M 2700, M 2701, IM 2702 Machine Code: D0B2/D0B3/D0B4 Field Service Manual Ver 1.0

M 2700, M 2701, IM 2702
Machine Code: D0B2/D0B3/D0B4

Field Service Manual
Ver 1.0
Latest Release: -
Initial Release: April, 2019
Copyright (c) 2019 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.
Important Safety Notices
Warnings, Cautions, Notes
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
• A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could result in
death or serious injury.
• A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.
• Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of
valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
• This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this manual handy
for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
[A]: ON
[B]: OFF
[C]: Push ON/Push OFF
[D]: Standby
Switches and Symbols

Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the meaning of
each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
Safety
Prevention of Physical Injury

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that the
machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged.
2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical
voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the product. Before you
move the machine, arrange the power cord so it will not fall under the machine.
5. Disconnect all peripheral units (finisher, LCT, etc.) from the mainframe before you move the
machine.
6. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main
switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
7. The machine drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be careful to
keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the machine starts operation.
8. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is
operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
9. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and
aerosols.
10. Do not use flammable sprays or solvent in the vicinity of the machine. Also, avoid placing these
items in the vicinity of the machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
11. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part that generates heat.
12. Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials to prevent
slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg injuries.
13. Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace safety devices
immediately.
14. Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device.
15. Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal
injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating normally and safely
after removal and replacement of any safety device.
16. For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with the machine.
Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine could lead to a fire and personal
injuries.
17. For machines installed with the ADF/ARDF:
When a thick book or three-dimensional original is placed on the exposure glass and the ARDF
cover is lowered, the back side of the ARDF rises up to accommodate the original. Therefore, when
closing the ARDF, please be sure to keep your hands away from the hinges at the back of the
ARDF.
18. When using a vacuum cleaner around the machine, keep others away from the cleaner, especially
small children.
19. For machines installed with the anti-tip components:
The anti-tip components are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the
international standard for safety. The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which
are heavy in weight, from toppling as a result of people running into or leaning onto the products,
which can lead to serious accidents such as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.:
UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1) Therefore, removal of such components must always be with the
consent of the customer. Do not remove them at your own judgment.
20. NEVER touch the AC circuits on the PSU board to prevent electric shock caused by residual
charge. Residual charge of about 100V-400V remains in the AC circuits on the PSU board for
several months even when the board has been removed from the machine after turning off the
machine power and unplugging the power cord.
Health Safety Conditions
1. For the machines installed with the ozone filters:
• Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed.
• Always replace the ozone filters with the specified types at the proper intervals.
2. The machine, which use high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density
is harmful to human health. Therefore, locate the machine in a large well ventilated room that has
an air turnover rate of more than 50m3/hr/person.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may
cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If
unsuccessful, get medical attention.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
1. The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models with exceptions on some
machines where the installation can be handled by the user.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
• Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an
open flame.
• Dispose of used toner, developer, organic photoconductors, and AIO unit in accordance with local
regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
• Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
• When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100
batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical
reactions and heat build-up.
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Handling Toner
• Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid spilling
toner on clothing or the hands.
• If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well-
ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
• If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
• If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If there are signs of
irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
• If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner. If there are
signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
• If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water. Never use
hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric.
• Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages, cartridges,
bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges), and AIO unit out of the reach of
children.
• Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location that is not
exposed to direct sunlight.
• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Vacuumed toner may
cause a fire or explosion due to sparks or electrical contact inside the cleaner. However, it is
possible to use a cleaner designed to be dust explosion-proof. If toner is spilled over the floor,
sweep up spilled toner slowly and clean up any remaining toner with a wet cloth.
Handling the development unit cooling system
For the machines installed the development cooling system:
1. The development unit cooling system circulates propylene glycol from a sealed tank through hoses
that pass behind cooling plates on the sides of each development unit.
2. The coolant tank is located at the bottom of the cooling box on the back of the main machine.
3. Always obey local laws and regulations if you need to dispose of a tank or the propylene glycol
coolant.
4. The tank must never be emptied directly into a local drainage system, river, pond, or lake.
5. Contact a professional industrial waste disposal organization and ask them to dispose of the tank.
Lithium Batteries for Taiwan
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and
laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
• Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this
manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING FOR LASER UNIT
WARNING:
Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser
beams can seriously damage your eyes.
Safety Instructions for the Color Controller
Fuse
The color controller uses a double pole fuse. If this fuse blows, be sure to replace it with an identical
fuse.
Batteries
Always replace a battery with the same type of battery prescribed for use with the color controller unit.
Replacing a battery with any type other than the one prescribed for use could cause an explosion.
• Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other batteries or other refuse.
• Always remove used batteries from the work site and dispose of them in accordance with local
laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses the following symbols and abbreviations:
Symbols:
Screw
Black screw
Connector
Flexible flat cable (FFC)
Hook
Clamp
Clip ring
E-ring
C-ring
Timing belt
Spring
Location of a screw(s) to be tightened or loosened.
Location of a connector(s), clamp(s) or spring(s) to be removed

Direction (Rotating or moving)
Abbreviations:
Abbreviations such as (M1), (S1), or (TH1) after the names of some electrical components indicate that
those components are shown on a Point-to-Point diagram.
Abbreviation Meaning
SEF Short edge feed
LEF Long edge feed
[A] Short edge feed (SEF)

[B] Long edge feed (LEF)
Destination：
Abbreviation Destination
EU (-27) Europe
AP (-29) Asia-Pacific
TWN (-19) Taiwan
CHN (-21, -25) China
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and Genuine Adobe® PostScript® 3TM are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Dropbox is a registered trademark or trademark of Dropbox, Inc.
Google, Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome, Google Play, and Android are registered trademarks for
Google Inc.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other countries.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and BSAFE are
registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 9, 10, and 11 are as follows:
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 9
• Internet Explorer® 10
• Internet Explorer® 11
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium Microsoft®
Windows Vista® Home Basic Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate Microsoft® Windows® 7
Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Microsoft®
Windows® 8.1 Pro Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise Microsoft® Windows® 10
Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008
Standard Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008
R2 Standard Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
Foundation Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012
Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012
R2 Foundation Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials Microsoft® Windows Server®
2012 R2 Standard
Standard Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Essentials Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016
Datacenter Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 MultiPoint Premium Server
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Table of Contents
1. Product Information .......................................................................................................................... 13
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration ................................................................................... 13
System Configuration and Options ................................................................................................... 13
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with The Predecessor Product ............................................... 16
Comparison with Previous Models ................................................................................................... 16
Specifications........................................................................................................................................ 19
2. Installation ......................................................................................................................................... 20
Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 20
Environment ...................................................................................................................................... 20
Machine Level ................................................................................................................................... 21
Minimum Space Requirements ........................................................................................................ 21
Machine Dimensions ........................................................................................................................ 21
Power Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 22
Copier Installation (D0B2,D0B3) .......................................................................................................... 23
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 23
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 23
Checking the copy image with the test chart .................................................................................... 30
Moving the Machine.......................................................................................................................... 30
Transporting the Machine ................................................................................................................. 30
Copier Installation (D0B4) .................................................................................................................... 32
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 32
Checking the copy image with the test chart .................................................................................... 37
Moving the Machine.......................................................................................................................... 37
Transporting the Machine ................................................................................................................. 37
Paper Feed Unit PB2030/2040 ............................................................................................................ 38
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 38
Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray .......................................................................... 53
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 53
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 53
Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray (Single Paper Feed Unit) .............................. 61
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 61
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 61
Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray (Double Paper Feed Unit) ............................. 68
1
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 68
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 68
Bypass Tray Cover Type M16 .............................................................................................................. 79
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 79
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16 (D0B2,D0B3)............................................................................ 83
Accessory Check .............................................................................................................................. 83
NPB (PaaS) (D0B2,D0B3) ................................................................................................................... 85
PaaS Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 85
Unregistering PaaS........................................................................................................................... 88
Changing Registered Device/ Main Board ....................................................................................... 88
NPB (PaaS) (D0B4).............................................................................................................................. 93
PaaS Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 93
Unregistering PaaS........................................................................................................................... 94
Changing Registered Device/ Main Board ....................................................................................... 95
Inner 1bin Tray BN2020 (D0B4) ......................................................................................................... 101
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 101
Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 101
Fax Option Type M38 (D0B4) ............................................................................................................ 107
Accessory Check ............................................................................................................................ 107
Adding Fax Application Icons to the Home Screen ........................................................................ 109
Registering the Function key .......................................................................................................... 109
Function Priority Setting ................................................................................................................. 112
Notes for Connecting the Telephone Line ...................................................................................... 113
NFC Card Reader Type M38 (D0B4) ................................................................................................. 114
Component Check .......................................................................................................................... 114
Machine Data Encryption (D0B4) ....................................................................................................... 120
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 120
Setting Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 120
Data That is Encrypted ................................................................................................................... 121
Enabling the Encryption Settings ................................................................................................... 124
Backing Up the Encryption Key ...................................................................................................... 125
Recovery Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 126
Restoring the Encryption Key ......................................................................................................... 126
Forced Start Up with No Encryption Key ........................................................................................ 127
2
Operation Guidance for Users............................................................................................................ 129
Daily Machine Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 129
3. Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 132
Preventive Maintenance Tables ......................................................................................................... 132
PM Parts Settings ............................................................................................................................... 133
PM Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................. 133
After Installing the New PM parts ................................................................................................... 133
Operation Check ............................................................................................................................. 133
4. Replacement and Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 134
Beforehand ......................................................................................................................................... 134
Special Tools and Lubricants ............................................................................................................. 135
Location to Apply G-1077 Grease .................................................................................................. 135
Location to Apply KS660B Grease ................................................................................................. 144
Location to Apply MDF-2400E Grease........................................................................................... 145
Location to Apply EM-50L Grease ................................................................................................. 179
Location to Apply RA44-3502 Grease ............................................................................................ 192
Location to Apply 50G .................................................................................................................... 193
Location to Apply G-501 Grease .................................................................................................... 194
Location to Apply SILICONE OIL TYPE-SS................................................................................... 196
Exterior Covers ................................................................................................................................... 198
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 198
Front Door ....................................................................................................................................... 202
Paper Tray 1 ................................................................................................................................... 202
Front Right Cover (D0B2,D0B3) ..................................................................................................... 203
Front Upper Cover (D0B4) ............................................................................................................. 203
Inner Cover ..................................................................................................................................... 204
Left Cover ....................................................................................................................................... 208
Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3) ............................................................................................................... 208
Rear Cover (D0B4) ......................................................................................................................... 209
Right Rear Cover ............................................................................................................................ 209
Right Upper Cover .......................................................................................................................... 210
Paper Exit Tray ............................................................................................................................... 210
Right Door ....................................................................................................................................... 211
ADF Unit (D0B3) ................................................................................................................................. 215
ADF Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 215
Platen Cover Sensor....................................................................................................................... 215
ADF Front Cover............................................................................................................................. 216
ADF Rear Cover ............................................................................................................................. 217
Document Table ............................................................................................................................. 218
3
Original Width Sensor (S17) ........................................................................................................... 218
Pick-up Roller ................................................................................................................................. 219
Separation Pad ............................................................................................................................... 220
ADF Cover Sensor (S19), Original Set Sensor (S18) .................................................................... 221
ADF/Platen Cover Sensor (S21) .................................................................................................... 222
ADF Pick-up Solenoid (SOL3) ........................................................................................................ 223
ADF Inverter Solenoid (SOL2)........................................................................................................ 223
ADF Feed Roller ............................................................................................................................. 224
ADF Main Motor (M6) ..................................................................................................................... 229
ADF Registration Sensor (S20) ...................................................................................................... 230
ADF Unit (D0B4) ................................................................................................................................. 232
ADF Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 232
Original Feed Unit ........................................................................................................................... 233
Rear Cover...................................................................................................................................... 234
Front Cover and Original Tray ........................................................................................................ 234
Hinge............................................................................................................................................... 235
Original Length Sensors (SN12) (SN13) (SN14) and Original Sensor (SN11).............................. 242
Original Set Sensor (SN8) .............................................................................................................. 243
Original Width Sensors (SN1) (SN2) (SN3) (SN4) (SN5) and Skew Correction Sensor (SN10) .. 245
Original Exit Sensor (SN7) ............................................................................................................. 246
Registration Sensor (SN6).............................................................................................................. 247
ADF Position Sensor (SN9) ............................................................................................................ 247
Cover Switch (SWC1) ..................................................................................................................... 248
Feed Motor (MT1) ........................................................................................................................... 248
Transport Motor (MT2).................................................................................................................... 250
Stamp Solenoid (SL3)..................................................................................................................... 250
Pick-up Solenoid (SL2) ................................................................................................................... 252
Inverter Solenoid (SL1) ................................................................................................................... 253
Paper Feed Clutch (CLT1) ............................................................................................................. 253
Feed Belt......................................................................................................................................... 253
Pick-Up Roller ................................................................................................................................. 254
Separation Roller ............................................................................................................................ 255
DF Main Board (BD1) ..................................................................................................................... 256
Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................. 257
4-Line LCD (D0B2,D0B3) ............................................................................................................... 257
Smart Operation Panel (D0B4)....................................................................................................... 258
Scanner (D0B2,D0B3) ........................................................................................................................ 263
Top Rear Cover .............................................................................................................................. 263
Scanner........................................................................................................................................... 264
4
Exposure Glass Unit ....................................................................................................................... 266
CIS Unit........................................................................................................................................... 267
Scanner Drive Belt .......................................................................................................................... 267
Scanner HP Sensor (S1) ................................................................................................................ 268
Original Size Sensors (S3) ............................................................................................................. 269
Scanner Motor (M1) ........................................................................................................................ 269
Adjusting the Scanner Parameters................................................................................................. 270
Scanner (D0B4) .................................................................................................................................. 271
Scanner Exterior ............................................................................................................................. 271
Exposure Glass .............................................................................................................................. 278
Scanner Carriage............................................................................................................................ 280
Scanner Motor (M1) ........................................................................................................................ 287
APS Sensors (S22)......................................................................................................................... 288
Scanner Home Position Sensor (S1) ............................................................................................. 289
ADF/Platen Cover Sensor (S21) .................................................................................................... 290
Scanner FFC................................................................................................................................... 290
Laser Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 294
Warning Decal Location ................................................................................................................. 294
Toner Shield Glass ......................................................................................................................... 294
Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................ 294
PCDU Section..................................................................................................................................... 296
Before Replacing a PCU or Development Unit .............................................................................. 296
PCDU .............................................................................................................................................. 296
Pick-off Pawls ................................................................................................................................. 299
OPC Drum ...................................................................................................................................... 299
Charge Roller and Cleaning Brush ................................................................................................. 301
Cleaning Blade ............................................................................................................................... 302
Developer........................................................................................................................................ 303
Mixing Auger Bearings.................................................................................................................... 307
Quenching Lamp (L1) ..................................................................................................................... 309
After Replacement or Adjustment .................................................................................................. 310
Toner Supply Motor (M5) ................................................................................................................... 311
Fusing ................................................................................................................................................. 312
Fusing Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 312
Fusing Entrance Guide Plate.......................................................................................................... 314
Fusing Exit Guide Plate .................................................................................................................. 315
Thermistor (H1) (H2)....................................................................................................................... 315
Fusing Lamp ................................................................................................................................... 316
Hot Roller Stripper Pawls ............................................................................................................... 317
5
Hot Roller and Hot Roller Bearings ................................................................................................ 318
Thermostat (S4) .............................................................................................................................. 318
Pressure Roller and Bushings ........................................................................................................ 319
NIP Band Width Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 320
Contact/Release Solenoid (SOL1) ................................................................................................. 321
Paper Exit Section .............................................................................................................................. 323
Paper Exit Sensor (S5) ................................................................................................................... 323
Paper Feed Section ............................................................................................................................ 325
Friction Roller .................................................................................................................................. 325
Paper Feed Roller / Pickup roller.................................................................................................... 325
Tray Lift Unit.................................................................................................................................... 326
Tray Lift Motor (M4) ........................................................................................................................ 328
Paper Size Switch (SW4) ............................................................................................................... 329
Registration Roller .......................................................................................................................... 331
Registration Sensor (S16) .............................................................................................................. 333
Paper End Sensor (S12), Upper Limit Sensor (S13) ..................................................................... 334
Bypass Tray .................................................................................................................................... 335
Bypass Paper Feed Roller.............................................................................................................. 336
Bypass Tray Friction Pad ............................................................................................................... 338
Bypass Paper End Sensor (S9)...................................................................................................... 339
Bypass Width Sensor (S10), Bypass Length Sensor (S11) ........................................................... 340
Duplex Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 342
Transfer Roller ................................................................................................................................ 342
Duplex Guide Plate ......................................................................................................................... 342
Transfer Guide Unit ........................................................................................................................ 343
ID Sensor (S6) ................................................................................................................................ 344
Relay Roller (driven) ....................................................................................................................... 348
Electrical Components........................................................................................................................ 350
MPU (PCB7) (D0B2,D0B3) ............................................................................................................ 350
MPU (PCB7) (D0B4)....................................................................................................................... 351
EEPROM (D0B2,D0B3) .................................................................................................................. 354
NVRAM,EEPROM (D0B4).............................................................................................................. 357
PSU (Power Supply Unit) (PCB1) .................................................................................................. 381
HVPS (High-Voltage Power Supply Board) (PCB3)....................................................................... 382
Main Motor (M3) ............................................................................................................................. 383
Main Fan (FAN2) ............................................................................................................................ 384
Exhaust Fan (FAN1) ....................................................................................................................... 384
Room Temperature Sensor (S14) .................................................................................................. 385
Paper Exit Clutch (CL1) , Reverse Clutch (CL7) ............................................................................ 386
6
Paper Feed Clutch (CL4)................................................................................................................ 388
Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL5) ................................................................................................... 390
Duplex Clutch (CL2) ....................................................................................................................... 390
Registration Clutch (CL3) ............................................................................................................... 392
Relay Clutch (CL6) ......................................................................................................................... 393
Right Door Switch (SW1)................................................................................................................ 395
Interlock Switch (SW2) ................................................................................................................... 396
Front Door Switch (SW5) (D0B4) ................................................................................................... 396
Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3) .................................................................................... 397
Printing ............................................................................................................................................ 397
Scanning ......................................................................................................................................... 398
ADF Image Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 399
Adjustment after Replacement (D0B4) .............................................................................................. 400
Image Adjustment After Replacing Parts ....................................................................................... 400
Image Position Adjustment ............................................................................................................. 400
Scanning Adjustment ...................................................................................................................... 403
ADF Image Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 404
5. System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3) ............................................................................................... 406
Service Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 406
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 406
Maintenance Mode Menu ............................................................................................................... 406
Special Maintenance Menu ............................................................................................................ 407
SP Tables ........................................................................................................................................... 408
Test Pattern Printing ........................................................................................................................... 409
SMC Page Printing ............................................................................................................................. 411
Firmware Update ................................................................................................................................ 412
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 412
Before Beginning ............................................................................................................................ 412
Updating Firmware ......................................................................................................................... 412
Handling Firmware Update Errors .................................................................................................. 415
6. System Maintenance (D0B4).......................................................................................................... 416
Service Program Mode ....................................................................................................................... 416
SP Tables ....................................................................................................................................... 416
Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode............................................................................. 416
Types of SP Modes ........................................................................................................................ 417
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ............................................................................................................. 418
Firmware Update (SD Card) ............................................................................................................... 420
Updating Firmware ......................................................................................................................... 420
Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update) ................................................................................... 428
7
RFU Performable Condition ........................................................................................................... 428
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update) ...................................................................................... 429
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 429
Immediate Update .......................................................................................................................... 430
Update at the Next Visit (Reserve) ................................................................................................. 432
Update via SD Card ........................................................................................................................ 437
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update) .......................................................................... 440
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 440
Downloading and Updating Process .............................................................................................. 441
Checking the ARFU Result ............................................................................................................. 445
Checking the Result Using the Log Data ....................................................................................... 445
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 445
Address Book Upload/Download........................................................................................................ 449
Information List ............................................................................................................................... 449
Download ........................................................................................................................................ 449
Upload............................................................................................................................................. 449
Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data............................................................................................... 451
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD Card................................................................................ 451
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM ............................................................................................. 451
Capturing the Device Logs ................................................................................................................. 453
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 453
Storing the Device Logs on an SD Card ........................................................................................ 455
Retrieving the Device Logs via Operation Panel............................................................................ 455
Retrieving the Device Logs via Web Image Monitor ...................................................................... 458
SMC List Card Save Function ............................................................................................................ 461
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 461
Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 461
File Names of the Saved SMC Lists ............................................................................................... 462
Error Messages .............................................................................................................................. 463
SP Data Import/Export........................................................................................................................ 464
Data That Can Be Imported and Exported ..................................................................................... 464
Exporting Device Information ......................................................................................................... 464
Importing Device Information.......................................................................................................... 465
Possible Solutions for Import/Export Problems .............................................................................. 466
Card Save Function ............................................................................................................................ 468
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 468
Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 468
Error Messages .............................................................................................................................. 470
7. Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 471
8
Self-Diagnostic Mode (D0B4) ............................................................................................................. 471
SC Automatic Reboot (D0B4)......................................................................................................... 471
Service Call Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 473
Summary......................................................................................................................................... 473
List of Automatic Reboot Target SC (D0B4) .................................................................................. 474
SC Code Descriptions ........................................................................................................................ 481
SC1xx ............................................................................................................................................. 481
SC2xx ............................................................................................................................................. 489
SC3xx ............................................................................................................................................. 493
SC4xx ............................................................................................................................................. 497
SC5xx ............................................................................................................................................. 497
SC6xx ............................................................................................................................................. 518
SC7xx ............................................................................................................................................. 529
SC8xx ............................................................................................................................................. 532
SC9xx ............................................................................................................................................. 535
Jam Detection ..................................................................................................................................... 537
Jam Description and Position Code ............................................................................................... 537
Sensor Locations ............................................................................................................................ 538
Vertical Streaks on Copies due to Scanning Problems (D0B4) ......................................................... 539
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 539
Other Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 543
Noise from Transfer Roller Bearings .............................................................................................. 543
8. Detailed Descriptions ...................................................................................................................... 546
Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 546
Component Layout ......................................................................................................................... 546
Paper Path ...................................................................................................................................... 559
Drive Layout .................................................................................................................................... 561
ADF (D0B3) ........................................................................................................................................ 563
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 563
Original Transport Drive ................................................................................................................. 564
Original Transport Mechanism 1 .................................................................................................... 564
Original Transport Mechanism 2 .................................................................................................... 565
Single-sided Scanning .................................................................................................................... 565
Duplex Scanning............................................................................................................................. 566
ADF (D0B4) ........................................................................................................................................ 567
Original Detection ........................................................................................................................... 567
Original Size Detection / Original Set Detection Mechanism ......................................................... 567
Paper Feed / Separation Mechanism ............................................................................................. 568
Skew Correction Mechanism, Registration Mechanism ................................................................. 569
9
SP6-901-002 (Setting to give priority to stackability) ..................................................................... 571
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 571
Scanning (D0B2,D0B3) ...................................................................................................................... 572
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 572
Scanner Drive ................................................................................................................................. 573
Original Size Sensor (S3) Layout ................................................................................................... 573
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 574
Scanning (D0B4) ................................................................................................................................ 575
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 575
Mechanism...................................................................................................................................... 576
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 583
Laser Exposure .................................................................................................................................. 585
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 585
Auto Power Control (APC).............................................................................................................. 586
LD Safety Switch ............................................................................................................................ 587
PCDU .................................................................................................................................................. 588
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 588
Drive ................................................................................................................................................ 589
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 589
Drum Charge/Quenching ................................................................................................................... 590
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 590
ID Sensor Pattern Production Timing ............................................................................................. 590
Drum Charge Roller Cleaning ........................................................................................................ 590
Quenching....................................................................................................................................... 591
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 592
Development....................................................................................................................................... 593
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 593
Drive ................................................................................................................................................ 594
Developer Mixing ............................................................................................................................ 594
Development Bias........................................................................................................................... 595
Toner Supply................................................................................................................................... 596
Toner Supply Mechanism ............................................................................................................... 597
Toner Density Control ..................................................................................................................... 597
Toner Near End/End Detection and Recovery ............................................................................... 600
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 600
Drum Cleaning and Toner Recycling ................................................................................................. 602
Drum Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 602
Toner Recycling .............................................................................................................................. 603
Image Transfer and Paper Separation ............................................................................................... 604
10
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 604
Image Transfer Current Timing ...................................................................................................... 605
Transfer Roller Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 605
Paper Separation Mechanism ........................................................................................................ 606
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 606
Image Fusing and Paper Exit ............................................................................................................. 610
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 610
Fusing Unit Drive and Release Mechanism ................................................................................... 611
Fusing Entrance Guide Shift........................................................................................................... 612
Pressure Roller ............................................................................................................................... 613
Pressure Roller Release Mechanism ............................................................................................. 613
Fusing Temperature Control........................................................................................................... 614
Overheat Protection ........................................................................................................................ 616
CPM Control ................................................................................................................................... 617
Paper Transport in Low-Voltage Mode........................................................................................... 618
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 619
Paper Feed ......................................................................................................................................... 624
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 624
Paper Feed Drive Mechanism ........................................................................................................ 624
Paper Feed Mechanism ................................................................................................................. 625
Tray Base Plate Lift Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 627
Paper End Detection....................................................................................................................... 628
Paper Size Detection ...................................................................................................................... 628
Side Fences .................................................................................................................................... 630
Paper Registration .......................................................................................................................... 630
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 631
Bypass Feed ....................................................................................................................................... 632
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 632
Duplex Unit/Exit Unit........................................................................................................................... 633
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 633
Drive Mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 634
Basic Operation .............................................................................................................................. 634
Feed In and Exit Mechanism .......................................................................................................... 637
Paper Exit Detection ....................................................................................................................... 638
Related SPs .................................................................................................................................... 638
Board Structure .................................................................................................................................. 639
Block Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 639
9. Smart Operation Panel G2.5 .......................................................................................................... 641
Replacement and Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 641
11
Exterior Covers ............................................................................................................................... 641
Wi-Fi Module ................................................................................................................................... 643
Micro Computer Board.................................................................................................................... 644
LCD ................................................................................................................................................. 646
Mechanism ......................................................................................................................................... 647
System Components ...................................................................................................................... 647
Panel Components/Screen Layout ................................................................................................. 656
Electrical Components .................................................................................................................... 659
Controlling the Power Supply ......................................................................................................... 660
System Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 664
Maintenance Modes ....................................................................................................................... 664
Login to/Logout from Control Panel Service Mode ........................................................................ 664
Service Mode Menu ........................................................................................................................ 666
Panel Self Check ............................................................................................................................ 673
Recovery Mode ............................................................................................................................... 680
Special Key Combinations .............................................................................................................. 681
Backup/Restore for Smart Operation Panel Application/Settings Function ................................... 681
Software Update ............................................................................................................................. 683
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 688
Problems and Errors Related to Hardware .................................................................................... 688
Errors Related to Applications ........................................................................................................ 689
Factory Reset and Restoration ....................................................................................................... 690
Software Update Errors .................................................................................................................. 691
Other Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 694
12
1.Product Information
1. Product Information
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration
System Configuration and Options
Model Name Product Name Machine Code

Bc-MF2d M 2700 D0B2
Bc-MF2e M 2701 D0B3
Bc-MF2H IM 2702 D0B4
Bc-MF2d
No. Item Machine Code Remarks

1 Single Paper Feed Unit PB2030 D3F1 Option
2 Double Paper Feed Unit PB2040 D3F1 Option
3 Bypass Tray Cover Type M16 D3B7 Option
4 Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray - Option
5 Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray - Option
6 IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16 - Option
13
Bc-MF2e

4 ADF - Standard
7 IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16 - Option
14
Bc-MF2H

4 ADF - Standard
7 NFC Card Reader Type M38 D3FJ Option
8 Fax Option Type M38 D3FH Option
9 1 Bin Tray BN2020 D3F2 Option
15
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with The Predecessor

Product
Comparison with Previous Models
Component Changed Item RICOH MP 2014 / RICOH M 2700 / M RICOH IM

MP 2014D / MP 2701 2702
2014AD
(Previous)
PCDU General - Easier to remove Same as
developer unit cover RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Developer CE must fill with the Prefilled in the Same as
Preparation developer during factory, disassembly RICOH M
machine installation of PCDU not required 2700 / M
2701
Replacement Only CE can do User and CE can do Same as
RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Paper Tray General - Capacity increased to Same as
500 sheets RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Paper Size N/A Supported: Paper Same as
Detection size switch detects RICOH M
paper size 2700 / M
2701
Bottom Plate Moves mechanically Tray Lift Motor moves Same as
it RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Paper Separation Separation pad and RF method Same as
the roller is used RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Transfer Unit Cleaning Changed the shape Same as
of the transfer roller RICOH M
16
bearing to prevent 2700 / M

abnormal sounds due 2701
to the penetration of
the toner
Laser Unit General - Fully sealed so that Same as
no dust can get inside RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Cleaning Only CE can do User and CE can do Same as
using the toner shield RICOH M
glass cleaning tool 2700 / M
2701
Fusing Not supported Supported Same as
temperature RICOH M
control (Print 2700 / M
duty control) 2701
Anti- Not supported Supported as service Same as
condensation options RICOH M
heater options 2700 / M
2701
Operation General - Some function keys 7-inch smart
Panel added operation
panel
Language Arabic Not supported Supported Same as
RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
Network General - Supported as a Same as
interface standard feature; no RICOH M
need to replace the 2700 / M
MPU to upgrade 2701
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n Not supported Supported (Option): Supported
USB port on the front (Standard)
of the machine
Scan to USB Not supported Supported as a Same as
standard feature RICOH M
2700 / M
2701
PaaS Supported as an Supported as a Same as
17
option standard feature RICOH M

2700 / M
2701
18
Specifications
See “Appendices” for the following information:
• General Specifications
• Supported Paper Sizes
19
2.Installation
2. Installation
Installation Requirements
Environment
–Temperature and Humidity Chart–
• Standard temperature range: 10 - 32°C (50 - 89.6°F)

• Standard humidity range: 15% to 80% RH
• Extended temperature range: 10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F)
• Extended humidity range: 10% to 90% RH
• Ambient illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
• Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
• Ambient dust: Less than 0.075 mg/m3 (2.0 x 10-6 oz/yd3)
• Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:
1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
• Do not place the machine in areas where it can get exposed to corrosive gases and chemicals.
• Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
• Place the machine on a sturdy and level base. (Inclination on any side should be no more than 5
mm.)
20
2.Installation
• Do not place the machine where it is subjected to strong vibrations.
Machine Level
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Minimum Space Requirements
Place the machine near a power source, providing clearance as shown:

A (front): 750 mm (30")
B (left): 150 mm (6")
C (rear): 300 mm (12")
D (right): 450 mm (18")
The recommended 750 mm (30") front space is sufficient to allow the paper tray to be pulled out.
Additional front space is required to allow operators to stand at the front of the machine.
Machine Dimensions
• Platen Model (D0B2)

Width: 587 mm
Depth: 581 mm
Height: 560 mm
• DF Model (D0B3)
Width: 587 mm
Depth: 581 mm
Height: 639 mm
• DF Model (D0B4)
Width: 587 mm
Depth: 581 mm
Height: 677 mm
21
2.Installation
Power Requirements
• Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible. After completing the
installation, make sure the plug is firmly inserted into the outlet.
• Avoid using extension cables.
Input voltage:
D0B2,D0B3
EU, AP, CHN 220V - 240V, 50/60Hz, 8A
D0B4
EU, AP, CHN 220V - 240V, 50/60Hz, 8A

TWN 110V, 60Hz, 15A
22
2.Installation
Copier Installation (D0B2,D0B3)
Accessory Check
Check that the accessories in this list are included.

No. Description EU AP CHN Q'ty
1 Safety Information Y Y - 1
2 Brand plate Y Y - 1
3 EULA sheet Y Y Y 1
4 READ THIS FIRST Y - Y 1
5 QUICK GUIDE Y Y Y 1
6 Notes for Using This Machine Safety sheet Y Y Y 1
SEC NOT GW sheet (China)
7 Driver CD Y Y Y 1
8 Paper size decal Y Y Y 1
9 Setup Guide Y Y Y 1
10 Power cord Y Y Y 1
11 Toner bottle Y Y Y 1
12 Warranty sheet (China) - - Y 1
13 Notes for Movie Y Y Y 1
Installation Procedure
• Two persons are required to lift the machine.

1. Remove filament tape and other packing materials.
23
2.Installation
DF Model (D0B3)
Platen Model (D0B2)
24
2.Installation
2. Open the ADF [A] or platen cover [B], and then remove the sheet and filament tapes.
3. Hold the places shown below, and then lift the machine.
4. Place the machine on a table or optional paper feed unit.

5. Open the front door.
25
2.Installation
6. Remove the heat seal [A], and the mylar [B].
7. Pull the toner bottle holder lever [A] upward.
26
2.Installation
8. Release the lock lever [A], and then pull the toner bottle holder [B].
9. Shake the toner bottle [A] several times, and then remove the bottle cap [B]. (Do not remove the
bottle cap [B] before shaking the bottle.)
27
2.Installation
10. Install the toner bottle [A] on the holder [B], and then set the holder in the machine.
11. Close the front door.

12. Pull out the paper tray, and then adjust the positions of the end and side guides.
13. Plug in the main power cord and turn on the main power switch.
After switching on the machine the initialization process will start automatically.
Wait until "Ready" appears on the display panel (about 1 minute).
Do not turn off the main power switch until initialization is complete.
If the front door is opened during initialization, close it.
If the tapes are not removed from the PCDU, an error occurs (SC) and the machine cancels
initialization.
The machine makes a noise during initialization. This noise does not indicate a malfunction.
28
2.Installation
Setting for the language displayed on the display
1. Press the User Tools button.
2. Select "Admin. Tools" and press "OK".
29
2.Installation
3. Select "Language" and press "OK".
4. Select a language and press "OK".
The selected language is used for the operation panel.

5. Load paper into the paper tray and make a full-size copy, and make sure the side-to-side and
leading edge registrations are correct.
6. If using a PaaS, refer to the PaaS settings.(NPB (PaaS) (D0B2,D0B3))
Checking the copy image with the test chart
Check the copy image with the test chart.
Moving the Machine
This section describes how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the
section "Transporting the Machine" to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.
• Turn the main power OFF and pull out the plug.
• Close all the covers and trays.
• Remove peripherals attached to the main machine such as paper feed unit and bypass tray cover.
• Keep the machine horizontal and move it slowly. Tipping and excessive vibrations may damage the
machine.
Transporting the Machine
1. Remove the PCDU. This prevents toner from leaking due to vibration during transport.
30
2.Installation
2. Make sure there is no paper remaining in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a
sheet of paper and tape.
3. Do one of the following steps:
• Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
• Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
31
2.Installation
Copier Installation (D0B4)
Accessory Check
Check that the accessories in this list are included.

No. Description EU AP TWN CHN Q'ty
1 Safety Information Y - - - 1
2 Brand plate Y Y - - 1
3 EULA sheet Y Y Y Y 1
4 READ THIS FIRST (Safety Information) - Y Y Y 1
5 Setup Guide Y Y Y Y 1
6 Notes for Using This Machine Safety sheet Y Y Y Y 1
SEC NOT GW sheet (China)
7 Driver CD Y Y Y Y 1
8 Paper size decal Y Y Y Y 1
9 ADF Caution Decal - Y Y - 1
10 Original Set Decal - Y Y - 1
11 Notes for Movie Y Y Y Y 1
12 Power cord Y Y Y Y 1
13 Toner bottle Y - - Y 1
14 Warranty sheet (China) - - - Y 1
15 For Users of This Product Y Y Y Y 1
16 Notes for User (Air Print) Y Y Y Y 1
17 Notes for User (EU Countries) Y - - - 1
18 OI CD - Y - - 1
19 How to Check - - - Y 1
• Two persons are required to lift the machine.

1. Remove filament tape and other packing materials.
32
2.Installation
2. Open the ADF [A] and then remove the sheet and filament tapes.
3. Remove the two scanner shipping locks [A] by rotating them 90 degrees counterclockwise.
SC120 is displayed when the machine is turned ON with the shipping lock attached.
33
2.Installation
・Keep the scanner shipping locks after installing the machine. The scanner shipping locks must
be installed before moving the machine using methods in which the machine will not always be
level, such as by truck over rough ground, or by ship.
・Before moving the machine, make sure to move the scanner carriage to the correct position with
SP4-806-001 and reattach the shipping locks. (Moving the Machine)
4. Attach the two caps [A] provided with the machine.
5. Hold the places shown below, and then lift the machine.
6. Place the machine on a table or optional paper feed unit.

34
2.Installation
8. Remove the heat seal [A], and the mylar [B].
35
2.Installation
10. Release the lock lever [A], and then pull the toner bottle holder [B].
11. Shake the toner bottle [A] several times, and then remove the bottle cap [B]. (Do not remove the
bottle cap [B] before shaking the bottle.)
12. Install the toner bottle [A] on the holder [B], and then set the holder in the machine.
13. Close the front door.

36
2.Installation
14. Pull out the paper tray, and then adjust the positions of the end and side guides.
15. Plug in the main power cord and turn on the main power switch.
・Toner Initialization starts and "Self checking..." appears. It will take around 1 minute to fill the
toner up.
16. Select the language.
17. Set the Administrator password (This step can be skipped).
18. Load paper into the paper tray and make a full-size copy, and make sure the side-to-side and
leading edge registrations are correct.
19. If using @Remote, set SP5-812-101 to 1.
20. If using a PaaS, refer to the PaaS settings.(NPB (PaaS) (D0B4))
Checking the copy image with the test chart
Check the copy image with the test chart.
Moving the Machine
This section describes how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the
section "Transporting the Machine" to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.
• Turn the main power OFF and pull out the plug.
• Close all the covers and trays.
• Remove peripherals attached to the main machine such as paper feed unit and bypass tray cover.
• Keep the machine horizontal and move it slowly. Tipping and excessive vibrations may damage the
machine.
Transporting the Machine
1. Remove the PCDU. This prevents toner from leaking due to vibration during transport.
2. Make sure there is no paper remaining in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a
sheet of paper and tape.
3. Do one of the following steps:
• Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
• Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
37
2.Installation
Paper Feed Unit PB2030/2040
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Descriptio EU AP TWN CHN Q’t
. n (D0B2,D0B3,D0B4 (D0B2,D0B3,D0B4 (D0B4 (D0B2,D0B3,D0B4 y
) ) ) )
1 Relay Y Y Y Y 1
harness
2 Screws Y Y Y Y 4
- EMC Sheet Y Y Y - 1
• Turn off the main power switch of the main machine and unplug the power cord before starting
the installation procedure.
• Two or more people are required to lift the main machine. The main machine is highly unstable
when lifted by one person, possibly resulting in injury or property damage.
• Do not lift the main machine with the paper feed unit installed. The grips may be damaged.
38
2.Installation
Installing the Single Paper Feed Unit
1. Remove all tapes and accessories on the paper feed unit.
2. Pull the tray, and then remove the filament tapes and padding.
3. Lift the main machine and place it on the paper feed unit.
4. Remove the rear cover of the main machine [A].
39
2.Installation
D0B2,D0B3
D0B4
5. Remove the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit.
40
2.Installation
6. Remove the brackets [A] on the bottom of the main machine.
41
2.Installation
7. Insert the relay harness into the opening [A] of the main machine.
8. Do the following steps:
D0B2,D0B3
1. Connect the relay harness provided with the paper feed unit to the bottom connector [A] and
42
2.Installation
CN246 [B] on the MPU (PCB7) board.
D0B4
CN111 [B] on the MPU board.
9. Pull out the paper trays [A] and [B].
43
2.Installation
10. Secure the main machine to the paper feed unit.
Screws (M4 x 6) are provided with the paper feed unit.

Use a stubby driver or the bracket wrench [A] attached to the rear bottom of the paper feed unit.
Reattach the bracket wrench after tightening the screws.
44
2.Installation
11. Reinstall all trays and covers.

12. Load paper into the paper feed unit.
13. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
14. Adjust the registration of the upper paper feed unit. (Adjustment after Replacement
(D0B2,D0B3)Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3), Adjustment after Replacement (D0B4))
• Use SP1-002-004 for the tray bank 1.
45
2.Installation
Installing the Double Paper Feed Unit
1. Remove all tapes and accessories on the paper feed unit.
2. Pull the tray, and then remove the filament tapes and paddings.
3. Lift the main machine and place it on the paper feed unit.
4. Remove the rear cover of the main machine [A].
46
2.Installation
D0B2,D0B3
D0B4
47
2.Installation
5. Remove the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit.
6. Remove the brackets [A] on the bottom of the main machine.
48
2.Installation
7. Insert the relay harness into the opening [A] of the main machine.
D0B2,D0B3
49
2.Installation
CN246 [B] on the MPU (PCB7) board.
D0B4
CN111 [B] on the MPU board.
9. Pull out the paper trays [A] and [B].
50
2.Installation
10. Secure the main machine to the paper feed unit.
Screws (M4 x 6) are provided with the paper feed unit.

Use a stubby driver or the bracket wrench [A] attached to the rear side of the paper feed unit.
Reattach the bracket wrench after tightening the screws.
51
2.Installation

12. Load paper into the paper feed unit.
13. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
14. Adjust the registration of the upper paper feed unit. (Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3),
Adjustment after Replacement (D0B4))
1. Use SP1-002-005 for the tray bank 2.
52
2.Installation
Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray
Overview
The following diagram shows the heater configuration.
Accessory Check
No. Description Q’ty Shown in the Overview Remarks

as
1 PSU Harness 1 #1 D0B25368
2 MPU Harness 1 #2 D0B25364
3 Relay Harness 1 #3 D0B25365
4 Relay Harness 1 #4 D0B25367
5 DHB 1 #5 D0B25185
6 Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper 1 #6 D0B29010
Feed Tray
7 Clamps 3 -
8 Brackets 3 -
9 Screws (M3x6, M4x8) 3 -
(M3x6)
1
(M4x8)
10 Decal 1 -
53
2.Installation
the installation procedure.
1. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
2. Remove paper tray 1. (Paper Tray 1)
3. Remove the high-voltage power supply board [A]. (HVPS (High-Voltage Power Supply Board)
(PCB3))
54
2.Installation
4. Remove the cable cover [B].
5. Remove the screws [A].
55
2.Installation
6. Attach the anti-condensation heater [A].
7. Attach the brackets [A], [B] and [C].
56
2.Installation
8. Attach the DHB [A].
9. Attach the clamps.
10. Connect the relay harness [A] to CN921 on the DHB.

11. Connect the relay harness [B] to the connector of the anti-condensation heater.
57
2.Installation
12. Connect the relay harness [A] to [B] and clamp the harness.
13. Connect the PSU harness [A] to CN920 on the DHB and CN253 on the PSU and clamp the
harness.
• D0B2,B0B3
1. Connect the MPU harness [A] to CN204 on the MPU and CN930 on the DHB and clamp the
58
2.Installation
harness.
• D0B4
1. Connect the MPU harness [A] to CN115 on the MPU and CN930 on the DHB and clamp the
harness.
59
2.Installation
15. Attach the warning decal [A] on the paper tray-1.
16. Reinstall the high-voltage power supply board and all covers.
60
2.Installation
Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray (Single

Paper Feed Unit)
Overview
Accessory Check
No. Description Q’ty Remarks

1 Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray 1 D3F11162 (AP, CHN)
D3F11163 (EU)
2 Harness Cover 1 D3F11094
3 Relay Harness 1 D3F15370
4 Clamp (small) 14 -
5 Clamp (large) 3 -
6 Heater Cover 1 -
61
2.Installation
• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord before starting the procedure.
• Follow this procedure after mounting the anti-condensation heater for the main paper feed tray
on the main paper feed tray. (Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray)
62
2.Installation
1. Pull out the option paper tray [A].
2. Remove the rear cover [A].
63
2.Installation
3. Remove the heater mounting screws.
64
2.Installation
65
2.Installation
6. Mount the relay harness [A] and clamp the harness.
7. Mount the heat cover [A] and the harness cover [B].
66
2.Installation
8. Mount the double paper feed unit on the main body. (Installing the Single Paper Feed Unit)
9. Insert the relay harness into the opening [A] of the main body.
10. Connect the relay harness [A] from the DHB and the relay harness [B] from the option paper feed
tray.
67
2.Installation
Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray (Double

Paper Feed Unit)
Overview
Accessory Check
Two sets of the following should be prepared for the double paper feed unit.
1 Anti-condensation Heater for Option Paper Feed Tray 1 D3F11162 (AP,CHN)
D3F11163 (EU)
2 Harness Cover 1 D3F11094
3 Relay Harness 1 D3F15370
4 Clamp (small) 14 -
5 Clamp (large) 3 -
6 Heater Cover 1 -
68
2.Installation
the procedure.
• Follow this procedure after mounting the anti-condensation heater for the main paper feed tray
on the main paper feed tray. (Anti-condensation Heater for Main Paper Feed Tray)
69
2.Installation
1. Pull out the paper tray [A].
70
2.Installation
3. Disconnect the ground cable [A] and cable [B].
4. Separate paper feed tray 2 [A] from paper feed tray 3 [B].
If the screws do not readily come off, use a stubby driver or the bracket wrench [C] attached to the
rear side of the paper feed unit. Reattach the bracket wrench after tightening the screws.
71
2.Installation
5. Remove the heater mounting screws.
This description is for paper feed tray 2. Do the same with paper feed tray 3.
72
2.Installation
73
2.Installation
8. Mount the relay harness [A] and clamp the harness.
9. Mount the heat cover [A] and the harness cover [B].
74
2.Installation
10. Mount paper feed tray 2 [B] on the paper feed tray 3 [A].
Use a stubby driver or the bracket wrench [C] which is attached at the rear side of the paper feed
unit. Reattach the bracket wrench after tightening the screws.
75
2.Installation
11. Insert the relay harness from the paper feed tray 3 into the opening [A] of paper feed tray 2.
12. Connect the relay harness [A] from the paper feed tray 2 and the relay harness [B] from the paper
76
2.Installation
feed tray 3.
13. Mount the double paper feed unit on the main body. (Installing the Double Paper Feed Unit)
14. Insert the relay harness from the paper feed tray 2 into the opening [A] of the main body.
77
2.Installation
15. Connect the relay harness [A] from the DHB and the relay harness [B] from the paper feed tray 2.
78
2.Installation
Bypass Tray Cover Type M16
Accessory Check
No. Description Q’ty

1 Bypass tray cover 1
2 Rear stud bracket 1
3 Front stud bracket 1
4 Rear stud cover 1
5 Front stud cover 1
- Screws: M3 x 6 2
- Screws: M3 x 8 2
• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)
2. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)
79
2.Installation
3. Remove the right front cover [A].
4. Cut off a part [A] of the right front cover.
Be careful not to get hurt when cutting off the part [A].
5. Cut off a part [A] of the right rear cover.
80
2.Installation
6. Attach the front stud bracket ( x 1: M3 x 6).
7. Attach the rear stud bracket ( x 1: M3 x 6).
8. Attach the front stud cover [A] ( x 1: M3 x 8).
81
2.Installation
9. Attach the rear stud cover [A] ( x 1: M3 x 8).
10. Reinstall all the covers removed.

11. Place the bypass tray cover [A] on the bypass tray.
• Make sure that the hooks [B] at the front and rear side of the bypass tray cover hold the front
and rear studs [C] on the machine.
12. Close the right door.
82
2.Installation
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16 (D0B2,D0B3)
Accessory Check
No. Description Q’ty

1 IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type P16 1
• Before using the wireless LAN option, settings must be configured from the operation panel. For
details, see the Setup Guide.
• Before beginning work, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static
electricity. Static electricity can damage the interface units.
• Do not subject the wireless LAN option to physical shocks.
• Be sure to turn off the machine before installing the wireless LAN option.
• Insert the wireless LAN option into the USB port on the back of the machine. Do not insert it into the
USB flash disk port of the front of the machine.
• We recommend installing the printer driver on the computer after the wireless LAN option is
configured.
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
2. Fully insert the wireless LAN option.
Check that the wireless LAN option is firmly connected to the USB port.
3. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine.
83
2.Installation
4. Configure settings from the operation panel. For details, see the Setup Guide.
Check that the wireless LAN option was correctly installed by printing the configuration page.
If it is correctly installed, "Wireless (Wi-Fi) Status" will appear for "Network Settings" on the
configuration page.
For details about printing the configuration page, see page 191 "Printing Lists/Reports".
84
2.Installation
NPB (PaaS) (D0B2,D0B3)
NPB is the abbreviation of "New Printer Business".
PaaS Setting
PaaS Setup Procedure
The customer Contract ID and the customer authentication key are required for authentication.
Switch to PaaS Mode
1. Enter the "Maintenance mode (SP menu)".

2. Select "NPB".
SP menu > [CTL Maintenance] > [Product type] > [NPB]
PaaS Registration
Do not turn off the machine or disconnect from the internet during the registration procedure.
1. Launch the web browser.
2. In the address bar, enter http://(machine’s IP address)/ to access the machine.
3. On the Web Image Monitor menu, select PaaS (Printer as a Service) Settings.
85
2.Installation
4. Check that [Operation] is set to "Contract Registration".
Operation Settings:
Item Description
Contract Registration Select this to enter the ID and Authentication Key after registration.
Contract Status Checking Select this if the machine stops operating.
The machine asks the server about the registration status.
Contract Cancel Select this to cancel the registration.
Device Replacement Select this to replace the machine being used.
5. Check and enter [Contract ID], [Authentication Key], and [PaaS URL].
Registration Configurations Settings:

Item Description
Contract ID Enter the customer Contract ID.
Authentication Key Enter the customer Authentication Key.
PaaS URL China: rpaasdev.online.tj.cn
If no PaaS URL is specified, enter the PaaS URL above.
86
2.Installation
6. If using a proxy server, enter the proxy information.
Proxy Function Settings:

Item Description
Enable Proxy Check this box to enable the proxy server.
Function
Proxy URL Set the proxy server address.
The characters that can be input are 0-9, A-Z, a-z.
Proxy Port Number Enter the proxy server port number.
The range is 1-65535.
Authorization The authorization method for linking to the proxy server.
The options are:
-None
-Basic
-Digest
The default value is “None”.
When “Basic” or “Digest” is selected, the User Name and Password can be
edited and should not be left blank.
When “None” is selected, the User Name and Password are read-only.
User Name The account connecting to the proxy server.
Please use ASCII characters only.
The max. length is 32.
Password The password for the username connecting to the proxy server.
7. After entering the information, click [OK].
8. If “Operation Successful” appears, PaaS registration is complete. For other messages, check the
following table.
PaaS Error Message List:
Message Description
Registration Configuration is The entered Contract ID or Authentication Key is either wrong or
not correct already being used. Check that the entered Contract ID or
87
2.Installation
Message Description
Authentication Key is correct.
Operation failed, please Please contact the service center.
contact service center (Code:
xxx)
Unregistering PaaS
To unregister, it is necessary to perform the cancellation procedure on the PaaS server side in advance.
2. In the web browser’s address bar, enter http://(machine’s IP address)/ to access the machine.
4. Check that Operation is set to "Contract Cancellation".
5. Click [OK].
6. If "Operation Successful" appears, PaaS unregistration is complete.
7. Switch back to Normal mode.
8. Enter the "Maintenance mode (SP menu)".
9. Select "Normal".
SP menu > [CTL Maintenance] > [Product type] > [Normal]
Changing Registered Device/ Main Board
To change the PaaS registered device or if the main board has been replaced, perform the procedure in
88
2.Installation
this section on the new device. The following flowchart summarizes the procedure.
The existing customer Contract ID and customer authentication key are required for authentication.
Note: It is not necessary to obtain a new contract ID and authentication key to change a registered
device or main board.
Check the Network Environment
1. Specify the network settings (IP address, Subnet mask, Gateway, and DNS):
Open User Tools > Network Settings > IPv4 Configuration, specify the IP address, Subnet,
Gateway, DHCP, and DNS settings according to the customer’s network environment.
Switch to PaaS Mode
1. Enter the "Maintenance mode (SP menu)"

2. Select "NPB".
SP menu > [CTL Maintenance] > [Product type] > [NPB]
Overwrite Registration on Server
Make sure the machine’s main power is always turned on and connected to the internet during
registration.
2. In the web browser’s address bar, enter http://(machine’s IP address)/ to access the machine.
89
2.Installation
4. Check that [Operation] is set to "Device Replacement".
5. Check and enter [Contract ID], [Authentication Key], and [PaaS URL].

Item Description
Contract ID Enter the customer Contract ID.
Authentication Key Enter the customer Authentication Key.
PaaS URL China: rpaasdev.online.tj.cn
If no PaaS URL is specified, enter the PaaS URL above.
90
2.Installation
6. If using a proxy server, enter the proxy information.
Proxy Function Settings:

Item Description
Enable Proxy Check this box to enable the proxy server.
Function
Proxy URL Set the proxy server address.
The characters that can be input are 0-9, A-Z, a-z.
Proxy Port Number Enter the proxy server port number.
The range is 1-65535.
Authorization The authorization method for linking to the proxy server.
The options are:
-None
-Basic
-Digest
The default value is “None”.
When “Basic” or “Digest” is selected, the User Name and Password can be
edited and should not be left blank.
When “None” is selected, the User Name and Password are read-only.
User Name The account connecting to the proxy server.
Password The password for the username connecting to the proxy server.
Use ASCII characters only.
7. After entering the information, click [OK].
8. If the message “Operation Successful” appears, PaaS registration is complete. For other
messages, check the following list.
PaaS Error Message List:
Message Description
Registration Configuration is The entered Contract ID or Authentication Key is either wrong or
not correct already being used. Check that the entered Contract ID or
91
2.Installation
Message Description
Authentication Key is correct.
Operation failed, please Please contact the service center.
contact service center (Code:
xxx)
92
2.Installation
NPB (PaaS) (D0B4)
NPB is the abbreviation of "New Printer Business".
PaaS Setting
PaaS Setup Procedure
The customer Contract ID and the customer authentication key are required for authentication.
Check that the SP5-816-201 value is “0” to make sure that @Remote is NOT enabled.
Switch to PaaS Mode
1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Set SP2-903-004 to 1.
3. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-002 (Entering PaaS mode).
If the machine is already in PaaS mode or @Remote is running, an "Execution Failed" message is
displayed on the operating panel.
4. Close the dialog and reboot the device.
5. After rebooting, check the SP5-760-001(PaaS Mode) value is “1” to confirm PaaS mode.
93
2.Installation
PaaS Registration
After PaaS Registration, you cannot switch back to normal mode.

1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Specify the following SP proxy server settings:
• SP5-760-015 (Use Proxy) 1: Use / 0: Don’t use
• SP5-760-016 (Proxy Server)
• SP5-760-017 (Proxy Port Number)
• SP5-760-018 (Proxy User Name)
• SP5-760-019 (Proxy User Password)
3. Input the Contract ID, Authentication Key, Server Name, and Server Port Number in SP5-760-003
to SP5-760-007.
Registration configuration:
SP No. Item Description
SP5-760-003 Contract ID Enter the customer Contract ID.
SP5-760-004 Authentication Key Enter the customer Authentication Key.
SP5-760-005 Server Name ‘rpaasdev.online.tj.cn’
Don't change the value above.
SP5-760-006 Server URL Path ‘/npb-base-web/API/npb/v1.0/deviceNotification’
SP5-760-007 Server Port Number 443
4. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-009 (Registration).
5. Please wait a moment for communication with the server.
6. Check the SP5-760-012(Execution Return Code) value is “0” to confirm the success of PaaS
setup.
If the value is not “0”, please check the result with the SP5-760-013 values in PaaS Error Code
List.
7. Make sure the SP5-760-008(Registration Status) value is “1” to confirm that PaaS registration is
complete.
Unregistering PaaS
In order to unregister, it is necessary to follow the cancellation procedure on the PaaS server side in
advance
1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-010 (Unregistration).
94
2.Installation

5. After auto-rebooting, make sure the SP5-760-012 (Execution Return Code) value is “0” to confirm
the success of the PaaS unregistration.
If the value is not “0”, please check the result with the SP5-760-013 values in the PaaS Error Code
List.
6. Make sure the SP5-760-008 (Registration Status) value is “0” to confirm that the PaaS
unregistration is complete.
Changing Registered Device/ Main Board
To change the PaaS registered device or if the main board is replaced, please follow the procedure
below on the new device.
• The customer Contract ID and the customer authentication key are required for authentication.
• Check that the SP5-816-201 value is “0” to make sure, @Remote is NOT enabled.
Switch to PaaS Mode
1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-002 (Entering PaaS mode).
When the machine is already in PaaS mode or @Remote is running, an "Execution Failed"
message is displayed on the operating panel.
95
2.Installation
4. After rebooting, check the SP5-760-001(PaaS Mode) value is “1” to confirm PaaS mode.
Overwrite Registration on Server
After PaaS Registration, you cannot switch back to normal mode.

1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Specify the following SP proxy server settings:
• SP5-760-015 (Use Proxy) 1: Use / 0: Don’t use
• SP5-760-016 (Proxy Server)
• SP5-760-017 (Proxy Port Number)
• SP5-760-018 (Proxy User Name)
• SP5-760-019 (Proxy User Password)
3. Input the details, such as Contract ID, Authentication Key, Server Name, and Server Port Number
in SP5-760-003 to SP5-760-007.
SP No. Item Description
SP5-760-003 Contract ID Enter the customer Contract ID.
SP5-760-004 Authentication Key Enter the customer Authentication Key.
SP5-760-005 Server Name ‘rpaasdev.online.tj.cn’
SP5-760-006 Server URL Path ‘/npb-base-web/API/npb/v1.0/deviceNotification’
SP5-760-007 Server Port Number 443
4. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-011 (Overwrite Registration on Server).
6. Check the SP5-760-012 (Execution Return Code) value is “0” to confirm the success of PaaS
setup.
If the value is not “0”, please check the result with the SP5-760-013 values in PaaS Error Code
List. (PaaS Error Code List)
7. Make sure the SP5-760-008 (Registration Status) value is “1” to confirm that PaaS registration is
96
2.Installation
complete.
Switching Back to Normal Mode
1. Enter SP Mode.
2. Press [Execute] in SP5-760-024 (Entering Normal Mode).
3. Close the reboot dialog and reboot the device.
4. After rebooting, check the SP5-760-001 (PaaS Mode) value is “0” to confirm that switching to
Normal mode is complete.
This function targets the device before registering with PaaS and after unregistering with PaaS.
After registering the PaaS device, it cannot be unregistered in SP5-760-024 (Enter Normal Mode).
It is necessary to unregister through SP5-760-010 (Unregistration).
SP Number
SP No. Name
SP5-760-001 PaaS Mode
SP5-760-002 Enter PaaS Mode
SP5-760-003 Contract ID
SP5-760-004 Authentication Key
SP5-760-005 Server Name
SP5-760-006 Server URL Path
SP5-760-007 Server Port Number
SP5-760-008 Registration Status
SP5-760-009 Registration
SP5-760-010 Unregistration
SP5-760-011 Overwrite Registration on Server
SP5-760-012 Execution Return Code
SP5-760-013 Error Code
SP5-760-015 Use Proxy
97
2.Installation
SP No. Name
0: Don’t use
1: Use
SP5-760-016 Proxy Server
SP5-760-017 Proxy Port Number
SP5-760-018 Proxy User Name
SP5-760-019 Proxy User Password
SP5-760-020 Retry Interval
SP5-760-021 Retry Count
SP5-760-023 Next Update Time
SP5-760-024 Enter Normal Mode
PaaS Execution Return Code
SP No. Value Description Solution / Workaround

SP5-760- 0 Initial / Succeeded -
012 1 Invalid Refer to Switch to PaaS mode. (Switch to PaaS Mode)
2 Already registered -
3 Already -
unregistered
4 Communication For details, refer to SP5-760-013 in PaaS Error Code List.
error (PaaS Error Code List)
9 Running Please wait a moment and check the status again.
PaaS Error Code List

SP5- 0 No error -
760- 1 Network information has not been set, Confirm information such as the Contract
013 or an invalid contract ID and ID, Authentication Key, PaaS Server
authentication key were entered. Name, PaaS Server Port Number, etc…
2 DNS server does not resolve the Confirm the PaaS Server Name and Proxy
hostname. Server.
Check the firmware version and the
network environment.
If this does not work, contact the network
administrator.
3 PaaS Server is not connected. Confirm the PaaS Server Name/Port
Number and Proxy Server/Port Number.
administrator.
98
2.Installation

4 Proxy is not authenticated Confirm the Proxy User Name and
Password.
administrator.
5 PaaS Server registration error Confirm the cause with the PaaS Server
Escalate to the PaaS Server Supplier
6 PaaS Server internal error Retry the procedure.
If this does not work, confirm the cause
with PaaS Server
7 PaaS Server internal error Confirm the cause with the PaaS Server
8 PaaS Server parameter error Confirm the cause with the PaaS Server
9 PaaS Server under maintenance Retry the procedure after maintenance
has finished.
10 HTTP communication error (404) Review the PaaS Server URL Path.
Check the PaaS Configuration.
11 HTTP communication error (500) Check the firmware version, the network
environment, and the PaaS Configuration.
If this does not work, escalate to the PaaS
Server Supplier.
51 Connection timeout Confirm the network settings such as the
IP address.
Check the firmware version and the
network environment
101 Unit number error Escalate to the Device Supplier
102 Device data collection error Escalate to the Device Supplier
103 PaaS Server response data Escalate to the Device Supplier
conversion error
104 PaaS Server response error Escalate to the Device Supplier
110 Invalid HTTP header Escalate to the Device Supplier
111 Incorrect JSON structure Escalate to the Device Supplier
112 HTTP communication error (405) Escalate to the Device Supplier
116 HTTP communication error (other) Escalate to the Device Supplier
255 System error Escalate to the Device Supplier
99
2.Installation
Technical Tips
• If communication fails, the PaaS update process will retry three more times at five-second
intervals.
• If the PaaS update process fails on three consecutive days, the device will display the banner
message.
• If a PaaS communication update error occurs, the device will try to connect to the server to update
after being rebooted.
• If the device is rebooted, the banner message will not be displayed. The banner message not
being displayed doesn’t necessarily mean the communication update was successful.
100
2.Installation
Inner 1bin Tray BN2020 (D0B4)
Accessory Check

1 1 Bin Tray Unit 1
2 Bracket 1
3 Bracket 1
4 Harness 1
5 Screws M3 x 6 3
6 Tapping screw M3 x 6 1
7 Mylar 2
- EMC Sheet 1
When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If
installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
101
2.Installation
1. Attach the Mylar films [A].
2. Remove the packing tape and retainers, and then remove the accessories (screws, etc.).
3. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B4))
4. Remove the front upper cover. (Front Upper Cover (D0B4))
5. Cut off a part [A] of the front upper cover.
102
2.Installation
6. Remove the bracket [A], [B].
7. Attach the bracket [A].
Use the screw obtained from step 6-[A].
8. Hook the hole on the upper side of the bracket [A] onto hinge [B], and then affix the lower side with
103
2.Installation
the screw.
9. With guide plate [A] open, insert the 1-bin tray unit.
104
2.Installation
10. Attach the 1-bin tray unit [A].
11. Connect the harness [A] attached to the 1-bin tray unit to CN110 [B] on the MPU.
105
2.Installation
12. Connect the harness from the MPU to connector [A] on the 1-bin tray.
13. Reattach covers.

14. Turn ON the main power.
15. Check that output to this tray can be selected on the operation panel, and check operation.
106
2.Installation
Fax Option Type M38 (D0B4)
Accessory Check
No. Description Q'ty Remarks

1 FCU 1
2 Serial Number Decal 1
3 Screws: M3 x 6 3
- EMC Sheet 1
• Before installing this fax unit, print out all data in the printer buffer. Turn the main power
to OFF and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
107
2.Installation
2. Remove the TEL and LINE cover [A] on the interface slot cover [B] using a screwdriver.
3. Attach the FCU [A].
4. Make one loop with the telephone cord, and then attach the ferrite core [A].
5. Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE" jack.

"SRAM formatted" is displayed on the operation panel after the main power is turned ON. Turn the
main power OFF and then ON again for normal use.
7. Enter the correct country code with SP1-101-016 ((SYS OF): Country/area code for functional
setting).
8. Execute SP3-102 in the fax SP mode and enter the serial number for the fax unit.
108
2.Installation
Adding Fax Application Icons to the Home Screen
The fax application icon is normally added automatically. However, if it is missing from the Home
screen, add it as follows:
The display (user interface, etc.) looks different from that of the actual machine.
1. Press the [Application List] key [A].
2. Press and hold the Fax application from the app list.
3. Drag and position the application on the home screen.
Registering the Function key
By registering a fax application to a function key on the Home screen, you can open the application
from any page. Specify the setting as required.
109
2.Installation
Function Keys 1, 2, and 3 are from the left, as shown:

The display (user interface, etc.) looks different from that of the actual machine.
Allocate an application to a function key as follows:

1. Login as the machine administrator
2. Press “Settings” icon > “Screen Features Settings”.
3. Press [Screen Device Settings].
110
2.Installation
4. Press [Function Key Settings].
5. Select the key to register.

To disable a function key, deselect the corresponding function key checkbox.
6. Press [Allocated Function], and then select the fax application.

In [Display Name], you can change the name of the icon on the Home screen (using up to 64
characters).
111
2.Installation
Function Priority Setting
You can specify whether the fax application appears on the operation panel just after turning the power
on or just after the system is reset automatically.
1. Login as the machine administrator
2. Press “Settings” icon > “Screen Features Settings”.
3. Press [Screen Device Settings].
4. Press [Function Priority].
112
2.Installation
5. Select the fax application.
Notes for Connecting the Telephone Line
Checking the following before connecting the telephone line:

If a phone line dedicated to business phones is connected to the MFP, the fax board may be damaged.
Make sure that the connecting phone line is for fax.
Why the Fax Board may be damaged?
Business phones have various functions. To operate those functions, a high current is supplied to a
business phone line. This may damage components on the Fax board.
113
2.Installation
NFC Card Reader Type M38 (D0B4)
Component Check
No. Description Q'ty Remarks

1 Reader 1
2 Interface Cable (with the ferrite core) 1
3 Decal 1
4 Decal 1
5 Screws: M3 x 6 2
6 Clamps 3
7 For Users of This Product 1
8 Note to Users in the United States of America 1
- EMC Sheet 1
• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
occur.
1. Remove the operation panel unit from the main machine. (Operation Panel Unit)
114
2.Installation
2. Remove the cover [A].
4. Connect the card reader [A] to the interface cable [B], and then attach them to the scanner front
115
2.Installation
cover.
5. Connect the interface cable [A].
116
2.Installation
6. Attach the cover [A].
7. Clamp the harness.
The harnesses should be run in order:

USB harness [B] from the back of wiring guide [A], from the NFC card reader harness [C] and then
harness [D] from the microcomputer board.
harness [D] from the microcomputer board from the back of the wiring guide [E], from the NFC card
reader harness [C] and then USB harness [B].
Position cable tie band [F] for the USB harness as shown in the figure.
117
2.Installation
8. Reassemble the operation panel.
When securing harness [A] from the operation panel, make sure that cable tie bands [C] and [D]
reach both sides of the clamp [B].
118
2.Installation
9. Clamp the harness.
10. Reattach the scanner front cover.

11. Attach the decal [A].
12. Reassemble the machine.
119
2.Installation
Machine Data Encryption (D0B4)
Overview
This function is used for encrypting data when storing it in the machine.
Even if the NVRAM or the micro SD card is stolen, data leakage can be prevented by encrypting the
data on them.
• This encryption setting must be specified by the customer.

• When the customer logs into the machine with the machine administrator’s privilege and
specifies the encryption setting, the encryption key is backed up.
• The back-up method can be selected from “Save to SD Card” and “Print on Ppr”.
Note: Only “Print on Ppr” is available for printer models.
• The customer keeps the encryption key.
• After replacing the part (MPU), get the SD card that contains the encryption key information
ready and perform the NVRAM and microSD data recovery.
(If the encryption key is already stored in the SD card, the SD card can be used as it is.)
• If the paper on which the Encryption Key is printed has been lost, the SD card that contains
the encryption key is damaged, or the serial number data in the SD card is corrupt, NVRAM
and SD card data recovery cannot be performed.
• The notes relating to the microSD card do not apply to models not equipped with a microSD
card.
• The data in the microSD card is deleted when the encryption is configured/canceled.
Setting Procedure
120
2.Installation
(1): Setup (at the factory)

(2): Delivery
(3): Encryption (performed by the customer)
(4): Backing up the encryption key (printing or storing on the SD card)
Note: Only MF models support storing on the SD card.
(5): Storing the encryption key on the SD card brought by the service technician.
(6): Data restoration with the encryption key
A: The customer keeps the encryption key.

B: MPU failure
Data That is Encrypted
This function encrypts data that is stored in the machine's NVRAM, or micro SD card.
• Address book information
• User code/authentication information
• Temporarily stored documents
• Logs (Job log/access log/Eco-friendly log)
• Network I/F setting information
• System settings information
• SAF/Fax communication history
Notes for Encrypting Data on the Machine
What Happens if the Encryption Function is Active
NO. When replacing Encryption status

1 Micro SD card The data in the microSD card is deleted.
After the replacement, a message prompting you to format the microSD
card appears.
If you press the [Initialization] button, data encryption starts over.
2 NVRAM Encryption is performed automatically.
After replacement, the format micro SD card window is displayed. Press
the [Format] button.
When formatting is completed, reboot the system.
If the [Check Status] indicator is lit in red, press the [Check Status] button
and check the status of the equipment.
Note that if the [Check Status] button does not respond, applications (copy,
121
2.Installation

scan, printer, fax, etc.) can be started from the control panel.
If an SC such as SC890-01 etc. is displayed, refer to troubleshooting.
3 MPU After the replacement, a message prompting you to restore the data
appears.
If the [Check Status] indicator is lit in red after the power is turned on, press
the [Check Status] button and check the status of the equipment.
The encryption key is available.
You can continue using the NVRAM/microSD card data.
The encryption key is unavailable.
After executing the forced start-up, it is necessary to format the

NVRAM/microSD card.
After canceling data encryption, a message prompting you to format the
microSD card appears.
4 MPU and The encryption key is entirely deleted along with the data in the microSD
NVRAM card.
After the replacement, a message prompting you to format the microSD
card appears.
If you press the [Initialization] button, data encryption is canceled.
5 MPU and Micro After the replacement, a message prompting you to restore the data
SD card appears.
The encryption key is available.
You can continue using the NVRAM.

After the restoration, a message prompting you to format the microSD card
appears.
122
2.Installation
The encryption key is unavailable.
After executing the forced start-up, it is necessary to format the

NVRAM/microSD card.
After the recovery by the forced start-up, a message prompting you to
format the microSD card appears.
If you press the [Initialization] button, data encryption is canceled.
6 NVRAM and After the replacement, a message prompting you to restore the data
Micro SD card appears.
After the replacement, a message prompting you to format the
NVRAM/microSD card appears.
After recovery by the forced start-up, reconfigure data encryption. (Cancel
data encryption and then execute data encryption again.)
In some cases, a message prompting you to format the microSD card

appears.
If it does, there is no need to reset data encryption.
7 MPU, Micro SD All the encryption key information is deleted. The data in the
card, and NVRAM/microSD card is also deleted when replacing the NVRAM/microSD
NVRAM card. (After the replacement, the data encryption key is canceled.)
The notes relating to the microSD card do not apply to models not equipped with a microSD card.
123
2.Installation
Enabling the Encryption Settings
This setting must be done by the customer. Advise the customer to enable this setting as necessary.
Enabling the Encryption Settings
The procedure relating to the microSD card do not apply to models not equipped with a microSD card.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the operation panel.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press the [Administrator Tools] tab.
6. Press [Next] 5 times
7. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
8. Press [Encrypt].
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.

Once the encryption process starts, it cannot be stopped.
If the power switch is turned OFF, the micro SD card, and/or NVRAM will be damaged and all data
in it will be unusable.
9. Specify how to back up the encryption key.
124
2.Installation
• If you select [Save to SD Card], insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
operation panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
• If you select [Print on Ppr], press [Start] and print out the machine's data encryption key.
The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure to instruct the
customer to keep it in a safe place.
10. Press [Restart] to reboot the machine.
When you reboot the machine, the machine will start to convert the data in the memory. Wait until
the message “Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off.” appears, and then
turn the main power switch OFF again.
Backing Up the Encryption Key
Backing Up the Encryption Key
To restore the encrypted data, you need the Encryption key that was generated when enabling the
encryption setting.
The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the operation panel.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press the [Administrator Tools] tab.
6. Press [Next] 5 times.
7. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
8. Press [Back Up Encryption Key].
9. Specify how to back up the encryption key.
• If you select [Save to SD Card], insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
operation panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
• If you select [Print on Ppr], press [Start] and print out the machine's data encryption key.
10. Press [Exit].
11. Log out
125
2.Installation
Recovery Procedure
In the machine in which the data is encrypted, the following message appears after the MPU is
replaced.
Using the encryption key kept by the customer, get an SD card ready for restoration, and then execute
the restoration. (If the encryption key is already stored on an SD card, use that SD card.)
If the customer has lost the encryption key, get ready an SD card for canceling data encryption, and
then execute forced start-up without an encryption key. (In this case, the existing data in the NVRAM
and microSD card is deleted.)
The notes relating to the microSD card do not apply to the models not equipped with a microSD card.
Restoring the Encryption Key
Restoring the Encryption Key
If the encryption key is printed on paper, first get an SD card ready to enter the encryption key. If you
have already stored the encryption key on an SD card, start this procedure from step 6.
1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.
2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the “restore_key” folder and name it the same as the machine’s serial number,
“xxxxxxxxxxx” (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and write the encryption key.
Write this string at the head of the file.

Use all lower-case letters.
Do not use quotation marks, line breaks, or blank spaces.
5. Save the text file in the "xxxxxxxxxxx“ folder created in Step 3.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
6. Turn the power switch ON.
7. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains the
encryption key.
8. Turn the power switch OFF.
9. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into the machine's rear SD card slot.
10. With a model equipped with a microSD card, after replacing the MPU, remove the NVRAM and
microSD card from the old MPU and install them on the new MPU.
126
2.Installation
The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the MPU.
12. Turn the power switch OFF after the restoration is completed.
13. Remove the SD card.
15. After a message is displayed on the LCD telling you to initialize the micro SD card, turn the power
switch OFF (Do not press “Initialization” button)
Check whether the microSD card has been replaced in step 10.
If the microSD card has not been replaced, turn the power off without pressing the “Initialization”
button, install the microSD card on the new MPU, turn the power back on, and then press the
“Initialization button. If you press the “Initialization” button without replacing the microSD card, the
data in the microSD card cannot be recovered.
Forced Start Up with No Encryption Key
Forced Start Up with No Encryption Key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, or the encryption key restoration has failed, follow the
procedure below to do a forced start-up.
When the restoration is carried out in the following procedure, data on the micro SD and NV-RAM are
initialized (encrypted data will be deleted, and the user settings will be cleared).
SC870-09 may occur. In such a case, the address book is formatted, so be sure to back up the address
book.
1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named “restore_key” inside the root directory of the SD card.
3. Save the “nvram_key.txt” file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
4. Create a text file and write "nvclear".
Write this string at the head of the file.

Use all lower-case letters.
Do not use quotation marks, line break, or blank spaces.
127
2.Installation
5. Turn the power switch OFF.

6. Insert the SD card that contains nvram_key.txt" into the machine's rear SD card slot.
8. Check that a message “Are you sure you want to clear the NVRAM?” is displayed on the LCD, then
press the execute button.
9. Check that a message “Initialize the NVRAM after the machine is started.” appears, and then turn
the power switch OFF.
10. Remove the SD card.
If SC870-09 occurs, turn the power off and then back on. The address book is formatted during
initialization.
12. Check that a message is displayed on the LCD telling you to initialize the micro SD card, then
press “Initialization”.
If the message reporting the formatting does not appear in step 12, reconfigure data encryption
(cancel data encryption and then execute data encryption again), and then proceed to step 15. (For
details about canceling and then executing data encryption, see “Enabling the Encryption
Settings”.)
13. After Initialization is completed, turn the power switch OFF.
15. Do SP5-801-001 (Memory Clear/All Clear)
16. Set necessary user settings with the User Tools menu.
128
2.Installation
Operation Guidance for Users

Machine Function User Instruction
Basic machine Basic user instruction:
functions • How to load and replace consumables (paper and toner)
(all models) • Basic machine operations (power ON/OFF, other)
• How to make copies (basic operations)
• How to remove jammed paper and clear the jam condition
• How to clear SC errors, contact the service provider in case of occurrence
• Supported paper types/sizes/weights and paper storage
• Daily machine maintenance (Daily Machine Maintenance)
• Machine limitations and other important notes regarding machine
usage/operation
Printer, scanner Settings, print jobs:
• Printer/Scanner settings (USB, network, other)
• Printer/Scanner driver and utilities recommended installation, settings
(printer ports, TWAIN drivers)
• Print test (printing out the driver test page)
• Scan test using a Windows standard scanning application
Basic user instruction:
• How to print out a file
• How to install drivers, perform settings (recommended installation)
• Introduction to the settings and menus available from the operation panel
• Machine limitations and other important notes regarding machine
usage/operation
Daily Machine Maintenance
Cleaning the Toner Shield Glass
The toner shield glass may require cleaning if white lines appear on the print side of the document.
Do not forcibly insert the brush, as the machine may be damaged.
129
2.Installation
Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the power cord.
Open the front door and remove the cleaning brush.
Lift the cleaning brush toward the machine to release the catches, and then hold its grip and remove it
from the machine.
There is a hole for cleaning the toner shield glass.
Insert the cleaning brush so that its arrow mark faces the arrow mark beside the hole in the machine.
Slide the cleaning brush in and out slowly two to three times.
Tilt and insert the cleaning brush, avoiding hooking it on the rear catches.
Return the cleaning brush to its original position, avoid hooking it onto the front catch. When the
cleaning brush is placed correctly, it makes a clicking sound.
Insert the cleaning brush so that its arrow mark faces the arrow mark beside the hole in the machine.
130
2.Installation
Cleaning the Exposure Glass
Lift the ADF or the platen cover (exposure glass cover).
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, as the tray might be damaged.
Clean the parts indicated with arrows using a soft damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth to remove
any remaining moisture.
When cleaning the exposure glass, clean the scanning glass too.
131
3.Preventive Maintenance
3. Preventive Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Tables

See “Appendices” for the following information:
• Preventive Maintenance
132
3.Preventive Maintenance
PM Parts Settings
PM Parts Replacement Procedure
1. Enter the SP mode.

2. Print the SMC logging data. (SMC Page Printing)
3. Execute the following SPs to "1".
Item SP No. SP Name
OPC Drum SP7-622-021 PM Counter Reset OPC
Developer SP7-622-024 PM Counter Reset Developer
Mixing Auger Bearings SP7-622-028 PM Counter Reset Bearing:Dev Screw
Transfer roller SP7-622-108 PM Counter Reset Paper Trans Unit
Fusing unit SP7-622-115 PM Counter Reset Fusing Unit
Hot Roller Bearings SP7-622-119 PM Counter Reset Fusing Roll Bear
4. Exit the SP mode.
5. Turn off the main power.
6. Replace the PM parts and turn the power on.
The machine will reset the PM counters.
After Installing the New PM parts
1. Turn on the main power.

2. Output the SMC logging data (SMC Page Printing) and check the counter values.
3. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-621 and SP7-944.
Operation Check
Check if an example image is copied normally.
133
4.Replacement and Adjustment
4. Replacement and Adjustment
Beforehand
• Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
• After replacing, make sure that all removed harnesses are connected up again and secured in
their clamps.
134
Special Tools and Lubricants

No. Parts No. Description Q’ty Unique or Notes
Common
1 B6455010 SD card 1 C (General)
2 B6455020 SD card (1GB) 1 C (General)
3 A2929500 Test chart – S5S (10 pcs/set) 1 C (General)
4 VSSG9006 MOLYKOTE(R) G-1077 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)
GREASE 50g Fusing Drive
Development Drive
Main Motor
Drum Drive
Paper Feed Unit
PB2030/2040
5 D0149800 Grease: KS660B 1 C (General) Development Drive
Drum Drive
6 VSSG0006 DRYSURF:MDF-2400E 25G 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)
Paper Feed Tray
Bypass Tray
Duplex Unit
Paper Feed Unit
PB2030/2040
7 VSSG9007 MOLYKOTE EM-50L 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B4)
(JP/ENG) Paper Feed Tray
Paper Feed Unit
PB2030/2040
Inner 1bin Tray BN2020
(D0B4)
8 VSSG9003 MOLY HIGH TEMP GREASE: 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B4)
50G
9 52039502 Silicon Grease G-501 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)
10 A2579100 SILICONE OIL TYPE-SS 1 C (General) ADF Unit (D0B4)
Location to Apply G-1077 Grease
ADF Unit (D0B2,D0B3)
ADF Drive Gears
Apply G-1077 grease at the locations shown below.
135
Location Parts name

[A] ADF drive gear GEAR:SLOW DOWN:MOTOR
[B] ADF drive gear GEAR:ROLLER:EXIT
[C] ADF drive gear GEAR:ROLLER:PULL OUT
[D] ADF drive gear GEAR:IDLER:SEPARATION SUB-UNIT
[E] ADF drive gear GEAR:IDLER:NO.4
[F] ADF drive clutch TORQUE LIMITER:REVERSE ROLLER
Coating Amount Maximum Minimum Note

[A] [A]:8 places
[B] [B]:2 places
[C] [C]:1 place
[D] [D]:1 place
[E] [E]:1 place
[F] [F]:1 place
ADF side plate shaft
Apply G-1077 grease at the locations shown below

Location Parts name
[A] ADF side plate shaft SIDE PLATE:REAR
136

[A] 9 places
Original Turn Guide Plate

Location Parts name
[A] Original turn guide plate GATE PAWL:REVERSE
[B]
[C]
137

[A] 2 places
[B]
[C] 1 place
Fusing Drive
Apply G-1077 grease at the locations shown below.

Location Parts name
[A] Fusing drive gear GEAR:FUSING/PAPER EXIT UNIT:IDLER
[B] Fusing drive gear GEAR:FUSING/PAPER EXIT UNIT:No.1
[C] Fusing drive gear GEAR:PULLY:FUSING:TRANSPORT
138

[A] 9 places
[B]
[C]
Development Drive

Location Parts name
[A] Development drive gear GEAR:DEVELOPMENT:DRIVE:IDLER
[B]
[C] Development drive shaft FRAME:DRIVE:MAIN
139

[A] [A]:3 places
[B] [B]:3 places
140

[C] 1 place
Main Motor
After replacing the main motor (M3), apply G-1077 grease to the motor shaft.
Location Parts name
Main motor shaft DC BRUSHLESS MOTOR:50M:18.96W
Maximum Minimum Note

• [A]: Direction of
spreading the grease
• Apply 20 mm to shaft
tip.
141
Drum Drive

Location Parts name
[A] Drum drive gear GEAR:DRUM:DRIVE

[A] 3 places

Location Parts name
[A] Paper feed clutch ELECTROMAGNETIC CLUTCH:MIC3.5T:PAPER FEED
[B] Paper feed gear GEAR:VERTICAL TRANSPORT:Z32
[C] Paper feed gear GEAR:PAPER FEED:Z65
142
Location Parts name

[D] Paper feed gear GEAR:PAPER FEED:Z65/Z32
[E] Transport motor gear DC MOTOR:ENCODER:NO:10W:GEAR:BRUSHLESS

[A] [A] :2 places
[B] [B] :2 places
[C] [C] :3 places
[D] [D] :5 places
[E] [E] :1 place
143
Location to Apply KS660B Grease
Development Drive
Apply KS660B grease at the locations shown below

Location Parts name
[A] Development drive shaft SHAFT:DEVELOPMENT:DRIVE

[A] 1 place
Drum Drive
Apply KS660B grease at the locations shown below

Location Parts name
[A] Drum drive shaft SHAFT:DRUM:DRIVE:ASS'Y
144

[A] 1 place
Location to Apply MDF-2400E Grease
ADF Original Feed Roller Shaft
Apply MDF-2400E grease at the locations shown below.

Location Parts name
[A] ADF original feed roller shaft SHAFT:PAPER FEED:COUPLING
[B] ADF harness guide BRACKET:FEED:HARNESS
145
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.01 g ± 0.005 g 2 places
[B] 0.01 g ± 0.005 g 3 places
ADF Guide Plate

Location Parts name
[A] ADF guide plate GUIDE PLATE
[B]
[C]
[D]
146
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.06 g ± 0.015 g 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[D] 0.01 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
ADF Original Sensor Feeler

Location Parts name
[A] ADF original sensor feeler FEELER:ORIGINAL SENSOR
[B]
147
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.02 g ± 0.004 g 1 place
[B] 0.02 g ± 0.004 g 1 place
ADF Document Table Roller

Location Parts name
[A] ADF document table roller ROLLER:REVERSE:DRIVEN:2
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.005 g ± 0.0013 g 4 places
148
ADF Document Table

Location Parts name
[A] ADF document table ORIGINAL TABLE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
149
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.05 g ± 0.01 g 2 places
[B] 0.05 g ± 0.01 g 6 places
[C] 0.05 g ± 0.01 g 2 places
[D] 0.05 g ± 0.01 g 6 places
[E] 0.03 g ± 0.01 g 1 place
[F] 0.03 g ± 0.01 g 1 place
Paper Feed Tray
Paper Feed Tray

Location Parts name
[A] Paper Feed Tray PAPER FEED TRAY
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
150
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.03 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.03 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[D] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[E] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 2 places
[F] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 2 places
[G] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 2 places
[H] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 2 places
Tray Lift Drive

Location Parts name
[A] Tray Lift Motor (M4) coupling JOINT:LIFT MOTOR
[B] Tray Lift Motor (M4) gear GEAR:RISING TRAY:OUTPUT
151
Coating Maximum Minimum Note

Amount
[A] 0.0800g ±0.0050g • 1 place
[B] • 1 place
• Evenly apply [B] to the side
surface of the gear.
• Apply [B] while pushing
down the joint (D3312667).
Tray Release Lever

Location Parts name
[A] Tray release lever GRIP:PAPER TRAY
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
152
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[D] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[E] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[F] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[G] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[H] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
Tray Release Lever

Location Parts name
[A] Tray release lever LEVER - RELEASE INNER
[B]
153
Location Parts name

[C]
[D] Tray release lever LEVER:RELEASE:PAPER TRAY:OUTER
[E]
[F] Tray release lever LEVER:PRESSURE:RELEASE:PAPER TRAY
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[B] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[C] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[D] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[E] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[F] 0.06 g ±0.005 g 1 place
Pressure Release Lever

Location Parts name
[A] Pressure release lever LEVER:PRESSURE RELEASE
154

[A] 1 place
Pressure Arm

Location Parts name
[A] Pressure arm ARM:PRESSURE:SEPARATE
[B]
155
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.005 g ±0.002 g • 1 place
[B] 0.005 g ±0.002 g • 1 place
• Spread grease evenly over the inner surface of the housing.
Base End Fence

Location Parts name
[A] Base End Fence BASE:END FENCE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place
[B] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place
[C] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place
[D] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place
156
Coating Amount Note

[E] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place
[F] 0.5 g ±0.07 g 1 place
Rear Side Fence

Location Parts name
[A] Rear side fence SIDE FENCE:REAR
[B]
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.005 g ±0.002 g 1 place
[B] 0.005 g ±0.002 g 1 place
Front Side Fence

Location Parts name
[A] Front side fence SIDE FENCE:FRONT
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
157
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ±0.005 g 1 place
[D] 0.02 g ±0.01 g 1 place
[E] 0.02 g ±0.01 g 1 place
[F] 0.02 g ±0.01 g 1 place
[G] 0.02 g ±0.01 g 1 place
158
If grease gets on [A], [B], or [C] in the figure below, wipe it off with alcohol.
Bypass Tray
Bypass tray friction pad

Location Parts name
[A] Bypass tray friction pad shaft SHAFT:HOLDER
159

[A] 2 places
Bypass tray

Location Parts name
[A] Bypass tray BASE:MANUAL FEED TABLE
[B]
160
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.03 g ±0.01 g 3 place
[B] 0.03 g ±0.01 g 3 place
Duplex Unit
Lock Button

Location Parts name
[A] Duplex unit lock button BUTTON:DOOR:RIGHT
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
161

[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place
162

[C] 1 place
[D] 1 place
[E] 1 place
Duplex Unit Cover

Location Parts name
[A] Duplex unit cover COVER:DUPLEX
[B]
[C]
163

[A] 1 place
[B] 1 place
164

[C] 4 places
Duplex Unit Frame

Location Parts name
[A] Duplex unit frame FRAME:TRANSFER
[B]
[C]
[D]
165
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.0125 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[B] 0.0125 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[C] 0.0133 g ± 0.0033 g 1 place
[D] 0.0133 g ± 0.0033 g 1 place
Relay Roller (driven) Bushing

Location Parts name
[A] Duplex unit relay roller(driven) bushing BUSHING - VERTICAL TRANSPORT
[B]

[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place
Tray Lift Drive

Location Parts name
[A] Tray Lift Motor (M1, M2) coupling JOINT:LIFT MOTOR
166
Location Parts name

[B] Tray Lift Motor (M1, M2) gear GEAR:RISING TRAY:OUTPUT

Amount
[A] 0.08 g ±0.002 g • 1 place
[B] • 1 place
• Evenly apply [B] to the side
surface of the gear.
• Apply [B] while pushing
down the joint (D3312667).
Paper Feed Tray

Location Parts name
[A] Paper feed tray PAPER FEED TRAY
[B]
[C]
[D]
167
Location Parts name

[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 2 places
[B] 0.13 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.06 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[D] 0.06 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[E] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[F] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[G] 0.03 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[H] 0.03 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[I] 0.04 g ±0.02 g* 4 places
*Total coating amount for 4 places
Paper Feed Tray (Base)

168
Location Parts name

[A] Paper feed tray (Base) PAPER FEED TRAY (BASE)
[B]
[C]
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.13 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.06 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.06 g ±0.02 g 1 place
Paper Feed Unit (Right Frame)

Location Parts name
[A] Paper feed unit (Right frame) FRAME:RIGHT
169
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.1 g ±0.02 g 1 place
Pressure Arm

Location Parts name
[A] Pressure Arm ARM:PRESSURE:SEPARATE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
170
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
[D] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
[E] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
[F] 0.01 g ±0.02 g • 1 place
Tray Release Lever

Location Parts name
[A] Tray release lever LEVER:RELEASE PAPER TRAY
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E] Tray release lever SHAFT:LEVER:GRIP
[F]
[G] Tray release lever LEVER:RELEASE:PAPER TRAY:INNER
[H]
[I] Tray release lever LEVER:RELEASE:PAPER TRAY:OUTER
[J]
171
Location Parts name

[K] Tray release lever GRIP:PAPER TRAY
[L]
[M]
[N]
[O]
[P]
[Q]
[R]
172
173
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 4 places
[B] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 4 places
[D] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[E] 0.015 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[F] 0.025 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[G] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[H] 0.05 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[I] 0.015 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[J] 0.015 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[K] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[L] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[M] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[N] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[O] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[P] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[Q] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[R] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
Vertical Transfer Roller (Driven Side)

Location Parts name
[A] Vertical transfer roller PULL OUT ROLLER - OPTION TRAY
174
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 2 places
Paper End Feeler

Location Parts name
[A] Paper end feeler FEELER:PAPER END
[B]
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.015 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.015 g ±0.02 g 1 place
Tray Lift Feeler

Location Parts name
[A] Tray lift feeler FEELER:POSITIONING CONTROL
[B]
175
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
Base End Fence

Location Parts name
[A] Base End Fence BASE:END FENCE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
176
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[D] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[E] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[F] 0.01 g ±0.02 g 1 place
Rear Side Fence

Location Parts name
[A] Rear side fence SIDE FENCE:REAR
[B]
[C]
177
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
Front Side Fence

Location Parts name
[A] Front side fence SIDE FENCE:FRONT
[B]
[C]
178
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[B] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
[C] 0.02 g ±0.02 g 1 place
Location to Apply EM-50L Grease
ADF Unit (D0B4)
ADF Guide Plate
Apply EM-50L grease at the locations shown below.

Location Parts name
[A] ADF guide roller torsion bar TORSION BAR SPRING:EXHAUST:UPPER:DRIVEN
179

[A] 8 places
Take care not to get grease on [A], [B], and [C] in the figure below.
180
ADF Pickup Lever

Location Parts name
[A] ADF pickup lever SIDE PLATE:REAR
[B] ADF pickup lever BRACKET:FEED CLUTCH
181

[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place
unction Gate

Location Parts name
[A] Junction gate SIDE PLATE:FRONT
[B] Junction gate SIDE PLATE:REAR
182

[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place
Original Stopper

Location Parts name
[A] Original stopper SIDE PLATE:REAR
[B] Original stopper SIDE PLATE:FRONT

[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place
183
Original Table

Location Parts name
[A] Original table ORIGINAL TABLE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
184

[A] 1 place
[B] 1 place
185

[C] [C]:4 places
[D] [D]:4 places
[E] [E]:4 places
[F] [F]:4 places
Take care not to get grease on [A], [B], and [C] in the figure below.
Original Table Cover

Location Parts name
[A] Original table cover COVER:ORIGINAL TABLE
Take care not to get grease on [B], and [C] in the figure below.
186

[A] 2 places
Original Feed Roller

[A] Original feed roller DRIVE SHAFT - PAPER FEED BELT
[B]
Location Parts name
187

[A] [A]:1 place
[B] [B]:1 place
Take care not to get grease on [A] in the figure below.
188
Paper Feed Tray
Tray Bottom Plate

Location Parts name
[A] Paper feed tray bottom plate TRAY BOTTOM PLATE

[A] 2 places
Tray Bottom Plate

Location Parts name
[A] Paper feed tray bottom plate TRAY BOTTOM PLATE
189

[A] 2 places

Location Parts name
[A] Paper transfer gear shaft GEAR:PULLY
[B] Paper transfer gear GEAR:PULLY
190

[A] 1place
[B] 1place
191
Location to Apply RA44-3502 Grease
ADF Paper Feed Clutch
Apply RA44-3502 grease at the locations shown below

Location Parts name
[A] ADF paper feed clutch spring SPRING:MECHANICAL SPRING CLUTCH:PAPER FEED
[B] ADF paper feed clutch gear GEAR:MECHANICAL SPRING CLUTCH:PAPER FEED
[C]

Amount
[A] • 1 place
• Spread grease evenly over
the inside surface of the
spring.
192

Amount
[B] 1 place
[C] 1 place
Location to Apply 50G
ADF Unit (D0B4)
Hinge
Apply Moly High Temp Grease 50G at the locations shown below
Location Parts name
[A] Hinge SCREW:DIA6
193

Amount
[A] • 2 places
• Spread at least 5 mm wide around
the entire circumference of [A].
Location to Apply G-501 Grease
ADF Original Feed Roller

Location Parts name
[A] ADF original feed roller FEED ROLLER
[B]* ADF original feed roller spring SPRING:ROLLER CLUTCH
[C] ADF original feed roller gear GEAR:FEED
194
*Apply grease around the entire circumference of locations [A] and [C]. Do not apply grease to location
[B].
Amount
- • Apply grease around the entire
circumference of locations [A] and
[C]. Do not apply grease to location
[B].
• Apply the amount of grease shown
in the figure on the left to locations
[A] and [C]. (The amount shown in
the figure on the left spreads inside
the ADF original feed roller spring.)
195
Location to Apply SILICONE OIL TYPE-SS
ADF Unit (D0B4)
Original Feed Unit
Apply SILICONE OIL TYPE-SS at the locations shown below

Location Parts name
[A] Original feed unit drive shaft SHAFT:PAPER FEED:DRIVE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
Coating Amount Note

[A] 0.025 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[B] 0.025 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[C] 0.025 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[D] 0.025 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
[E] 0.025 g ± 0.005 g 1 place
Feed Motor
Apply SILICONE OIL TYPE-SS at the locations shown below
196
Location Parts name

[A] Timing pully shaft TIMING PULLY:TRANSPORT:SLOW DOWN
Coating Note
Amount
[A] 3 dollops • 1 place
• Spread grease in the area from the shaft base up to 50 mm from the shaft
base.
197
Exterior Covers
• Unplug the power cord before starting the following procedure.
Overview
Front and Rear Side Covers (D0B2,D0B3)
No. Cover name

1 Operation panel
2 Front right cover
3 Front door
4 Main power switch cover
5 ADF rear cover
6 Rear cover
Front and Rear Side Covers (D0B4)
198
No. Cover name

1 Smart operation panel
2 Front upper cover
3 Front door
4 Main power switch cover
5 Rear cover (ADF)
6 Rear cover
Left and Right Side Covers
No. Cover name

1 Left cover
2 Fusing exhaust cover
3 Right upper cover
4 Right rear cover
5 Right front cover
199
Fusing Exhaust Covers/Inner Covers
No. Cover name

1 Fusing exhaust cover
2 Inner cover
ADF (D0B3)
No. Cover name

1 ADF front cover
200
No. Cover name

2 ADF upper cover
3 ADF rear cover
ADF (D0B4)
No. Cover name

1 Front cover
2 Left cover
3 Rear cover
201
Front Door
1. Remove the front door [A].
Paper Tray 1
1. Remove the paper tray 1 [A].
202
Front Right Cover (D0B2,D0B3)
If the front door will get in the way while performing this work, remove it. (Front Door)
2. Open the bypass tray [A], and then press the button [B] to open the right door [C].
3. Remove the front right cover [A].
Front Upper Cover (D0B4)
If the front door will get in the way while performing this work, remove it. (Front Door)
203
3. Remove the front upper cover [A].
Inner Cover
D0B2,D0B3
1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover (D0B2,D0B3))
D0B4

2. Remove paper tray 1. (Paper Tray 1)
204
4. Release the lock lever [A], and then pull out the toner bottle holder [B].
205
5. Remove the toner bottle [A], and then remove the toner bottle holder [B].
6. Release the lock lever [A].

7. Remove the PCDU [B].
206
8. Remove the lock lever [A].
9. Remove the inner cover [A].
207
Left Cover
1. Remove the left cover [A].
Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3)
208
Rear Cover (D0B4)
Right Rear Cover
1. Remove the rear cover.(Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3), Rear Cover (D0B4))

2. Remove the right rear cover [A].
209
Right Upper Cover
D0B2,D0B3
D0B4

3. Remove the right upper cover [A].
This cover hook employs a snap-fit mechanism.

The hook is on the back of the mark shown in the enlarged view.
Paper Exit Tray
If an inner 1 bin tray is attached to the D0B4, remove it.

210
3. Remove the paper exit tray [A].
Right Door

211
3. Remove the ID sensor connector. [A]
4. Close the right door.

5. Remove the right door hinge brackets [A].
212
6. Press the button [B] to remove the right door [C].
7. Remove the duplex unit bracket [A].

8. Slide the right door hinge shaft [B].
9. Remove the transfer guide unit [C].
213
Reinstalling the Right Door
1. Reinstall the transfer guide unit on the right door.

2. Hook the right door hinge brackets [A] to the rear frame [B].
3. Close the right door [C].
4. Tighten the right door hinge brackets [A].
5. Reconnect the ID sensor connector.

6. Reinstall the right rear cover.
• Be sure to close the right door first then secure the right door hinge brackets in place with
screws.
Otherwise, the right door may shift and may not close properly.
214
ADF Unit (D0B3)
ADF Unit
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3))

2. Disconnect the ADF cable [A] and remove the ground plate [B].
3. Open and remove the ADF unit [A].
Platen Cover Sensor
1. Remove the top rear cover (Top Rear Cover)
215
2. Remove the platen cover sensor (S2) [A].
ADF Front Cover
1. Open the ADF upper cover [A].

2. Remove the ADF front cover [B].
216
ADF Rear Cover

2. Open the document table [B].
3. Remove the ADF rear cover [A].
217
Document Table
1. Remove the ADF front cover. (ADF Front Cover)

2. Remove the ADF rear cover (ADF Rear Cover)
3. Remove the document table [A].
Original Width Sensor (S17)
1. Remove the document table. (Document Table)
218
2. Remove the document table rear cover [A].
3. Remove the original width sensor (S17) [A].
Pick-up Roller
219
2. Remove the original feed unit [B].
3. Remove the pick-up roller [A].
Separation Pad
220
2. Remove the original feed unit [B].
3. Push the lever [A] to pop up the separation pad [B].
ADF Cover Sensor (S19), Original Set Sensor (S18)
1. Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover)

2. Remove the ADF cover sensor (S19) [A].
221
3. Remove the original set sensor (S18) [B].
ADF/Platen Cover Sensor (S21)

2. Remove the ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) [A].
222
ADF Pick-up Solenoid (SOL3)

2. Remove the ADF pick-up solenoid (SOL3) [A].
ADF Inverter Solenoid (SOL2)
223
2. Remove the bracket [A].
3. Remove the ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2) [A].
ADF Feed Roller

2. Remove the original feed unit. (Pick-up Roller)
224
3. Remove the original feed-in guide plate [A].
4. Remove the original turn guide plate [A].
225
6. Remove the harness guide [A].
226
7. Remove the ADF feed clutch [A].
8. Remove the left hinge [A].
227
9. Remove the right hinge [A].
228
12. Remove the ADF feed roller [A].
ADF Main Motor (M6)
1. Remove the ADF feed roller. (ADF Feed Roller)

229
2. Remove the ADF main motor (M6) [A].
ADF Registration Sensor (S20)
1. Open the ADF unit.

2. Remove the white plate guide [A].
230
3. Remove the ADF registration sensor (S20) [A].
231
ADF Unit (D0B4)
ADF Unit

2. Remove the cable bracket [A],[B] and connector.
3. Remove the screws on the ADF base.
4. Slowly and carefully (the ADF is heavy) lift the ADF [A].
Set the ADF on its edge on the floor, and then lean it against a wall [B].
232
• To prevent damage to the fragile feelers [A] of the ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21), never lay
the ADF on a flat surface as shown below.
Original Feed Unit
1. Open the left cover.
233
2. Remove the Original feed unit [A].
• Pull the original feed unit forward to release the back side of the shaft.
Rear Cover
1. Open the left cover [A].

2. Open the original tray [B].
3. Remove the Rear cover [C]. ( ×1, hook ×5)
Front Cover and Original Tray
1. Open the left cover.

2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
234
3. Remove the front cover [A].
• Keep the original tray open when removing the front cover.
4. Remove the original tray [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1).
Hinge
1. Remove the ARDF from the main machine.

2. Place the ARDF on a flat surface, and place it so that the hinge does not hit against that surface.
• Be careful not to scratch the scanning area [A] (guide plate and mylar).
• Be careful not to hook the actuator [B]. (It is a movable actuator; it is stored in the ARDF
235
when you push it and it comes back because of a spring.)
3. Remove the rear cover of the ARDF.
4. Remove the following parts.

• Clamp
• Harness
• Connectors [A] ( ×3)
• Screw [B] ( ×1)
5. Remove the screws [A] and spring [B] of the feed motor bracket, and remove the feed motor unit.
236
( ×2, spring ×1)
6. Remove the resin ring [A] and flanges, and remove the timing belt. Then, remove the reverse
torque limiter [B] from the shaft.
7. Disconnect the link [A] of the junction gate, and remove the E-ring [B] of the fixing shaft. ( ×1)
237
8. Loosen the screw [A] of the belt tension unit and remove the spring [B]. ( ×1, spring ×1)
9. Remove the screws [A] of the motor bracket, and remove the transport motor unit. ( ×2)
10. Remove the belt tension unit and screw [A], and pull out the hinge fixing shaft [B] (do not remove
the E-ring on the fixing shaft side).
11. Remove the step screws and springs [A] of the hinge, and remove the hinge [B]. ( ×2, spring ×2)
Note: Grease is applied to the step screws.
238
12. Insert the left hinge with a damper [A] and insert the hinge fixing shaft [B].
13. Fix the hinge fixing shaft with an E-ring, and insert the link [B] of the junction gate. ( ×1)
After inserting the link, pull it slightly to check that it does not fall out.
14. Attach the step screws and springs of the hinge. After attaching them, push the screw top to check
that the screws are pushed down.
When the screws do not move, the step screws may be fixed with the plate stay. Loosen and fix the
screws again.
239
15. Attach the reverse torque limiter [A].

Put the torque limiter on the shaft, hook the timing belt, attach the flange, and fix it with the resin
ring.
16. Attach the transport motor unit. ( ×2)

Attach the bracket to the plate, hook the timing belt onto the motor pulley, and hook the spring.
Do not fix the screws [A] completely, so that the motor unit can move left and right.
17. Rotate the white gear [A] by hand to warm up the timing belt. ( ×2)
Fix the screws [B] of the feed motor bracket completely, which were attached in step 16.
(The picture has been taken after attaching the harness guide.)
240
18. Attach the belt tension unit. Do not fix the screw [A] completely. Move the cutout of the belt tension
unit to fit the hole [B] in the rear plate. ( ×1)
19. Hook the belt [A] onto the pulley of the transport motor unit, and insert the shaft into the hole in the
rear plate, shown in step 18.
20. Fix the two screws [A] of the transport motor unit, and hook the spring [B] of the belt tension unit.
241
Do not fix the screw [C] of the belt tension completely. ( ×3, spring×1)
21. Attach the harness guide and fix it with the screw [A]. ( ×1)
The harness [B] of the clutch should be passed as shown below.
22. Insert the connector of the motor and the connector of the cooling fan, and fix the harness with the
clamp. ( ×2, ×1)
Original Length Sensors (SN12) (SN13) (SN14) and Original Sensor (SN11)
1. Remove the Original Tray. (Front Cover and Original Tray)
242
2. Remove the Tray cover [A]. ( ×3)
3. Remove the following items:

• Original sensor (SN11) [A] ( ×1)
• Original length sensors (SN12) (SN13) (SN14) [B] ( ×1 each)
Original Set Sensor (SN8)
1. Remove the Original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit)

2. Remove the Original tray. (Front Cover and Original Tray)
243
3. Remove the Original feed-in guide plate [A]. ( ×3)
4. Remove the Feed guide [A].
5. Remove the Original turn guide plate [A]. (hook ×2)
244
6. Remove the Original set sensor bracket [A]. (hook ×2)
7. Remove the Original set sensor (SN8) [A]. ( ×1)
Original Width Sensors (SN1) (SN2) (SN3) (SN4) (SN5) and Skew Correction Sensor
(SN10)
1. Remove the Original turn guide plate. (Original Set Sensor (SN8))
245
2. Remove the Original width sensors (SN1) (SN2) (SN3) (SN4) (SN5) [A] ( ×1 each) and skew
correction sensor (SN10) [B] with bracket. ( ×1, ×1)
Original Exit Sensor (SN7)
1. Remove the Original feed-in guide plate. (Original Set Sensor (SN8))
• The original exit sensor [A] is located in the ARDF mainframe.
246
2. Remove the Original exit sensor bracket [A]. ( ×1)
3. Remove the Original exit sensor (SN7) [A]. ( ×1)
Registration Sensor (SN6)
1. Remove the Original feed-in guide plate. (Original Set Sensor (SN8))
2. Remove the Registration sensor (SN6) [A]. ( ×1)
ADF Position Sensor (SN9)
1. Remove the DF Main Board (BD1). (DF Main Board (BD1))
247
2. Remove the ADF position sensor with bracket [A]. ( ×1)
3. Remove the ADF position sensor (SN9) [A]. ( ×1)
Cover Switch (SWC1)

2. Remove the cover switch (SWC1) [A]. ( ×2, ×2)
Feed Motor (MT1)
248
2. Remove the Feed motor harness [A]. ( ×1)
3. Remove the Harness guide [A]. ( ×5)
4. Remove the Feed motor with bracket [A]. ( ×2, spring [B]×1, ×1)
249
5. Remove the Feed motor (MT1) [A]. ( ×2)
Transport Motor (MT2)
1. Remove the Rear cover. (Rear Cover)

2. Remove the Transport motor bracket [A]. (spring ×1, ×2, ×1)
3. Remove the Transport motor (MT2) [A]. ( ×2)
Stamp Solenoid (SL3)
250
2. Remove the Stamp solenoid harness [A]. ( ×1, ×1)
3. Open the DF and remove the platen sheet [A].
4. Remove the Stamp solenoid cover [A]. ( ×1)
251
5. Remove the Stamp solenoid (SL3) [A]. ( ×1)
6. Pull out the harness [A].
Pick-up Solenoid (SL2)

2. Remove the Harness guide. (Feed Motor (MT1))
3. Remove the Pick-up solenoid (SL2) [B]. ( ×2, ×1)
252
Inverter Solenoid (SL1)

2. Remove the Harness guide. (Feed Motor (MT1))
3. Remove the Inverter solenoid (SL1) [A]. ( ×2, ×1, ×1, gear ×1, gear cover ×1, ×1)
Paper Feed Clutch (CLT1)

3. Remove the Paper feed clutch (CLT1) [A]. ( ×2, bushing ×1, shaft ×1, ×1, ×1)
Feed Belt
253
2. Remove the Feed belt cover [A]. (spring×1)
• When reattaching the feed belt cover, make sure that the projection [B] of the feed belt
cover is on the guide plate rear [C].
3. Remove the Belt tension unit [D].
4. Remove the Feed belt [E].
Pick-Up Roller
254
2. Remove the Pick-up roller [A]. ( ×1)
Separation Roller
1. Remove the original Feed Unit. (Original Feed Unit)

2. Remove the separation roller cover [A].
255
3. Remove the separation roller [A]. ( ×1).
DF Main Board (BD1)

2. Remove the DF Main board (BD1) [A]. ( ×2, ×7)
256
Operation Panel
4-Line LCD (D0B2,D0B3)
OPU Board (PCB9)
If the front door will get in the way while performing this work, remove it. (Front Door)Front Door
3. Open the ADF unit or platen cover.
4. Remove the operation panel [A].
5. Remove the OPU board (PCB9) [A].
257
Smart Operation Panel (D0B4)
• M2 screws are used for assembling the smart operation panel.

• The machine’s operation panel is a flat touchscreen. When you remove the panel and set it
aside temporarily, be sure to lay it down with the screen face up so as not to damage the
screen.
• When you dismantle the removed operation panel unit, be sure to do it on the service mat [A]
spread on the exposure glass.
• If you place the operation panel unit directly on the exposure glass or other flat surface and
apply strong pressure to the entire panel, air may leak from the gap in the panel, causing such
problems as a coordinate deviation and detection error.
Operation Panel Unit
1. Remove the scanner front cover[A]. (Scanner Front Cover)

2. Remove the operation panel unit [A] from the main machine.
Spread a cloth or service mat [A] on the exposure glass to protect the display.
Place the operation panel on the exposure glass so that the display faces down.
258
259
5. Remove cable [A],[B].
260
6. Remove the cover [A],[B] and left hinge [C].
By factory default, the following switches of the DIP switch [A] on the micro computer board are set to
ON: No.1, No.3.
When installing the operation panel unit, make sure that the DIP switch setting is correct for the MFP on
which you are installing the panel.
The harnesses should be run in order:

USB harness [B] from the back of wiring guide [A],from the NFC card reader (option) harness [C] and
then harness [D] from the micro computer board.
harness [D] from the micro computer board from the back of wiring guide [E],from the NFC card reader
(option) harness [C] and then USB harness [B].
261
Position cable tie band [F] for the USB harness as shown in the figure.
When securing harness [A] from the operation panel, make sure that cable tie bands [C] and [D] reach
both sides of the clamp [B].
After replacing the operation panel unit, make sure that the latest version of the firmware is installed on
the Smart Operation Panel. Update it if necessary (Updating the Smart Operation Panel).
Internal Parts
For details about disassembling the Smart Operation Panel, see Replacement and Adjustment.
262
Scanner (D0B2,D0B3)
• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedures.
• Do not touch the guide rod [A], because it has grease on it.
Top Rear Cover
1. Remove the platen cover or ADF unit. (ADF Unit)

2. Remove the top rear cover [A].
263
Scanner
1. Remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel)

2. Remove the right upper cover. (Right Upper Cover)
4. Remove the top rear cover. (Top Rear Cover)
1. Remove the four brackets [A].
2. Remove the two ground parts [B].
264
265
7. Remove the scanner [A].
Exposure Glass Unit
1. Remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel)

4. Remove the top rear cover. (Top Rear Cover)
5. Remove the exposure glass unit [A].
• Exposure glass [B], DF exposure glass [C] and cover [D] are all in one unit.
• Do not disassemble this unit into the individual parts.
266
CIS Unit
• When replacing the CIS unit (PCB4) or scanner drive belt, be careful not to touch the grease
that applied to the guide rod under the timing belt.
1. Remove the exposure glass unit. (Exposure Glass Unit)
2. Remove the CIS unit [A].
Scanner Drive Belt

267
1. Move the CIS unit (PCB4) [A] to expose the left bracket [B].
DO NOT pull it directly, instead, use the drive belt to move.

2. Push the left bracket [B] and remove the scanner drive belt [C].
Scanner HP Sensor (S1)
268
2. Remove the scanner HP sensor (S1) [A].
Original Size Sensors (S3)

2. Remove the original size sensors (S3) [A].
Scanner Motor (M1)
1. Remove the scanner drive belt. (Scanner Drive Belt)
269
2. Remove the scanner motor (M1) [A].
Adjusting the Scanner Parameters
• Adjust the following SP modes after replacing the scanner unit or a part of the scanner unit:
• SP4-008-001 (Sub Scan Mag. Adj): (Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3))
• SP4-010-001 (L-Edge Regist Adj): (Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3))
• SP4-011-001 (S-to-S Regist Adj): (Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3))
• SP4-688-001 (ADF Adj Density): Use this to adjust the density level if the image density of outputs
made in the DF and platen mode is different.
270
Scanner (D0B4)
Scanner Exterior
Scanner Front Cover
Removal procedure

2. Remove the screw [A],[B].
3. Remove the screw [A],[B].
271

1. Remove hook [A] on the right side of the scanner front cover.
2. Remove hook [A] on the left side of the scanner front cover.
Insert a flathead screwdriver into the gap in the scanner front cover and remove it.
272
3. Adjust the smart operation panel [A] so that it is vertical.
273
4. Remove the scanner front cover [A].
Attachment procedure
1. Remove the smart operation panel. (Smart Operation Panel (D0B4))

2. Attach the screw [A],[B].
3. Attach the smart oparation panel [A].
274
4. Attach the scanner front cover [A].
Using your finger, press hooks [A] and [B] that attach the smart operation panel and check that
they are attaching at the correct positions.
275
Scanner Rear Cover
1. Remove the ADF unit. (ADF Unit)

2. Remove the scanner rear cover [A].
Scanner Right Cover
276
2. Remove the scanner right cover [A].
Scanner Left Cover

2. Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover)
3. Remove the scanner left cover [A].
Scanner Upper Cover
1. Remove the scanner left cover. (Scanner Left Cover)

2. Remove the scanner rear cover. (Scanner Right Cover)
277
3. Remove the scanner upper cover [A].
Exposure Glass
1. Open the ADF.

2. Remove the scale cover [A].
278
3. Remove the rear scale [A].
4. Remove the sheet-through exposure glass [A].
5. Remove the left scale and exposure glass [A].
• The exposure glass and the left scale are attached with double-sided tape.
279
• When installing, please follow the points below:

• Install the sheet-through exposure glass with the mark [A] at the rear left corner.
• Set so that the locating hole of the left scale fits over the locating boss of the front/rear
frame.
Scanner Carriage
1. Remove the exposure glass. (Exposure Glass)

2. Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover)
280
3. Remove the scanner carriage front cover [A].
4. Move the scanner carriage [A] to the indicated position as shown.
281
5. Loosen the screw, remove the spring [A], and then remove the belt [B].
6. Turn the scanner carriage over and place it on the frame [A].
• When holding the scanner carriage, be careful not to touch the circuit board [A], lens [B],
and mirror [C].
282
7. Remove the Belt [A].
8. Lower the lock lever [A] and disconnect the FFC [B].
9. Remove the ferrite core [A] and the sheet [B] (Hook x4).
283
10. Remove the scanner carriage.
• When attaching the scanner carriage, hold the carriage with the screw [A] loosened and move
the carriage back and forth to the sides twice to have the belt stretch evenly. Then, fasten the
screw [A].
• After replacing the scanner carriage, enter the values supplied with the carriage in the
following SP
- SP4-871-002 (Distortion Correction Distortion Initialization)
- SP4-880-001 (Dot shift amount between R Line and G Line).
- SP4-880-002 (Dot shift amount between G Line and B Line).
To apply the specified settings, turn the power off and then back on.
The specified values are cleared when the NVRAM is initialized, so be sure to keep the
supplied sheet showing the values in the machine.
Cleaning the scanner carriage mirror
284
2. Remove the scanner carriage front cover [A].
3. Move the scanner carriage [A] to the indicated position as shown.
4. Remove the resin cover [A] (Hook x3).
285
5. Open the metal cover [A].
6. Wipe clean the mirror with a dry cloth.
• When reattaching the metal cover [A], fasten the screws in the order of "1", "2", and "3".
286
• When attaching the resin cover, insert its tip under the metal frame.
Scanner Motor (M1)
1. Remove the scanner upper cover. (Scanner Upper Cover)

3. Remove the grounding plate [A].
287
4. Remove the spring [A].
5. Remove the scanner motor (M1) with bracket [A].
APS Sensors (S22)
288
2. Remove the APS sensor harness cover [A].
3. Remove the APS sensors (S22) [A] (Hook x2).
Scanner Home Position Sensor (S1)

2. Remove the slide the scanner carriage [A] in the direction of the arrow.
289
3. Remove the scanner home position sensor (S1) [A] (Hook x 3).
ADF/Platen Cover Sensor (S21)
1. Remove the scanner upper cover. (Scanner Upper Cover)

2. Remove the ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) [A].
Scanner FFC

2. Remove the FFC from the scanner carriage. (Scanner Carriage)
290
3. Remove the APS sensor harness cover [A].
4. Remove the double-sided tape.
When reattaching the same part, apply a double-sided tape again.

6. While pressing the lock release lever, pull out the FFC [A].
When changing the FFC
When changing the FFC, stick the sheet [A] to the new FFC.
291
When attaching the sheet, follow the steps below.

1. Feed the FFC through the ferrite core [A].
2. Connect the FFC to the scanner carriage’s connector, and then lift the lever [A] to lock it.
3. Attach the sheet [A] to the FFC from above, and then insert the tabs at both ends of the sheet into
292
the gaps in the FFC holder to secure it in position.
When applying the sheet, be sure not to stretch the FFC.

Applying the sheet while stretching the FFC causes the circuit board to be deformed.
293
Laser Unit
• The laser beam can seriously damage eyes. Be absolutely sure that the main power
switch is off and that the machine is unplugged before accessing the laser unit.
Warning Decal Location
Toner Shield Glass
The toner shield glass cannot be replaced.

Cleaning only. Refer to the "Daily Machine Maintenance".
Laser Unit

3. Remove the paper exit tray. (Paper Exit Tray)
294
4. Remove the fan duct [A].
5. Remove the laser unit [A].
295
PCDU Section
Before Replacing a PCU or Development Unit
• To prevent toner spill out during the PCDU removal process, cover the toner openings on old
PCDU.
• To prevent damage from excessive light, wrap the OPC drum with protective paper and store
the OPC drum in a cool dark place.
• Do not touch the OPC drum, cleaning blade, or any seals or tapes.
• Do not use any alcohols or solvents to clean the OPC drum; Be sure to wipe with a dry cloth.
If excessive dirt exists, first wipe with a damp cloth, and next wipe off completely with a dry
cloth.
• Do not rotate the OPC drum clockwise after the PCDU has been installed.
PCDU
296
2. Open the front door, and then pull the toner bottle holder lever [A] upward.
3. Release the lever lock [A], and then pull the toner bottle holder [B].
297
4. Remove the toner bottle [A], and then remove the toner bottle holder [B].
5. Hold the lock [A], and then remove the PCDU [B].
Do not touch the OPC drum surface.

6. Execute SP2-801-001 (Deve Initializati Init TD Sen Execu) to reinitialize the TD sensor (S7).
Perform this work (SP2-801-001 execution) only when performing initialization, such as when
removing the PDCU to reset the counter for PCDU internal component maintenance. This work is
not required when the PCDU is replaced by the user or the PCDU is replaced with a new PCDU by
a serviceman.
298
Pick-off Pawls
• Do not turn the PCU upside down. It will cause toner and developer to spill out.
1. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)
2. Remove the pawl [A].
• Pull down the pawl and release the bottom end.
3. After reinstalling the pickoff pawls, adjust the image quality. (After Replacement or Adjustment)
OPC Drum

1. Remove the front side piece [A].
299
2. Remove the coupling [B] and rear side piece [C].
3. Separate the PCU [A] from the development unit [B].

1. Pry out the drum retaining clip [A].
300
2. Remove the OPC drum [B].
Install the clip in the same orientation (with the clip facing away from the drum shaft) at
reassembly.
5. When reassembling, adjust the image quality (After Replacement or Adjustment).

6. Execute SP2-801-001.
Perform this work (SP2-801-001 execution) only when performing initialization, such as when
removing the PDCU to reset the counter for PCDU internal component maintenance. This work is
not required when the PCDU is replaced by the user or the PCDU is replaced with a new PCDU by
a service man.
Charge Roller and Cleaning Brush
1. Remove the OPC drum. (OPC Drum)

1. Remove the holding pin [A].
2. Remove the stepped screw [B].
3. Remove the charge roller [C] and cleaning brush [D]. (with the holders and springs)
Turn the gear [E] (as necessary) so that the rear holder [F] comes out.
301
Cleaning Blade
1. Remove the charge roller. (Charge Roller and Cleaning Brush)

2. Remove the cleaning blade [A]. ( x 2)
Reassembling
• To prevent damage to the new cleaning blade and OPC drum, remove some toner from
the old OPC drum with your finger, and apply it evenly along the edge [B] of the new
blade.
302
Developer

2. To let the toner fall to the development unit, gently tap about eight different spots on the top of the
PCDU with a screwdriver. Each spot must be approximately at an equal distance from the next
spot.
3. Reinstall the PCDU in the main machine.
4. Turn the main power switch on.
5. Open and close the front door and wait for the machine to rotate the development roller for about
10 seconds.
6. Repeat the previous step two more times.
8. Separate the development unit from the OPC drum section. (OPC Drum)
9. Place sheets of paper on a flat surface, and then put the development unit on it.
10. Remove the top part [A] of the development unit.
• If any of the gears [A] fall off, attach them as shown below.
303
11. Remove the old developer.

1. Set the coupling [A] back on the shaft.
304
2. Turn the upper part [A] over.
3. Turn the coupling [A] in the direction of the arrow to remove the old developer from the upper
part [B].
305
4. Remove the coupling [A].
5. Turn the bottom part [A] over and remove the old developer.
12. Load the new developer.

1. Uniformly distribute a pack of developer to all openings [A].
Do not spill the developer on the gears [B]. If developer spills on the gears, remove it using a
magnet or magnetized screwdriver.
Be sure to pour in all the developer from the pack.
306
13. Reassemble the PCDU.

14. Install the PCDU in the machine.
16. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine.
17. Execute SP2-801-001 (Deve Initializati Init TD Sen Execu) to reinitialize the TD sensor (S7).
• Make sure no toner or developer stays on the gear. Clean the gears as necessary with a
blower brush, etc.
Mixing Auger Bearings
1. Remove the top part of the development unit. (Developer)
307
2. Remove the four gears [A].
3. Remove the four mixing auger bearings [A] (two on each side).
4. Reassemble the PCDU.

5. Install the PCDU in the machine.
7. Execute SP7-622-028 (PM Counter Reset Bearing : Dev Screw).
308
Quenching Lamp (L1)
1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)

4. Remove the duct [A].
5. Remove the quenching lamp (L1) [A].
309
After Replacement or Adjustment
• Do the following procedure after replacing or adjusting any of the PCDU components. This
procedure is not necessary when the entire PCDU is replaced with a new one.
1. Take 5 sample copies.
2. If black dots (dropped toner) show on any of the copies, continue as follows. If all copies are clean,
the following steps do not need to be performed.
3. Remove the PCDU from the main machine.
4. Tap on top of the PCDU with a screwdriver at eight evenly spaced locations (two or three taps at
each spot), to knock the recycled toner down into the development section.
5. Put the PCDU back into the main machine.
6. Turn the main power on. Then open and close the door and wait for the machine to rotate the
development roller for 10 seconds. Then open and close the door two more times, so that total
rotation time is 30 seconds.
7. Make some sky-shot copies (or solid black prints).
• If using A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper, make 4 copies/prints.
• If using A3 or 11" x 17" paper, make 2 copies/prints.
• Step 7 is necessary only after replacing or adjusting any components. There is no need
to make sky-shot (or solid black) copies after replacing the developer.
310
Toner Supply Motor (M5)
• To prevent ignition, the output check of the toner supply motor stops 3 seconds after it has
been turned on.

5. Remove the toner supply motor (M5) [A].
311
Fusing
Fusing Unit
• The fusing unit becomes very hot during use. After turning off the machine, wait at least
30 minutes before handling it.
1. Turn off the main power switch, and unplug the machine.
D0B2,D0B3
D0B4

4. Open the right door.
5. Remove the cable cover. [A]
312
6. Remove the fusing unit [A].
When replacing the fusing unit, install the clamp so that it is located between the binds of the
harness [A].
313
Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

1. Pull up the pressure arms [A].
2. Separate the pressure roller section [B] from the hot roller section.
314
3. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate [A].
Fusing Exit Guide Plate

2. Remove the fusing exit guide plate [A].
Thermistor (H1) (H2)

1. Remove the thermistor harness [A].
2. Remove the thermistors (H1) (H2) [B].
315
Fusing Lamp
1. Remove the pressure roller section. (Fusing Entrance Guide Plate)

2. Remove the rear holding plate [A] and front holding plate [B].
316
3. Remove the hot roller unit [A].
4. Pull out the fusing lamp [A] from hot roller unit.
Hot Roller Stripper Pawls
1. Remove the hot roller unit. (Fusing Lamp)
317
2. Remove the hot roller stripper pawls [A].
Hot Roller and Hot Roller Bearings

2. Remove the hot roller [A] and hot roller bearings [B].

5. Execute SP7-622-119 (PM Counter Reset Fusing Roll Bear).
Thermostat (S4)
318
2. Remove the thermostat (S4) [A].
Pressure Roller and Bushings
1. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate. (Fusing Entrance Guide Plate)
1. Remove the two pressure arms [A].
2. Remove the two bushings [B].
319
3. Remove the pressure roller [C].
NIP Band Width Adjustment
Do this adjustment when the fusing unit is at its operating temperature. The size of the OHP sheet must
be A4/LT LEF. Any other sizes may cause a paper jam.
320
• [A] Pressure roller

• [B] Hot roller
• [C] Spring hook
• [D] Spring
1. Place an OHP sheet on the bypass feed table.
2. Enter SP mode, and run SP 1-152-001 (Fusing Nip Check).
3. Press ‘1’ (Yes), or “Execute”.
4. Press twice. The machine feeds the OHP sheet into the bypass feed, stops it at the registration
roller for 300 seconds, then 20 seconds in the fusing unit.
5. Check that the OHP sheet is ejected to the copy tray.
6. Press the key.
7. Quit the SP mode.
8. Check that the nip band (the opaque stripe) across the ejected OHP sheet is symmetrical, with
both ends slightly thicker than the center.
• There is no standard value for the nip band on this machine. Make the adjustment based
on the band's appearance.
9. If the band is not as described above, change the position of the spring hooks [C] (one on each
side), and then check the band again.
• The higher hook position produces greater tension.
Contact/Release Solenoid (SOL1)
1. Remove the gear cover. (Paper Exit Clutch (CL1) , Reverse Clutch (CL7))
321
2. Remove the contact/release solenoid (SOL1) [A].
322
Paper Exit Section
Paper Exit Sensor (S5)

2. Remove the paper exit guide [A].
323
3. Remove the paper exit sensor (S5) [A].
324
Paper Feed Section
Friction Roller
1. Remove the paper tray 1 (Paper Tray 1)

2. Remove the friction roller [A].
Paper Feed Roller / Pickup roller
1. Remove the paper tray 1 (Paper Tray 1)

2. Remove the paper feed roller [A].
325
3. Remove the pickup roller [B].
Tray Lift Unit
1. Remove the paper tray 1. (Paper Tray 1)

2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3))
3. Remove the high-voltage power supply board (PCB3) [A].
326
4. Remove the bracket [B].
327
5. Remove the tray lift unit [A].
Tray Lift Motor (M4)
1. Remove the tray lift unit. (Tray Lift Unit)

328
4. Remove the tray lift motor (M4) [A].
Paper Size Switch (SW4)
1. Remove the paper tray 1. (Paper Tray 1)

2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3),Rear Cover (D0B4))
329
3. Remove the mylar [A].
330
4. Remove the paper size switch (SW4) [A].
Registration Roller
Driven Side

3. Remove the rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)
4. Remove the registration clutch (CL3). (Registration Clutch (CL3))
5. Remove the feed roller cover [A].
331
6. Remove the registration roller [B].
Drive Side
1. Remove the ID sensor cover. (Transfer Roller)
332
2. Remove the cap, gear, and bushing and the registration roller [A].
Registration Sensor (S16)
333
3. Remove the registration sensor (S16) [A].
Paper End Sensor (S12), Upper Limit Sensor (S13)
1. Remove the bypass tray lower section. (Bypass Tray Friction Pad)
334

1. Remove the upper limit sensor (S13) [A].
2. Remove the paper end sensor (S12) [B].
Bypass Tray
335
3. Remove the bypass tray [A].
Bypass Paper Feed Roller
1. Remove the bypass tray. (Bypass Tray)

2. Remove the bypass paper feed clutch. (Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL5))
336
3. Remove the bypass tray upper section [A].
337
4. Remove the bypass paper feed roller unit [A].
5. Remove the bypass paper feed roller [A].
Bypass Tray Friction Pad
1. Remove the bypass paper feed roller unit. (Bypass Paper Feed Roller)
338
2. Remove the bypass tray lower section [A].
3. Remove the bypass tray friction pad [A].
Bypass Paper End Sensor (S9)
1. Remove the bypass paper lower section. (Bypass Tray Friction Pad)
339
2. Remove the bypass paper end sensor (S9) [A].
Bypass Width Sensor (S10), Bypass Length Sensor (S11)
1. Remove the bypass tray. (Bypass Tray)

3. Remove the bypass Length Sensor (S11) [A].
340
4. Remove the bypass Width Sensor (S10) [B].
341
Duplex Unit
Transfer Roller
1. Remove the transfer roller [A].
Duplex Guide Plate


342
2. Open the transfer roller unit [B].
4. Remove the duplex guide plate [A].
Transfer Guide Unit
343

2. Slide the right door hinge shaft [B].
3. Remove the transfer guide unit [C].
ID Sensor (S6)
Before Replacing the ID Sensor (S6)
You must take note of the original value of SP2-933-001 to prepare for the possibility that the process
344
control after replacement will not be done properly.

A QR-code is pasted on the sensor head of an ID sensor, which includes the characteristic value for the
sensor. This characteristic value must be input into SP2-933-001 before replacing the ID sensor.
1. Take a note of the characteristic value on the new ID sensor (surrounded by a red dashed line in
the following photo).
2. Turn the main power ON and enter SP mode.

3. Input the characteristic value into SP2-933-001.
Replacement Procedure
1. Remove the right rear cover.(Right Rear Cover)


2. Remove the ID sensor cover [B].
3. Remove the sensor connector. [C]
345
4. Open the transfer guide unit [D].
4. Remove the ID sensor harness cover [A].
346
5. Remove the duplex guide plate [A].
6. Remove the ID sensor harness [A].
7. Close the transfer guide unit.
347
8. Remove the ID sensor (S6) [A].
9. Execute SP2-935-001 (ID.Sens Initializ).
Relay Roller (driven)
348
2. Remove the relay roller (driven) [A].
349
Electrical Components
MPU (PCB7) (D0B2,D0B3)
• Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your body before handling
SD cards, circuit boards, EEPROM or memory boards.
1. Remove the rear cover (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3))
2. Remove the EEPROM [A] from the old MPU.
Keep the EEPROM away from objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage EEPROM data.
Install the EEPROM from the old MPU on the new MPU before replacing. The EEPROM contains
the SP settings.
3. Remove all connectors from the old MPU.

4. Remove the MPU [A].
5. Install the new MPU.
350
MPU (PCB7) (D0B4)
• Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your body before handling
SD cards, circuit boards, EEPROM or memory boards.
2. Remove the braket [A].
3. Remove all connectors from the old MPU.

4. Remove the old MPU [A].
351
5. Remove the EEPROM [A], NVRAM [B] from the old MPU, and then install them on the new MPU.
Keep the NVRAM and EEPROM away from objects that can cause static electricity.
Static electricity can damage NVRAM and EEPROM data.
Install the NVRAM and EEPROM so the indentation on the NVRAM and EEPROM faces the
indentation marks on the MPU.
If they are not installed correctly, the MPU may be damaged.
352
Install the NVRAM and EEPROM from the old MPU on the new MPU before replacing.
The NVRAM and EEPROM contain the SP settings.
If a message tells that you need an SD card to restore settings after the NVRAM replacement,
create an “SD card for restoration".
6. Install the new MPU.
If a message tells that you need an SD card to restore settings after the NVRAM replacement,
create an “SD card for restoration". (Restoring the Encryption Key)
If the [Check Status] indicator is lit in red after the power is turned on, press the [Check Status]
button and check the status of the equipment.
Note that if the [Check Status] button does not respond, applications (copy, scan, printer, fax etc.)
can be started from the control panel.
353
If an SC such as SC890-01 etc. is displayed, refer to trouble shooting.
EEPROM (D0B2,D0B3)
• The following procedure explains how to replace a defective EEPROM. For how to transfer an
existing (not defective) EEPROM to a new MPU (PCB7), refer to the "MPU (PCB7)
(D0B2,D0B3)" replacement procedures.
When replacing an old EEPROM with a new EEPROM, EEPROM setting is required. Follow the
EEPROM setting procedure described below.
EEPROM on the MPU
1. Plug in, and turn on the main power switch.

2. Print the SMC reports (SMC Page Printing).
When the EEPROM is cleared, the data shown in the table below is reset to the factory settings
(Factory Default). Be sure to output the SMC reports before replacing the EEPROM.
3. Find any values that differ from the values in the default SMC reports (Factory Default) stored
inside the front door.
4. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord.
5. Replace the EEPROM on the MPU (PCB7) and reassemble the machine.
6. Plug in, and then turn on the main power switch.
7. Change the values that differ as found in step 3 back to the values in the SMC reports output in
step 3.
8. Print the SMC reports (SMC Page Printing).
9. Confirm that the changed values have been set.
List of Items That Are Reset to Factory Settings (Factory Default) When EEPROM Is Cleared:
SP No. SP Name Action
SP1-801- Motor Speed Main Motor: 122 Return to the value of SMC report
001 Adjust output in step 2
SP1-002- Main Registration Tray Bank1 Return to the value of SMC report
004 output in step 2
SP1-002- Main Registration Tray Bank2 Return to the value of SMC report
SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank1: Plain Return to the value of SMC report
SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank1: Return to the value of SMC report
006 MiddleThick output in step 2
SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank1: Thick Return to the value of SMC report
354

SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank2: Plain Return to the value of SMC report
SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank2: Return to the value of SMC report
009 MiddleThick output in step 2
SP1-003- Paper Buckle Bank2: Thick Return to the value of SMC report
SP2-224- Toner Near End Counter Return to the value of SMC report
SP4-008- Sub Scan Mag. - Return to the value of SMC report
001 Adj output in step 2
SP4-010- L-Edge Regist Adj - Return to the value of SMC report
SP4-011- S-to-S Regist Adj - Return to the value of SMC report
SP4-400- Erase Margin ADF: Trail Edge L Return to the value of SMC report
SP4-400- Erase Margin ADF: Trail Edge R Return to the value of SMC report
SP4-400- Erase Margin ADF: Left Return to the value of SMC report
SP4-400- Erase Margin ADF: Right Return to the value of SMC report
SP4-609- Gray Balance Set: Book Scan Return to the value of SMC report
001 R output in step 2
SP4-609- Gray Balance Set: DF Scan Return to the value of SMC report
002 R output in step 2
001 G output in step 2
002 G output in step 2
001 B output in step 2
002 B output in step 2
SP4-673- Black Level Adj: FactSet: Offset Return to the value of SMC report
001 FC DAC output in step 2
SP4-673- Black Level Adj: FactSet: RLC DAC Return to the value of SMC report
355

002 FC output in step 2
001 BW DAC output in step 2
002 BW output in step 2
003 BW DAC output in step 2
004 BW output in step 2
SP4-803- Home Position Adj - Return to the value of SMC report
SP5-126- Set F-size Doc - Return to the value of SMC report
SP5-131- Paper Size Type - Return to the value of SMC report
SP5-135- LG_Oficio Change - Return to the value of SMC report
SP5-181- Clutch Adjust Bank1 Return to the value of SMC report
SP5-181- Clutch Adjust Bank2 Return to the value of SMC report
SP5-182- Next feed timing Bank1 Return to the value of SMC report
SP5-182- Next feed timing Bank2 Return to the value of SMC report
SP5-183- Refeed timing Bank1 Return to the value of SMC report
SP5-183- Refeed timing Bank2 Return to the value of SMC report
SP6-006- ADF Adjustment Side Edge: Front Return to the value of SMC report
SP6-006- ADF Adjustment Side Edge: Rear Return to the value of SMC report
SP6-006- ADF Adjustment LeadingEdge: Return to the value of SMC report
003 Front output in step 2
SP6-006- ADF Adjustment Leading Edge: Return to the value of SMC report
004 Rear output in step 2
356

SP6-016- Size Detect Set NA-1 Return to the value of SMC report
SP6-016- Size Detect Set NA-2 Return to the value of SMC report
SP6-016- Size Detect Set EU-1 Return to the value of SMC report
SP6-016- Size Detect Set EU-2 Return to the value of SMC report
SP6-017- ADF Adjust Mag - Return to the value of SMC report
SP6-018- ADF Adjustment Scanner HP adj Return to the value of SMC report
SP6-020- ADF Job Counter - Return to the value of SMC report
SP6-030- ADF Job Cnt - Return to the value of SMC report
001 Clear output in step 2
NVRAM,EEPROM (D0B4)
EEPROM, NVRAM on the MPU
There are EEPROM [A] and NVRAM [B] on the MPU.
357
EEPROM Replacement
1. Make sure you have the SMC Report (factory settings).

2. Print out the SMC Report (all data) with SP5-990-001.
3. Turn the main power OFF.
4. Install an SD card into SD Card Slot (lower slot).
5. Turn the main power ON.
6. Copy the EEPROM data to an SD card with SP5-824-001.
7. Turn the main power OFF. Disconnect the power cord.
8. Replace the EEPROM on the MPU and reassemble the machine. (MPU (PCB7) (D0B4))
9. Connect the power cord. Then turn the main power ON.
When you do this, SC995 will be displayed. However, DO NOT turn off the main power. Continue
358
with this procedure.

10. Enter the MPU serial number and area code.
• For information on how to configure this SP, contact the supervisor in your branch office.
• Refer to the following area code/destination list.
3: Europe
4: Taiwan
5: Asia
6: China
11. Power cycle the machine.
If the SCB serial number is not entered correctly, SC995-01 (serial number entry error) will occur.
12. Copy the data from the SD card to the new EEPROM with SP5-825-001.
14. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot (lower slot).
16. Check the factory settings sheet from step 1 and the SMC data printout from step 2, and then set
the user tool and SP settings so they are the same as before.
List of Items That Are Reset to Factory Settings (Factory Default) When EEPROM Is Cleared:
SP1- Leading Edge Tray: Plain Return to the value
001-002 Registration of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Tray: Mid Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Tray: Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Bypass: Plain Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Bypass: Mid Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Bypass: Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Duplex: Plain Return to the value
359

step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Duplex: Mid Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Side-to-Side Bypass Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Side-to-Side Tray Main1 Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Side-to-Side Tray Bank1 Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Side-to-Side Tray Bank2 Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Side-to-Side Duplex Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Tray1: Plain Return to the value
003-002 of SMC report output in
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Tray1: Mid Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Tray1: Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank1: Plain Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank1:Mid Thick Return to the value
360

step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank1: Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank2: Plain Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank2:Mid Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bank2: Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bypass: Plain Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bypass: Mid Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Bypass: Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Duplex: Plain Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Duplex: Mid Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Paper Buckle Duplex: Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP1- ByPass Size Adj. 0:LTSEF 1:LG Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Motor Speed Adjust mainmotor:122 Return to the value
step 2
361

SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. PaperExitCL Stop Pos. Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. PaperExitCL Start Pos. Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Dup:PaperExitCL Stop Pos. Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Dup:ReverseCL Start Time Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Duplex Feed Pos. Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Duplex Wait Pos. Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Paper Feed CL:OFF Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Relay CL:OFF Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Paper Feed Start Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Relay CL:ON Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Registration CL:OFF Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Bypass Paper Feed CL:OFF Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Bypass FD Space Return to the value
362

step 2
SP1- FeedRetryCount Bypass Tray Return to the value
step 2
SP1- FeedRetryCount Tray1 Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Bypass Envelope Bypass Envelope Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Fan Drive Time Fan Extra Time Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Fan Drive Time Fan Cooling Time Set Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Fan Drive Time Fan Start Time Set Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Print Fan Ctrl Fan Ctrl SW Temp. Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Print Fan Ctrl Fan Ctrl SW Thres Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Silent Fan Ctrl Fan Ctrl SW Temp. Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Extra Fan Ctrl Extra Drive State Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Extra Fan Ctrl Extra Start Temp. Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Extra Fan Ctrl Extra Threshold Return to the value
363

step 2
SP1- Extra Fan Ctrl Extra ON/OFF Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Fan Ctrl Timing Judgement Time Interval Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Standby Fan Ctrl Cooling Ctrl SW Temp. Return to the value
step 2
SP1- Standby Fan Ctrl Cooling Ctrl SW Thres Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Main Scan Mag. - Return to the value
102-001 Adjustment of SMC report output in
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Lead Edge Width Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Trail. Edge Width Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Left Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Right Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. L Size Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. M Size Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. S Size Return to the value
step 2
364

SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Left Edge Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Right Edge Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Left Edge:Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Erase Margin Duplex Right Edge:Thick Return to the value
step 2
SP2- Toner Near End Counter Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Sub Scan - Return to the value
008-001 Magnification Adj of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Sub Scan - Return to the value
010-001 Registration Adj of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Main Scan Reg - Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask Book:Sub LEdge Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask Book:Sub TEdge Return to the value
365

step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask Book:Main:LEdge Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask Book:Main:TEdge Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask ADF: Leading Edge Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask ADF: Right Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Set Scale Mask ADF: left Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Dust Check Dust Detect:Lvl Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Min Size for APS - Return to the value
step 2
SP4- 8K/16K Detection - Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Scan Size Detection Detection ON/OFF Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : ON/OFF/Shadingless: Select Return to the value
350-001 BW of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : Interval 1 Return to the value
366

step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : Interval 1 Repetitions Return to the value
step 2
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : ON/OFF/Shadingless: Select Return to the value
351-001 FC of SMC report output in
step 2
step 2
SP4- Intermittent Shading : Interval 1 Repetitions Return to the value
step 2
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask Book:Sub:LEdge(Left) Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask Book:Sub:TEdge(Right) Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask Book:Main:LEdge(Rear) Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask Book:Main:Tedge(Front) Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask ADF: Leading Edge Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Org Edge Mask ADF: Right Return to the value
step 2
367

SP4- Org Edge Mask ADF: leftt Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Digital AE Low Limit Value Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Digital AE Background level Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:GrayScale Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:GrayScale Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Col Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
570-007 Txt/Photo of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Col Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
368

570-008 Txt/Photo of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Col Gloss Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
571-007 Photo of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Scan Apli:Col Gloss Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
571-008 Photo of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Fax Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: R Book Scan Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: R DF Scan Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: G Book Scan Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: G DF Scan Return to the value
369

step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: B Book Scan Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Gray Balance Set: B DF Scan Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Analog Gain Adjust Factory Setting: R Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Analog Gain Adjust Factory Setting: G Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Analog Gain Adjust Factory Setting: B Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Digital Gain Adjust Factory Setting: R Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Digital Gain Adjust Factory Setting: G Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Digital Gain Adjust Factory Setting: B Return to the value
step 2
SP4- DF Density - Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Factory Setting Input On/Off Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Home Position Adj - Return to the value
803-001 Value of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- PWM Factory Setting Return to the value
step 2
370

SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: RE Return to the value
852-001 Peak Read of SMC report output in
step 2
SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: RO Return to the value
step 2
SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: GE Return to the value
step 2
SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: GO Return to the value
step 2
SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: BE Return to the value
step 2
SP4- LED White Level Factory Setting: BO Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Distortion Correction FB mode R: Distortion Amount at Return to the value
872-001 Position:0 of SMC report output in
- - step 2
SP4- FB mode R: Distortion Amount at
872-036 Position:35
SP4- Distortion Correction FB mode G: Distortion Amount Return to the value
873-001 at Position:0 of SMC report output in
- - step 2
SP4- FB mode G: Distortion Amount
873-036 at Position:35
SP4- Distortion Correction FB mode B: Distortion Amount at Return to the value
874-001 Position:0 of SMC report output in
- - step 2
SP4- FB mode B: Distortion Amount at
874-036 Position:35
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Offset:Highlight Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Offset:Middle Return to the value
371

step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Offset:Shadow Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Offset:IDmax Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Option:Highlight Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Option:Middle Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Option:Shadow Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:P ColK Option:IDmax Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Offset:Highlight Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Offset:Middle Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Offset:Shadow Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Offset:IDmax Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Option:Highlight Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Option:Middle Return to the value
step 2
372

SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Option:Shadow Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma:T:ColK Option:IDmax Return to the value
step 2
SP4- Man Gamma Adj - Return to the value
step 2
SP4- High Light Correction Sensitivity Selection Return to the value
step 2
SP4- High Light Correction Range Selection Return to the value
step 2
SP5- Set F-size Document - Return to the value
step 2
SP5- Copy Data Security 0: OFF/1: ON Return to the value
178-001 Setting of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Tray Size Adjust Tray1:1 Return to the value
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
SP5- PaperFD Clutch Bank1 Return to the value
181-002 Adjust of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- PaperFD Clutch Bank2 Return to the value
373

181-003 Adjust of SMC report output in
step 2
SP5- Next feed timing Bank1 Return to the value
step 2
SP5- Next feed timing Bank2 Return to the value
step 2
SP5- Re-feed timing Bank1 Return to the value
step 2
SP5- Re-feed timing Bank2 Return to the value
step 2
SP5- Machine State Destination Return to the value
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front Return to the value
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear Return to the value
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Leading Edge Registration: Return to the value
006-003 Front of SMC report output in
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Leading Edge Registration: Rear Return to the value
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Buckle: Duplex Front Return to the value
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Buckle: Duplex Rear Return to the value
step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Rear Edge Erase Front Return to the value
374

step 2
SP6- ADF Adjustment Rear Edge Erase Rear Return to the value
step 2
SP6- Stamp Position Adj. - Return to the value
step 2
SP6- Original Size Detect - Return to the value
step 2
SP6- DF Magnification Adj. - Return to the value
step 2
SP6- ADF Operation - Return to the value
step 2
SP6- ADF Operation Stack Mode Return to the value
step 2
SP9- Star50WaitHeat1 DutyStep Return to the value
step 2
SP9- Star50WaitHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
step 2
SP9- Start50WaitHeat2 LastDuty Return to the value
step 2
SP9- Start50JobHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
step 2
step 2
SP9- Stop50WaitHeat1 First Duty Return to the value
step 2
375

SP9- Stop50WaitHeat1 DutyStep Return to the value
step 2
SP9- Stop50WaitHeat1 RepeatCount Return to the value
step 2
SP9- Stop50WaitHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat1 First Duty Return to the value
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat1 DutyStep Return to the value
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat1 RepeatCount Return to the value
step 2
SP9- Stop50JobHeat1 LastDuty Return to the value
step 2
step 2
376

step 2
step 2
step 2
SP9- Start60WaitHeat1 DutyStep Return to the value
step 2
step 2
SP9- Start60WaitHeat2 DutyStep Return to the value
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
377

step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
step 2
378

SP9- frequency frequency Return to the value
step 2
NVRAM Replacement
1. Make sure you have the SMC Report (factory settings).

2. Print out the SMC report (all data) with SP5-990-001.
4. Install an SD card into SD Card Slot (lower slot).
6. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card with SP5-824-001
7. Make sure the customer has a backup of their address book data. If they do not, do the following
procedure to create a backup.
1. Insert an SD card into SD slot, and then turn the main power ON.
2. Save the address book data in the SD card using SP5-846-051.
• The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this procedure. So
be sure to obtain a backup of the customer’s address book data.
• Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of the
address book data.
• If they have a backup of the address book data, use their own backup data for restoration.
There is a risk that the data cannot be backed up properly depending on the NVRAM
condition.
8. Do the following steps if the machine has the fax unit. If not, skip this step.
1. Print the Box List by with the User Tools/Counter.
• [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [General Settings] - [Box Setting: Print List]
2. Print the Special Sender List by pressing these buttons in the following order.
• [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] - [Program Special
Sender: Print List]
3. Write down the following fax settings.
• [Receiver] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Reception File Settings] - [Forwarding].
• [Notify Destination] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Reception File Settings] - [Store].
• [Specify User] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Stored Reception File User Setting].
• [Notify Destination] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Folder Transfer Result Report].
379
• Specified folder in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Send Settings] - [Backup

File TX Setting].
• [Receiver] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception Settings] -
[Reception File Settings] - [Output Mode Switch Timer].
• [Store: Notify Destination] in [User Tools/Counter] - [Facsimile Features] - [Reception
Settings] - [Output Mode Switch Timer].
• All the destination information is shown on the display.
In the fax settings, address book data is stored with entry IDs, which the system internally
assigns to each data. The entry IDs may be changed due to re-assigning in
backup/restore operations.
4. Make sure that there are no files queued for sending. Ask the customer to send any files
waiting for transmission.
9. Turn the main power OFF. Disconnect the power cord.

10. Remove the SD card containing the NVRAM data from SD Slot.
11. Replace the NVRAM on the MPU and reassemble the machine. (MPU (PCB7) (D0B4))
12. Connect the AC power cord, and then turn the main power ON.
• Do not insert anything into SD Card Slot.

• SC673 appears at start-up, but this is normal because the controller and the smart
operation panel cannot communicate with each other due to changes in the operation
panel SP settings.
13. Change the SP settings for the operation panel.
If you switch the screen to enter the SP mode, SC995-02 is displayed. However, continue the
following steps.
• SP5-748-101: (OpePanel Setting: Op Type Action Setting): Change bit 0 from 0 to 1.
• SP5-748-201: (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting): Change the value from 0
to 1.
14. Change the Flair API SP values.
• SP5-752-001 (Copy FlairAPIFunction Setting): Change bit from 0 to 1.
• SP3-301-001 (FAX:FlairAPI Setting) Change bit from 0 to 1.
• The model information is written on the NVRAM (Novita), so SC995-02 does not occur.
• Program/Change Administrator will be displayed in Japanese, but this is normal.
• If the [Check Status] indicator is lit in red after the power is turned on, press the [Check
Status] button and check the status of the equipment.
Note that if the [Check Status] button does not respond, applications (copy, scan, printer,
380
fax etc.) can be started from the control panel.

If an SC such as SC890-01 etc. is displayed, refer to trouble shooting.
16. Re-insert the SD card that you removed in Step 10 back into SD Slot.
17. Download the old NVRAM data from the SD card onto the new NVRAM with SP5-825-001
(NVRAM Data Download).
This will take about 2 or 3 minutes.

18. Turn the main power OFF, and then remove the SD card from the SD slot.
The screen "Program/Change Administrator" will be displayed in the language that is the same
language as the time when the data was uploaded to the SD card in Step 6.
20. If the security functions (e.g. Stored file encryption/ Auto Erase Memory Setting) were applied, set
the functions again.
21. Ask the customer to restore their address book or restore the address book data using SP5-846-
052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book), and then ask the customer to ensure the address book
data has been restored properly.
If you obtained the backup of the customer’s address book data in step 3, delete the backup
immediately after the NVRAM replacement to avoid accidentally removing customer information
from the work site.
22. Output all the SMC data with SP5-990-001 and make sure all the SP/UP settings, except counter
information, are properly restored by checking the factory setting sheet from Step 1 and the SMC
Report from Step 2.
The counters will be reset.

23. Make sure that the “Reception Settings” and “Send Settings” correspond with the notes taken in
Step 8. Correct the settings if they are wrong.
If SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) cannot be
executed for some reason, enter all data on the SMC Report manually.
If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM replacement, restore the
encryption key.
PSU (Power Supply Unit) (PCB1)

381
5. Remove the PSU assembly [A].
Remove the old PSU assembly components from the Main fan (FAN2) [B] and reuse them.
HVPS (High-Voltage Power Supply Board) (PCB3)
1. Remove the rear cover (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3),Rear Cover (D0B4))

382
2. Remove the high-voltage power supply board (PCB3) [A].
Main Motor (M3)

2. Remove the main motor (M3) [A].
After replacing the main motor (M3), apply grease to the motor shaft gear. (Main Motor)
383
Main Fan (FAN2)

2. Remove the main fan (FAN2) [A].
Exhaust Fan (FAN1)
384
2. Remove the exhaust fan (FAN1) [A].
Room Temperature Sensor (S14)
1. Remove the inner cover (Inner Cover)

2. Remove the room temperature sensor (S14) [A].
385
Paper Exit Clutch (CL1) , Reverse Clutch (CL7)

2. Remove the exhaust fan bracket [A].
3. Remove the reverse clutch (CL7) [A].
386
4. Remove the gear cover [A].

1. Remove the gear [A].
2. Remove the timing belt [B].
3. Remove the gear [C].
387
6. Remove the paper exit clutch (CL1) [A].
Paper Feed Clutch (CL4)
388
2. Remove the lower gearbox cover [A].
389
3. Remove the paper feed clutch (CL4) [A].
Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL5)
1. Remove the paper feed clutch (CL4). (Paper Feed Clutch (CL4))
2. Remove the bypass paper feed clutch (CL5) [A].
Duplex Clutch (CL2)
1. Remove the lower gearbox cover. (Paper Feed Clutch (CL4))

2. Remove the main motor (M3). (Main Motor (M3))
390
3. Remove the upper gearbox cover [A].
391
5. Remove the duplex clutch (CL2) [A].
Registration Clutch (CL3)
1. Remove the upper gearbox cover. (Duplex Clutch (CL2))

392
4. Remove the registration clutch (CL3) [A].
Relay Clutch (CL6)
1. Remove the upper gearbox cover. (Duplex Clutch (CL2))
393
394
4. Remove the relay clutch (CL6) [A].
Right Door Switch (SW1)

2. Remove the right door switch (SW1) [A].
395
Interlock Switch (SW2)

2. Remove the interlock switch (SW2) [A].
Front Door Switch (SW5) (D0B4)

2. Remove the front door switch (SW5) [A].
396
Adjustment after Replacement (D0B2,D0B3)
Printing
• Make sure the paper is loaded properly in each paper tray before starting these adjustments.
• Print the registration page (Test Pattern Printing) to use for these adjustments.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
A: Leading edge registration (3 ± 2 mm)

B: Side-to-side registration (2 ± 1.5 mm)
1. Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper feed station, and adjust them using SP1-
001.
Tray SP No. Threshold
Tray: Plain SP1-001-002 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Tray: Mid Thick SP1-001-003
Tray: Thick SP1-001-004
Bypass: Plain SP1-001-007
Bypass: Mid Thick SP1-001-008
Bypass: Thick SP1-001-009
Duplex: Plain SP1-001-013
Duplex: Mid Thick SP1-001-014
Duplex: Thick SP1-001-015
2. Check the side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust them using SP1-002.
Tray SP No. Threshold
Bypass SP1-002-001 2 ±1.5 mm
Tray Main1 SP1-002-002
Tray Bank1 SP1-002-004
Tray Bank2 SP1-002-005
Duplex SP1-002-006
397
Main Scan Magnification
• Use an S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments.

1. Check the magnification, and if necessary, adjust it using SP2-102-001 (Main Scn Mag. Adj.). The
specification is ± 0.5%.
Scanning
• Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration /
side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
• Use an S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode
A: Leading edge registration (L-Edge Regist Adj)

B: Side-to-side registration (S-to-S Regist Adj)
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them using the following SP
modes if necessary.
SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range
SP4-010-001 L-Edge Regist Adj ±2.0 mm
SP4-011-001 S-to-S Regist Adj ±2.0 mm
Magnification
• Use an S5S test chart to do the following adjustment.
398
A: Sub-scan Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio and adjust using the following SP mode if necessary.
SP4-008-001 Sub-scan Mag. Adj ±1.0 %
ADF Image Adjustment
Registration
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
• Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.

1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP6-006-001 SideEdge: Front ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-002 SideEdge: Rear ±3.0 mm
SP6-006-003 LeadingEdge: Front ±5.0 mm
SP6-006-004 LeadingEdge: Rear ±5.0 mm
Sub Scan Magnification
• Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.

1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP6-017-001 ADF Adjust Mag ±5.0 %
399
Adjustment after Replacement (D0B4)
Image Adjustment After Replacing Parts
Adjustment of the following settings is required after SP5-801 is executed or after the following parts
are replaced:
Parts Implementation items
• Scanner Carriage • Image Position Adjustment
• Laser Unit • Scanning Adjustment
• Scanner Motor (M26)
• Polygon Mirror Motor (M27)
• Paper Feed Unit
• Bypass Unit
• Duplex Unit
• ADF ADF Image Adjustment
Image Position Adjustment
• Before you start adjustment, make sure that the paper in each tray is loaded correctly.
• Use the same paper type and size as those used by customers.
• Use "14:Trimming Area" in SP2-109-001 to print a test pattern, and set SP2-109-001 back to
"0" after you finish adjustment.
Standard
• Leading Edge (A) : 4.2 mm ±1.5mm (plain paper, thin paper)

• Side to Side (B): 0.5mm to 4.0mm
• Trailing Edge (C): 0.5mm to 6.0mm (duplex mode: 3.0 to 6.0mm)
400
Main/Sub Scan Registration Adjustment
Adjustment Standard
• Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
• Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 ± 1 mm
Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below.
Leading Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Edge
Side to Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode (SP1-
Side 002) to adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit, LCT, and
duplex unit.
Adjustment Procedure
• Registration may be changed slightly in each sheet. Print some test pattern "14:Trimming
Area", then average the leading edge and side-to-side registration values, and adjust each SP
mode.
1. Print out the test pattern (14:Trimming Area) with SP2-109-001.
2. Do the leading edge registration [A] adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value. Then press the [#] key.
401
3. After the leading edge registration adjustment, print out the new test pattern.
4. Do the side-to-side registration [B] adjustment.
1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value. Then press the [#] key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
Erase Margin Adjustment
• Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub-scan) cannot be
adjusted within the standard values.
• Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the erase margin C and D, and then adjust the
erase margin A and B.
1. Print out the test pattern (14:Trimming Area) with SP2-109-001.
2. Check the erase margin A and B, and then adjust them with SP2-103-001 to -015 if necessary.
402
Scanning Adjustment
• Check and perform the image position adjustment before you do the following scanner
adjustments. (Refer to Image Position Adjustment)
• Use a C4 test chart to do the following adjustments.
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration
1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
403
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration.

A: 4.2 ± 2mm
B: 2.0 ± 1mm
3. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary.
Name SP mode
Leading edge registration (Home Position Adj Value) SP4-803-001
Side-to-Side Registration (Main Scan Reg) SP4-011-001
Scanner magnification
1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
A: Sub-scan magnification
2. Check the magnification ratio.
Standard:
• Normal mode for main-scan: ±0.55% or less
• Normal mode for sub-scan: ±1.00% or less
• Reduction mode for main-scan: ±1.00% or less
• Enlargement mode for main-scan: ±1.00% or less
3. Adjust with SP4-008 if necessary.
Scanner shading correction
1. Turn the power OFF and then ON.

The shading correction is executed automatically when the machine is rebooted.
ADF Image Adjustment
ADF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge
404
1. Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown below.

A: Leading edge registration
2. Put the temporary test chart on the ADF, and then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
3. Check the registration. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following
SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 4.2 ± 2 mm for the leading edge registration, 2 ± 1 mm for the side-to-side registration.
Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-003 Leading Edge Registration ± 5.0 mm
SP6-006-005 Buckle: Duplex Front ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-006 Buckle: Duplex Rear ± 2.5 mm
SP6-006-007 Rear Edge Erase (Trailing Edge) ± 10.0 mm
ADF sub-scan magnification
1. Put the temporary test chart on the ADF, and then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP6-017-001 if necessary.
Specification (magnification error)
• Sub-scan without magnification: ±2.75%

• Sub-scan with magnification: ±2.75%
405
5.System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)
5. System Maintenance (D0B2,D0B3)
Service Menu
Overview
These models have several service menus. Each service menu has several adjustment items. This
section explains how to enter each service menu and the operations that can be performed in each
service menu.
There are two menus depending on how the service menus are accessed.
Maintenance Mode Menu This is a menu for maintenance and service.
Special Maintenance menu Displays the serial number of the machine.
Maintenance Mode Menu
Menu List
Display Info
Model Name Displays the Model Name depending on Engine Firmware Settings.
FW CTL FW Displays the Firmware Version.
Version Version
Engine Displays the Engine Firmware Version.
FW
Version
Scan FW Displays the Scanner Firmware Version.
Version
Counter Printer Displays the black image counter of the printer engine.
Counter
Scanner Displays the sum total of scanner counters for each mode.
Counter Total Page/ Black Page/ Color Page
/ ADF Used
Jam Displays the number of paper jams at each location.
Counter JAM Total/ ARDF/ Initialize jam/ Tray1 nofeed jam/ Bank1 nofeed jam/ Bank2
nofeed jam/ Bypass nofeed jam/ Duplex nofeed jam (for C1b/C1c)/ Not reach
bank1 Ver. Deliver/ Not reach regist/ Not reach exit sensor/ Stay on bank1
ver. Deliver/ Stay on bank2 ver. Deliver/ Stay on regist/ Stay on exit sensor/
Stayed on duplex exit
Print Report
406
Print Report SMC Page Report Prints out the SMC repot.
Engine Maintenance
See “Engine SP Mode” for details.
Scan Maintenance
Mono Compression Sets the monochrome compression type for scanning.
MH (Default)/ MR/ MMR
Factory Default
Factory Default Return Returns to the upper level of the mode
Execute
Be very careful when doing this.
It resets a lot of settings to the factory default settings.
Refer to "EEPROM on the MPU" for details.
CTL Maintenance
FW Update Mode Not Execute Not used
Execute
Auto IP Turns automatic IP assignment on or off.
Off/ On
PaaS Validity Set Normal Normal type
NPB NPB type
Special Maintenance Menu
Menu List
Engine maintenance
Engine maintenance Serial No Displays the serial number of the machine.
407
SP Tables
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• Engine SP1-XXX (Paper handling)
• Engine SP2-XXX (Process)
• Engine SP4-XXX (Scan)
• Engine SP5-XXX (Mode)
• Engine SP6-XXX (Option)
• Engine SP7-XXX (Data Log 1)
• Input Check
• Output Check
408
Test Pattern Printing

Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for
design testing.
• Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, SC will
occur.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
2. Select “Print List/Report” from the list then press the [OK] key.
3. Select “Test Page” or “Registration Page” to print from the list then press the [OK] key.
4. Press [Yes] to print the selected pattern.
409
Test Page Registration Page
410
SMC Page Printing

1. Enter the “Maintenance Mode”.
2. Select “Print reports” from the list then press [OK] key.
3. Select “SMC Page Print” for print from the list then press [OK] key.
4. Press [Yes] to print the SMC reports.
411
Firmware Update
Overview
In order to update the firmware of this machine, download the latest firmware file from Ricoh's website
and save it on an SD card.
Insert the card in the SD card slot on the MPU (PCB7).
Before Beginning
An SD card is a fragile device. When handling SD cards, always observe the following precautions:
• Before inserting an SD card, always switch the machine off. Never insert an SD card into a slot
when the power is on.
• Do not remove an SD card from a service slot after the power has been switched on.
• Never switch the machine off while firmware is downloading from an SD card.
• Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high humidity,
or exposure to direct sunlight.
• Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not expose an SD card to
shock or vibration.
Updating Firmware
Preparation
1. Confirm the SD Card is using FAT or FAT32 filesystem if not, please reformat and change the
filesystem to FAT or FAT32.
2. Create a folder named “d0b2” on the card.
3. Copy the “d0b2*****.brn” file to “d0b2” folder on SD card.
• Do not put multiple firmware files on the same SD card. Copy only the firmware you will be
using to update the machine.
Updating Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off.

2. Remove the rear Cover (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3))
412
3. Locate the SD card slot [A] and insert the SD card in the slot.
4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. It will make a click sound. Make sure the
SD card locks in place.
5. Turn on the update switch (SW2) [A].
6. Disconnect the network cable if the machine is connected to a network.

7. Attach the rear cover.
8. Turn the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the update screen will be shown on the
display.
413
9. The firmware filename will be displayed. If this is the file to be updated, press the [OK] key.
10. The file will be loaded to the memory, and the below screen will be displayed. Press the [Execute]
key to start the update process.
11. Once the update finished, "Completed" message will be displayed on the screen.
12. Turn the main power switch off.

13. Remove the rear cover (Rear Cover (D0B2,D0B3))
14. Push the SD card to release and remove it from the slot.
• To remove the SD card, push it in to unlock the spring lock and it will pop out of the slot.
15. Turn the update switch off [A].
16. Turn the main power switch on. Updating the firmware has been completed.
414
Recovery after power loss
• If the update process disrupted due to a power loss, normal operation cannot be guaranteed
when the machine is turned ON.
• An error message will be repeatedly shown until the update successfully completed in order to
make sure the machine operates normally.
• To solve this issue, reinsert the SD card, switch ON the power and the firmware file will be
automatically loaded.
Handling Firmware Update Errors
If an error occurs, a message will be displayed on the screen.

There are 4 different messages as shown below.
The following are the possible error conditions for each of the 4 error messages:
Error Message Error Situations
SD Card not supported 1. SD card not inserted
2. Bad card
3. SD card format
4. SD 3.0 card
File not exists 1. FW file not in d0b2/d0b2***.brn
Invalid file format 1. Read file error
2. File size <24Byte
3. First 4 Byte not match
4. File size ≠ len in Header
5. If .ram FW
6. CheckSum error
Update Failed 1. MPU (PCB7) defective
415
6.System Maintenance (D0B4)
6. System Maintenance (D0B4)
Service Program Mode
• Make sure that the data-in LED is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates
that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the printer to process
the data.
SP Tables
See "Appendices" for the following information:

"SP Mode Tables"
Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode
• The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only, so that they can
properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by anyone other than service
representatives for any reason, data might be deleted or settings might be changed. In such
case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.
Entering SP Mode
For details, ask your supervisor.

Note
If there are no Classic Application (copy/printer/scanner/fax) icons on the Home screen, follow the
procedure below to display the number keyboard.
1. Press and hold the button [B] located at the right side of the operation panel and "Check Status [A]"
at the same time, until the number keyboard is displayed.
416
2. Enter the key code for SP mode.
Exiting SP Mode
Press "Exit" on the LCD twice to return to the user screen.
• To make the settings effective, turn the main power switch off and on after exiting service
mode.
Types of SP Modes
• System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions

• Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
• Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
• Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as
shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode.This section explains the functions of the
System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.
417
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
1 Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press [#].
The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing [#]. If not, just press the required
SP Mode number.
2 Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
3 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
4 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
5 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page).
6 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
Service Mode Lock/Unlock
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the
machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on
the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set
"Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
Settings > Machine Features Settings > User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools >
Service Mode Lock > OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not necessary to ask
the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
418
3. After machine servicing is completed:

• Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the
machine.
• The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
419
Firmware Update (SD Card)
Updating Firmware
Preparation
• If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
• If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D0B4" folder onto the card.
If the card already contains folders up to "D0B4", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g. D0B4xxxx.fwu)
into this folder.
• Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only model
firmware you want.
Updating Procedure
1. First download the new firmware to the SD card.

2. Turn OFF the power.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover.
4. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.
• Check whether the card is properly in the SD card slot. When an SD card is inserted, a
click is heard, and it is locked.
• To remove the card, release by pressing once.
5. Turn ON the power.
6. Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds).
When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed.
7. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (The screen is always in English,
regardless of the machine's language settings.) When the SD card contains two or more software
modules, they are displayed as follows.
- When two or more software names are displayed -

1. Press the module selection button or [1] - [5] on the 10-key pad.
2. Choose the appropriate module. (If already selected, cancel the selection.)
Operation of keys or buttons
420
Keys or buttons to press Contents

[Exit] or 10-key pad [0] Returns to the normal screen.
[Start] Key Select all modules.
[Clear/Stop] key Cancel all selections.
Display contents
On the above screen, two programs, engine firmware and printer application, are displayed. (The
screen may change depending on the firmware or application.)
The display contents are as follows:
Display Contents
ROM: Display installed module number / version information.
NEW: Display module number / version information in the card.
The upper row corresponds to the module name, the lower row corresponds to the version number.
8. Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key pad operation. The selected module
is highlighted, and [Verify] and [Update] are displayed.
• Depending on the combination of modules to update, it may not be possible to select all of
them simultaneously.
Key or button operations

Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Update] or [#] key Update the ROM of the selected module.
[Verify] button or [./*] key Perform verification of the selected module.
9. Press the [Update] or [#] key. Software will be updated.
10. During firmware update, a "firmware update/ verification progress screen" is displayed. When
firmware update is complete, the "firmware update end screen" is displayed.
• In the middle row, the name of the module currently being updated is displayed (in this case,
the printer module is being updated).
421
• In the lower row, a progress bar is displayed in ten steps. (The more *, the more the progress.)
Firmware update end screen
• This screen is displayed when all selected firmware modules are to be updated. "Printer" in the
second row shows that the module updated last is the printer. (When more than one were
updated simultaneously, only the module that was updated last is displayed.)
• When Verify was completed normally, the "Update done" display of the above screen is "Verify
done." If "Verify Error" is displayed, reinstall the software of the application displayed in the
lower row.
11. After turning the main power OFF, remove the SD card.
12. Turn the main power ON again, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
13. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position.
• When the power supply is switched OFF during firmware update, update is interrupted, and
the power is switched ON again, normal operation cannot be guaranteed.
• To guarantee operation, an update error continues to be displayed until update is successful.
• In this case, insert the SD card again, switch the power ON, and continue download of
firmware from the SD card automatically.
• The PS3 firmware program is included in the preinstalled PDF firmware. In the default state,
although the PS3 firmware program is hidden in the disabled state, the function is enabled by
installing the PS3 card. (The program installed in the PS3 card is a dongle (key) for enabling
the PS3 function).
• Due to the above specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM module
number / software version of the PDF firmware at the PS location.
Error Screens during Updating
EXX shows an error code.

For error codes, refer to the following table:
422
Error Code List
Code Contents Solutions

20 Physical address mapping cannot be • Switch the main power supply off and on to
performed. try again.
• Re-insert the SD card to reboot.
• Replace the MPU if the above solutions do
not solve the problem.
21 Insufficient memory for the download • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• Replace the MPU if the updating cannot be
done by switching the power off and on.
22 Decompression of compressed data • Switch the main power supply off and on to
failed. try again.
• Replace the SD card used for the update.
24 SD card access error • Re-insert the SD card.
• Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• Replace the SD card used for the update.
32 The SD card used after download • Insert the SD card containing the same
suspension is incorrect. program as when the firmware update was
The SD card which was inserted after suspended, and then switch the main power
power interruption is different from the supply off and on to try again.
one which was inserted before power • There is a possibility that the SD card is
interruption. damaged if the update cannot be done after
the correct SD card has been inserted. In this
case, try again with a different SD card.
Replace all relevant boards if the update is
done for the MPU and FCU function.
Replace the operation panel unit if the
update is done for the operation panel.
33 Card version error. • Install the correct ROM update data for each
The wrong card version is downloaded. version in the SD card.
423

34 Destination error. • Install the correct ROM update data for each
A card for the wrong destination is destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM) in the SD card.
inserted.
35 Model error. • Install the correct ROM update data for each
A card for the wrong model is inserted. model in the SD card.
36 Module error. • Install the program to be updated in advance.
The program to be downloaded does not • There is a possibility that the SD card
exist on the main unit. containing the program to be updated has
The download destination specified by not been mounted. Check to confirm that the
the card does not match the destination SD card has been correctly mounted.
for the main unit’s program. • The SD card is incorrect if the program to be
updated has been correctly installed. In this
case, insert the correct SD card.
38 The version of the downloaded program • Make sure that the program to be overwritten
has not been authorized for the update. is the specified version.
40 Engine download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the MPU.
41 Fax download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the MPU
and the fax board.
42 Control panel / language download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the MPU
and the operation panel unit.
43 Printing download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• The SD card is damaged if the update fails
again. Replace the SD card.
44 The data to be overwritten cannot be • Switch the main power supply off and on to
accessed when controller-related try again.
programs are downloaded. • Install the correct ROM update data in the
SD card.
• Replace the MPU if the data to be
overwritten is contained on the MPU.
49 Firmware updates are currently • The setting of Update Firmware in the
prohibited. Administrator Tools has been set to [Prohibit]
424

by an administrator. Amend the setting to [Do
not Prohibit] and try again.
50 The results of the electronic • Install the correct ROM update data in the
authorization check have rejected the SD card.
update data.
57 @Remote is not connected at the • Check the @Remote connection.
date/time reserved for receiving the
package firmware update from the
network.
58 Update cannot be done due to a • Check the @Remote connection.
reception route problem.
59 HDD is not mounted. This code is not displayed in this machine.
60 HDD could not be used during the This code is not displayed in this machine.
package firmware update.
61 The module ID for the package firmware • Prepare the correct package files.
update is incorrect.
62 The configuration of the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update files is incorrect.
63 Reception fails due to power off at the • Update is to be done automatically when the
reserved date/time of the remote next reception time has elapsed.
firmware update from the network.
64 Reception fails due to power off at the • Reset the reservation date/time for the
reserved date/time of the package remote update.
65 Reception fails due to a status error of • Update is to be done automatically when the
the machine at the reserved date/time of next reception time has elapsed.
the remote firmware update from the
network.
66 Reception failed due to a status error of • Reset the reservation date/time for the
the machine at the reserved date/time of remote update.
the package firmware update from the
network.
67 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected
information from the Gateway fails at the correctly.
reserved date/time of the remote
425

information from the Gateway fails. correctly.
69 Download fails at the reserved date/time • Check that the network is connected
of the remote firmware update from the correctly.
network.
70 Package firmware download from the • Check that the network is connected
network fails. correctly.
71 Network communication error occurs at • Check that the network is connected
the reserved date/time of the package correctly.
72 The setting of @Remote is invalid at the • Set the setting of @Remote Service in the
reserved date/time of the package Administrator Tools to [Do not Prohibit].
57 @Remote is not connected at the • Check the @Remote connection.
date/time reserved for receiving the
package firmware update from the
network.
58 Update cannot be done due to a • Check the @Remote connection.
reception route problem.
59 HDD is not mounted. This code is not displayed in this machine.
60 HDD could not be used during the This code is not displayed in this machine.
package firmware update.
61 The module ID for the package firmware • Prepare the correct package files.
update is incorrect.
62 The configuration of the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update files is incorrect.
63 Reception fails due to power off at the • Update is to be done automatically when the
reserved date/time of the remote next reception time has elapsed.
64 Reception fails due to power off at the • Reset the reservation date/time for the
reserved date/time of the package remote update.
65 Reception fails due to a status error of • Update is to be done automatically when the
the machine at the reserved date/time of next reception time has elapsed.
the remote firmware update from the
network.
66 Reception failed due to a status error of • Reset the reservation date/time for the
426

the machine at the reserved date/time of remote update.
the package firmware update from the
network.
information from the Gateway fails at the correctly.
reserved date/time of the remote
information from the Gateway fails. correctly.
69 Download fails at the reserved date/time • Check that the network is connected
of the remote firmware update from the correctly.
network.
70 Package firmware download from the • Check that the network is connected
network fails. correctly.
71 Network communication error occurs at • Check that the network is connected
the reserved date/time of the package correctly.
72 The setting of @Remote is invalid at the • Set the setting of @Remote Service in the
reserved date/time of the package Administrator Tools to [Do not Prohibit].
• The PDF firmware installed as standard contains a program required to print PS3 data as
default. However, this PS3 program is normally disabled.
• The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the PS3
firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this
specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software version of
the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program.
427
Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update)

In this machine, software can be updated by remote control using @Remote.
Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:
SFU SD Card RFU ARFU

Individual firmware N/A Available Available N/A
Package firmware Available Available Available Available
RFU Performable Condition
RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions.

1. The customer consents to the use of RFU.
2. The device is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.
428
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)
Overview
Each firmware module (such as System, Engine, etc.) used to be updated individually. However, an all-
inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are several ways to update using the firmware package.
Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
• There are two methods for SFU.

• Immediate Update: To update the firmware when visiting
• Update at the next visit: To set the date and time for downloading. The firmware will be
automatically downloaded beforehand and updated at the following visit.
• "Update at the next visit" is recommended since firmware download may take some minutes
due to the network condition.
SFU requires the connection to @Remote via a device which has the embedded @Remote
communicating function. When a machine is connected to @Remote via an intermediate device (RC
Gate), the SFU function is disabled.
Other than SFU, package firmware update can also be performed by using the following three methods.
• Package Firmware Update via a network: ARFU (Auto Remote Firmware Update)
• Package Firmware Update via an SD Card
• Package Firmware Update via a network: RFU (Remote Firmware Update)

429
Immediate Update
Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote
with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens during Updating
2. Touch [Firmware Update].
Touch [Update].
3. Touch [Execute Update].
4. Touch [YES].
430
5. The following will be displayed.
• If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, is
displayed, go back to step 1.
• Update will be started automatically after the download is finished.
• When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a print job
is started. After the print job is finished, touch [YES] on the display shown below to restart
updating.
6. [Update done] is displayed.

• The machine will automatically reboot itself.
431
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/All items to
be updated".
Update at the Next Visit (Reserve)
It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in
advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit. This saves waiting time for
the firmware to download at the service visit.
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (Reserve)
Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote
with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function. If an
error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens during Updating.
Touch [Reserve].
432
3. Touch [Reservation setting].
4. Enter the dates and times of the next visit and the start of receiving data.
• "Next time to visit this customer": The package firmware will be automatically downloaded by
this time/date.
• "When to receive? (1-7)": The download of the package firmware will begin this number of
days before the next visit.
Successful Download
In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next scheduled
visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try. In the second diagram, the
download fails three times and is successful on the fourth try.
433
• If the firmware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network settings/condition, no
power to the machine, or other reason, the machine will continue retrying every six hours until the
scheduled deadline (up to a maximum of four tries). For example, if the download is set for the day
before the next visit, the machine will attempt the download at 24 hours before the visit, and then
continue trying every six hours (max. four tries total).
• The retry is only performed in cases when the firmware download has failed.
• If the machine is in Energy Saver mode when the download is scheduled to begin, the download
will be performed in the background and the machine/panel will stay in Energy Saver mode.
• The download will continue uninterrupted even if the customer initiates a print job, copy job, fax
receiving or other operation while the download is in progress.
• The download will be terminated if the customer turns the power off while the download is in
progress.
• If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit, the
machine will stop trying to download the firmware.
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

Touch [Reserve].
434
3. Touch [Reserve and received package information].
4. Check the information displayed.

When the package firmware was downloaded successfully, the details of the download result are
displayed as the following picture shows.
• This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been
downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with "-".
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

Touch [Update].
435
3. Touch [Execute Update].
4. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES].
• Update is started.
• If the version of the reserved package in the eMMC is older than the latest version, the
messages shown in the following picture are displayed.
• If you wish to download the latest version, touch [Execute] beside the message
"Download and update the latest package." Then update of the package firmware will be
started.
• If you wish to update using the firmware in the eMMC (old version), touch [Execute]
beside the message "Update to the received package."
5. [Update done] is displayed.
436
• The machine will automatically reboot itself.
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to
be updated".
Update via SD Card
Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the package
firmware to the SD card.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens during Updating.

1. Create a new folder in the SD card, and then name it "package".
2. Copy the package firmware (xxxxxxxx.pkg) to this folder.
• If you copy the package firmware into the conventional "romdata" folder, the update will
437
not work.
• Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you copy
multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select only one
version of the firmware randomly.
3. Turn the power OFF.
4. Remove the slot cover.
5. Insert the SD card which contains the package into the SD card slot (for service).
6. Turn the power ON and touch [Update].
• When the SD card contains both a firmware package and one or more modules, the
following display may show up. Select [Package] and touch [OK] to move to step 5 above.
7. Update is started automatically after the package firmware download to the eMMC has been
completed.
438
8. When update is completed, "Update done" is displayed.
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/All items to
be updated".
9. Turn the main power switch OFF, and then pull out the SD card from the SD card slot.
10. Turn the power ON.
439
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)
• Auto remote firmware update (ARFU) requires connection to the Internet. Be sure to get
permission from the customer before setting up this feature.
Overview
By Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), the firmware is updated by checking the global server every
76 hours and downloading the latest package if it is newer than the one installed on the machine.
Function Overview

What is Included in the Firmware Package
Modules included in the firmware package are indicated by ticks ( ) in the firmware download web site.
Firmware not included in the package require updating by SD cards, etc.
The table below is an example:
Included Firmware
- aics
animation
Application Site
BluetoothService
CheetahSystem
- CSPF
- Data Erase Onb
- EcoInfoWidget
Engine
440
Downloading and Updating Process
Downloads the Latest Package
The machine checks the server for the latest package version.
If the version of the package on the global server is later than that of the package installed on the
machine, or if the machine has not downloaded the firmware package, the machine downloads the
latest package in the background even when the customer is using the machine.
If download fails, the machine will retry downloading 76 hours later.
The downloaded package can also be used with SFU (Smart Firmware Update). A package
downloaded with SFU (Smart Firmware Update) can be used with ARFU (Auto Remote Firmware
Update) and vice versa.
When replacing the MPU, the firmware package data becomes lost from the MPU. Even if the latest
firmware is on the new MPU, be sure to receive the latest package data.
When the machine connects to the server where the package files are stored, the DNS settings and the
name solution by DNS are needed. The machine will still try to download the package even if the name
cannot be resolved, but will fail because the name is not resolved.
The time and date to send the next inquiry to the global server can be checked with SP5-886-116 (Farm
Update Setting: Auto Update Next Date).
The auto remote firmware update is executed every 76 hours.
Judgement of ARFU
Update judgement is done when the latest update package is successfully downloaded, or the package
has already been downloaded.
441
If the judgement timing is in the range of the update prohibited time or day set with SP or WIM, the
machine will retry the update after 76 hours.
If the machine is in use when the judgement process runs, the process is retried. Retry is done up to
three times every hour (can be changed with SP) and if the machine is in use for all three retries, the
machine will retry the update after 76 hours
442
Situations judged as machine in use
No. Situations judged as machine in use

1 When the control panel is used within 30 seconds
2 During firmware update
3 While firmware update is disabled
4 While printing (copy, printer, fax, re-printing via network)
5 While scanning (copy, scanner, fax)
6 Retrieving image data via network
7 While initial setting (User Tools settings) or SP is being set
8 While fax is transferring data
9 During on hook / on handset
10 During the PC-FAX process (from PC to machine data transfer to the end of the job)
11 While shifting to/from the energy server mode
12 When not being able to run firmware update due to the modules that are running
e.g.) Waiting for DCS transfer (refer to appendix), accessing devices such as eMMC/SD card,
etc.
13 While displaying a preview
14 While the document server function is in use
15 Connecting to TWAIN
16 During the interrupt copy process
17 While displaying the printer menu
18 While updating the display for the document server function via WIM or for stored fax
documents
19 While writing log information
20 While accessing the address book
21 During SC
Update Process
When the machine has decided to run the auto firmware update, the following message is displayed.
443
The popup will have "Cancel" and "OK" buttons and the update process will start either when the "OK"
button is selected or 30 seconds has passed.
When the "Cancel" button is selected, the machine will run the "Retry update" process.
When the device update and three retries in recovery mode both fail, it is determined as a device defect
and will display an SC for the defective device. If such an SC appears, replace the indicated board.
Canceling the update
It is possible to cancel the Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) or update in recovery mode from the
operation panel.
But this is not possible while updating the operation panel itself. On the other hand, the update for the
operation panel will run at the final stage of the update. Thus canceling the update at that stage has no
real effect.
When the update is cancelled, the machine will reboot when updates for all modules of one of the
following devices is done.
1. MPU
2. FCU function on the MPU and the fax board
3. Operation Panel
For example, when the update process is cancelled while updating the first module of the operation
panel, the machine will reboot when all modules in the operation panel have been updated.
The firmware contents included in the package can be referred to in the release note in the SERES
release of the package.
444
The next update will run 76 hours after the cancellation. The old (cancelled) package will be discarded if
the package downloaded 76 hours later is the latest.
Checking the ARFU Result

2. Press [Firmware update].
3. Press [Update].
4. Press [Update Package Information].
5. If the firmware package is the same as the one on the global server, the update was completed
successfully. Otherwise, check the result using the logging date.
In SP7-520-041 to -045 (Update Log: Auto:Version), you can check the versions of the packages
updated by ARFU. (-041 displays the latest result. It is also printed on the SMC sheet.)
Checking the Result Using the Log Data

2. Press [System/Copy].
3. Check the results for ARFU by SP7-520-051 to 060 (Update Log: Auto:Result)
"-051" is the latest update result. For details about the number of each result log, see the next
section “Related SP.”
Related SPs
SP Number Selection Overview

Def.
SP5-886-111 0: OFF Sets auto update by ARFU ON/OFF.
1: ON
SP5-886-112 0: OFF Will not run the update when update prohibited time setting is ON and
1: ON the current time is in the range of the time set.
SP5-886-113 0 to 23 • Start time < End time: Prohibited time is from the start time to the
9 end time on the same day.
SP5-886-114 0 to 23 • Start time > End time: Prohibited time is from the start time to the
17 end time on the next day.
• Start time == End time: Prohibited time setting is disabled.
(Update will not be prohibited.)
SP5-886-115 0: OFF Even when the update function is disabled, downloading the package
1: ON is allowed.
The downloaded package can be used with SFU.
SP5-886-116 Display Displays when the latest package check will run.
only
445
SP Number Selection Overview

Def.
SP5-886-117 1 to 24 Set time for the next version check after retry.
1
SP5-886-120 0x00 Update will not run if the corresponding bit for each day below is set to
1.
• Prohibited at all times: bit 7
• Monday: bit 6
• Tuesday: bit 5
• Wednesday: bit 4
• Thursday: bit 3
• Friday: bit 2
• Saturday: bit 1
• Sunday: bit 0
This setting is not changed by the prohibited time setting.
e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun. : 0x47 (01000111)
SP7-520-011 Display History of dates and times when update has started.
to 015 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
If the last update failed, this is not recorded.
SP7-520-021 Display History of dates and times when update has finished.
recent.
The record is created when the update has successfully finished.
When the update is cancelled, no record is created.
SP7-520-031 Display History of the package numbers (including suffix) for which update has
to 035 only completed.
The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
SP7-520-041 Display History of the package versions for which update has completed.
recent.
SP7-520-051 Display History of the results of the download and the update.
to 060 only Refer below for the numbers set.
446
Numbers set for the result history for SP7-520-051 to 060
No. Result Description

1 Downloading with SFU Cannot download or update because the machine is now
downloading the package for SFU.
2 HDD not installed Cannot download or update because the machine has no
HDD.
3 Updating with SFU Cannot download or update because the machine is being
updated with SFU.
4 HDD error Cannot download or update because the HDD cannot be
used.
5 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because the version
information cannot be obtained.
6 Update download error Cannot download or update because the update download
failed.
In the non @Remote method, this shows that the download
failed because there was no proxy set.
7 Name resolution error Cannot download or update because the name cannot be
resolved upon downloading the update.
8 Auto update setting disabled The package has been downloaded but will not run the
update because SP5-886-111 (auto update setting) is
disabled and SP5-886-115 (auto download setting for SFU)
is enabled.
9 Update prohibited time Cannot start to update because the auto update prohibited
time setting (SP5-886-112) is enabled and the time update
initiated was in the range of prohibited time (SP5-886-113
to 114).
Or the day which update was initiated was a day for which
update was prohibited (SP5-886-120).
10 Update postponed due to Cannot start update due to the following conditions when
machine in use update was initiated.
• The machine is in use by a user (the panel was used
within 30 seconds)
• Machine offline for other reasons
• Operation prohibited
• Displaying SP/UP menu
• Firmware update is running with another method
• Configuration change prohibited
• Verifying the operation panel (smart panel)
447
No. Result Description

11 Update cancelled by user Update was cancelled because a user selected "Cancel" in
the popup shown before starting the update.
12 Offline failed Cannot start to update because the machine is offline for
other reasons.
13 Update successful Update was started and successfully completed.
14 Update failed Update was started but failed.
15 Update deemed completed Update was cancelled after the process was initiated
because a user selected “Cancel”. There is no need to
resume the update due to one of the following reasons:
• A newer update has been released and received.
• When retrying ARFU, the update has already been
completed by another method.
16 Update cancelled by user after Update was cancelled after the process initiated because a
update initiated user selected "Cancel" during the update.
17 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because the name cannot be
(communication error occurred resolved when obtaining version information.
for hostname)
18 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because the proxy verification
(proxy verification failure) failed with proxy settings when obtaining version
information.
19 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because an error other than
(other than proxy verification proxy verification with proxy settings occurred when
failure when proxy is set) obtaining version information.
20 Update download error (proxy Cannot download or update because the proxy verification
verification failure) failed with proxy settings when downloading the package.
21 Update download error (other Cannot download or update because an error other than
than proxy verification failure proxy verification with proxy settings occurred when
when proxy is set) downloading the package.
22 Update by retry successful After power failure, unsuccessful update, or rebooting,
update by retry is executed successfully.
However, this does not apply to the case where the update
was cancelled after the process was initiated because a
user selected “Cancel”.
In this case, the update is “successful” if the retry is not
executed between the start and completion of the next
update (76 hours after the cancellation).
448
Address Book Upload/Download
Information List
The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.

Information
• Registration No. • Select Title
• User Code • Folder
• E-mail • Local Authentication
• Protection Code • Folder Authentication
• Fax Destination • Account ACL
• Fax Option • New Document Initial ACL
• Group Name • LDAP Authentication
• Key Display
Download
With this machine, download and restore from WIM. Like conventional machines, backup and restore
cannot be performed from SP mode.
1. Open a web browser.

2. Enter "http://(the machine's IP address or host name)/" in the address bar.
3. Click [Login].
4. Login using the administrator account.
Depending on the configuration of your web browser, the login user name and password might be
saved.
Configure your web browser's settings in advance so that this information is not saved (do not get
the customer's account details).
5. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Address Book].
6. Click [Maintenance].
7. Enter an encryption key as necessary.
8. Click Execute Backup.
9. A download window will appear from the browser, and so specify the save destination, and then
click save.
Upload
1. Open a web browser.

2. Enter "http://(the machine's IP address or host name)/" in the address bar.
3. Click [Login].
4. Login using the administrator account.
449
Depending on the configuration of your web browser, the login user name and password might be
saved.
Configure your web browser's settings in advance so that this information is not saved (do not get
the customer's account details).
5. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Address Book].
6. Click [Maintenance].
7. Enter an encryption key as necessary.
8. Click "Restore Settings".
9. Click "Browser", select a backup file, and then click "Open".
10. After it has uploaded, click "OK".
• The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.

• The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded.
450
Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD Card
Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
• All data that is stored in NV-RAM of the MPU is subject to update.
• This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked
1. Do SP5-990 (SMC Print) before you switch the machine off. You will need a record of the NVRAM
settings if the upload fails.
2. Switch the machine main power switch off.
3. Remove the SD slot cover.
4. Insert the SD card into SD card slot. Then switch the machine on.
5. Execute SP5-824 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the “Execute” key.
6. The following files are copied to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload procedure is
finished. The file is saved to the following path and filename:
NVRAM <serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number “K5000017114”:
NVRAM K5000017114.NV
7. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the
uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
• You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM
Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
• The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the
connection between the controller and EGB is defective.
• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM
data.
1. Switch the machine main power switch off.
2. Remove the SD slot cover.
3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot.
4. Switch the machine main power switch on.
451
5. Do SP5-825(NVRAM Data Download) and press the “Execute” key.
• The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine
for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial numbers do
not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• Total: Full Color
• B&W/Single Color
• Default charge counters for counter display
452
Capturing the Device Logs
Overview
Using the Capturing Log feature, you can retrieve the device log stored in the SD card inserted in the
service slot. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
The Capturing Log feature saves device logs for the following four.
• Controller device log including operation log
• Engine device log
• Fax board device log
• Operation panel log
• In older models, a technician enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred. After that,
when the problem had been reproduced, the technician was able to retrieve the device log.
• However, this new feature saves the device logs at the time that problems occur. Then you can
copy the logs to an SD card.
• You can retrieve the device logs using a SD card without a network.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before retrieving the Debug Logs.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the debug logs are retrieved.
Types of device logs that can be saved
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum

storage capacity)
Controller device • Saved at all times SD card connected to the
log including service slot.
operation log • When using an 8 GB
SD card:
If the data exceeds 4
GB, log entries are
deleted starting with
the oldest.
• When using a 16 GB
SD card:
If the data exceeds 8
GB, log entries are
deleted starting with
the oldest.
Engine device • When an engine SC occurs SD card connected to the
453
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum

storage capacity)
log • When paper feeding/output stop because of a service slot (Up to 300
jam times)
• When the machine doors are opened during
normal operation
FCU device log • When a specified amount of FCU function SD card connected to the
device log is stored in the MPU. If fax service slot
application is unavailable (e.g. not installed),
the machine does not transfer the log.
Operation panel • When an error related to the operation panel Memory in the operation
log occurs. panel.
Device logs are not saved in the following conditions:

• While erasing all memory
• While data encryption equipment is installed
• While changing the firmware configuration
• Forced power OFF (accidentally disconnecting the outlet)
• Engine device log while the machine is shutting down
• When one of the following SCs occurs: SC672, SC816, SC861
The following logs are not saved:

• Logs related to the energy saver mode (Engine-off, suspend-mode, or other cases)
Network communication log
Logs related to NRS
IP-FAX log
Access log for unauthorized users (guests)
• HTTP session timeout log
• Auto log-out log
• IC card related log
• Authorization for Fax
Security of the Operation Log
The following operation logs related to security are not saved.

• User ID
• Password
• IP address
• Telephone number
• Encryption key
454
• Transition to SP mode
Storing the Device Logs on an SD Card
The model without HDD does not have space to store device logs. To store device logs on such a
model, insert an SD card into the service slot on the back of the machine.
• It is recommended to use the SD card (8 GB or 16GB) provided as a service part. The part
number of the SD card that is registered as a service part is "B6455040"(8 GB) and
"B6455060"(16 GB).
1. Insert the SD card into the service SD card slot.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Set SP5-858-001 (Save Machine Info) to "1 (ON)"
5. Set SP5-858-002 (Target) to "1 (SD)"
6. Execute SP5-858-003 (Make LogTrace Dir)
7. Turn the power switch OFF and ON.
After the power switch is turned on, the machine starts to store the device logs on the SD card.
However, because the logs on this SD card are not organized, the procedure to retrieve the logs
with the other SD card via the operation panel (next section) is required.
If you set SP5-858-002 (Target) to "0 (HDD)" in Step 5, when an SC occurs, only the log entry of
the device related to the SC is stored in the eMMC without storing a log entry in the SD card.
When the MPU is broken, the log cannot be stored in the eMMC.
Retrieving the Device Logs via Operation Panel
After turning the power off, remove the SD card for storing the device log from the service slot and then
retrieve the log.
In addition to the method mentioned above, you can copy the device logs stored on the SD card in the
service slot by inserting another SD card into the SD card slot on the operation panel.
For details, see Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with Another SD Card.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.
Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with Another SD Card
1. Insert the SD card into the slot on the side of the operation panel.
• It is recommended to use the SD card (8 GBs* or 16 GBs**) provided as a service part.

This is because the log data can be acquired much faster than when using commercially
455
available SD cards.
• Format the SD card by using SD Formatter from Panasonic before copying the logs:
https://www.sdcard.org/downloads/formatter_3/ (free software)
* The part number of the 8 GB SD card that is registered as a service part is "B6455040".
** The part number of the 16 GB SD card that is registered as a service part is "B6455060".
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Specify the date that the problem occurred in SP5-858-101 (Start Date) by setting it to the year-
month-day calendar format.
• For example, if a problem occurred on February 1, 2015, the date should be set to
"20150201".
• Be sure to check the date that the problem occurred before obtaining the logs.
5. Specify the number of days to collect the logs in SP5-858-102 (Days of Tracing).
• "2" is set by default, which is the minimum needed for investigating the problem.
• A value of "1" to "180" can be set.
6. Execute SP5-858-111 (Acquire All Info & Logs) to copy all of the log types to an SD card.
It is possible to obtain the logs separately by the following SPs.
SP Collectable Information and/or Logs
SP5-858- All of the information and logs that are collected by executing the SPs from SP5-
111 858-121 to SP5-858-145, and SMC.
SP5-858- Configuration page
121
SP5-858- Font page
122
SP5-858- Print settings list
123
SP5-858- Error log
124
SP5-858- Fax information (whether the fax destinations are included or not depends on the
131 setting of SP5-858-103.)
SP5-858- Controller log, engine log, operation panel log, FCU, and SMC.
141
SP5-858- Controller log
142
SP5-858- Engine log
143
SP5-858- Operation panel log
144
SP5-858- FCU log
456
SP Collectable Information and/or Logs

145
SP5-992- SMC
001
7. After executing the SP for copying the information and/or logs, a confirmation screen will appear.
To proceed with obtaining the information and/or logs, tap "Execute".
• The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time may be
affected by the type or format of the SD card.
Controller device log (GW device log): 2 - 20 minutes
Engine device log: 2 minutes
Operation panel device log: 2 - 20 minutes
If the estimated time is not calculated due to an error, an error code will be displayed.
Error Description
Code
-1 Other.
-2 No SD card is inserted in the SD card slot on the side of the operation panel. In this
case, insert an SD card into the SD card slot on the side of the operation panel.
-3 The SD card is locked. In this case, unlock the SD card, as shown below.
[A]: Unlocked, [B]: Locked
457
8. Wait for the information and/or logs to be copied to the SD card.
9. After a message stating that the process has completed appears on the operation panel, confirm
that the LED light next to the SD card slot on the side of the operation panel is not flashing and
then remove the SD card.
• The process of obtaining logs fails in the following cases:

- When the size of the logs to obtain exceeds the amount of space available on the SD
card.
- When the SD card is removed while the logs are being copied to it.
- When the SD card is not formatted.
• If ‘failed’ appears on the touch panel display, turn the power off, and then recover from
step 1 again.
Retrieving the Device Logs via Web Image Monitor
The device logs can be retrieved via the Web Image Monitor.
1. Access the following URL and logon as an administrator:
http://[IP address or host name]/web/entry/df/websys/direct/getSysInfo.cgi
2. Specify the date that the problem occurred and the number of days to download the logs. If the fax
destinations need to be included in the fax information, set "Obtain Fax Destination(s) Information"
458
to "On". Then click "Calculate".
• "3" is set by default for "Number of days, including date fault occurred, to obtain".
However "2", which is the minimum needed for investigating the problems, is
recommended for reducing the downloading time.
• "Obtain Fax Destination(s) Information" is set to "Off" by default.
3. The confirmation screen will appear and the information and/or logs will start downloading. To
proceed to download the information and/or logs, wait for the open-or-save dialog to appear.
• To cancel downloading, click "Cancel".

• To reconfigure some settings, click "Download again".
• Operation panel when downloading the logs:
459
4. After a while, the open-or-save dialog will appear. Specify where to download and save the file.
• The debug logs are saved with the following file names. These names are the same as
the files downloaded with SD card.
The device logs are saved with the following file names.
Controller log /LogTrace/[the model number]/watching/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss]_[a unique value].gz

(mmesg)
Engine /LogTrace/[Machine Serial]/engine/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz
device log
Operation /LogTrace/[the model number]/opepanel/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].tar.gz
panel log
SMC /LogTrace/[the model number]/smc/[the model
number]_[5992XXX]_[yyyymmdd]_[hhmmss].csv
Configuration /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/ConfigrationPage/ConfigrationPage_
page [yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Font page • /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PCL_[the page
number]_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].jpg
• /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PDF_[the page
• /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PS_[the page
Print settings • /LogTrace/[the model
list number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RPGL_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].txt
• /LogTrace/[the model
number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RTIFF_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Error log /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/ErrorLog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Fax /LogTrace/[the model number]/faxreport/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
information
FCU debug /LogTrace/[Machine Serial]/fculog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz
log
460
SMC List Card Save Function
Overview
The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD
card inserted into the operation panel SD card slot.
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before exporting the SMC sheet data.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is exported.
Procedure

2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD-card slot, and then turn ON the power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select [System/Copy SP].
5. Select SP5-992-001 (SP Text Mode) and press [EXECUTE].
6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save

001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
026 Printer SP
027 Smart Operation Panel SP
028 Smart Operation Panel UP
461
7. Press [EXECUTE].
8. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
9. “It is executing it” is shown on the screen while executing.
10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown.
• The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

• Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode.
File Names of the Saved SMC Lists
The SMC list data saved on the SD card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
462
follows.
Example:
A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP number(s). In
this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the above SP table for
the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
File creation date
Year/Month/Day (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.
• A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
function is executed.
• This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation panel
SD card slot.
Error Messages
SMC List Card Save error message:

• Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing “Exit” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
463
SP Data Import/Export
Data That Can Be Imported and Exported
• System SP
• Printer SP
• Fax SP
• Scanner SP
Exporting Device Information
When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Do SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export).
4. Select “Target” SP settings (System/Printer/Fax/Scanner) to be exported.
5. Select the “Option” setting (Unique/Secret).
Item Specification Note
Unique Unique information of the machine is Unique information that can be updated
included in the exported file if you #1. Items that are to be used to identify the
select "Unique". machine.
Example: Network Information/ Host name /
Information related to fax number /Mail
address assigned to the machine
#2. Items for specifying the options equipped
on the machine.
Example: Lot number for developer
Unique information that cannot be updated
#1. Items that may cause a problem if imported
Example: Serial number / Information related
to @Remote
#2. Items for managing the history of the
machine
Example: Time and date / Counter information
/ Installation date
#3. Setting values for the Engine
Secret Secret information is exported if you Secret information
select "Secret". #1. Data that cannot be exported without being
encrypted.
(Exported data is encrypted.)
464
Item Specification Note

Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN
code
#2. Confidential information for the customer
Example: User name / User ID / Department
code / Mail address / Phone number
#3. Personal information
Example: Document name / Image data
#4. Sensitive information for the customer
Example: MAC address / Network parameters
Note: The IP address is exported when both 'Unique' and 'Secret' are selected.
6. Select the “Crpt config” setting (Encryption).
Encryption Select whether to encrypt or not If the encryption function is used, setting of
when exporting. an encryption key is required by direct input.
If you push the "Encryption" key, • Type the arbitrary password using the
you can export secret information. soft keyboard
• Can enter up to 32 characters
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].
• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
Importing Device Information
Import device information saved on an SD card.

1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Select SP5-749-101(Import/Export: Import)
4. Select whether to include (On) or exclude (Off) the machine unique information.
If you select exclude (Off), the unique information such as machine IP address will not be imported.
5. Press [Encryption Key], if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
6. Select an encryption setting.
Unique If you want to apply the unique information to the target Refer to the above
machine, select the "Unique" key. information.
Encryption If an encrypted file is selected as the import file, this
setting is required.
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].
465
• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
Possible Solutions for Import/Export Problems
The access log file is created when export/import is executed. The file is stored in the same location as
the exported device setting information file.
If an error occurs, check the log's result code in the access log file first. Values other than 0 indicate that
an error occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file
If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note down the
error log entry, then contact your supervisor.
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 (INVALID A file import was attempted between Import files exported from the same
REQUEST) different models or machines with model with the same device
different device configurations. configurations.
4 (INVALID Failed to write the device information Check whether the destination device is
OUTPUT DIR) to the destination device. operating normally.
7( MODULE An unexpected error occurred during Switch the power off and then back on,
ERROR) import or export. and then try the operation again. If the
error persists, contact your supervisor.
8 (DISK FULL) The available storage space on the Execute the operation again after making
external medium is insufficient. sure there is enough storage space.
9 (DEVICE Failed to write or read the log file. Check whether the path to the folder for
ERROR) storing the file or the folder in which the
file is stored is missing.
466
Result Code Cause Solutions

20 (PART Failed to import some settings. The reason for the failure is logged in
FAILED) "NgCode". Check the code.
Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the
allowable range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is
missing.
4. NOT EXIST
The setting does not exist in the system.
5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed because
of the system status or interlocking with
other specified settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
The setting cannot be changed for some
other reason.
21 (INVALID Failed to import the file because it is Check whether the file format is correct.
FILE) in the wrong format in the external The import file should be a CSV file.
medium.
22 (INVALID The encryption key is not valid. Use the correct encryption key.
KEY)
• When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only on an
SD card.
• The file format for exports is CSV.
467
Card Save Function
Overview
Card Save:
• The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no
print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will
remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
• Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned
sequentially from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be created. This
file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
• Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has "Add"
and "New" menu items.
• Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If the card
becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the operation panel.
Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
• Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Limitation:
• Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status Readbacks will not
work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.
Procedure

2. Insert the SD card into the service slot or the slot on the left side of the operation panel, and then
turn ON the power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select the [Printer SP].
5. Select [SP1-XXX] .
468
6. Select [1001] (Bit Switch).
7. Select "Bit Switch 1 Settings", use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON, and then press the "#"
button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, the Card Save
option will appear in the "List/Test Print" menu.
469
8. Press [Exit] to exit SP Mode.

9. Press the [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features].
10. Press [Printer Features].
11. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add)
or Card Save (New).
12. Press [OK] and then exit the "User Tools" menu.
13. Press the [Printer] icon.
14. "Card Save" is displayed in the top left of the display panel.
15. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking.
16. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print
output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful.
17. Press [Reset] to exit Card Save mode.
18. Change the bit switch settings back to the default 00000000. Press [#] in the numeric keypad to
register the changes.
19. Remove the SD card after the power is turned OFF.
Error Messages
Card Save error messages:

• Init error: A card save process (e.g. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to initialize.
• Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
• No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
• Write error: Failed to write to the card.
• Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing [OK] will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
470
7.Troubleshooting
7. Troubleshooting
Self-Diagnostic Mode (D0B4)
SC Automatic Reboot (D0B4)
When an ordinary SC (pattern D) is generated, automatically reboot is performed. Automatic reboot or

reboot by user operation can be set by SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting out) (default value: 1
"OFF").
When a type D occurs, an automatic reboot is done or the machine display asks the customer if it can
reboot. However, when the SC occurs twice in a short time, the machine sends a report to the
@Remote server without rebooting. This is because just rebooting may not be a good solution if an SC
occurs twice.
When an automatic reboot is performed, a confirmation screen is displayed after reboot. The
confirmation screen can be canceled by pressing the [OK] key (display is not canceled only when the
main power switch is switched OFF to ON).
Screen display during reboot
• Status display on the current screen

• Post-processing ...... Post-processing during printing, etc.
• Automatic reboot ...... After operation end
Post-processing
Until automatic reboot
• Reset key (Reboot key)

Key to perform the reboot
# Cancel key is not displayed.
• Turn on spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated).
Operation during SC reboot
• The timing of SC reboot

When @Remote is enabled, and when an NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the corresponding SC is
the object of an automatic reboot.
*1 NRS alarm: Issued when an ordinary SC (type D) is generated twice while the total counter
counts 10 times.
• Time to automatic reboot
Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible, after the end of post-
processing during printing, etc.
471
7.Troubleshooting
At that time, a reboot is performed even if the MFP is operating. The engine does not start process
control when a reboot is possible.
• Automatic reboot
See the flowchart below.
• For the SC list of the automatic reboot, refer to List of Automatic Reboot Target SC (D0B4).
472
7.Troubleshooting
Service Call Conditions
Summary
The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter are put into
four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the
SC codes.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
A The SC is immediately displayed on the operation <D0B2,D0B3>
panel when SC occurs. Reset the SC and then cycle the main
The error involves the fusing unit. The machine power off and on.
operation is disabled. The user cannot reset the <D0B4>
error. Reset the SC (set SP5-810-1) and then
cycle the main power off and on.
B When a function is selected, the SC is displayed Turn the operation switch off and on.
on the operation panel.
The machine cannot be used (downtime
mitigation).
C No display on the operation panel. Only the SC history is updated.
The machine operates as usual.
D The SC is displayed on the operation panel. Turn the main n power switch off and
The machine cannot be used (machine-error SC). on.
• If the problem concerns PCBs, first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before replacing
the PCBs.
• If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before replacing motors
or sensors.
• When an ordinary SC (type D) is generated, an automatic reboot is performed. When an event
is reported by the customer support system, even in the event of an ordinary SC, a reboot is
not performed. During the automatic reboot, a confirmation screen is displayed after the
reboot.
• When automatic reboot occurs twice continuously, an SC is displayed without rebooting, and
logging count is performed. Also, when an SMC print is output, an "*" mark is added alongside
the SC number for clarity.
• The automatic reboot can be enabled or disabled with SP5-875-001 (D0B4 only) (SC
automatic reboot setting) (default value: OFF).
SP descriptions
• SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot: Reboot Setting) (D0B4 only)
Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs.
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error
473
7.Troubleshooting
code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for the pattern A or C.
SC Logging
When an SC is generated, the "total count value when the SC is generated" and the "SC code" are
logged. However, if the total count value during the SC is the same as last time, logging is not
performed.
Logged data can be checked by outputting an administrative report (SMC print). The SC history is
logged up to the last 10 entries, and if there are more than 10 entries, data are progressively deleted
starting from the oldest.
List of Automatic Reboot Target SC (D0B4)
Engine SC
For details of Automatic reboot, refer to SC Automatic Reboot (D0B4).
SC100
SC code Name Automatic Reboot

101-01 LED Error (Scanning) Yes
101-02 LED Error (LED illumination adjustment) Yes
102-00 LED Illumination Adjustment Error Yes
120-00 Scanner Home Position Error 1 Yes
121-00 Scanner Home Position Error 2 Yes
141-00 Black level detection error Yes
142-00 White level detection error Yes
144-00 SBU Communication Error Yes
161-20 MPU error (DRAM initialization failure) Yes
SC200

202-00 Polygon motor: ON timeout error Yes
203-00 Polygon motor: OFF timeout error Yes
204-00 Polygon motor: Lock signal error Yes
220-00 Laser synchronization detection error Yes
230-00 FGATE ON error Yes
231-00 FGATE OFF error Yes
240-00 LD error Yes
270-00 Image writing ASIC communication error Yes
474
7.Troubleshooting

272-00 LD driver communication error Yes
SC300

302-00 High voltage charge error Yes
350-00 ID sensor (S6) error (detailed) No
351-00 ID sensor error: Vsg measurement error (detailed) No
353-00 ID sensor (S6): Auto adjustment PWM value error (detailed) No
354-00 ID sensor (S6): Auto adjustment timeout error (detailed) No
360-01 TD sensor calibration error No
361-01 TD sensor output upper limit error (K) No
362-01 TD sensor output lower limit error (K) No
391-00 Development bias error Yes
392-00 Initial developer setting error No
SC400

440-00 Image transfer current error Yes
SC500

501-01 1st feed tray lifting error No
501-02 1st feed tray lowering error No
502-01 2nd tray (option) error (lift error) No
502-02 2nd tray (option) error (lowering error) No
503-01 3rd tray (option) error (lift error) No
503-02 3rd tray (option) error (lowering error) No
520-00 Main motor (M3) error Yes
530-01 Main fan error Yes
530-02 Exhaust fan (FAN1) error Yes
531-01 Room temperature sensor error Yes
531-02 Image temperature sensor error Yes
541-01 Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection No
541-02 Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection: Low voltage No
542-01 Reload failure: Thermistor deformation No
542-03 Reload failure: Heater damage No
542-04 Reload failure: Low voltage and thermistor deformation No
542-06 Reload failure: Low voltage and heater deformation No
475
7.Troubleshooting

543-00 Thermistor (center) (H1) high-temperature detection: Software No
544-00 Thermistor (center) (H1) high-temperature detection: Hardware No
545-01 Heater continuously heat No
545-02 Heater continuously heats: Low voltage No
547-01 Zero Cross Error (relay-contact soldering) Yes
547-02 Zero Cross Error (relay-contact fault) Yes
547-03 Zero Cross Error (low-frequency error) Yes
549-01 Temperature lowering detection No
549-02 Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage No
551-01 Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection No
551-02 Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection: Low voltage No
552-01 Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation No
552-03 Reload failure: Heater (edge) disconnection No
552-04 Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage No
552-06 Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage No
553-00 Thermistor (end) (H2) high-temperature detection: Software No
554-00 Thermistor (end) (H2) high-temperature detection: Hardware No
555-01 Thermistor (end) (H2) continuous lighting No
555-02 Thermistor (end) (H2) continuous lighting: Low voltage No
557-00 Zero cross frequency exceeded No
559-00 Fusing jam SC No
SC600
SC Name Automatic
code Reboot
620-01 ADF Communication error 1 Yes
620-02 ADF Communication error 2 Yes
622-00 2nd tray communication error Yes
623-00 3rd tray communication error Yes
667-01 Master Device Mode Setting Error Yes
667-40 Macaron1 Mode Setting Error Yes
669-01 EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM OPEN Yes
669-02 EEPROM communication error: Channel error during EEPROM OPEN Yes
669-03 EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM OPEN Yes
669-04 EEPROM communication error: Communication interrupted error during Yes
476
7.Troubleshooting
SC Name Automatic
code Reboot
EEPROM OPEN
669-05 EEPROM communication error: Communication timeout error Yes
669-06 EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM Yes
OPEN
669-07 EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM OPEN Yes
669-08 EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM OPEN Yes
669-09 EEPROM communication error: ID error Yes
669-10 EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM Close Yes
669-11 EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM data write Yes
669-12 EEPROM communication error: Channel error during EEPROM data Yes
write
669-13 EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM data write Yes
EEPROM data write
data write
669-17 EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM data write Yes
669-18 EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM data Yes
write
669-19 EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM data read Yes
669-20 EEPROM communication error: Channel error EEPROM data read Yes
669-21 EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM data read Yes
EEPROM data read
data read
669-25 EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM data read Yes
669-26 EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM data Yes
read
669-36 EEPROM communication error: Verification error Yes
669-37 EEPROM communication error: Error Detection Yes
682-01 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Invalid device ID Yes
682-06 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Channel error Yes
682-11 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Device error Yes
477
7.Troubleshooting
SC Name Automatic
code Reboot
682-16 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Communication disconnection Yes
682-21 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Communication timeout Yes
682-26 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Device operation stopped Yes
682-31 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Request buffer full Yes
682-36 TD sensor (S7) communication error – Request buffer full Yes
687-00 PER receipt failure Yes
688-00 PRREQ signal error No
SC700

701-03 Paper Feed Motor Driver Error (ADF) Yes
701-08 Paper Exit Motor Driver Error (ADF) Yes
702-01 Protection Device Intercept Error 1 (ADF) Yes
724-03 Protection Device Intercept Error No
SC900

990-00 Fail-safe SC Yes
Controller SC
For details of Automatic reboot, refer to SC Automatic Reboot (D0B4).
SC600

641-01 Engine serial communication error (Time-out) Yes
641-02 Engine serial communication error (Retry-over) Yes
641-03 Engine serial communication error (Download Error) Yes
641-04 Engine serial communication error (UART Error) Yes
670-01 Engine start up error when the machine boots up No
670-02 Engine start up error when the machine is in operation Yes
672-00 Controller start up error No
478
7.Troubleshooting

673-01 System application communication error (Smart operation panel) No
673-10 Operation panel Flair communication error (Smart Operation Panel) No
SC800

816-01 Subsystem error Yes
816-02 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Yes
816-03 Transition to STR was denied. Yes
816-04 Interrupt in kernel communication driver Yes
816-05 Preparation for transition to STR failed. Yes
816-07 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Yes
816-08 Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error Yes
816-09 Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error Yes
816-10 to 12 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Yes
816-13 open() error Yes
816-14 Memory address error Yes
816-15 to 18 open() error Yes
816-19 Double open() error Yes
816-20 open() error Yes
816-22 Parameter error Yes
816-23, 24 read() error Yes
816-25 write () error Yes
816-26 to 28 write() communication retry error Yes
816-29, 30 read() communication retry error Yes
816-35 read() error Yes
816-36 to 40 Subsystem error Yes
855-01 Wireless LAN card error (driver attachment failure) No
861-50 Storage boot failure Yes
871-01 FCU error Yes
871-02 FCU job error (Recovery possible) Yes
871-03 FCU job error (Recovery not possible) No
890-01 PaaS function: Tampering detection No
890-02 PaaS function: Suspended No
479
7.Troubleshooting
SC900
SC Name Automatic
code Reboot
920-02 Printer error (WORK memory not acquired) No
920-04 Printer error (Filter process not started) No
921-00 Printer error (Resident font not found) No
992-00 Undefined SC occurred Yes
994-00 Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally No
undetectable.
480
7.Troubleshooting
SC Code Descriptions
SC1xx
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

101-01 D Lamp error (scanning)
<D0B2,D0B3> The white peak level did not reach the prescribed threshold when the white
plate was scanned.
• CIS unit (PCB4) defective
• MPU (PCB7) defective
• Harness defective
• Condensation in the scanner unit
• CIS unit (PCB4) dirty or positioned incorrectly
• White plate dirty or positioned incorrectly
1. Perform the following operations.
• Reconnect the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).
• Reattach or clean the CIS unit (PCB4).
• Reattach or clean the white plate.
2. Replace the following parts.
• Replace the CIS unit (PCB4).
• Replace the MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).

101-01 D LED Error (Scanning)
<D0B4> The white level peak did not reach the prescribed threshold when the white guide
plate was scanned.
• Condensation in scanner unit
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• LEDB defective
• SBU defective
• White Reference Seal dirty or installed incorrectly
• White Guide Plate, or White Roller dirty or installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again,
do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each
step.
1. Clean the white guide plate, or white roller.
481
7.Troubleshooting

2. Reconnect the following connectors:
• SBU - MPU harness
• SBU - LEDB harness (FFC)
3. Check the white reference seal that attached back of sheet-through exposure
glass. Replace the sheet-through exposure glass, if dirty or damaged.
4. Replace the white guide plate, or the white roller.
5. Replace the Scanner Carriage.
6. Replace the SBU.
7. Replace the MPU.
8. Replace the following harnesses:

101-02 D LED Error (LED illumination adjustment)
<D0B4> The peak level did not reach the specified threshold on both sides when scanning
the white reference seal during initial adjustment LEDB lighting.
• LEDB defective
• SBU defective
• White Reference Seal dirty or installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
step.
4. Replace the LEDB.
5. Replace the SBU.
6. Replace the MPU.
482
7.Troubleshooting


102-00 D LED light adjustment error
<D0B2,D0B3> The white peak level exceeded the prescribed threshold when the white
plate was scanned after a specified number of adjustments.
1. Reconnect the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4)
2. Replace the following parts
• Replace the CIS unit (PCB4)
• Replace the MPU (PCB7)
• Replace the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4)

102-00 D LED Illumination Adjustment Error
<D0B4> The white level peak reached the prescribed threshold when the white plate was
scanned after a specified number of adjustments.
• LEDB defective
• SBU defective
• MPU defective
step.
4. Replace the LEDB.
5. Replace the SBU.
6. Replace the MPU.
483
7.Troubleshooting


120-00 D Scanner home position error 1
<D0B2,D0B3> • The scanner home position sensor does not go OFF even if the scanner
moves 30 mm at homing.
• The scanner home position sensor does not go OFF even if the scanner
moves 13 mm at the white balance adjustment.
• The scanner home position sensor goes ON before the scanner
reaches the specified position (in the sensor OFF area) at returning
from the scanning position.
• This SC is issued only when the error signal of the scanner HP sensor
(S1) is detected three times consecutively to prevent the sensor
detection error due to some noise.
• Motor driver defective
• Motor defective
• Scanner HP sensor (S1) defective
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly
• Check the harness.
• Check the timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage installation.
• Replace the scanner motor (M1).
• Replace the scanner HP sensor (S1).

120-00 D Scanner Home Position Error 1
<D0B4> The scanner home position sensor (S42) does not go OFF.
Details:
Error detection timing
• During homing (when the machine is turned ON or when it returns from
energy saving mode)
• During an automatic adjustment (when the machine is turned ON or when it
returns from energy saving mode)
• During a scan from the ADF or exposure glass.
• At original size detection operation
484
7.Troubleshooting

• Scanner motor driver (MPU) defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Scanner home position sensor defective
do the following steps.
1. Reconnect the all connectors.
2. Check the timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage installation.
3. Replace the following parts:
• Replace the HP sensor.
• Replace the MPU.
• Replace the scanner motor.
• Replace the harness.

121-00 D Scanner home position error 2
<D0B2,D0B3> • The scanner home position sensor does not go ON even if the scanner
moves 480 mm (from the sensor off area) or 30 mm (from the sensor on
position) at homing.
• The scanner home position sensor goes OFF on starting the DF
scanning/Book scanning.
• The scanner home position sensor does not go ON when the scanner
reaches the specified position (in the sensor ON area) from the
scanning position
• This SC is issued only when the error signal of the scanner HP sensor
(S1) is detected three times consecutively to prevent the sensor
detection error due to some noise.
• Motor driver defective
• Motor defective
• Scanner HP sensor (S1) defective
• Check the harness.
• Check the timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage installation.
485
7.Troubleshooting

• Replace the scanner motor (M1).
• Replace the scanner HP sensor (S1).

121-00 D Scanner Home Position Error 2
<D0B4> The scanner home position sensor (S42) does not go ON.
Details:
Error detection timing
• During homing (when the machine is turned ON or when it returns from
energy saving mode)
• During an automatic adjustment (when the machine is turned ON or when it
returns from energy saving mode)
• During a scan from the ADF or exposure glass.
• At original size detection operation
• Scanner motor driver (MPU) defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Scanner home position sensor defective
do the following steps.
1. Reconnect the all connectors.
2. Check the timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage installation.
3. Replace the following parts:
• Replace the HP sensor.
• Replace the scanner motor.

141-00 D Black level detection error
<D0B2,D0B3> The black level cannot be adjusted within the specified value.
1. Reconnect the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).
486
7.Troubleshooting


141-00 D Black level detection error
<D0B4> The black level cannot be reached the target during auto gain control.
• Scanner Carriage defective
• MPU defective
step.
• Scanner Carriage - MPU harness (FFC)
3. Replace the MPU.

142-00 D White level detection error
<D0B2,D0B3> The white level cannot be adjusted within the specified value.
• CIS unit (PCB4) dirty or positioned incorrectly
• White plate dirty or positioned incorrectly
• Reconnect the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).
• Reattach or clean the CIS unit (PCB4).
• Reattach or clean the white plate.
487
7.Troubleshooting


142-00 D White level detection error
<D0B4> The white level cannot be adjusted to the second target level within the target
during auto gain control.
• White plate dirty or installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
step.
3. Replace the scanner carriage.
4. Replace the MPU.

144-00 D Scanner communication error
<D0B2,D0B3> The machine cannot communicate in the MPU (PCB7), or the
communication result is unexpected.
• Unexpected communication
• Power failure
1. Reconnect the harness of the CIS unit (PCB4).
488
7.Troubleshooting

144-00 D SBU Communication Error
<D0B4> • The machine cannot detect that the SBU is connected.
• The machine cannot communicate with the SBU.
• The communication data is incorrect.
• MPU defective
step.
3. Replace the MPU.

161-20 D MPU error (DRAM initialization failure)
<D0B4> An error occurred during performed every time the machine is turned on, or returns
to full operation from energy saving mode.
• MPU board defective (Macaron/ DRAM device connection error)
• DRAM device defective
• Reconnect the all connectors on MPU board if they are disconnected, or
loose.
SC2xx

202-00 D Polygon motor: ON timeout error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Polygon motor locking has not been detected when 8 seconds have
elapsed after the machine turned the polygon motor ON.
• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not
connected correctly.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly. (Polygon
controller)
489
7.Troubleshooting

• Check the harness of the laser unit (disconnected, etc.).
• Check if the laser unit connector is connected.
• Check if the PSU 24 V power is output.
• Replace the interface harness of the laser unit.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the MPU (PCB7)
• Replace the PSU (PCB1)

203-00 D Polygon motor: OFF timeout error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Polygon motor has not stopped when 3 seconds have elapsed after
the machine turned the polygon motor OFF.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective.
• Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly.
• Replace the PSU (PCB1).

204-00 D Polygon motor: Lock signal error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> An error is detected during the polygon motor rotation.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective.
• Replace the PSU (PCB1).
490
7.Troubleshooting

220-00 D Laser synchronization detection error
<D0B2,D0B3> An error of the laser synchronizing is detected at the LD lighting.
• The interface harness to the synchronization detection unit damaged or
not connected correctly.
• Synchronization detection board defective
• Beam does not enter photodetector.

220-00 D Laser synchronization detection error
<D0B4> An error of the laser synchronizing is detected at the LD lighting.
• Laser unit defective
• MPU defective
• LDB harness defective
• Condensation of the laser unit.
• Reconnect the following harnes:
• Laser unit - MPU harness
• Replace the following harnes:

230-00 D FGATE ON error
<D0B4> Write image length signal (FGATE signal) absent even at the time to start writing.
• MPU failure (Write ASIC failure)
• Connection error between MPU engine and controller (Harness disconnection,
etc. between CTL ASIC and write ASIC).

231-00 D FGATE OFF error
<D0B4> When the write image length signal (FGATE signal) is absent even at the time to
491
7.Troubleshooting

stop writing.
• MPU failure (Write ASIC failure)
• Connection error between MPU engine and controller (Harness disconnection,
etc. between CTL ASIC and write ASIC).

240-00 D LD error
<D0B4> • When the LD current during LD lighting exceeds the specfied value.
• When the LD driver initialization operation at the time of LD lighting does not
complete normally.
• When the harness of the LDB becomes disconnected (connector
disconnection).
• LDB harness connection error.
• LD characteristic degradation (LD breakdown, current-to-optical output
characteristic degradation).
• LDB failure
• LDB harness defect.
• Replace the following harnesses:

270-00 D Image writing ASIC communication error
<D0B4> When communication between the CPU and writing ASIC was not performed
correctly.
• MPU failure

272-00 D LD driver communication error
<D0B4> When the power supply for the LD board is defective.
• LDB harness defective
• MPU defective (LD5V Power error)
492
7.Troubleshooting

• LDB defective (LD drive error)
• Replace the following harnesses:
SC3xx

302-00 D High voltage charge error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The machine detects "1" (error) 10 times consecutively when
monitoring the output error signal every 20 msec (excluding in Sleep
mode or with the front door open).
• PCDU defective.
• HVPS (PCB3) board harness defective.
• Replace the PCDU.
• Replace the harness of the HVPS (PCB3) board.

350-00 D ID sensor (S6) error (detailed)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
Factory Use only
One of the conditions below occurs during the ID sensor detection
(only when the SP5-995-001 is set to “1”).
• Vsp > 2.5V
• Vsg < 2.5V
• Vsp = 0V
• Vsg = 0V
• ID sensor (S6) defective.
• ID sensor (S6) harness damaged.
• ID sensor (S6) not connected correctly.
• MPU (PCB7) defective.
• Laser unit defective.
• Imaging density fault.
• HVPS (PCB3) board defective.
• ID sensor (S6) dirt.
493
7.Troubleshooting

• Clean the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace the ID sensor (S6).
• Replace and reset the ID sensor (S6) harness.
• Replace the HVPS (PCB3) board.

351-00 D ID sensor error: Vsg measurement error (detailed)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
Factory Use only
Only when the following two conditions are met during the ID sensor
detection (only when the SP5-995-001 is set to “1”).
• Vsg is 5V and LED drive current is minimum (PWM=0).

353-00 D ID sensor (S6): Auto adjustment PWM value error (detailed)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
Factory Use only
One of the following conditions occurs when the ID sensor (S6) is
adjusting Vsg automatically, this SC is issued (only when the SP5-
995-001 is set to “1”).
• Vsg is less than 4 V with the LED drive current set to maximum
(PWM=1023).
• Vsg is more than 4 V with the LED drive current set to minimum
(PWM=1).
494
7.Troubleshooting


354-00 D ID sensor (S6): Auto adjustment timeout error (detailed)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
Factory Use only
If Vsg is not automatically adjusted to 4.0±0.2 V twice consecutively
when the ID sensor (S6) is adjusting Vsg automatically, this SC is
issued (only when the SP5-995-001 is set to “1”).

360-01 D TD sensor calibration error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The error of the TD sensor calibration is determined if the TD sensor
calibration is not out of the target range described below. The TD
495
7.Troubleshooting

sensor calibration error is detected three times consecutively, this SC
is issued.
• Upper threshold (SP2-992-001).
• Lower threshold (SP2-992-002).
• TD sensor defective.
• TD sensor harness not connected correctly or damaged.
• Not initial developer.
• Replace the harness of the TD sensor (S7).
• Insert the connector of the TD sensor (S7).
• Replace the development unit.

361-01 D TD sensor output upper limit error (K)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> TD sensor output:
The Vt (SP2-220-004) output continuously exceeds the upper limit
threshold value (SP2-992-001) for the time of the upper limit threshold
(SP2-992-003).
TD sensor (S7) is not connected correctly.
• Check if the TD sensor (S7) is connected properly.
• Check the TD Sensor harness (disconnected, etc.).
• Replace the development unit if any errors detected.

362-01 D TD sensor output lower limit error (K)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> TD sensor output:
The Vt (SP2-220-004) output is continuously below the lower limit
threshold value (SP2-992-002) for the time of the lower limit threshold
(SP2-992-004).
TD sensor (S7) is not connected correctly.
• Check if the TD sensor connector is connected.
• Check the TD Sensor harness (disconnected, etc.).
• Replace the development unit if some error is detected.

391-00 D Development bias error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The machine detects “0” (abnormality) 10 times consecutively in
signal output from the detection target (PWM)
496
7.Troubleshooting

• PCDU defective.
• HVPS (PCB3) board harness defective.

392-00 D Initial developer setting error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> • A read error for the ID sensor pattern at the initial developer
setting is detected.
• If the Vsp output is more than 2.5 V, the machine detects that
there is no developer, and displays SC.
• The OPC drum does not rotate.
• The development roller does not rotate.
• Replace the developer.
SC4xx

440-00 D Image transfer current error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The machine detects "1" (error) 10 times consecutively when
monitoring the output error signal every 20 msec (excluding in Sleep
mode or with the front door open).
Right door not closed correctly.
The PCDU is not in the correct position.
HVPS (PCB3) board defective.
HVPS (PCB3) board harness defective.
• Close the right door correctly.
• Reinstall the PCDU correctly or replace the PCDU.
SC5xx

501-01 D 1st feed tray lifting error
<D0B2,D0B3> The machine does not detect the upper limit sensor for 10,000 msec when
497
7.Troubleshooting

the tray bottom plate is raised either at tray initialization (upper limit not
detected) or to check the tray bottom plate and amount of remaining paper.
* If the error occurs three times consecutively, it is handled as a 1st feed tray
lifting error. Up to two times, the error is handled by a tray reset.
• Tray lift motor error/connector disconnected

• Upper limit sensor error/connector disconnected
• Harness disconnected
• PCB malfunction
• Remaining paper or other object is stuck in between the tray and tray lift
motor.
• Paper not set properly
• Bottom plate broken
• Pickup roller abnormality
• Pickup arm broken
• Remaining paper or other object stuck inside the tray.
• Turn the power off and on.
• Pull out the tray and check the paper. Check whether there is too much
paper or it is skewed.
• Remove the tray and check whether there are any paper scraps on the
tray lift motor.
• Check whether there are any paper scraps on the upper limit sensor.
• Check the connection of the upper limit sensor connector.
• Check the connections of the IOB connectors (upper limit sensor, tray
lift motor).
• Check the connection of the tray lift motor connector.
• Check the upper limit sensor. Run an IO check on the upper limit sensor
and replace it if faulty.
• Check the tray lift motor. Run an IO check on the tray lift motor and
replace it if faulty.
• Check the paper feed unit harness, and replace it if faulty.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the tray lift
motor and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the paper
feed unit and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Replace the IOB.
498
7.Troubleshooting

501-01 B 1st feed tray lifting error
<D0B4> The machine does not detect the upper limit sensor for 10,000 msec when the tray
bottom plate is raised either at tray initialization (upper limit not detected) or to
check the tray bottom plate and amount of remaining paper.
* If the error occurs three times consecutively, it is handled as a 1st feed tray lifting
error. Up to two times, the error is handled by a tray reset.
• Tray lift motor error/connector disconnected

• Upper limit sensor error/connector disconnected
• Harness disconnected
• PCB malfunction
motor.
• Pull out the tray and check the paper. Check whether there is too much paper
or it is skewed.
• Remove the tray and check whether there are any paper scraps on the tray lift
motor.
• Check the connections of the IOB connectors (upper limit sensor, tray lift
motor).
• Check the upper limit sensor. Run an IO check on the upper limit sensor and
• Check the tray lift motor. Run an IO check on the tray lift motor and replace it if
faulty.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the tray lift motor
and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the paper feed unit
499
7.Troubleshooting

501-02 D 1st feed tray lowering error
<D0B2,D0B3> When the upper limit and paper load are simultaneously detected at power-
on or tray installation, the upper limit detection sensor does not turn off even
when the tray is lowered for 1,000 msec.
* If the machine detects an error five times consecutively, it is handled as a
1st feed tray lowering error. Up to four times, the error is handled by a tray
reset.
• Tray lift motor abnormality / disconnected connector
• Upper limit sensor abnormality / disconnected connector
• Harness disconnection
• PCB malfunction
motor.
• Pull out the tray and check the paper. Check whether there is too much
paper or it is skewed.
• Remove the tray and check whether there are any paper scraps in the
tray lift motor.
• Check the connections of the IOB connectors (upper limit sensor, tray
lift motor).
• Check the upper limit sensor. Run an IO check on the upper limit sensor
and replace it if faulty.
• Check the tray lift motor. Run an IO check on the tray lift motor and
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the tray lift
motor and replace the harness if any problems are found.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the paper
feed unit and replace the harness if any problems are found.
500
7.Troubleshooting

• Replace the IOB

501-02 B 1st feed tray lowering error
<D0B4> When the upper limit and paper load are simultaneously detected at power-on or
tray installation, the upper limit detection sensor does not turn off even when the
tray is lowered for 1,000 msec.
* If the machine detects an error five times consecutively, it is handled as a 1st
feed tray lowering error. Up to four times, the error is handled by a tray reset.
• Tray lift motor abnormality / disconnected connector
• Upper limit sensor abnormality / disconnected connector
• Harness disconnection
• PCB malfunction
motor.
• Pull out the tray and check the paper. Check whether there is too much paper
or it is skewed.
• Remove the tray and check whether there are any paper scraps in the tray lift
motor.
• Check the connections of the IOB connectors (upper limit sensor, tray lift
motor).
• Check the upper limit sensor. Run an IO check on the upper limit sensor and
• Check the tray lift motor. Run an IO check on the tray lift motor and replace it if
faulty.
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the tray lift motor
• Check for problems with the harness between the IOB and the paper feed unit
501
7.Troubleshooting

• Replace the IOB

502-01 B 2nd tray (option) error (lift error)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The tray lift sensor does not detect the tray bottom plate or stack of
paper for 10 seconds after the machine starts to initialize all units.
* If the machine detects an error three times consecutively, this SC is
issued.
• Tray lift motor (M4) error or harness disconnected.
• Tray lift sensor error or harness disconnected.
• Each harness damaged.
• Mainboard defective.
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the tray
and tray lift motor (M4) or in the tray.
• Paper set fault.
• Bottom plate defective.
• Paper feed roller missing.
• Tray lift sensor feeler defective.
• Reload the paper.
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor (M4).
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the tray lift sensor.
• Replace the main board.
• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the tray lift sensor feeler.
• Replace the bottom plate.

502-02 B 2nd tray (option) error (lowering error)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The tray lift sensor does not turn off for 1,000 msec. after the tray
bottom plate has started to lower when the upper limit and paper load
are simultaneously detected at the power-on or tray installation.
* If the machine detects an error five times consecutively, this SC is
issued.
502
7.Troubleshooting

and tray lift motor (M4) or in the tray.
• Replace the tray lift sensor feeler
• Replace the tray bottom plate.

503-01 B 3rd tray (option) error (lift error)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The tray lift sensor does not detect the tray bottom plate or stack of
paper for 10 seconds after the machine starts to initialize all units.
* If the machine detects an error three times consecutively, this SC is
issued.
and tray lift motor (M4).
• Tray bottom plate defective.
503
7.Troubleshooting

• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught in the tray.
• Replace the tray bottom plate.

503-02 B 3rd tray (option) error (lowering error)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The tray lift sensor does not turn off for 1,000 msec. after the tray
bottom plate has started to lower when the upper limit and paper load
are simultaneously detected at the power-on or tray installation.
* If the machine detects an error five times consecutively, this SC is
issued.
and tray lift motor (M4).
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught in the tray.
504
7.Troubleshooting

• Replace the bottom plate.

520-00 D Main motor (M3) error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> "High" signal is detected continuously 20 times or more when the
main motor (M3) is turned on.
Detection cycle: 100 msec
• Motor lock due to overload to the drive chain.
• Motor driver defective.
• Replace the main motor (M3).

530-01 D Main fan error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> A motor lock error is detected for 5 seconds or more when the main
fan (FAN2) is turned on.
Main fan motor defective.
Replace the main fan (FAN2).

530-02 D Exhaust fan (FAN1) error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> A motor lock error is detected for 5 seconds or more when the exhaust
fan (FAN1) is turned on.
Exhaust fan (FAN1) motor defective.
Replace the exhaust fan (FAN1).

531-01 D Room temperature sensor error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Temperature thermistor output is 0.56V or less or 3.0V or more.
• Temperature sensor disconnected.
• Temperature sensor malfunction.
• Reconnect the temperature sensor connector.
• Replace the temperature sensor.
• Replace the temperature sensor harness.
505
7.Troubleshooting

531-02 D Image temperature sensor error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Temperature thermistor output is 0.56V or less or 3.0V or more.
• Temperature sensor disconnected.
• Temperature sensor malfunction.
• Reconnect the temperature sensor connector.
• Replace the temperature sensor.
• Replace the temperature sensor harness.

541-01 A Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Temperature of 0°C or lower is detected ten or more times
consecutively for 4 seconds.
• Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
• Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection.
• Thermistor (center) (H1) not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Replace the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5-810-001.

541-02 A Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
• A temperature of 0°C or lower is detected for 5 seconds
continuously.
• The error is detected ten or more times.
• Thermistor (center) (H1) disconnection.
• Thermistor (center) (H1) not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Clear this SC by executing SP5 -810-001.

542-01 A Reload failure: Thermistor deformation
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The temperature of 22°C or lower is detected five times consecutively
506
7.Troubleshooting

for 2 seconds.
• Measurement begins 2 seconds after the heater is turned on.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts two
seconds after the temperature reaches 45°C.
• If the reload temperature is reached during measuring, the
measurement is canceled.
• Inclination measurement is not performed during pre-rotation.
• Thermistor deformed.
• Thermistor out of position.
• Out of guaranteed input voltage.

542-03 A Reload failure: Heater damage
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Normal (no pre-rotation):
• The reload temperature is not reached for 17 seconds after
heater control starts.
Pre-rotation:
• Heater damaged.
• After over-heat prevention.
• Replace the heater.

542-04 D Reload failure: Low voltage and thermistor deformation
<D0B2,D0B3> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
The temperature of 17°C or lower is detected five times consecutively for 3
seconds.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts 15 seconds
after the temperature reaches 45°C.
507
7.Troubleshooting


542-04 C Reload failure: Low voltage and thermistor deformation
<D0B4> An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is low.
seconds.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts 15 seconds after the
temperature reaches 45°C.
• If the reload temperature is reached during measuring, the measurement is
canceled.

542-06 D Reload failure: Low voltage and heater deformation
• Normal (no pre-rotation):
The reload temperature is not reached for 24 seconds after heater
control starts.
• Pre-rotation:
The reload temperature is not reached for 28 seconds after heater
control starts.
• Heater damaged.
508
7.Troubleshooting


542-06 C Reload failure: Low voltage and heater deformation
• Normal (no pre-rotation):
The reload temperature is not reached for 24 seconds after heater control
starts.
• Pre-rotation:
The reload temperature is not reached for 28 seconds after heater control
starts.
• Heater damaged.

543-00 A Thermistor (center) (H1) high-temperature detection: Software
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> An error is detected when the temperature of 230°C or higher is
detected for 1 second continuously.
• Detection with the thermistor (center) (H1).
• Detection time: 10 or more.
• Triac short-circuit.

544-00 A Thermistor (center) (H1) high-temperature detection: Hardware
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> An error is detected when the temperature of 250°C or higher is
detected.
• Detection with the thermistor (center) (H1).
• MPU (PCB7) control board defective.
• Fusing control error.
509
7.Troubleshooting

545-01 A Heater continuously heat
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> After reloading, the heater (center) turns on at full power for 10
seconds or more continuously.
• Thermistor detection error.
• Heater damaged.

545-02 D Heater continuously heats: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3> Detected only when the waiting for input voltage is the same as the normal
voltage.
After reloading, the heater (center) turns on at full power for 10 seconds or
more continuously.
• Heater damaged.

545-02 C Heater continuously heats: Low voltage
<D0B4> Detected only when the waiting for input voltage is the same as the normal
voltage.
After reloading, the heater (edge) turns on at full power for 10 seconds or more
continuously.
• Heater damaged.

547-01 D Zero Cross Error (relay-contact soldering)
510
7.Troubleshooting

<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> When a zero cross signal is detected consecutively three times or
more, this SC is issued.
When a zero cross signal is detected consecutively less than three
times, the error counter for the zero cross signal increments, and then
the machine retries the checking out the zero cross signal again.
• Fusing relay defective (contact soldering, contact open).
• Drive circuit of the fusing relay defective.
• PSU fuse (24 VS) damaged.
• Frequency instability of the input power line.
• Replace the fusing relay.
• Replace the fuse of the PSU (PCB1).

547-02 D Zero Cross Error (relay-contact fault)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> When a zero cross signal is detected consecutively three times or
more, this SC is issued.
When a zero cross signal is detected consecutively less than three
times, the machine tries to turn off the relay of the fusing unit.
• Fusing relay defective (contact soldering, contact open).

547-03 D Zero Cross Error (low-frequency error)
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> When the low frequency is detected once, the SC557 is determined.
When a low frequency is detected twice or more, this SC is issued.
• Fusing relay defective (contact soldering, contact open)
511
7.Troubleshooting

549-01 D Temperature lowering detection
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> If the target temperature of -30°C is detected for more than 30
seconds after the thermistor (center) has performed all corrections 30
seconds after the registration roller restarts, this SC is issued.
• Heater damaged during paper feeding.
• Heater not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the heater.

549-02 D Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> If the target temperature of -30°C is detected for more than 30
seconds after the thermistor (end) has performed all corrections 30
seconds after the registration roller restarts, this SC is issued.
• Loose connectors.
• Lowering the input voltage.

<D0B2,D0B3> When [specified temperature B] is not reached within the time specified with
SP1-105-050 before the low voltage job and after rotation is completed.

549-03 C Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage
<D0B4> When [specified temperature B] is not reached within the time specified with SP1-
105-050 before the low voltage job and after rotation is completed.
512
7.Troubleshooting


<D0B2,D0B3> After the machine has entered the CPM down level 3 in the low voltage
operation mode, the center or edge thermistor temperature <= down
temperature is detected continuously for the time specified with SP1-124-
104 (default: 30 sec).

549-04 C Temperature lowering detection: Low voltage
<D0B4> After the machine has entered the CPM down level 3 in the low voltage operation
mode, the center or edge thermistor temperature <= down temperature is detected
continuously for the time specified with SP1-124-104 (default: 30 sec).

551-01 A Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Temperature of 0°C or lower is detected for 4 seconds continuously.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the thermistor (end).
• Replace the thermistor (end).
513
7.Troubleshooting

551-02 A Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> • An error is detected only when the input voltage at power-on is
low.
• A temperature of 0°C or lower is detected for 5 seconds
continuously.
• Detection interval: 0.1 seconds.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) disconnection.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the thermistor (end).

552-01 A Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> The temperature of 20°C or lower is detected five times consecutively
for 2 seconds.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts two
seconds after the temperature reaches 45°C.
• Measurement is not performed during pre-rotation.

552-03 A Reload failure: Heater (edge) disconnection
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> Normal (no pre-rotation):
Pre-rotation:
514
7.Troubleshooting

• Heater (edge) damaged.
• Replace the heater (edge).

552-04 D Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage
seconds.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts 15 seconds
after the temperature reaches 45°C.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) deformed.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) out of position.

552-04 C Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage
seconds.
• If the temperature is less than 45°C, measurement starts 15 seconds after the
temperature reaches 45°C.
• If the reload temperature is reached during measuring, the measurement is
canceled.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) deformed.
515
7.Troubleshooting

• Thermistor (end) (H2) out of position.

552-06 D Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage
• Normal (no pre-rotation): The reload temperature is not reached for 27
seconds after heater control starts.
• Pre-rotation: The reload temperature is not reached for 30 seconds after
• Heater damaged.

552-06 C Reload failure: Thermistor (end) (H2) deformation: Low voltage
• Normal (no pre-rotation): The reload temperature is not reached for 27
seconds after heater control starts.
• Pre-rotation: The reload temperature is not reached for 30 seconds after
• Heater damaged.

553-00 A Thermistor (end) (H2) high-temperature detection: Software
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> • Temperature above 230°C is detected for 1 second continuously.
• Detection with the thermistor (end).
Detection time: 10 or more.
Measurement interval: 0.1 sec.
516
7.Troubleshooting

554-00 A Thermistor (end) (H2) high-temperature detection: Hardware
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> A temperature of 250°C or higher is detected by the thermistor (end).
• Fusing control error.

555-01 A Thermistor (end) (H2) continuous lighting
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> After reloading, the heater (center) turns on at full power for 10
seconds or more continuously.
• Thermistor (end) (H2) detection error.
• Heater damaged.

555-02 D Thermistor (end) (H2) continuous lighting: Low voltage
<D0B2,D0B3> After reloading, the heater (edge) turns on at full power for 10 seconds or
more continuously.
• Heater damaged.

555-02 C Thermistor (end) (H2) continuous lighting: Low voltage
<D0B4> After reloading, the heater (edge) turns on at full power for 20 seconds or more
continuously.
• Heater damaged.
517
7.Troubleshooting


557-00 C Zero cross frequency exceeded
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> When a low frequency is detected once, this SC is issued.
Powerline noise.
Turn the power off and on.

559-00 A Fusing jam SC
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> A fusing jam, which does not reach the paper exit sensor (S5), is
detected three times consecutively.
• If paper exits normally (passes the paper exit sensor (S5)), the
count will be cleared.
• This detection is effective only when the setting of SP1-159-001
(Fusing jam 3 times SC setting) is set to “1 (on)”. (Default: 0 (off))
• The fusing jam counter value is retained after turning the power
off/on.
• The fusing jam counter is reset when clearing this SC after
SC559-00 has been issued.
Paper winding around the fusing roller.
• Replace the fusing unit.
SC6xx

620-01 D ADF Communication error 1
<D0B4> After ADF connection was recognized on startup, an error is detected.
(disconnection detection)
• ADF connection error
• ADF defection
• MPU defective
• Noise contamination
• Check if all connectors related to ADF are connected securely.
518
7.Troubleshooting

Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or loose.
• Check for the existence of noise or software bugs in the machine and ADF
firmware. Run the firmware update when a new firmware is released.
• Check the harness. Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
• Check for MPU malfunction and replace the MPU if any abnormalities exist.
• Check if there are any signs of a short circuit on the ADF Main Board. If there
are any defects, replace the board.

620-02 D ADF Communication error 2
<D0B4> When detecting a retry due to a communication error after initially connecting
successfully, or when detecting an incompatible ADF unit connection (i.e., an ADF
model code that does not comply with the standard)
• ADF connection error
• ADF defection
• MPU defective
• Noise contamination
• Incompatible ADF unit connection (ADF model code not compliant with the
standard)
• Do not use an incompatible ADF. Replace it with a compatible ADF.
• Perform the same recovery procedures as the SC620-01 if there is recurrence
when using a compatible ADF.

622-00 D 2nd tray communication error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> • An error occurs during the line connection between the main
machine and the optional PFU (2nd tray).
• A communication error report is received between the main
machine and the optional PFU (2nd tray).
• The 2nd paper tray's main board defective.
• 2nd tray and the machine are not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the 2nd tray connection cable.
• Replace MPU (PCB7).
• Replace the 2nd tray.
519
7.Troubleshooting

623-00 D 3rd tray communication error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> • An error occurs during the line connection between the main
machine and the optional PFU (3rd tray).
• A communication error report is received between the main
machine and the optional PFU (3rd tray).
• 2nd tray main board defective.
• 3rd tray main board defective.
• 2nd tray and 3rd tray not connected correctly.
• Reconnect the 2nd tray and 3rd tray connection cable.
• Replace the 3rd tray.

641-01 D Engine serial communication error (Time-out)
<D0B4> No response over the specified time.
• MPU or software failure
• Turn the main power off/on.

641-02 D Engine serial communication error (Retry-over)
<D0B4> When commands are sent in the normal mode, communication fails over the upper
limit numbers (3 times) of command byte retry.

641-03 D Engine serial communication error (Download Error)
<D0B4> In the download command mode (ESIF_LECI_DLCOM) or download data mode
(ESIF_LECI_DLDAT), a communication error is returned from engine.

641-04 D Engine serial communication error (UART Error)
<D0B4> UART receive errors (Break condition, Framing, Parity or Overrun error) are
detected.
520
7.Troubleshooting

667-01 D Master Device Mode Setting Error
<D0B4> The machine detects the CPU mode error when starting up, or recovery from
energy saving mode.
Board defects (parts mounting defects, solder scraps,etc.)
Recovery via automatic reboot

667-40 D Macaron1 Mode Setting Error
<D0B4> The machine detects the Macaron1 mode error when starting up, or recovery from
energy saving mode.
Board defects (parts mounting defects, solder scraps,etc.)
Recovery via automatic reboot

669-01 D EEPROM communication error – Access-type designation error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-02 D EEPROM communication error – Bus error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-03 D EEPROM communication error – Device error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-04 D EEPROM communication error – Communication abort error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-05 D EEPROM communication error – Communication failed error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-06 D EEPROM communication error – Device access inhibited
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-07 D EEPROM communication error – Buffer full error
<D0B2,D0B3>
669-08 D EEPROM communication error – Request parameter error
<D0B2,D0B3>
When the machine retries three times after an error report has been
received in the EEPROM communication, but the machine does not recover
the communication, this SC is issued.
• Noise
• EEPROM not connected
• EEPROM mounted in reverse
521
7.Troubleshooting

• EEPROM defective
EEPROM not connected:
• Reinstall the EEPROM on the MPU (PCB7).
EEPROM mounted in reverse:
• Mount the EEPROM correctly on the MPU (PCB7).
EEPROM defective:
• Replace the EEPROM on the MPU (PCB7).
SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

669-01 D EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-02 D EEPROM communication error: Channel error during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-03 D EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-04 D EEPROM communication error: Communication interrupted error during EEPROM
<D0B4> OPEN
669-05 D EEPROM communication error: Communication timeout error
<D0B4>
669-06 D EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-07 D EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-08 D EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM OPEN
<D0B4>
669-09 D EEPROM communication error: ID error
<D0B4>
669-10 D EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM Close
<D0B4>
669-11 D EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-12 D EEPROM communication error: Channel error during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-13 D EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
<D0B4> data write
522
7.Troubleshooting

<D0B4>
669-16 D EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-17 D EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-18 D EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM data write
<D0B4>
669-19 D EEPROM communication error: ID error during EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-20 D EEPROM communication error: Channel error EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-21 D EEPROM communication error: Device error during EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
<D0B4> data read
<D0B4>
669-24 D EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-25 D EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-26 D EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM data read
<D0B4>
669-36 D EEPROM communication error: Verification error
<D0B4>
669-37 D EEPROM communication error: Error Detection
<D0B4>
An error is notified during EEPROM communication and the machine does not
recover after three retries.
• Electromagnetic noise
• EEPROM defective
• MPU defective
Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power off/on after each
step.
1. Re-install the EEPROM on the MPU.
523
7.Troubleshooting

2. Replace the EEPROM on the MPU.
3. Replace the MPU.

670-01 D Engine start up error when the machine boots up
<D0B4> • /ENGRDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on.
• PCI I/F is not linked up when the machine returns from energy saving mode.
• EC/PC/SC response was not received within specified time from power on.
• Writing to Rapi driver failed (the other party not found through PCI).
• MPU is down / unstable
• MPU defective
• Check if the MPU is connected securely.
• Replace the MPU board.
• Replace the PSU board.

670-02 D Engine start up error when the machine is in operation
<D0B4> MPU reset unexpectedly.
• CPU reset by software
• CPU reset by anomaly CPU
• CPU reset by hardware defect / noise
• Hardware defect
• Check the machine and CTL firmware version.
• Run the firmware update when there is a new firmware released.
• Check if the MPU is connected securely.
• Replace the MPU board.
• Replace the PSU board.

672-00 D Controller start up error
<D0B4> After the machine was powered on, communication between the MPU (controller)
and the operation panel was not established.
• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• MPU defective
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late
524
7.Troubleshooting

• Turn the main switch off and on.
• Reconnect the harness of the operation panel.
• Replace the cable/harness between operation panel and MPU.

• MPU defective
• Controller late

<D0B4> Communication error (send) between operation panel and MPU (controller) after
machine is powered on.
• MPU defective
• Controller late

<D0B4> Communication with MPU (controller) was interrupted after a normal startup.
525
7.Troubleshooting

• MPU defective
• Controller late

• MPU defective
• Controller late

<D0B4> This error occurs when communication between the MPU (controller) and
operation panel could not be established after powering on the machine, or when
communication between the MPU (controller) and operation panel was interrupted
after a normal startup.
Harness connection fault
• Replace the USB cable/harness between operation panel and MPU.
• Replace the operation panel.

<D0B4> This error occurs when communication between the MPU (controller) and
526
7.Troubleshooting

operation panel could not be established after powering on the machine, or when
communication between the MPU (controller) and operation panel was interrupted
after a normal startup.
MPU (controller) defective
• Replace the MPU (controller).
• Replace the USB cable/harness of the MPU (controller).
• Replace the operation panel.

<D0B4> After the machine was powered on, communication between the controller and the
operation panel was not established, or communication with controller was
interrupted after a normal startup.
• MPU defective
• Controller late

673-01 D System application communication error (Smart operation panel)
<D0B4> The system application (Monitor Service) of Smart Operation Panel performed
abnormal operation.
The system application (Monitor Service) of Smart Operation Panel ended
abnormally.
• Press the Reboot button on the screen of the SC.

673-10 D Operation panel Flair communication error (Smart Operation Panel)
<D0B4> This SC is issued only for the machine that has the Smart Operation Panel
installed.
• Communication between Smart Operation Panel and main machine (this is
called "Flair communication") is not sent to Smart Operation Panel.
The CATS module (controller) did not see the response to notification of monitoring
service module (operation panel).
527
7.Troubleshooting

• Turn the main power OFF/ON.

682-01 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Invalid device ID
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-06 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Channel error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-11 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Device error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-16 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Communication disconnection
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-21 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Communication timeout
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-26 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Device operation stopped
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-31 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Request buffer full
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
682-36 D TD sensor (S7) communication error – Request buffer full
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4>
When the machine retries three times after receiving notification of an
abnormality during EEPROM communication but cannot recover
communication
• Remove and reinstall the PCDU
• Disconnect and reconnect the harness (MPU side) between the
MPU and TD sensor (S7)
• Replace the PCDU
• Replace the harness between the MPU and TD sensor (S7)
• Replace the MPU

687-00 D PER receipt failure
<D0B4> Even though 120 seconds have elapsed after RAPI-PES (request for image
transfer) is issued, a RAPI-PER receipt is not received from the MPU.
• Defective MPU
• Noise
Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do
the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power off/on after each
528
7.Troubleshooting

step.
1. Update the firmware
• ADF - MPU harness
3. Replace the MPU.

688-00 D PRREQ signal error
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> When registration does not restart within the prescribed period of time
(40 seconds) after the registration roller arrives at the waiting position
because a ready to send images notification (PREQ) is not sent by the
controller.
Controller problem
• Check whether the firmware is the latest version.
• Update the firmware to the latest version.
• Repeat the SC using the copy/print procedure used when the SC
occurred.
SC7xx

701-03 D Paper Feed Motor Driver Error (ADF)
<D0B4>
701-08 D Paper Exit Motor Driver Error (ADF)
<D0B4>
Detection of error signal from motor driver.
• Encoder disconnection
• Encoder connector dropout
• Encoder defective
• Overload
• Motor deterioration
• Check that the board, relay, and motor connectors are connected securely (no
disconnection or looseness). Reconnect any connector that is disconnected or
loose.
• Check the harness from the board to the motor. Replace the harness if it is
disconnected or damaged.
• Check that the motor runs, is not overloaded, and is properly driven. Replace
the motor if there are any abnormalities.
529
7.Troubleshooting

• Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

702-01 D Protection Device Intercept Error 1 (ADF)
<D0B4> When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 24V
power supply system is detected.
Any of feed motor, transport motor, reverse solenoid, paper feed solenoid, paper
feed clutch and FAN motor defective, a harness short-circuit occurs, and the
protection device of the 24V power supply system intercepts.
• Check that the board, relay, and motor/solenoid/clutch connectors for the
motor, solenoid, and clutch are connected properly (no disconnection or
looseness). Reconnect any connector that is disconnected or loose.
• Check the harness from the board to the motor/solenoid/clutch. Replace the
harness if it is disconnected or damaged.
• Check that the motor/solenoid/clutch runs (output check), is not overloaded,
and is properly driven. Replace the motor/solenoid/clutch if there are any
abnormalities.
any defects.

<D0B4> When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of
24VOUT power supply system is detected.
Solenoid defective or harness short-circuit occurs in 24VOUT power supply
system.
• Check that the board, relay, and solenoid connectors are connected securely
(no disconnection or looseness). Reconnect any connector that is
disconnected or loose.
• Check the harness from the board to the solenoid. Replace the harness if it is
disconnected or damaged.
• Check that the solenoid runs (output check). Replace the solenoid if there are
any abnormalities.
any defects.
530
7.Troubleshooting

<D0B4> When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 5VE
power supply system is detected.
Sensor defective or a harness short-circuit occur in 5VE power supply system.
• Check that the board, relay, and solenoid connectors for Original Set Sensor
are connected securely. Reconnect any connector that is disconnected or
loose.
• Check the harness for the Original Set Sensor from the board to the sensor.
Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
• Check if the Original Set Sensor turns OFF/ON (INPUT Check). Replace the
part if there are any defects.
any defects.

702-04 D Protection Device Intercept Error
<D0B3> When a protection device interruption of 24V/5V/5VE power supply system is
detected in the ADF set state.
Short-circuit or motor soleniod defect due to pinching of the harness inside the
ADF.
• The target parts that need to be checked are the Original set sensor (S18),
ADF pick-up solenoid (SOL3), ADF main motor (M6), ADF inverter solenoid
(SOL2) ,ADF registration sensor (S20), ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21), ADF
cover sensor (S19).
1. Check if the connector of the target part is connected securely. Reconnect the
connector if it is disconnected, or loose.
2. Check the harness for the target part. Replace the harness if it is
disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace the
parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are
any defects.

724-03 B Protection Device Intercept Error
<D0B4> Blown fuse discovered when detecting the 1 bin tray set (either or both of the
+5VE/+24V fuses are blown)
531
7.Troubleshooting

1 bin tray harness pinching, short circuit, etc.
• Replace the 1 bin tray control board
• Replace parts at location of 1 bin tray failure
SC8xx

816-01 D Subsystem error
<D0B4>
816-02 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
<D0B4>
816-03 D Transition to STR was denied.
<D0B4>
816-04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver
<D0B4>
816-05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed.
<D0B4>
816-07 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
<D0B4>
816-08 D Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error
<D0B4>
816-09 D Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error
<D0B4>
816-10 to D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
12
<D0B4>
816-13 D open() error
<D0B4>
816-14 D Memory address error
<D0B4>
816-15 to D open() error
18
<D0B4>
816-19 D Double open() error
<D0B4>
816-20 D open() error
<D0B4>
816-22 D Parameter error
532
7.Troubleshooting

<D0B4>
816-23, 24 D read() error
<D0B4>
816-25 D write () error
<D0B4>
816-26 to D write() communication retry error
28
<D0B4>
816-29, 30 D read() communication retry error
<D0B4>
816-35 D read() error
<D0B4>
816-36 to D Subsystem error
40
<D0B4>
• Energy saving I/O subsystem defective
• Energy saving I/O subsystem detected a MPU error (non response).
• Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR.
1. Turn the main power off/on.
2. Update the controller firmware and the subsystem firmware to the latest
version.
3. Disable the STR shift function by SP5-191-001 (Power Str Set).
4. Replace the MPU.

855-01 B Wireless LAN card error (driver attachment failure)
<D0B4> Wireless LAN card error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Loose connection
1. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
2. Replace wireless LAN card

861-50 D Storage boot failure
<D0B4> Access to the storage device fails when recovery from energy saving.
No response from the storage device.
533
7.Troubleshooting

2. If the problem persists, replace the storage device.
No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

871-01 D FCU error
<D0B4> An error occurred when FCS detects FCU defective.
• Time-out error
• Abnormal Parameter
2. Update the firmware if more recent firmware was released.

871-02 D FCU job error (Recovery possible)
<D0B4> This SC occurs when the FCU has detected a job error (failure to start or complete
a job) that may be recovered by auto reboot.
-

871-03 D FCU job error (Recovery not possible)
<D0B4> This SC occurs when the FCU has detected a job error (failure to start or complete
a job) that will not be recovered by auto reboot.
-

890-01 A PaaS* function: Tampering detection
<D0B4> PaaS data in NVRAM and on USB flash drive do not match at startup.
Occurs when product replacement was performed under certain conditions with
respect to equipment for which PaaS functionality was activated even once.
1. Execute SP5-760-002.
3. Execute SP5-760-024.
5. After rebooting, check the SP5-760-001(PaaS Mode) value is “0” to confirm
PaaS mode.
534
7.Troubleshooting
* PaaS stands for “Printer as a Service”. It is a remote service like the @remote service
890-02 D PaaS function: Suspended
<D0B4> This SC occurs when the PaaS function is suspended because of an internal or
external factor (receiving a request from PaaS-PF to suspend).
The SC occurs due to the following factors when the PaaS function is activated:
• Exceeds the specified number of printing pages.
• Receives a request to suspend from the PaaS-PF while PaaS is installed.
• Cannot establish communication with the PaaS-PF over an extended period of
time (approx. 1 month) while PaaS is installed.
The warning dialog box displayed when this SC occurs contains instructions.
Follow the instructions to solve the problem.
SC9xx

903-00 D Total counter error
<D0B2,D0B3> • If the counter values (4 bits) for the machine and mirroring agree, the
SUM value of the machine is recalculated, and it does not agree with
the SUM value of upper 4 bits, this SC is issued.
• If the counter values (4 bits) for the machine and mirroring do not agree,
recalculate the SUM values for the machine and mirroring. If the values
for both machine and mirroring do not agree with the SUM value of
upper 4 bits, this SC is issued.
EEPROM defective
Replace the EEPROM.

920-02 B Printer error (WORK memory not acquired)
<D0B4> When an error is detected in the application, which makes continued operation
impossible.
• Software bug
• Unexpected hardware configuration (such as insufficient memory)
• Increase the memory storage capacity.

920-04 B Printer error (Filter process not started)
<D0B4> When an error is detected in the application, which makes continued operation
535
7.Troubleshooting

impossible.
• Software bug
• Unexpected hardware configuration (such as insufficient memory)

921-00 B Printer error (Resident font not found)
<D0B4> Resident font was not found at printer startup.
Preinstalled font files not found.
Turn the main power off/on.

990-00 D Fail-safe SC
<D0B2,D0B3,D0B4> An unexpected error occurred in the software.
System error

992-00 D Undefined SC occurred
<D0B4> An error not controlled by the system occurred (the error does not come under any
other SC code).
• Software defective
• Incorrect SC code from previous machine

994-00 C Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable
<D0B4> An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the limit for images
managed in the service layer of the firmware.
This can occur if there are too many application screens open on the operation
panel.
Logging only.
536
7.Troubleshooting
Jam Detection
Jam Description and Position Code
• Position code: Shows the location of a jam. Appears on the operation panel.
These are lists of codes for the main machine and peripheral devices. Please note:
• Late jam. The paper has failed to arrive within the prescribed time due to a jam that has occurred
upstream of the referenced sensor.
• Lag jam. The paper has failed to leave the location of the referenced sensor within the prescribed
time due to a jam downstream of the referenced sensor.
Main Machine
No. Jam Description Position Code

1 Initial jam *1
2 Tray 1 no feed A
3 Optional PFU 1 no feed Y1
4 Optional PFU 2 no feed Y2
5 Bypass paper tray no feed A
6 Duplex no feed Z
7 Optional PFU 1 paper feed sensor: Late jam Y1
8 Registration sensor (S16): Late jam A
10 Exit sensor: Late jam C
11 Optional PFU 1 paper feed sensor: Lag jam Y1
12 Optional PFU 2 paper feed sensor: Lag jam Y2
13 Registration sensor (S16): Lag jam B
14 Exit sensor: Lag jam C
15 Exit sensor (duplex reverse): Lag jam Z
*1 Initial Jam
Jam Description Position Code

Main Machine
Registration sensor (S16) B
Exit sensor C
ADF registration sensor (S20) P
Optional PFU
PFU 1 Y1
PFU 2 Y2
537
7.Troubleshooting
Sensor Locations
538
7.Troubleshooting
Vertical Streaks on Copies due to Scanning Problems (D0B4)
Overview
Marks on prints and copies are mostly due to dirt on the DF exposure glass [A], generally caused by
adhesive contaminants (such as ball point pen ink and correction fluid).
Compared to non-adhesive contaminants (such as paper fragments and eraser dust), adhesive
contaminants are more likely to lead to complaints from customers because of the following:
• Vertical streaks caused by adhesive contaminants are more visible in terms of image quality.
• Unless removed by cleaning, adhesive contaminants continue to produce vertical streaks, while
non-adhesive contaminants stop producing streaks after they are dislodged.
• Many adhesive contaminants are difficult to remove by cleaning.
The ADF that is provided with this machine "Machine Features Settings" a system (non-contact
scanning) to reduce vertical streaks caused by adhesive contaminants.
Contact scanning: Non-contact scanning:
Other ADFs ADF for this machine
In contact scanning, the whole of the original By means of the Mylar sheet [B], originals are kept
comes into contact with the DF exposure glass slightly above the DF exposure glass [A],
[A] so that non-adhesive contaminants can be preventing adhesive contaminants from adhering to
removed. the glass.
The ADF for this machine can be converted from non-contact scanning to contact scanning for users
who wish to reduce vertical streaks caused by non-adhesive contaminants.
SP No. Contact scanning Non-contact scanning
SP4-688-001 103% 106%
539
7.Troubleshooting
SP No. Contact scanning Non-contact scanning

SP4-871-003 0.00% 0.11%
Converting the ADF to Contact Scanning
1. Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
2. Remove the ADF front cover [A] ( x1).
3. Remove the Scanning guide plate [B] ( [A]x1).
4. Remove the plastic guides [A] on the sides of the scanning guide plate( x1).
The screw-attached picture below shows the front side.
5. Attach the guides for contact scanning. Each guide has a hole [A].
The orange-colored illustration below shows the front side.
540
7.Troubleshooting
6. Mount the scanning guide plate, taking care not to damage the sheet [A].
7. Peel off the gap sheet [A] from the DF exposure glass with your hands.
8. Clean the DF exposure glass [A] with alcohol.

To avoid paper jams, make sure adhesive is completely removed.
541
7.Troubleshooting
9. Turn the main switch on.

10. Start the SP mode.
11. Select SP4-688-001 (DF Density Adjustment) and change the setting from "104" to "103" for the
contact scanning.
12. Change the DF magnification (SP4-871-003) from [0.11%] to [0.00%].
• When returning the setting back to non-contact scanning, return the SP values also.
542
7.Troubleshooting
Other Troubleshooting
Noise from Transfer Roller Bearings
Symptom
The transfer roller bearings emit noise.
Items to be prepared
Q-tips (cotton buds)

Alcohol
Air duster
Action
Clean the transfer roller bearings following the procedure below.

1. Remove the transfer roller (Transfer Roller).
2. Remove the front side transfer roller bearing [A], and the rear side transfer roller bearing [B].
543
7.Troubleshooting
3. Dampen a Q-tip (cotton bud) with alcohol.
4. Using the Q-tip (cotton bud), clean the front side transfer roller bearing and rear side transfer roller
bearing.
1. Clean the front side transfer roller bearing and rear side transfer roller bearing from the
inside [A].
2. Clean the front side transfer roller bearing and rear side transfer roller bearing from
the outside [A].
Clean the inside of each bearing up to the where there is a height difference.
544
7.Troubleshooting
5. Blow off any remaining debris after cleaning using the air blower.
545
8.Detailed Descriptions
8. Detailed Descriptions
Overview
Component Layout
D0B2,D0B3
The above illustration is the D0B3 model.

D0B2: No ADF
No. Description No. Description
1 Scanner motor (M1) 11 Paper feed roller
2 Paper exit/reverse roller 12 Pickup roller
3 Hot roller 13 PCDU
4 Pressure roller 14 Polygon mirror motor (M2)
5 Duplex transport roller 15 Laser unit
6 PCU (drum) 16 Toner bottle
7 Development roller 17 Scanner HP sensor (S1)
8 Registration roller 18 CIS unit (PCB4)
546

9 Transfer roller 19 Exposure glass
10 Friction roller
D0B4

1 Scanner motor (M26) 11 Paper feed roller
2 Paper exit/reverse roller 12 Pickup roller
3 Hot roller 13 PCDU
4 Pressure roller 14 Polygon mirror motor (M2)
5 Duplex transport roller 15 Laser unit
6 PCU (drum) 16 Toner bottle
7 Development roller 17 Sheet - through exposure glass
8 Registration roller 18 Exposure glass
9 Transfer roller 19 Sensor board unit (SBU) (PCB7)
10 Friction roller 20 Auto paper size (APS) sensors (S44),(S45)
547
ADF (D0B3)

1 ADF registration sensor (S20) 6 ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2)
2 ADF main motor (M6) 7 ADF main board (PCB8)
3 ADF pick-up solenoid (SOL3) 8 ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21)
4 Original set sensor (S18) 9 Original width sensor (S17)
5 ADF cover sensor (S19)
ADF (D0B4)
548

1 Original Width Sensor (LL) (SN5) 13 Original Length Sensor (M) (SN13)
2 Original Width Sensor (L) (SN4) 14 Original Length Sensor (L) (SN12)
3 Original Width Sensor (M) (SN3) 15 DF Position Sensor (SN9)
4 Original Width Sensor (S) (SN2) 16 Transport Motor (MT2)
5 Original Width Sensor (SS) (SN1) 17 Feed Clutch (CLT1)
6 Skew Correction Sensor (SN10) 18 Cooling Fan Motor (MT3)
7 Registration Sensor (SN6) 19 Cover Switch (SWC1)
8 Original Exit Sensor (SN7) 20 Pick-up Solenoid (SL2)
9 Original Set Sensor (SN8) 21 Feed Motor (MT1)
10 Stamp Solenoid (SL3) 22 Inverter Solenoid (SL1)
11 Original Sensor (SN11) 23 DF Main Board (BD1)
12 Original Length Sensor (S) (SN14) - -
549
Scanner (D0B2,D0B3)

1 Scanner HP sensor (S1) 4 Scanner motor (M1)
2 CIS (PCB4) 5 Operation panel
3 Platen cover sensor (S2) 6 Original size sensors (S3)
550
Scanner (D0B4)

1 Smart operation panel 5 Scanner lamp unit
2 Scanner home position sensor (S1) 6 Scanner motor (M1)
3 ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) 7 Sensor board unit (SBU) (PCB10)
4 Auto paper size (APS) sensor (S22)
551
Paper Feed Unit

1 Registration clutch (CL3) 5 Upper limit sensor (S13)
2 Relay clutch (CL6) 6 Paper end sensor (S12)
3 Paper feed clutch (CL4) 7 Registration sensor (S16)
4 Tray lift motor (M4) 8 Paper size switch (SW4)
552
Laser Unit, PCDU, Fusing Unit

1 Thermistor (End) (H2) 7 Quenching lamp (L1)
2 Thermistor (Center) (H1) 8 Laser unit
3 Thermostat (S4) 9 LD drive board (PCB5)
4 Fusing lamp 10 Contact/Release solenoid (SOL1)
5 ID sensor (S6) 11 Toner supply motor (M5)
6 TD sensor (S7)
553
Bypass Unit

1 Bypass length sensor (S11) 3 Bypass paper feed clutch (CL5)
2 Bypass width sensor (S10) 4 Bypass paper end sensor (S9)
554
Paper Exit Unit, Reverse Unit, Duplex Unit

1 Paper exit clutch (CL1) 3 Duplex clutch (CL2)
2 Reverse clutch (CL7) 4 Paper exit sensor (S5)
555
Drive Unit
No. Description
1 Main motor (M3)
556
Electrical Component
D0B2,D0B3

1 Exhaust fan (FAN1) 7 PSU (PCB1) (Power supply unit)
2 Right door switch (SW1) 8 DHB (PCB2) *option
3 Interlock switch (SW2) 9 HVPS (High-voltage power supply board) (PCB3)
4 Main power switch (SW3) 10 MPU (PCB7)
5 Room temperature sensor (S14) 11 Imaging temperature sensor (S8)
6 Main fan (FAN2) 12 Platen cover sensor (S2)
557
D0B4

1 Exhaust fan (FAN1) 8 PSU (Power supply unit) (PCB1)
2 Right door switch (SW1) 9 DHB (PCB2) *option
3 Interlock switch (SW2) 10 HVPS (High-voltage power supply board) (PCB3)
4 Main power switch (SW3) 11 MPU (PCB7)
5 Room temperature sensor (S14) 12 Imaging temperature sensor (S8)
6 Front Door Switch (SW5) 13 ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21)
7 Main fan (FAN2)
558
Paper Path
D0B2,D0B3

1 ADF unit (D0B3 only) 3 Bypass tray
2 Duplex unit
559
D0B4

1 ADF unit 3 Bypass tray
2 Duplex unit
560
Drive Layout
D0B2,D0B3

1 ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2) (D0B3 only) 9 Duplex clutch (CL2)
2 ADF pickup solenoid (D0B3 only) 10 Registration clutch (CL3)
3 ADF main motor (M6) (D0B3 only) 11 Main motor (M3)
4 Toner supply motor (M5) 12 Scanner motor (M1)
5 Tray lift motor (M4) 13 Reverse clutch (CL7) (near side)
6 Paper feed clutch (CL4) 14 Paper exit clutch (CL1) (back side)
7 Bypass paper feed clutch (CL5) 15 Contact/Release solenoid (SOL1)
8 Relay clutch (CL6)
561
D0B4

1 Inverter solenoid (SOL1) 9 Relay clutch (CL6)
2 Pick-up solenoid (SOL2) 10 Duplex clutch (CL2)
3 Paper feed motor (M1) 11 Registration clutch (CL3)
4 Paper transport motor (M2) 12 Main motor (M3)
5 Toner supply motor (M5) 13 Scanner motor (M26)
6 Tray lift motor (M4) 14 Reverse clutch (CL7) (near side)
7 Paper feed clutch (CL4) 15 Paper exit clutch (CL1) (back side)
8 Bypass paper feed clutch (CL5) 16 Contact/Release solenoid (SOL1)
562
ADF (D0B3)
Overview

1 ADF entrance roller 11 Platen cover
2 Original feed roller 12 ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21)
3 Friction pad 13 Reverse roller
4 Original stopper 14 Junction gate
5 Original set actuator 15 Original exit roller
6 Pickup roller 16 ADF main motor (M6)
7 Original set sensor (S18) 17 White plate guide
8 ADF cover sensor (S19) 18 ADF registration sensor (S20)
9 Original tray 19 Pre-scanning roller
10 ADF exit tray
563

1 ADF registration sensor (S20) 6 ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2)
2 ADF main motor (M6) 7 ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21)
3 ADF pickup solenoid (SOL3) 8 ADF main board (PCB8)
4 Original set sensor (S18) 9 Original width sensor (S17)
5 ADF cover sensor (S19)
Original Transport Drive
The ADF main motor (M6) [C] drives each roller through gears.
The ADF pickup solenoid (SOL3) [A] controls the original pickup.
The ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2) [B] operates the reverse junction gate.
Original Transport Mechanism 1
564
The stopper [A] prevents the user from placing originals [D] too far into the feeder.
After that, the original set sensor (S2) [B] detects the originals, and original transport will be started.
Original Transport Mechanism 2
The ADF pickup solenoid (SOL3) lowers the pickup roller [C].
The original can reach the original feed roller [A] because the original stopper [B] does not stop the
original if the pickup roller [C] is lowered.
Single-sided Scanning
The original is transported from the ADF entrance roller [A] to the pre-scanning roller [B], and then it
passes under the white plate guide [C].
The original is fed out from the ADF by the original exit roller [D].
565
Duplex Scanning
The ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2) lowers the junction gate [B], and the original is transported to the
reverse roller [C].
Then, the reverse roller [C] transports the original out of the ADF by rotating in reverse.
After that, the ADF inverter solenoid (SOL2) is turned off after the trailing edge of the original passes
the original exit roller [A], and the reverse roller starts normal rotation.
The original comes back into the ADF.
After the second side is scanned, the ADF reverses the original again and feeds it out face down.
566
ADF (D0B4)
Original Detection
When an original is placed on the original tray correctly, the edge of the original pushes up the feeler of
the original sensor (SN11).
Original Size Detection / Original Set Detection Mechanism
Five original width sensors detect the width of the original just when the leading edge of the original
passes the interval sensor. Three original length sensors on the original table detect the length. These
two pieces of size information summarize the original size.
Size (Width x Length: mm) Width Detection Length Detection
1 2 3 4 5 S M L
1 A3 SEF (297 x 420) On On On On On On On On
2 B4 SEF (257 x 364) On On On - - On On On
3 A4 SEF (210 x 297) On On - - - On On -
4 A4 LEF (297 x 210) On On On On On - - -
5 B5 SEF (182 x 257) On - - - - On - -
6 B5 LEF (257 x 182) On On On - - - - -
7 A5 SEF (148 x 210) On - - - - - - -
8 A5 LEF (210 x 148) On On - - - - - -
9 B6 SEF (128 x 182) - - - - - - - -
10 B6 LEF (182 x 128) On - - - - - - -
11 11" x 17" SEF (DLT) On On On On - On On On
12 8 1/2" x 13" SEF (Foolscap SEF) On On - - - On On On
13 8 1/2" x 11" SEF (LT) On On - - - On - -

14 11" x 81/2" LEF (LT) On On On On - - - -
Sensor Position
567
Description
A Original Width Sensors (SN1) (SN2) (SN3) (SN4) (SN5)
B Original Set Sensor (SN9)
C Original Length Sensors (SN12) (SN13) (SN14)
Paper Feed / Separation Mechanism
The separation mechanism uses the RF method.

When the originals are placed and [Start] is pressed, the paper feed solenoid is turned ON and the
pickup roller [A] goes down to the original. At this time, the feed motor (MT1) [B] switches on and the
pickup roller and paper feed motor [B] start rotating. Then a sheet of paper is fed.
Description
A Pickup Roller
B Feed Motor
C Paper Feed Belt
568
Skew Correction Mechanism, Registration Mechanism
• Skew Correction
This machine adjusts paper skew by hitting the originals against the pullout roller [A].
The skew correction sensor (SN10) [B] detects the leading edge of the original after it passes
through the separation area.
After hitting the originals against the pullout roller and making a buckle in the original, the transport
motor (MT2) turns ON. This mechanism prevents skewed feeding of the originals.
• Registration Mechanism
The registration sensor (SN6) [C] detects the leading edge of the originals. The machine uses the
data for registration during copying.
A Pullout Roller
B Skew Correction Sensor (SN10)
C Registration Sensor (SN6)
D Original Width Sensor (SN1) (SN2) (SN3) (SN4) (SN5)
E Sheet-through Exposure Glass
• Transport Mechanism (Simplex)
Originals are transported by the pullout roller [A] and the entrance transport roller [B] to the sheet-
through exposure glass [C], which scans the image. After this process, the originals are transported
to paper exit section by the exit transport roller [D] and the exit driven roller [E].
569
Description
A Pullout Roller
B Entrance Transport Roller
C Sheet-through Exposure Glass
D Exit Transport Roller
E Exit Driven roller
• Transport Mechanism (Duplex)
When originals are detected by the skew correction sensor (SN10) [A], the transport motor
(MT2) switches OFF and the original stops for a while. After skew correction, the originals are
re-transported to the sheet-through exposure glass [B], which scans the first side (front). Then
the inverter solenoid (SL1) switches ON and the junction gate [C] opens. By that process, the
originals are transported to the reverse roller. At this time, the transport motor (MT2) stops and
the inverter solenoid (SL1) switches off.
Description
A Skew Correction Sensor (SN10)
B Sheet-through Exposure Glass
C Junction Gate
The originals, which reached the reverse roller, are re-fed over the upper surface of the
junction gate [A]. When the originals reach the sheet-through exposure glass [B], the second
side (back) is scanned.
To make the order of the sheets on the exit tray correct, the two sides (front/back) of the
original need to be inverted. Therefore, the inverter solenoid (SL1) switches ON and the
originals are transported to the reverse roller again. After the inversion, the originals exit onto
the exit tray [C].
570
SP6-901-002 (Setting to give priority to stackability)
To improve the alignment of the delivered originals, select to give priority to stackability in the following
SP. This will reduce the originals’ delivery speed and improve their stackability.
• SP6-901-002 (ADF Operation Setting Stack Mode): Setting to give priority to stackability
0: Higher throughput (default)
1: Higher stackability
Related SPs
SP No. Selection Overview

Def.
6-901- 0 ADF Operation Setting Stack Mode (SP6-901-002 (Setting to give priority to
002 stackability))
571
Scanning (D0B2,D0B3)
Overview

1 CIS unit (PCB4) (with carriage) 5 Original size sensors (width)
2 Exposure glass 6 Scanner HP sensor (S1)
3 Scanner motor (M1) 7 DF exposure glass
4 Original size sensors (length)
• CIS unit (PCB4)
3-ch unity-magnifying contact image sensor capable of A3 color scanning
• Bottom frame
Resin base
• Upper frame
Composed of a resin base, exposure glass, and DF exposure glass
• Sensor
1-ch CIS + integrated carriage + slide guide
• Drive
Belt drive using a PM stepping motor
• Exterior
The bottom frame (resin base) is integrated into the exterior.
• Original size sensors
2 width sensors and 2 length sensors (the sensor location depends on the country of use).
Refer to the "Original Size Sensor (S3) Layout".
572
Scanner Drive
This machine is a flatbed scanner using a CIS unit (PCB4).

To scan an original, the scanner motor (M1) [A] moves the carriage on which the CIS unit (PCB4) [B] is
mounted along the carrier guide rod [C].
The CIS unit (PCB4) can be adjusted relative to the main scanning direction using the center guide rod
[C].
This is a factory adjustment; do not do this in the field.
Original Size Sensor (S3) Layout
The layout of the original size sensors (S3) depends on the destination.
Description Destination Shown in the layout chart as
Original size sensors (length) EU, AP [A]
CHN [B]
573
Description Destination Shown in the layout chart as

Original size sensors (width) All areas [C]
Related SPs

Def.
4-008- 0 Magnification ratio adjustment (Magnification)
001
4-010- 0 Leading edge adjustment (Registration: Platen Mode)
001
4-011- 0 Side-to-side adjustment (Registration: Platen Mode)
001
4-688- 100 Use this to adjust the density level if the image density of outputs made in the
001 DF and platen mode is different.(Adjusting the Scanner Parameters)
574
Scanning (D0B4)
Overview
The short focus scanner is realized by implementing a lens block (SBU, CMOS, and Lens) on the
carriage.
After the scanner lamp unit emits the light to the document, the light goes through the route shown
below and reaches the CMOS.
Scanner lamp unit (LED) -> Original -> 1st mirror (13) -> 2nd mirror (3) -> 3rd mirror (6) -> 2nd mirror
(3) -> 4th mirror (5) -> 5th mirror (14) -> lens -> pre-sensor lens -> CMOS

1 Sheet-through exposure glass 9 Sensor board unit (SBU) (PCB10)
2 Exposure glass 10 CMOS
3 2nd mirror 11 Pre-sensor lens
4 Scanner lamp unit (LED) 12 Lens
5 4th mirror 13 1st mirror
6 3rd mirror 14 5th mirror
7 Scanner motor (M1) - -
8 Auto paper size (APS) sensors (S22) - -
Reading System
Two scan modes are available: Book Mode (Platen Mode) and ADF Mode (Sheet-through Method).
In Book Mode (Platen Mode), the scanner scans the document from left to right.
When the ADF is used (ADF Mode), the scanner is fixed in the home position on the left side, and the
document is transported and read (Sheet-through Method).
Scanner
Scanner lamp
The light source is an LED.
575
The LED emits little heat (low power consumption) and has excellent light output rise characteristics.
Sensor
The sensor collects the light that was reflected from the original and converts it to three color digital
signals (R, G, B).
The resolution of this CMOS sensor is 600dpi.
Reflection plate (reflector)
The reflection plate reflects light from the scanner lamp and collects light to the reading point on a
document. The light which illuminates the document is adjusted to be the same on the left and right so
as not to cast any shadow on the document.
White reference seal
A white reference seal for shading correction is affixed to the underside of the scale on the left of the
scanner unit. This is read by the scanner and CMOS when the power is ON. The data read is
temporarily stored in a RAM, and used for correction of document image data.
Mechanism
Scanner Drive
The scanner is driven by the scanner motor (M1) [D] via the timing belt [C]. For each mode, reading is
completed in one pass.
Position control of the scanner carriage [B] is based on the scanner home position sensor (S1) [A].
576
Operation Flowchart
Overall Flowchart
Scanner Carriage Storage Control
To protect the scanner carriage, the carriage must be locked to the scanner frame before shipping. The
scanner can be moved to the shipping lock position with SP4-806-001 (Scanner carriage storage
operation).
If a pre-shipping check is required, make sure to move the scanner carriage to the right position with
SP4-806-001 and mount the locking parts.
SC121-00 will occur when the power is turned on or scanning takes place while the carriage is locked.
Document Size Detection
In this machine, for document size detection, two Auto Paper Size sensors, also called as APS sensors,
577
(S22) are used for the sub-scanning direction, and a CMOS is used for the main scanning direction.
Sub-scanning direction (by APS sensors)
The document size is detected by ON/OFF of the sensor. The ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) is used
for document size detection timing. When the ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) has changed from "no
cover" to "cover," the size is detected.
Main scanning direction (by CMOS)
RGB color densities at 3 locations (S1, S2, S3) are detected 3 times by the CMOS sensor. The
presence of the document is determined from the number of locations where an RGB density of 7 digits
or more is detected.
The ADF/Platen cover sensor (S21) is used for document size detection timing. When the ADF/Platen
cover sensor (S23) detects "no cover," the scanner lamp is moved to the right; when it detects "cover,"
the scanner lamp is moved to home position while lit, and during this time, the size is read.
The influence of ambient light is reduced by scanning with the scanner lamp (LED) turned off.
Document size Sensor response

Size Direction Dimensions S1 S2 S3 L1 L2
(main × sub)
A3 SEF 297x420 - -
B4 SEF 257x364 - -
A4 SEF 210x297 - - -
A4 LEF 297x210 - - - -
B5 SEF 182x257 - - - -
578
Document size Sensor response

B5 LEF 257x182 - - -
A5 SEF 148x210 - - - - -
A5 LEF 210x148 - - - -
B6 SEF 128×182 - - - - -
B6 LEF 182×128 - - - - -
DLT SEF 11"×17" - - -
10×15 SEF 10"×15" - - -
USB4 SEF 10"×14" - - -
LG SEF 8 1/2"×14" - - -
Oficio SEF 8 1/2"×13.4" - - -
Foolscap SEF 8 1/2"×13" - - -
Folio SEF 8 1/4"×13" - - -
F SEF 8"×13" - - -
LT SEF 8 1/2"×11" - - -
LT LEF 11"×8 1/2" - - - -
8×10 SEF 8"×10" - - -
10×8 LEF 10"×8" - - - -
Executive SEF 7 1/4"×10 1/2" - - - -
HLT SEF 5 1/2"×8 1/2" - - - - -
HLT LEF 8 1/2"×5 1/2" - - - -
8kai SEF 267×388 - - -
16kai SEF 194×267 - - - -
16kai LEF 267×194 - - - -
• The document width (main scanning direction) is detected by the sensor indicated with ‘ ’.
How to check the sensor state
• SP4-301 (Operation Check APS Sensor)

How to read the screen
(7)00000000(0)
0: no document
1: document present
When the sensor responds, bit 0 is displayed as "1."
• SP4-313 (Scan Size Detect Value)
Viewed from the operation panel, labeling positions from rear to front S1-S3 in that order, the RGB
density at each position is displayed in digit units (the value just before the scan is displayed).
579
Other
• SP4-303 (Min Size for APS)

Sets the display when non-standard (small size) size original is detected.
0: Display message "Original size unknown".
1: Operate assuming the original size is A5 LEF (HLT LEF for inches).
• SP4-305-001(8K/16K Detection)
By changing this SP, you can change between A4 size/letter size or Chinese paper size (8×16).
0: Normal setting. (Default)
1: When detecting A4/LT size -> Assume that it is A4 when SEF, LT when LEF.
2: When detecting A4/LT size -> Assume that it is LT when SEF, A4 when LEF.
3: Change to 8K/16K settings.
A3, B4 -> 8K LEF
A4 LEF, B4 LEF, A5 LEF -> 16K LEF
A4 SEF, B4 SEF, A5 SEF -> 16K SEF
• SP5-126 (Set F-size Document)
Selects the paper size for the F-size original.
0: When detecting Foolscap -> Assume that the size is 8 1/2"x13". (Default)
1: When detecting Folio -> Assume that the size is 8 1/4"x13".
2: When detecting F -> Assume that the size is 8"/13".
• SP4-308 (Scan Size Detection)
Sets CCD original size detection and APS original size detection.
0: Disable: Not detect original size
1: Enable: Detect original size by the CCD unit
2: APS: APS sensor (S44) (S45) is used for detecting original size.
• SP4-312-006 (Scan Size Detect: Setting LED PWM Duty)
If the user specifies that the pre-scan lamp is too bright, the brightness pre-scan can be reduced by
decreasing the value of this SP. However, if the lamp brightness is reduced, size detection for a
document with a large number of solid images will be less accurate.
• SP5-135 (LG_Oficio Change)
1: When detecting LG size -> Assume that the size is 8 1/2"x14".
2: When detecting Oficio size -> Assume that the size is 8 1/2"x13.4". (Default)
• Adding SP4-311-001 (Detection: Start Position)
To prevent the delay in starting scanning, the scanner carriage start position of this model is 10 mm
leftward (closer to scale) than that of the previous model. Since there may be rare occasions where
it is necessary to move the scanner carriage start position to that of the previous model, this SP
allows the start position to be changed.
0: 20 mm (default)
1: 30 mm (same as the previous model)
2: 130 mm
580
Improved Tolerance to Black Lines when Paper Passes through ARDF/SPDF
The original document does not come in contact with the sheet-through exposure glass, which prevents
adhesive dirt (ball pen ink) on the document from adhering to the sheet-through exposure glass.
ADF cross-section diagram, non-contact scanning
[A]: Sheet
[B]: Sheet-through exposure glass
[C]: Read position
[D]: Document
• Contact scanning
As the document comes in contact with the sheet-through exposure glass this is useful for dealing
with adhesion of free dirt particles (paper scraps, etc.). (Self-cleaning mechanism using paper)
On the other hand, sticky dirt adhering to the document sticks to the sheet-through exposure glass
and may give rise to the appearance of black lines.
ADF cross-section diagram, contact scanning
[A]: Sheet-through exposure glass

[B]: Read position
[C]: Document
If black lines due to free dirt particles appear within a short time, such as when users have
documents with large amounts of paper scraps, you can change from the non-contact scanning
system to the contact scanning system with the procedure in Troubleshooting - Vertical Streaks on
581
Copies due to Scanning Problems.

• Reference (reading position correction)
By changing SP4-020-001 (Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off), when dirt is detected at the reading
position, the reading position may be changed to avoid the dirt.
(If it cannot be avoided, an alert is displayed on the operation panel advising the user to perform
target glass cleaning).
Image diagram
[A]: Read position

[B]: Sheet-through exposure glass
[C]: Dirt
• Dirt is detected when a document passes through, so the alert will not disappear until the
reading of the next document begins, even after the sheet-through exposure glass
cleaning is performed.
• If dirt is detected not on the sheet-through exposure glass but on the background guide
plate, the alert will not disappear even if the glass is wiped.
• The time required for the first copy is slightly (almost imperceptibly) longer.
• The detection threshold value can be changed using SP4-020-002 (Dust Check Dust
Detect:Lvl). (The larger the value is, the smaller the dirt particles that can be detected
become.)
• It is prohibited to change the setting of SP4-020-003 (Dust Check Lvl Dust Reject:Lvl).
Difference between Non-contact Transport and Contact Transport in DF Scanning
Transport Non-contact Transport Contact Transport

Method
Descriptions
Because of the film attached to the While passing, the original contacts the
glass, the original doesn’t contact the glass.
glass.
582
Transport Non-contact Transport Contact Transport

Method
Merit It almost never causes stripes on the It almost never causes stripes on the
image that arise from foreign image that arise from dust on the glass,
substances transferring from the because the glass is cleaned by contact
original to the glass. with the transported original.
Demerit Compared with the contact method, Compared with the non-contact method,
stripes on the image caused by dust stripes on the image caused by foreign
occur more often. substances transferred from the surface of
an original to the glass occur more often.
Aim To improve the prevention of stripes in Considering the target users of this
the image caused by sticky foreign machine, it’s important to improve
substances. prevention of stripes caused by dust in the
path
Note 1. Be sure to replace the sheet- -
through glass with the film
attached on the glass.
2. When you attach the film on the
glass, you need to keep the left
scale attached on the glass in
order to fix the location of the
film.*1
3. You can change the method
(contact method to non-contact, or
vice versa) by replacing some
parts.*1
*1: For details, Vertical Streaks on Copies due to Scanning Problems (D0B4).
Related SPs

Def.
4-020- 0 Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off (Improved Tolerance to Black Lines when
001 Paper Passes through ARDF/SPDF)
4-020- 4 Dust Check Dust Detect:Lvl (Improved Tolerance to Black Lines when Paper
002 Passes through ARDF/SPDF)
4-020- 0 Dust Check Lvl Dust Reject:Lvl (Improved Tolerance to Black Lines when
003 Paper Passes through ARDF/SPDF)
583

Def.
4-301- 0 Operation Check APS Sensor (Document Size Detection)
001
4-303- 0 Min Size for APS (Document Size Detection)
001
4-305- 0 8K/16K Detection (Document Size Detection)
001
4-308- 1 Scan Size Detection (Document Size Detection)
001
4-311- 0 Detection: Start Position (Document Size Detection)
001
4-312- 22 Scan Size Detect: Setting LED PWM Duty (Document Size Detection)
006
4-313- 0 Scan Size Detect Value (Document Size Detection)
001
to
4-313-
036
4-806- 0 Scanner carriage storage operation (Scanner Carriage Storage Control)
001
5-126- 0 Set F-size Document (Document Size Detection)
001
5-135- 0 LG_Oficio Change (Document Size Detection)
001
584
Laser Exposure
Overview
Name
A Synchronization detector mirrors
B Synchronization detector lens
C Mirror
D F-theta lens
E Soundproof glass
F Polygon motor
G Cylindrical lens
H LD drive board
The LD drive board controls both the laser output and laser synchronization mechanism. The machine
cuts off the power supply to the LD drive board if the front door or right door is opened.
585
Auto Power Control (APC)
The LD driver IC drives the laser diode.

To prevent the intensity of the laser beam from changing because of the temperature, the machine
monitors the current passing through the laser diode (LD).
The machine adjusts the current to the laser diode by comparing it with the reference level from the
reference circuit.
This auto power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during printing.
The laser diode power is adjusted on the production line.
Do not touch the variable resistors on the LD unit in the field.
586
LD Safety Switch
To ensure the technician's and user's safety and to prevent the laser beam from inadvertently switching
on during servicing, the safety switch for the front door and right door is located on the front-right side of
the machine.
The switch is installed on the +24VS line through the MPU (PCB7) board.
When the front door or the right cover is opened, the power supply to the laser diode is interrupted.
587
PCDU
Overview
The PCDU consists of the components shown in the above illustration.

The PCU (diameter: 30 mm) is used in this machine.
1 Cleaning blade 6 Development roller
2 Toner collection coil 7 Development unit
3 Pickoff pawl 8 Charge roller
4 PCU (drum) 9 Charge roller cleaning brush
5 ID sensor (S6) 10 Quenching lamp (L1)
The ID sensor (S6) and the quenching lamp (L1) are not included in the PCDU.
588
Drive
The main motor (M3) [A] drives the drum gear [B] and the drum drive shaft [C].
The main motor (M3) assembly includes a drive controller, which outputs a motor lock signal when the
rotation speed is out of the specified range.
Related SPs

Def.
2-801- 0 Perform initialization of the developer after replacement with a new PCDU,
001 etc. (Developer)
7-622- 0 Reset the PM counter of the OPC. (PM Parts Replacement Procedure)
021
7-622- 0 Reset the PM counter of the developer. (PM Parts Replacement Procedure)
024
7-622- 0 Reset the PM counter of the transfer screw (bearing). (Mixing Auger
028 Bearings)
589
Drum Charge/Quenching
Overview
This product uses a drum charge roller to charge the drum.

The drum charge roller [A] always contacts the surface of the drum [B] to give it a negative charge of –
950 V.
The high-voltage power supply board (PCB3) gives a negative charge of –1700 V to the drum charge
roller through the screw [C] and terminal plate [D].
This voltage can be changed using SP2-001-001 (Charge Roller Bias Adjust Setting (Copying)).
ID Sensor Pattern Production Timing
The ID sensor pattern is not made on every page or in every job.

It is only made in the following conditions:
• During warm-up at power on
• When the machine starts warming up from energy saver mode and the temperature is less than the
target temperature as set with SP Mode.
• When the machine starts warming up from energy saver mode and the machine prints more than
100 prints after generating the p-pattern.
Drum Charge Roller Cleaning
590
Because the drum charge roller [A] always contacts the drum, it gets dirty easily.
So, the cleaning brush [B] also contacts the drum charge roller all the time to clean the surface of the
drum charge roller.
Quenching
The quenching lamp (L1) quenches the charge from the drum surface at the end of every print cycle.
No. Description
1 PCU (drum)
2 Quenching lamp (L1)
591
Related SPs

Def.
2-001-001 -1470 Set the charge roller bias adjust. (Overview)
7-622-021 0 Reset the PM counter of the OPC. (PM Parts Replacement Procedure)
592
Development
Overview
The development unit consists of the following parts.

No. Item
1 Development roller
2 Mixing auger 2
3 TD sensor (S7)
4 Mixing auger 1
5 Doctor blade
This machine uses a single-roller development system. Two mixing augers mix the developer.
The toner density (TD) sensor and image density (ID) sensor (see the illustration in the PCDU section)
are used to control the image density on the copy.
This sensor (called a mu sensor) is placed on the bottom of the development unit.
It is a toner density sensor to detect the blend ratio of the developer (carrier) and toner in the unit by
converting magnetic permeability change to frequency.
593
Drive
The main motor (M3) [A] drives the development roller [B] and mixing augers [C] through a train of
gears and the development drive shaft [D].
When the PCDU is pushed in, the development drive shaft engages the development roller gear.
The development drive gears (except for the gears in the development unit) are helical gears.
These gears are quieter than normal gears.
Developer Mixing
594
The two mixing augers [A] and [B] keep the developer evenly mixed.
Mixing auger 2 [A] transports excess developer, scraped off the development roller [C] by the doctor
blade [D], towards the front of the machine.
Mixing auger 1 [B] returns the excess developer, along with new toner, to the rear of the mixing
assembly.
Here the developer is reapplied to the development roller.
Development Bias
This machine uses a negative-positive development system, in which black areas of the latent image
are at a low negative charge (about –154 ± 50 V) and white areas are at a high negative charge (about
–950 V).
To attract negatively charged toner to the black areas of the latent image on the drum, the high-voltage
power supply board (PCB3) applies a bias of –520 volts to the development rollers throughout the
image development process.
The bias is applied to the development roller shaft [A] through the drive shaft [B].
The development bias voltage (–520 V) can be adjusted with SP2-201-001.
595
Toner Supply
Toner bottle replenishment mechanism
When a toner bottle is placed in the bottle holder unit [A] and the unit is pushed in completely, the toner
outlet [B] of the bottle holder fits the toner inlet [C] of the development unit.
When the toner bottle holder lever [D] is put back in the original position, the cap [E] on the toner bottle
is pulled away and kept in place by the chuck [F].
The toner supply mechanism transports toner from the bottle to the development unit.
The toner bottle has a spiral groove [G] that helps move toner to the development unit.
To add a new toner bottle, first lift the toner bottle holder. When this is done, the chuck releases the
toner bottle cap into its proper position to prevent toner from scattering.
596
Toner Supply Mechanism
The toner supply motor (M5) [A] drives the toner bottle [B] and the sheet blades [C].
First, the toner falls down into the toner bottle holder.
The toner supply sheet blades transfer the toner to the outlet [D].
When the PCU is installed in the machine, the outlet of the bottle holder fits the inlet of the development
unit.
Then the toner falls down into the development unit through the outlet and the inlet.
Toner Density Control
Overview
There are four modes for controlling toner supply, which can be changed with by SP2-921-001. The
factory setting is sensor control 1 mode.
Basically, the toner concentration in the developer is controlled using the toner supply reference voltage
(Vtref), the actual TD sensor output voltage (Vt), and ID sensor output data (Vsp/Vsg).
597
The four-toner density control modes are as follows.

Mode Sensor control 1 (SP2-921-001, "0"): Normally use this setting only
Toner supply Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vtref)
decision
Toner control Toner is supplied to the development unit when Vt is higher than the reference
process voltage (Vtref). This mode keeps the Vtref value for use with the next toner density
control.
Vt is used for the first toner density control after a new PCU has been installed.
Vtref is used after it has been corrected after the ID sensor density control.
Toner supply Varies
amount
Toner end Performed
detection
Mode Sensor control 2 (SP2-921-001, "1"): For designer's use only

Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vtref)
Toner control process This toner control process is the same as sensor control 1.
Toner supply amount Varies
Toner end detection Performed
Mode Fixed control 1 (SP2-921-001, "2"): For designer's use only

Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vtref)
598
Toner control process This toner control process is the same as sensor control 1.
Toner supply amount Fixed (SP 2925)
Toner end detection Performed
Mode Fixed control 2 (SP2-921-001, “3”): For designer's use only

Toner supply decision None
Toner control process Toner is supplied every printed page regardless of Vt.
Toner supply amount Fixed (SP 2925)
Toner end detection Not performed
Toner supply motor on time determinations
For fixed control mode, the toner supply motor on time is specified by the setting of SP2-925, and does
not vary.
The default setting is 200 ms for each copy.
For sensor control modes 1 and 2, the toner supply motor on time is decided by the following factors.
• Vt
• Vtref
• TD sensor sensitivity (coefficient: S, value is 0.3)
There are seven levels for toner supply motor on time as shown below.
Level Mode Decision Motor On Time (seconds)
Vt=Vt-Vtref
0 No supply Vt ≤ 0 0
1 Normal 0 < Vt ≤ S/16 T
2 Normal S/16 < Vt ≤ S/8 a×t
3 Normal S/8 < Vt ≤ S/4 b×t
4 Normal S/4 < Vt ≤ S/2 c×t
5 Normal S/2 < Vt ≤ 4/5 d×t
6 Intermittent (reference: near-end) 4S/5 < Vt ≤ S T
7 Intermittent (reference: toner end) S < Vt T
T means that toner is supplied intermittently in a cycle (e seconds on, f seconds off).
The value of “S” can be changed using SP2-931-001 (default: 0.3V)
The value of “t” can be changed using SP2-922-001 (default: 0.4 second)
The value of “T” can be changed using SP2-923-001 (default: 30 seconds)
The value of “a” can be changed using SP2-922-002 (default: 1.0 seconds)
The value of “b” can be changed using SP2-922-003 (default: 1.0 seconds)
The value of “c” can be changed using SP2-922-004 (default: 2.0 seconds)
The value of “d” can be changed using SP2-922-005 (default: 4.0 seconds)
The value of “e” can be changed using SP2-923-002 (default: 1.5 seconds)
599
The value of “f” can be changed using SP2-923-003 (default: 1.5 seconds)
Toner Near End/End Detection and Recovery
Toner near end and toner end are detected by the TD sensor (S7).
This is done in all toner supply modes except for fixed mode 2 when toner end is not detected.
Toner Near End Detection
If toner supply motor on time is at level 6 or higher ten times consecutively, the machine enters the
toner near end condition and the toner end indicator starts blinking on the operation panel. Then the
machine supplies toner for a certain time, which depends on the setting of SP 2-923-001.
Toner Near End Recovery
If toner supply motor on time is at level 5 or lower twice consecutively in any of the following situations,
the machine clears the toner near end condition.
• While in the toner recovery cycle after the machine has detected a toner near end condition.
• During copying in the toner near end condition.
• If the front door is opened and closed for more than 5 seconds.
Toner End Detection
There are two situations for entering the toner end condition.
• When toner supply motor on time is level 7 three times consecutively while in toner near-end
condition.
• When 50 copies*2 have been made since entering the toner near end condition.
*2 The number of copies between toner near-end and toner end can be changed using SP2-213.
When toner end is detected, the following is performed.
• During paper feed: The machine enters toner end condition as soon as printing on the paper being fed
finishes.
• During intermittent toner supply: The machine enters toner end condition as soon as intermittent toner
supply finishes.
Toner End Recovery
If the front door is opened for 5 seconds or more while the main power is turned ON, the machine
assumes that the toner bottle has been replaced, and clears the Toner End condition.
Related SPs

Def.
2-201- -520 Adjust the development bias voltage. (Development Bias)
001
600

Def.
2-213- 0 Set the remaining number of copies to make before the toner end after
001 detection of the toner near end. (Toner End Detection)
2-224- 0 The current number of copies to use as the toner near end with SP2-213-1.
001
2-921- 0 Change the toner supply control. (Overview)
001
2-922- 0.4 (Toner supply motor on time determinations)
001
2-922- 1
002
2-922- 1
003
2-922- 2
004
2-922- 4
005
2-923- 30
001
2-923- 1.5
002
2-923- 1.5
003
2-925- 0.2
001
2-931- 0.3
001
7-622- 0 Reset the PM counter of the developer. (PM Parts Replacement Procedure)
024
7-622- 0 Reset the PM counter of the transfer screw (bearing). (PM Parts Replacement
028 Procedure)
601
Drum Cleaning and Toner Recycling
Drum Cleaning
The cleaning blade [A] removes any toner remaining on the drum after the image is transferred to the
paper.
This model uses a counter blade system.
The cleaning blade scrapes off toner remaining on the drum.
When toner builds up in the cleaning unit, toner at the top of the pile is removed by the toner collection
coil [B].
To remove the toner and other particles that are accumulated at the edge of the cleaning blade, the
drum turns in reverse for 60 msec at the end of every copy job.
602
Toner Recycling
Toner picked up by the toner collection coil [A], is transported to the opening [B] in the side of the PCU.
Then, this toner falls into the development unit with new toner coming from the toner bottle and it is all
mixed together by mixing auger 1 [C] and used again.
603
Image Transfer and Paper Separation
Overview
The transfer roller [A] touches the surface of the drum [B].
The high voltage supply board supplies a positive current to the transfer roller, which attracts the toner
from the drum onto the paper.
The current depends on the paper width, paper type, and paper feed tray.
The curvature of the drum and the discharge plate [C] help the paper to separate from the drum.
The discharge plate is grounded.
604
The drum rotation is transmitted to the transfer roller by friction, and the roller will turn.
Image Transfer Current Timing
This machine has four patterns of image transfer current settings for each "paper type," "paper size,"
and "front/reverse side."
If the temperature in the machine is high, high image transfer current is used.
The temperature range can be adjusted with SP (SP2-307-001 to SP2-307-005).
The image transfer current correction value can be set with SP (SP2-301-001 to SP2-301-133) for each
"paper type," "front/reverse side" and "image area, leading edge, and trailing edge."
Transfer Roller Cleaning
If the paper size is smaller than the image, or if a paper jam occurs during printing, the toner may be
transferred to the roller surface.
To prevent the toner from transferring to the back side of the printouts, the transfer roller requires
cleaning before the next printing run.
During transfer roller cleaning, the high voltage power supply board (PCB3) supplies a negative
cleaning current (about –4 mA) to the transfer roller.
Any negatively charged toner on the transfer roller is then transferred back to the drum.
Then a positive cleaning current (+10 mA) is applied to the transfer roller to push back to the drum any
positively charged toner on the transfer roller.
The machine goes through the cleaning mode in the following conditions:
• Before starting the printing job (only if enabled with SP2-996; note that the default setting is off).
• Just after the power is switched on.
605
• After a copy jam has been cleared.

• After 10 or more sheets of paper have been copied and the copy job has finished.
Also, the transfer roller cleaning current can be adjusted using SP2-303-001 and -002.
Paper Separation Mechanism
The discharge plate [A] and the drum curvature of the drum help the paper to separate away from the
drum.
The discharge plate is grounded.
Related SPs
SP Selection Overview
No. Def.
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thin:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
001
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thin:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
002
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thin:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
606
No. Def.
301- Timing)
003
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Plai1:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
011
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Plai1:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
012
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Plai1:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
013
301- Timing)
021
301- Timing)
022
301- Timing)
023
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Mid:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
031
2- 0 Correct the 1sideMid:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
032
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Mid:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
033
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic1:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
041
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic1:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
042
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic1:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
607
No. Def.
301- Timing)
043
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic2:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
051
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic2:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
052
2- 0 Correct the 1side:Thic2:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
053
301- Timing)
111
301- Timing)
112
301- Timing)
113
301- Timing)
121
301- Timing)
122
301- Timing)
123
2- 0 Correct the 2side:Mid:Image image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
131
2- 0 Correct the 2sideMid:Lead image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
301- Timing)
132
2- 0 Correct the 2side:Mid:Trail image transfer current. (Image Transfer Current
608
No. Def.
301- Timing)
133
2- 10 CL bias: positive: Use to deal with marks on the back side generated due to
303- attachment of weakly-charged toner or reverse-polarity toner to the transfer
001 roller. Use in combination with 2-303-002. (Transfer Roller Cleaning)
2- 4 CL bias: negative :Use to deal with marks on the back side generated due to
303- attachment of toner to the transfer roller caused by paper jams, etc. Use in
002 combination with 2-303-001. (Transfer Roller Cleaning)
2- 13 Set the temperature threshold of the Division 1 image transfer current. (Image
307- Transfer Current Timing)
001
002
003
004
2- -99 Set the temperature threshold of the Division 5 image transfer current. (Image
005
2- 0 Specify whether or not to clean the transfer roller before printing. (Transfer Roller
996- Cleaning)
001
2- 50 Specify cleaning of the transfer roller when a print job has been finished.
996- (Transfer Roller Cleaning)
002
2- 0 Counter for use with 2-996-002. (Transfer Roller Cleaning)
996-
003
7- 0 Reset the PM counter of the transfer unit. (PM Parts Replacement Procedure)
622-
108
609
Image Fusing and Paper Exit
Overview

1 Thermotstat (S4) 5 Pressure roller
2 Thermistor 6 Hot roller
3 Paper exit/reverse roller 7 Fusing lamp
4 Paper exit sensor (S5)
610
Fusing Unit Drive and Release Mechanism
Fusing Unit Drive
The main motor (M3) [A] drives the fusing unit through a gear train and the timing belt [B].
Contact/Release Control
Drive power is not transmitted to the fusing unit during warming up when the environment temperature
(at the start) is 17 °C or higher.
Drive power is transmitted when the environment temperature is less than 17 °C.
The hot roller takes less time to become sufficiently hot if it is not turning during warming up.
However, when the environment temperature (at the start) is low, the temperature of the hot-roller
surface may become uneven.
SP1-103-001 can disable this control. Do not change this SP to 1 unless there is a problem with offset,
because when this SP is set to 1, the fusing unit ‘reloads’ and warm-up time becomes longer than
specification (17.6 seconds).
Contact/Release Solenoid (SOL1)
When the right cover is closed, the drive gear [A] engages with the fusing unit drive gear [B].
When the contact/release solenoid (SOL1) [D] is on, the fusing bracket [C] is pulled up. As a result, the
611
drive gear is released from the fusing unit drive gear.

When the environment temperature is 17 °C or higher, the contact/release solenoid (SOL1) comes on
when the main power is turned on.
The solenoid releases the drive gear from the fusing unit drive gear.
Fusing Entrance Guide Shift
The entrance guide [A] is adjustable for paper thickness to prevent creasing.
The outer screw holes [B] on each side are used as the default setting.
If creasing occurs frequently in the fusing unit, adjust the entrance guide to the right, by securing it with
the inner holes [C].
This allows more direct access to the gap between the hot roller and the pressure roller.
612
Pressure Roller
The pressure springs [A] constantly apply pressure between the hot roller [B] and the pressure roller
[C].
Applied pressure can be changed by adjusting the position of the pressure springs.
The spring is positioned at the end [D] as the default setting.
Pressure Roller Release Mechanism
On the low-end fusing unit, the pressure roller [B] is constantly pressed to the hot roller by a pressure
spring.
Therefore, when a paper is jammed on the fusing unit, the jammed paper is hard to remove.
This machine has a pressure-release lever [A] for easy removal of any paper jammed on the fusing
613
unit.
Fusing Temperature Control
Overview
There are two fusing lamps, two thermistors, and two thermostats (S4).
The fusing temperature is controlled using the thermistors (H1, H2)[A].
The CPU checks the output from the fusing thermistor once every 1 second.
The CPU decides how long the lamps must be switched on during the next 1 second by comparing the
following temperatures:
• The thermistor (center) (H1) temperature and the target center temperature
• The thermistor (end) (H2) temperature and the target end temperature
The fusing lamp works to maintain a target fusing temperature of 165°C during copying.
Temperature control
According to the operation mode, the fusing temperature is controlled.

The diagram illustrates the transition of fusing temperature. After the main power switch is turned on,
the fusing temperature rises from the room temperature (t0) to one of the specified temperatures.
Some of the temperatures can be adjusted.
614
A1: Regular Start Mode/A2: Cold Start Mode

Turning the fusing lamp on and off may affect the voltage of the power source in the room, causing the
fluorescent lights in the room to flicker.
To lighten this problem, the checking repetition can be reduced to 20 times.
When machine initialization ends, the fusing temperature is set to one of the following temperatures:
• The Standby Temperature (T2: SP1-107-001, -002) when there is no print job.
• The First Print Temperature when the main machine has received a print request during machine
initialization.
The First Print Temperature cannot be directly adjusted. This temperature is 10°C higher (up to 185°C)
than the Copying Temperature.
Refer to "C: Copying Mode" for Copying Temperature.

C: Copying Mode
When the main machine is making copies, the fusing temperature is set to the following temperature:
• The Copying Temperature (T4: SP1-105-003, -004, -011, -012, -013, -014, -015, -016)
The Copying Temperature can be raised to improve the fusing quality of the first print.
c: Thick Paper Mode
When the machine is making copies on thick paper, the fusing temperature is set to the Thick Paper
Temperature (SP1-105-021, -022, -023, -024).
When thick paper reaches the registration sensor (S16), the main machine checks the fusing
temperature, and executes one of the following processing:
• Stops feeding the thick paper (and keeps it at the registration sensor (S16)) and waits for the fusing
temperature to reach the predefined temperature–the temperature 5°C lower than the Thick Paper
Temperature. (The fusing temperature keeps rising until it reaches the Thick Paper Temperature
while the thick paper travels from the registration sensor (S16) to the fusing unit.)
• Continues feeding paper and executes the print job if the fusing temperature is high enough.
b1/b2: Standby Mode
When the main machine is not making copies, the fusing temperature is set to the Standby Temperature
(T2: SP1-107-001, -002).
615
This temperature can be adjusted. However, if this temperature is raised, the MPU (PCB7) may be
unable to generate an SC code in the event of fusing lamp error.
While in the Standby Mode, the main machine checks the fusing temperature every 2 seconds (G: SP1-
108-003).
Turning on and off the fusing lamp may affect the voltage of the power source (in the room), causing the
fluorescent lights (in the room) to flicker.
To reduce this problem, the control period can be adjusted. However, if this period is elongated (to two
seconds or longer), the MPU (PCB7) may be unable to generate an SC code in the event of a fusing
lamp error.
e: Low Power Mode
When the Energy Saver Timer ( > System Settings > Admin. Tools > Energy Saver Mode) expires,
the fusing temperature is set to the Low Power Temperature (T1: SP1-107-005).
Print Duty Control
Overview of Print Duty Control
In some cases, the temperature in the main body may rise due to high-load environment (32.1 to 38ºC)
conditions such as a high temperature in the machine installation environment and continuous printing.
Provide temperature control in the area around the imaging parts for preventing problems resulting from
fusing and sticking of toner in the imaging and toner carrying units in such situations.
Print Duty Control
• A temperature sensor is installed inside the machine, and this temperature sensor estimates the
imaging temperature (Ts).
• If the imaging temperature (Ts) exceeds the specified threshold, the machine stops printing and the
main fan (FAN2) operates at full speed until the temperature drops to the specified temperature for
standby.
• While the machine is on standby, the display shows "Cooling Inside/Please wait”.
• When the conditions for resolving the cause of the printing interruption are met, paper feeding is
resumed.
Threshold value Operation during control Release time (38ºC environment) SP mode set
48ºC Stop (Pause) Approx. 8 minutes SP2-990-001
Overheat Protection
This machine is equipped with three functions to prevent the hardware from overheating.
Normally, the first function operates.
When the first function fails to operate effectively, the second function operates.
When the second function fails to operate effectively, the third function operates.
First Function:
616
If the fusing temperature reaches 230°C (or higher) and stays so for one second, the controller turns
the fusing lamp off.
In a case like this, SC543 or SC553 shows.
Second Function:
If the fusing feature reaches 250°C, the controller cuts off the 24V line. (The fusing lamps are on the
24V line.) In a case like this, SC544 or SC554 shows.
Third Function:
Two thermostats (S4) are attached on the line of the fusing lamp. The thermostat cuts the power supply
to the fusing lamp at 200°C. (Note that the thermostat temperature is somewhat lower than the fusing
temperature.)
CPM Control
Overview of CPM control
This machine has two CPM down modes and slows the printing speed to keep the quality of images
and devices.
One is the CPM down for low fusing temperature and the other is for high fusing temperature.
Both CPM down modes have three levels to slow according to the usage and devices status.
CPM Down for Low Fusing Temperature
The fusing temperature is detected by the thermistors (Center:H1 and End:H2) and checked at regular
intervals.
In low ambient temperature, fusing temperature may not be kept at the target temperature due to
insufficient heating.
To keep at the target temperature, the machine enters the CPM down mode and slows the printing
speed by one step if the detected fusing temperature is lower than the threshold.
• Threshold temperature for CPM down mode: -13°C against the target temperature for printing
(Normal > CPM down 1 > down 2 > down 3)
• Threshold temperature for recovery from CPM down mode: -5°C against the target temperature for
printing (CPM down 3 > down 2 > down 1 > Normal)
Conversely, the machine speeds the printing by one step if the detected fusing temperature is higher
than the threshold.
There are three CPM down levels as follows:
Mode Level SP Adjustment
Normal CPM 100% -
CPM down 1 75% SP1-124-003
CPM down 2 65% SP1-124-004
CPM down 3 40% SP1-124-005
617
CPM Down for High Fusing Temperature
To prevent the hot roller damage from the heat, CPM down is performed according to the usage
conditions.
The decision of CPM down performance depends on the temperature detected by the thermistors
(Center:H1 and End:H2) and checked at regular intervals.
CPM down threshold
Mode Threshold A4 B5 A5 A6
Temp. LT
CPM down 1 SP1-124-009 -012 -015 -018 -021
(215°C) (215°C) (205°C) (205°C) (205°C)
CPM down 2 SP1-124-010 -013 -016 -019 -022
(220°C) (220°C) (205°C) (205°C) (205°C)
CPM down 3 SP1-124-011 -014 -017 -020 -023
(225°C) (225°C) (205°C) (205°C) (205°C)
CPM down is performed with the following three levels.
Normal CPM 100% -
CPM down 1 80% SP1-124-006
CPM down 2 65% SP1-124-007
CPM down 3 50% SP1-124-008
Paper Transport in Low-Voltage Mode
"Low-voltage mode" is adapted to maintain a high fusing result even if printing is performed outside the
guaranteed input voltage.
Control with CPM down
When the low voltage is detected, CPM down 1 is adopted for the second and subsequent paper
transport.
CPM down with decreasing or increasing temperature is detected and controlled in the same way as
with normal voltage.
Normal CPM 100% -
Low Voltage CPM down 1 30% SP1-124-101
Pre-rotation control before paper feeding
If a low voltage is detected, pre-rotation is performed for the time set by SP1-109-003 (default: 0
618
seconds) before paper feeding.

After pre-rotation, the rotation continues until the center and end temperatures of the fusing roller reach
the target temperature for printing.
Differences against Temperature for Paper Feeding
Mode Recovery threshold against target temp. SP Adjustment
Thermistor (Center) (H1) 10°C SP1-104-051
Thermistor (End) (H2) 10°C SP1-104-052
Pre-rotation Time Before Paper Feeding
Mode Time SP Adjustment
Pre-rotation before paper feeding 0 sec* SP1-109-003
* The default value is 0. To perform pre-rotation before paper feeding, set the appropriate value.
If the target temperature for printing cannot be obtained when the time set with SP1-104-050 (default:
60 seconds) has elapsed after pre-rotation, the machine stops with SC549-02 and displays "Low-
Voltage".
Control by interrupting paper transport
If a thermistor temperature equal to or lower than the down temperature is detected for 30 seconds
continuously with SP1-124-104 after shifting to low voltage CPM down 3, the machine stops with
SC549-04 and displays "Low-Voltage" (resolved by turning the power off and back on).
Related SPs
No. Def.
1- 0 Enable/disable Contact/Release Control. (Contact/Release Control)
103-
001
1- 60 Set the time for stopping the machine if the print start temperature is not reached
104- when the low voltage is detected. Set the period from pre-rotation to stopping.
050 (Pre-rotation control before paper feeding)
1- 10 Threshold for resuming paper feeding for the target temperature of the
104- thermistor center when the low voltage is detected. (Recovery threshold against
051 target temp.)(Pre-rotation control before paper feeding)
1- 10 Threshold for resuming paper feeding for the target temperature of the
104- thermistor end when the low voltage is detected. (Recovery threshold against
052 target temp.) (Pre-rotation control before paper feeding)
1- 145 Set the fusing temperature for thin paper (center). (Temperature control)
105-
619
No. Def.
003
1- 145 Set the fusing temperature for thin paper (end). (Temperature control)
105-
004
1- 165 Set the fusing temperature for plain paper 1 (center). (Temperature control)
105-
011
1- 165 Set the fusing temperature for plain paper 1 (end). (Temperature control)
105-
012
1- 165 Set the fusing temperature for plain paper 2 (center). (Temperature control)
105-
013
1- 165 Set the fusing temperature for plain paper 2 (end). (Temperature control)
105-
014
1- 175 Set the fusing temperature for middlethick paper (center). (Temperature control)
105-
015
1- 175 Set the fusing temperature for middlethick paper (end). (Temperature control)
105-
016
1- 185 Set the fusing temperature for thick paper 1 (center). (Temperature control)
105-
021
1- 180 Set the fusing temperature for thick paper 1 (end). (Temperature control)
105-
022
1- 195 Set the fusing temperature for thick paper 2 (center). (Temperature control)
105-
023
1- 190 Set the fusing temperature for thick paper 2 (end). (Temperature control)
105-
024
1- 155 Set the standby temperature (center). (Temperature control)
107-
620
No. Def.
001
1- 160 Set the standby temperature (end). (Temperature control)
107-
002
1- 50 Set the standby temperature in the energy saver mode. (Temperature control)
107-
005
1- 2000 Set the interval for checking the fusing temperature. (Temperature control)
108-
003
1- 0 Set the pre-rotation time for detection of the low voltage. (Pre-rotation control
109- before paper feeding)
003
1- 75 Adjust the CPM down 1 (low fusing temperature) level. (CPM Down for Low
124- Fusing Temperature)
003
004
005
1- 80 Adjust the CPM down 1 (high fusing temperature) level. (CPM Down for High
006
007
008
1- 215 Adjust the CPM down 1 (high fusing temperature) for size A3. (CPM Down for
124- High Fusing Temperature)
009
621
No. Def.
010
011
012
013
014
1- 205 Adjust the CPM down 1 (high fusing temperature) for size B5. (CPM Down for
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
622
No. Def.
022
023
1- 30 Adjust the CPM down 1 (low voltage) level. (Control with CPM down)
124-
101
124-
102
124-
103
1- 30 Set the time for interrupting paper feeding of CPM down (low voltage). (Control
124- by interrupting paper transport)
104
2- 1 Enable/disable Print Duty Control. (Print Duty Control)
990-
001
7- 0 Reset the PM counter of the fusing unit. (PM Parts Replacement Procedure)
622-
115
7- 0 Reset the PM counter of the hot roller bearings. (PM Parts Replacement
622- Procedure)
119
623
Paper Feed
Overview
• There is one paper tray, which can hold 500 sheets, in the main machine.
• In this machine, an RF paper feed system is employed.
• The paper feed roller, friction roller, and pick-up roller are high durability rollers.
• The components of the paper feed station are as follows.
1 Paper end sensor (S12) 4 Paper feed roller
2 Upper limit sensor (S13) 5 Pickup roller
3 Friction roller 6 Paper size switch (SW4)
Paper Feed Drive Mechanism
The pick-up roller, paper feed roller, relay roller (drive), and the registration roller are driven by the main
motor (M3).
624

1 Registration roller 4 Pick-up roller
2 Relay roller (drive) 5 Main motor (M3)
3 Paper feed roller
Paper Feed Mechanism

1 Pickup arm 4 Feed guide
625

2 Pickup roller 5 Friction roller
3 Paper feed roller 6 Upper limit sensor
The paper feed unit employs an RF system.
When the paper feed tray is set in the machine, the pressure release lever [1] is pressed, the friction
roller [2] comes in contact with the feed roller, and the pickup roller [3] contacts the top of the paper (to
prevent paper remaining, when the paper feed tray is withdrawn, then the pressure release lever
returns and contact with the rollers is released).

1 Pressure release lever 3 Pickup roller
2 Friction roller
626
Tray Base Plate Lift Mechanism
When the paper feed tray is set in the machine, the set switch at the rear of the tray switches ON, and it
is detected that the tray is set.
The coupling and the lift motor then engages, the motor rotates, and the tray base plate is lifted. The
tray base plate lifts until the paper surface pushes the pick-up roller up, the upper limit sensor switches
OFF (interrupt), and the machine enters the paper feed standby mode.
When the tray is removed, the coupling is released, and the base plate moves down. The lift motor then
rotates until the coupling returns to the home position.
1 Lift motor 3 Tray bottom plate
2 Coupling
627

1 Upper limit sensor 2 Pickup roller
Paper End Detection
When there is no more paper in the paper feed tray, the leading edge of the paper end feeler [A] falls
into a notch [C] in the base plate, and the paper end sensor (S12) [B] at the rear end of the feeler
switches ON (unblocked).
Paper Size Detection
The end fence is interlocked with a size detection actuator in an automatic detection system which
recognizes patterns using a 4-position push switch.
Size is detected by the detection patterns of switches 1, 2, 3, and 4. Tray set is detected by another
switch.
If the machine detects a change in the outputs from the switches, the machine detects the paper size
again from the new outputs.
If the paper size is selected manually by a user setting, the automatic size detection is overridden.
628

1 End fence 3 Tray set switch
2 Paper size switch 4 Size detection actuator
• Tray detection sizes: A3, B4, A4 SEF, LT SEF, B5 SEF, A4 LEF, EXE LEF, and A5 LEF
• Tray size detection patterns
Size Knob
1 2 3 4
A3 (DLT) *1 1 0 0 0
*1
B4 (LG) 0 0 0 0
A4 SEF 0 0 1 1
LT SEF 0 1 1 0
B5 SEF 1 1 0 0
*1
A4 LEF (LT LEF) 0 0 0 1
*1
EXE LEF (B5 LEF) 0 0 1 0
A5 LEF 0 1 0 0
• "0" is switched ON (pushed), "1" is switched OFF.

• The sizes indicated with *1 are the automatic paper size which can be switched over in SP
mode (SP5-180-001 to 004).
• EXE LEF = 10.5"×7.25"
• If a pattern other than the above is detected, a blank is displayed on the operation panel.
629
Side Fences
If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or bend.
This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be incorrect.
To correct this, the front side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it.
This side fence can be secured with a screw [B], for customers who do not want to change the paper
size.
Paper Registration
The drive from the main motor (M3) [A] is transmitted to the registration roller through the registration
630
clutch (CL3) gear [B].

The registration sensor (S16) [C] is used for correcting paper skew and for detecting paper misfeeds.
The skew of the paper can be corrected from SP1-003-002 to -004.
Related SPs

Def.
5-180-001 0 Tray size setting (0: A4LEF, 1: LTLEF) (Paper Size Detection)
5-180-002 0 Tray size setting (0: A3, 1: DLT) (Paper Size Detection)
5-180-003 0 Tray size setting (0: B4, 1: LG) (Paper Size Detection)
5-180-004 0 Tray size setting (0: B5LEF, 1: ExeLEF) (Paper Size Detection)
631
Bypass Feed
Overview
The components of the bypass feed tray are as follows.

1 Bypass paper feed roller 5 Main motor (M3)
2 Bypass paper pick-up roller 6 Bypass paper feed clutch (CL5)
3 Bypass paper end sensor (S9) 7 Bypass length sensor (S11)
4 Feeler 8 Bypass width sensor (S10)
• The bypass tray can hold 100 sheets.
• The bypass tray uses a friction pad system.
• The main motor (M3) drives the bypass paper feed roller and bypass pick-up roller through a gear
train. When the bypass paper end sensor detects no paper on the bypass tray, the machine stops
feeding a sheet of paper from the bypass tray.
632
Duplex Unit/Exit Unit
Overview
The printed paper goes to the paper exit/reverse roller from the fusing unit and then feed out to the
paper exit tray.
If the user selects the duplex mode, the printed paper from the fusing unit goes straight through to the
paper exit/reverse roller, and then it is reversed through the duplex unit, and back into the machine for
printing the second side.
1 Paper exit/reverse roller 3 Duplex transport roller
2 Paper exit sensor (S5) 4 Registration roller
633
Drive Mechanism

1 Paper exit/reverse roller 4 Main motor (M3)
2 Paper exit clutch (CL1) 5 Duplex clutch (CL2)
3 Reverse clutch (CL7) 6 Duplex transport roller
Basic Operation
To increase the productivity of the duplex unit, copies are printed as follows.
- Larger than A4 Short-edge/LT Short-edge -
The paper feed path can hold only one sheet of copy paper at a time.
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages.
The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper (if black, this indicates the
second side).
634
- Up to A4 Short-edge/LT Short-edge -
The paper feed path can hold two sheets of copy paper.
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages.
The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper (if black, this indicates the
second side).
635
636
Feed In and Exit Mechanism
During duplex printing, the rotation of the paper exit/reverse roller [A] is reversed by turning off the
paper exit clutch (CL1) and on the reverse clutch (CL7) after the paper exit clutch (CL1) has been
activated and specified time has elapsed.
The sheet of paper goes to the paper path in the duplex unit by the paper exit/reverse roller.
The paper is then sent to the main machine registration roller by the duplex transport roller to print the
reverse side.
If there are two or more copies being made with A4/81/2" x 11" LEF (or smaller), the next sheet waits at
the registration sensor (S16) for the current sheet to enter the duplex unit.
637
Paper Exit Detection
The paper exit/reverse roller [A] feeds out paper to the paper exit tray.
When the paper exit sensor (S5) [B] detects the trailing edge of the last page by the feeler [C], the
machine stops the paper exit clutch (CL1) and then stops the main motor (M3).
Related SPs

Def.
2-933- 1 Adjustment of the ID sensor correction value. (Before Replacing the ID
001 Sensor (S6))
2-935- 0 Initialization of the ID sensor. (Replacement Procedure)
001
638
Board Structure
Block Diagram
MPU (PCB7) (Main Processing Unit)

The MPU (PCB7) board controls the following functions:
• Engine sequence
• Timing control for peripherals
• Image processing, video control
• Operation control, system control
• Machine control
• Drive control for the sensors, motors, and clutches of the printer and scanner
639
• High voltage supply board control

• Serial interfaces with peripherals
• Fusing control
The LED 102 on the MPU (PCB7) blinks at a period of 1 second during the Firmware operation.
640
9.Smart Operation Panel G2.5
9. Smart Operation Panel G2.5
Replacement and Adjustment
M2 screws are used for assembling the smart operation panel.
Exterior Covers
USB Cover
1. Remove the USB cover [A],[B].
641
Maintenance Cover
1. Remove the maintenance cover [A].
Rear Cover
1. Remove the operation panel unit. (Operation Panel Unit)

642
Front Cover Assembly
1. Remove the micro computer board. (Micro Computer Board)

2. Remove the protection sheet [A].
3. Separate the the LCD unit [A] from the front cover assembly [B].
4. Separate the front cover assembly [A] from the LCD unit [B].
Wi-Fi Module
643
2. Remove the Wi-Fi module [A].
Micro Computer Board
1. Remove the Wi-Fi module. (Wi-Fi Module)

2. Remove the base bracket [A]
644
3. Remove the micro computer board [A].
• By factory default, the following switches of the DIP switch [A] on the micro computer board
are set to ON: No.1, No.3. When installing the operation panel unit, make sure that the DIP
switch setting is correct for the MFP on which you are installing the panel.
• After replacing the micro computer board, perform the following checks:
• LED Check (LED Check)
• Key Check (Key Check)
645
LCD
1. Remove the micro computer board. (Micro Computer Board)

2. Remove the protection sheet [A].
3. Separate the the LCD unit [A] from the front cover assembly [B].
• After replacing the LCD, perform the following checks.

• LCD Check (LCD Check)
• TouchPanel Check (TouchPanel Check)
• Perform "TouchPanel Calibration" (TouchPanel Calibration) and "MultiTouch Calibration"
(MultiTouch Calibration) of the Self Check function.
646
Mechanism
System Components
Hardware Specifications
No. Name No. Name

1 Main power indicator 8 NFC tag
2 USB slot 9 [Check Status] indicator
3 Control panel reboot key 10 Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes)
4 Extended Feature key (EX1) 11 Fax indicator
5 Extended Feature key (EX2) 12 Media access lamp
6 Extended Feature key (EX3) 13 SD card slot
7 USB slot for NFC card readers 14 USB slot
Basic Specifications
Category Specification
LCD panel • Size
7 inch panel
• Resolution
WSVGA (1024x600)
• Bit width
RGB666 (18 bit color)
• Brightness
250cd/m2 (typ.)
• Backlight
LED Backlight (life: 15,000 hours)
CPU ARM Cortex-A9 Quad Core 1GHz（SoC：MCIMX6Q5EYM10AD）
647
Touch panel Low load touch panel (recognizes touches to two points)
Memory • Volatile Memory
RAM (DDR3L-1066), 2GB
• Non-Volatile Memory
eMMC NAND, 8GB
• Uses a 16GB product in SLC Mode.

• Program area and data area for the operating system and
applications.
External interfaces • USB Memory
USB2.0 Host Type-A
• SD Card
SD card slot 1ch (SD*1/SDHC*2)
*1 Up to 2GB
*2 Up to 32GB
• USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-A
(for camera, USB keyboard, USB card reader)
• USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-miniB
(for NFC expansion)
Network • Wireless LAN
802.11ac/a/b/g/n (for Taiwan/China/Asia)
802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz only) (for EU)
• Bluetooth
Bluetooth4.2
Audio input/output Monaural speaker 1ch (output: 1 to 2 W), Microphone
RTC accuracy ±52.56 seconds per month (using external crystal oscillator, 20 ppm)
Hard keys • Extended Feature keys (EX1, EX2, and EX3)
Use for startup in extended mode etc.
• Control panel reboot key
Use to reboot the control panel when it freezes.
LED types • Main power indicator (blue)
Lights when the power is on. Flashes slowly in Sleep mode.
Flashes gradually in Energy Saver mode
• [Check Status] indicator lamp (red/yellow)
Lights when an error occurs.
• Data In indicator (blue)
648
Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer driver or LAN-
Fax driver.
• Fax indicator (blue)
Flashes while sending or receiving a fax. Lights when there is a
received fax document in the fax memory.
• Media access lamp (blue)
Lights when there is an SD card inserted in the SD card slot.
Maximum power 4.5 W or less in standby mode (excluding external interfaces and internal
consumption feature expansions)
6 W or less when using wireless LAN (during high-load operation)
NFC Built-in NFC tag
Made by Vanskee Enterprise
RCH-NTI2CP1K-BSA-PCB-CE-1128
Power consumption in 0.18 W or less
Sleep mode (When in Sleep mode, power is not supplied to USB devices connected to
the USB slots except when the IC card R / W (NFC) is connected.)
Tilt function Equipped with an angle-adjustable hinge. Clicks at the standard position.
Available languages
Japanese, English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Danish, Swedish, Polish,
Portuguese, Hungarian, Czech, Finnish, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Thai, Russian, Arabic,
Greek, Korean, Catalan, Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese
Note: Available languages may vary depending on the machine’s specifications.
Software Specifications
A software package consisting of the Android Firmware and the manufacturer’s own pre-installed
applications is installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
649
The following three types of software are installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
1. Android Firmware (Android OS)
2. Pre-installed applications
3. Applications that can be installed additionally
Android Firmware (Android OS)
The Android Firmware (Android OS) consists of the following modules that are called “stacks”.
• Linux kernel
• Android Runtime
• Library
• Application Framework
Pre-installed applications
On the Smart Operation Panel, applications such as the GW applications (Copy/Printer/Document

Server/Scanner/Fax), Control Panel Browser, the standard keyboard, Installer, Gallery, Self Check are
pre-installed. Unlike those installed on the MPU of the MFP, GW applications that are installed on the
Smart Operation Panel are for controlling operation and display of the Smart Operation Panel.
Pre-installed applications are provided as part of the control panel firmware (Cheetah System) together
with the Android firmware. When you update the control panel firmware using the recovery mode or
another method, the pre-installed applications will also be updated.
Applications that can be installed
On the Smart Operation Panel, applications can be installed in addition to the pre-installed applications.
Applications that can be installed include optional applications that customers can purchase,
650
applications that are installed only on machines sold in specific regions, and custom-made applications.
On an MFP, applications such as Simple UI applications (Quick Copy, Quick Fax, and Quick Scanner)
and Scan to Me are installed.
Communication Specifications
The Smart Operation Panel and the GW controller are connected by a USB 2.0/3.0 cable. They
communicate with each other via the Android OS on the Smart Operation Panel, using protocols called
“OCS Library” and “Flair-API (System/Application)”.
System block diagram
Overview of Components
Communication Details
module/signal name
OCS Library OSC stands for Operating Control Service. It is a module that controls the
control panel. The set of signals used by this module to control the control
panel are called the OCS Library.
It is used during communication between the Legacy UI (system) module
on the Smart Operation Panel and the GW module for the following
651
Communication Details
module/signal name
processes.
• Deciding on the display format suitable for a particular model of the
control panel, so that the intended image data can be converted to
actual image data.
• Converting touch panel operations to commands.
Flair-API Flair is the manufacturer's own communication interface between software
(System/Application) modules. The interface uses a generic WebAPI.
It is divided into two parts: a part that communicates directly with
applications such as the application manager, Home, Authentication,
Banner, Check Status, and Widgets, and a part that monitors applications.
It communicates with the GW controller via the CATS module.
CATS CATS stands for Cheetah Application Total System. It is a module in the
GW controller.
Because the Smart Operation Panel uses the Android OS, the contents
and protocols of communication are not the same as those of the
conventional control panel. CATS serves as an intermediary between the
GW controller and the Smart Operation Panel.
It also controls the power status of the control panel.
CATS communicates with the Smart Operation Panel using the Flair-API,
and communicates with the GW module using the GW-API.
GW-IPC The name of the interface used among modules in the GW controller. The
role is the same as that of the Flair-API.
• API stands for Application Programming Interface. An API is an interface that software
modules use in order to communicate with each other.
Application Specifications
The pre-installed applications and applications that can be additionally installed on the Smart Operation
Panel can be classified into the following 3 categories.
• System applications
652
Applications that operate in conjunction with multiple functions (operating regardless of the
application)
• Program applications
Applications that provide a single additional function
• Widget applications
Applications that provide a widget
The following table explains the function of each application.
Application Functions
Settings Provides the Android OS’s standard settings.
Screen Features Provides the manufacturer’s own settings.
Authentication Monitors login to/logout from the MFP, and transmits authentication
information to other services and applications.
Monitoring service Monitors the status of the MFP. This service is used by widgets and
applications including Banner, Check Status, Authentication, and Home.
Launcher (Legacy This application provides an application switching function when there is
Application Manager) no Home application.
Installer Provides the installer UI. Internal operation is controlled by the Package
Installer application.
Server service Provides server functions for application installation.
Remote control Works together with the server service and provides the functions and
displays of RFU and import/export of settings, including the UI.
Manual Provides connection to the server where manuals are stored (HTTP
server). Manuals are displayed using the Web Browser application.
Splash screen Provides the image that is displayed immediately after the MFP is turned
ON.
Startup animation Provides the startup animation for the operation screen.
Validation Performs validation when the machine is started in CC certified mode.
* CC stands for Common Criteria. It is the evaluation criteria for IT
security (ISO15408).
LUI system LUI stands for Legacy User Interface. The conventional control panel
display is displayed by this application. Model-specific settings are
included in this application
Package Installer Provides installation and update functions for applications.
Also provides the screen for uninstallation.
Self Check Provides a self-check function for the control panel hardware.
See Panel Self Check for contents of the self-check.
Initialization Initializes settings of the MFP or the control panel.
Web Browser Android OS’s standard Browser application
653
Gallery Reads images from SD cards or other media, and sets them as wallpaper
or live wallpaper.
Standard keyboard Android OS’s standard operation panel that is called up when the user
enters characters or numbers.
Home screen Provides the Home screen. Also provides screen customization and
application switching.
Banner Displays balloon messages in the banner area at the bottom of the panel
display.
OCS emulator This application serves as an intermediary between the control panel and
the controller board. (The emulator allows the controller board to work the
same way regardless of the type of control panel.)
Simple UI applications Simple (Quick) applications.
• Quick Copy
Provides the Quick Copy function.
• Quick Fax
Provides the Quick Fax function.
• Quick Scanner
Provides the Quick Scanner function.
Widgets Resident applications that display information on the screen as
configured.
• Date/time indicator
Displays the date and time.
• Supply information
Displays toner status.
• Change Languages
Provides the language switching function.
• Eco-friendly
Displays detailed information about the eco functions.
• Fax Received File
Displays the fax reception status.
• Stop
Provides a [Stop] key on the application screen. Used by functions
such as Quick Copy and Scan to Me.
• System Message
Displays system messages.
IME (excluding the Multiple settings can be configured (the user can select one when using
standard keyboard) the keyboard).
• iWnn IME Chinese (Simplified) Pack
654
Chinese (simplified) language pack for iWnnIME
• iWnn IME Chinese (Traditional) Pack
Chinese (traditional) language pack for iWnnIME
• iWnn IME Korean Pack
Korean language pack for iWnnIME
ICCardDispatcher Host application for NFC (Near Field Communication). Transmits card
information to authentication applications.
Quick Card Provides simple authentication using an IC card.
Authentication
Standard IC card plugin A plugin for using IC cards. Examples of IC cards are the FeliCa (Lite)
and Mifare card systems.
Bluetooth Service Provides configurations for standard Bluetooth on the Android OS.
Bluetooth Authentication This plugin is required to use Bluetooth authentication.
Plugin
Copy Copy application with a new UI.
Fax Fax application with a new UI.
Scan Scan application with a new UI.
Printer Printer application with a new UI.
Quick Print Release Ability to view and print stored documents.
Print/Scan (Memory "Media Print" and "Scan to Media" have been integrated into this
Storage Device) application.
Web Browser NX Provides an operating environment for solution applications' functions and
configuration.
Proximity Card Reader Provides support for USB card readers.
Support Plugin
655
Panel Components/Screen Layout
Components of the Control Panel
Name Description
No.
1 Display panel Displays icons for functions and applications. Displays the operation
screens, operation keys and other information.
2 Main power indicator Indicates power OFF/ON status.
3 USB slot USB expansion
4 Control panel reboot Used when rebooting the control panel.
key
5 Extended Feature Used for system maintenance, such as control panel self-check.
key (EX1)
key (EX2)
key (EX3)
8 USB slot for NFC A near field communication (NFC) device can be connected here.
card readers
9 NFC tag Used to connect the machine and a smart device with the RICOH
simple input and output.
10 [Check Status] Indicates system status.
indicator
11 Data In indicator Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer driver or LAN-
Fax driver.
12 Fax indicator Indicates fax status.
• During communication: Flashes
656
Name Description
No.
• When fax documents have been received using Substitute
Reception: Lights
• When the machine has received a confidential fax document:
Lights
13 Media access lamp Lights when an external media is inserted into the SD card slot or the
USB slot.
14 SD card slot Insert an SD card here.
15 USB slot Insert a USB memory device here.
Panel Display
Soft keys displayed on the screen（when the Authentication Function is Disabled
No. Name Description

1 [Function] Users can assign shortcuts for each application. Up to three applications can
keys be assigned as shortcuts. When an application is assigned as a function key,
users can call the application from any screen. The function keys are disabled
by default. Users must enable this function to be able to allocate applications
to function keys.
2 [System System messages are displayed in this area. If there are multiple messages to
messages] be displayed, they are displayed alternately. Tapping the message opens a
key dialog which shows all the messages.
3 [Help] key This icon is displayed when Help is available for the displayed screen or errors
occurring when the machine is connected to the Internet.
657

Specify [Cookie] in the control panel browser to [ON] to display Help properly.
4 [Energy Enters Sleep mode.
Saver] key
5 [Switch Press to scroll the screens right and left. The Home screen has 5 screens.You
Screens] key can switch between the screens by flicking.
6 [Application Displays the list of installed applications.
List] key
7 [Current Shows which of the five screens is currently displayed.
display
position] key
8 [Stop] key Stops the scanning of a document, fax transmission, or printing to paper.
9 [Menu] key Displays the menu screen of the application in use. May not be available
depending on the application.
10 [Home] key Displays the Home screen.
11 [Back] key Use this to go back to the previous screen when the Screen Features Settings
screen or the screen of an application is displayed.
12 [Media] key Displays icons when a USB flash drive or SD card is inserted.
By pressing this key, you can choose the media to remove and use.
Depending on the media, one of the following icons appear.
USB icon (key)
SD card icon (key)
USB/SD icon (key)
13 [Check Status] You can check the status of the MFP, each function, and the current job. You
key can also check the job history and maintenance information of the MFP.
Items that Appear when the Authentication Function is Enabled
Login user information and login/logout key also appear.
658

1 [User icon] key You can configure the authentication setting. This key appears when
someone is logging in. If pressed after logging in, the login user name
appears for a while in the login user information display area.
2 [Login/Logout] key This key is displayed if the authentication function is enabled. By
pressing [Login], the login menu appears. If you have already logged in,
[Logout] appears. By pressing [Logout], you can log out.
3 Login user The name of the user logging in appears in this area. By pressing the
information display [User icon] key, the name of the user logging in appears for
area approximately 5 seconds (and then automatically switches back to
displaying the function keys.)
Electrical Components
Touch Panel
The touch panel of this machine uses a 4-wire resistive film method (low load resistive film analog 4-
wire method). It can detect two points for flick/drag/pinch-in/pinch-out operations. Resistive touch panel
has been adopted in order to allow operation with a prosthetic hand.
Basic Structure
An analog 4-wire resistive film touch panel has 2 layers. Two materials (mainly film or glass) with
transparent conductive film (ITO) are attached such that the transparent conductive film layers face
each other.
When the film is pressed with a finger or a pen, the transparent conductive films contact each other and
the touch panel operation is recognized.
Insulators (spacing dots) secure space between the two transparent conductive film layers to prevent
short-circuiting.
Because the transparent conductive film has a uniform resistance characteristic, the resistance value
reflects the distance of contact.
[A]: Spacing dot

[B]: PET film
[C]: Transparent conductive film
[D]: Base glass
[E]: LCD panel
659
Self-Check (multi-touch calibration) mechanism
With the Multi-touch calibration in the self-check function, the touch panel is automatically calibrated
using the results of touches to the top left and bottom right positions.
The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are used for internal processing. They do
not indicate the positions or distance of the touched points. There is no problem unless there is a huge
difference between the values of the first calibration and the second calibration.
Controlling the Power Supply
Exiting Energy Saving Modes
Because this model of Smart Operation Panel has no hardware keys, the MFP exits from energy saving
mode when the user does one of the following:
• Touches the display panel
• Lifts the ADF
• Sets an original in the ADF
Screen Startup Mode
Startup Modes
There are two screen startup modes. The factory default setting is Normal.
1. Normal
This is the standard startup mode. When the main power of the MFP is turned ON, the control
panel starts up using less power compared to Quick mode.
2. Quick
By preparing for the next startup when the machine shuts down, the control panel starts up faster
than in Normal mode.
Changing the Screen Startup Mode
Screen Startup Mode can be changed in Screen Features Settings.

Select [Screen Features Settings] > [SYSTEM] > [Screen Device Settings] > [Screen Startup Mode],
and then select [Normal] or [Quick].
660
• In the following cases, the control panel starts up in Normal mode even if [Quick] is selected.
• The power cord has been disconnected from the power outlet after the last shutdown.
• The MFP is turned ON after being turned OFF due to reasons such as a power failure.
• The MFP was not properly shut down the last time it was turned OFF.
How the Control Panel Starts Up
In Normal mode
The startup screen is displayed on the display panel, followed by the startup animation.
In Quick mode
The [Home] screen is displayed immediately after the main power of the MFP is turned ON. The startup
screen displayed when starting in Normal mode is not displayed.
How the Screen Shuts Down When Quick mode Is Selected
When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down. The main
power indicator flashes during preparation for the next startup. The indicator turns off when preparation
is completed.
661
If the MFP is turned ON during shutdown, the preparation for the next startup continues. When
preparation for the next startup is completed, the control panel starts up in Quick mode.
• When Quick mode is selected, the control panel starts up faster than in Normal mode but
shutdown takes longer than in Normal mode.
Shutdown Functions
The shutdown functions and their uses are as follows.

Shutdown Use Operation
mode
Normal Same as shutdown by users. Turn the main power switch off.
Shutdown
Forced When normal shutdown does not complete Hold the main power switch 6
shutdown even though you waited a long time. seconds or longer.
Shutdown for • When you have to disconnect the power Turn the main power switch off
parts cord from the power outlet, such as when while holding down [Stop].
replacement replacing parts. Continue to hold down the [Stop]
• When you want to start the machine key until the shutdown screen is
normally and then enter recovery mode, displayed.
without changing the Startup mode in
Screen Features Settings. (For updating
control panel firmware)
Shutdown for When you are going to turn on the MFP within Turn the main power switch off
software 5 minutes for updating the MFP firmware or while holding down the [EX1] key.
update package. Continue to hold down the [Stop]
(Use shutdown for parts replacement if you key until the shutdown screen is
are updating the control panel firmware.) displayed.
Normal Shutdown
The MFP is equipped with a function to shut down safely in order to:
• Prevent damage to the file systems in the NAND flash memory.
• Prevent paper from being left inside the body of the MFP (except when paper is jammed).
The shutdown process begins when the main power switch is pressed. To make a forced shutdown,
press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds. However, if you force a shutdown during the
shutdown process, data being processed may be lost. Forced shutdown is to be used to shut down the
MFP without disconnecting the power cord when the shutdown process cannot be completed.
Other Shutdown Functions
This MFP has two additional shutdown functions to facilitate maintenance.
662
Shutting down the MFP for parts replacement (Starting up in Normal mode when Quick
mode is selected)
When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down. This causes
the shutdown process to take longer than when Normal mode is selected.
If you need to disconnect the power cord after shutdown in order to replace parts or for other reasons,
you can use the following procedure to shut down the MFP just like you do in Normal mode. This
shortens the time it takes to shut down the MFP.
• Procedure
Turn the main power switch OFF while holding down the [Stop] key on the control panel. Continue
to hold down the [Stop] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.
Shutting down the MFP for software updates (Shutting down the MFP with the control panel
in Sleep mode)
If you are going to turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes, you can use the following procedure to shut down
the MFP with the control panel in Sleep mode.
• Procedure
Turn the main power switch OFF while holding down the [EX1] key. Continue to hold down the
[EX1] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.
• You must turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes.

• If more than 5 minutes has elapsed after shutting down the MFP using the above procedure,
the machine starts up in Normal mode even if Quick mode is selected.
663
System Maintenance
The firmware is basically supplied as a package. However, an individual firmware module may be
provided on special occasions, such as for correcting a problem.
Maintenance Modes
Service program (SP) modes for the Smart Operation Panel are as follows:
Mode Use Notes
SP Mode (MFP) SP modes for the MFP The numeric keys are required to enter this
(controller, engine) mode. Display the application where soft keys
are displayed or the soft keys of the SP mode.
Service mode SP modes for the Smart Same as above
(operation Operation Panel.
panel) • Changing SP mode settings
in the Screen Features
Settings menu.
• Installing and updating
applications that can be
installed
Recovery mode Maintenance modes for the -
Android OS
• Updating firmware
• Initializing all data
Login to/Logout from Control Panel Service Mode
Login
In the same way as you log in to the SP Mode on the MFP, you use the soft keys to enter a combination
of numbers in order to login to the service mode of the control panel.
• You cannot log in to the service mode of the control panel when one of the following screens is
displayed.
• Stop All Jobs
• Settings
• Address Book Management
Use the numeric keys on one of the following screens.
• Soft keys on the application screen where soft keys appear
• Soft keys for the control panel’s service mode (displayed by pressing both the [EX3] key and
664
[Check Status] at the same time)
• To exit the soft keys, press [EXIT] on the screen.
Login Status Indicator
When you log in to the control panel’s service mode, the Screen Features Settings screen is displayed.
• “Service” is displayed in the login information area [A].
• [Logout] is displayed in the Login key area [B] to allow logout from the service mode.
Logout
Press [Logout] to log out from the control panel’s service mode.
• You need to logout manually because the Auto Logout function does not work.
Depending on the authentication settings of the MFP, the following screen is displayed after you log out.
665
Authentication settings
Administrator authentication: OFF Administrator authentication: ON Administrator
User authentication: OFF User authentication: OFF authentication: ON
User authentication: ON
Screen of the function selected in Screen of the function selected in [Home] screen
[Function Priority] [Function Priority]
When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator
The administrator of the MFP can prohibit entry into the control panel’s service mode by enabling
[Service Mode Lock] in [System Settings].
When [Service Mode Lock] is enabled, the machine does not enter the service mode even if you enter
the number combination for the control panel’s service mode. There will be beeping sounds to indicate
login failure.
• The machine can enter the recovery mode even if [Service Mode Lock] is enabled.
Service Mode Menu
There are four menus of settings.

• Wireless & Networks
• Device
• Personal
• System
Wireless & Networks
Menu level Description

1st level 2nd level 3rd level
Wireless Group Owner Mode You can only view the setting.
Direct Connection Password You can only view the setting.
Settings DHCP Server IP Address You can only view the setting.
666

DHCP IP Address Range You can only view the setting.
Select Channel You can only view the setting.
Fix SSID You can only view the setting.
PEER DEVICES View and configure devices that can be
connected.
REMEMBERED Displays groups that have been
GROUPS previously connected.
Bluetooth ON/OFF You can only view the setting.
SEARCH FOR DEVICES Scans for Bluetooth devices in the
vicinity.
(name of this device) You can only view the setting.
PAIRED DEVICES View and configure paired devices.
AVAILABLE DEVICES View and configure available devices.
Port Port Forwarding Settings Port Requests sent to the wireless LAN unit
Forwarding Forwarding of the Smart Operation Panel can be
to Machine Config 1-20 forwarded to the controller of the MFP.
You can enable or disable ports to
forward these requests.
MTU Settings PathMTU(Enable/Disable) Enables/disables the PathMTU size set
in [MTU Size]. When you change this
setting, the control panel restarts.
MTU Size Sets the size of PathMTU. Default:
1500.
Device

Storage & Internal Used and Total Displays the used size and total size of the
USB storage Storage Capacity internal storage.
SD CARD*1 Used and Total SD Displays the used size and total size of the SD
Card Capacity card.
Safely Remove *To remove the SD card, click the or
Hardware icon ( ) icon instead of the Safely Remove Hardware icon
( ).
USB Used and Total USB Displays the used size and total size of the USB
STORAGE*2 Storage Capacity stroage device.
667

Safely Remove *To remove the USB flash drive, click the
Hardware icon ( ) or icon instead of the Safely Remove
Hardware icon ( ).
Apps Install Install from SD Card Install or update applications from an SD card.
Install from Server Enter a product key to install or update
applications from the server.
Application Site Start up Application Site.
Activate Activate applications that have been installed
Applications from the server.
Update Applications Update applications that have been installed.
Uninstall Uninstall applications.
Install From Internal Install applications from internal storage.
Storage
Check Server Check if you can connect to the Server.
Connect
Firmware update Update the firmware from the SD card set in the
operation panel slot. If the SD card is not
inserted, an error message is displayed.
*1 Displayed only when an SD card is inserted into the SD card slot of the operation panel.
*2 Displayed only when an USB storage device is inserted into the USB slot of the operation panel.
Personal

1st level 2nd level 3rd
level
Lauguage & Registration - You can register the external keyboard, display the
input Keyboard connected keyboard, or remove the external keyboard.
System

Screen Status Displays the following:
Device • Wireless LAN MAC address
Settings • Bluetooth address
Information • Interface Settings
• Wi-Fi settings (ON/OFF)
Legal information Open source Displays the open source license
668

licenses information.
System WebView Displays the license of the system used in
Licences this machine.
Wallpapers Displays the copy light of the picture of
the wallpaper.
Software Version Version List Record Displays the versions of operation panel
*1
List Save to SD Card firmware and installed applications.
When saving the software version list on
an SD card, insert an SD card into the SD
card slot of the operation panel, and then
press [Save to SD Card].
Operation Panel Displays the hardware information of the
Kind operation panel with a 4-digit code.
1st digit: LCD size
• 1: 10.1"
• 2: 7"
2nd digit: LCD vendor
• 0: AUO
• 1: INNOLUX
• 2: Dongbond
• 6: Giantplus
3rd digit: eMMC version
• 7: Version 5.00
• 8: Version 5.10
4th digit: PCB vendor
• N: NEC
• R: RICOH
Screen Prohibit Use of Wi-Fi If you select [Prohibit] for this setting, the
Device External Interface (Do not Prohibit / Wi-Fi function is automatically set to
Settings Prohibit) [OFF] and the Wi-Fi function setting in
[Screen Features Settings] is hidden.
If you select [Do not prohibit] for this
setting, the Wi-Fi function setting in
[Screen Features Settings] is displayed.
The setting remains unchanged.
Wireless Direct If you select [Prohibit] for this setting,

669

(Do not Prohibit / the Wireless Direct function is
Prohibit) automatically set to [OFF] and
the Wireless Direct function setting in
setting, the Wireless Direct function
setting in [Screen Features Settings] is
displayed. The setting remains
unchanged.
Bluetooth If you select [Prohibit] for this setting,
(Do not Prohibit / the Bluetooth function is automatically set
Prohibit) to [OFF] and the Bluetooth function
hidden.

setting, the Bluetooth function setting in
[Screen Features Settings] is displayed.
The setting remains unchanged.
Screen SD Card If you select [Prohibit] for this setting,
Slot the Screen SD Card Slot function is
(Do not Prohibit / automatically set to [OFF] and the Screen
Prohibit) SD Card Slot function setting in [Screen
Features Settings] is hidden.

setting, the Screen SD Card Slot function
displayed. The setting remains
unchanged.
Screen USB If you select [Prohibit] for this setting,
Memory Slot the Screen USB Memory Slot function is
(Do not Prohibit / automatically set to [OFF] and the Screen
Prohibit) USB Memory Slot function setting in

670

setting, the Screen USB Memory Slot
function setting in [Screen Features
Settings] is displayed. The setting remains
unchanged.
Server Settings Port number Input a port number for communication
with the import/export and RFU server.
The input number is used for both HTTP
and HTTPS connections.
(Normally, input a number within 55101-
55111.)
Home Key Home Key Settings You can change the transition destination
Settings except for the Home screen when pushing
the [Home] icon.
Home Key Normal mode:
Assignment Mode In addition to pressing the [Home] icon, in
all statuses such as logout and restoring
from lower power display mode, the
screen transitions to the destination which
the user set with [Home Key Application].
UI change mode:
The screen transitions to the destination
which the user set with [Home Key
Application] only when you press the
[Home] icon.
Home Key You can set the application of
Application the transition destination when pressing
the [Home] icon.
Show default Home You can specify whether the guest user
for unauthenticated can access the application selected in
user [Home Key Application] when user
authentication is set to ON.
System Home Key You can use this setting only when [Home
Icon Settings Key Assignment Mode] is [ON] and [UI
Change Mode] is selected in [Home Key
Assignment Mode].
You cannot set other than the above
because of high brightness.
671

Application Displays a list of installed applications.
Settings If you press [Settings] for an application,
the setting screen for the CE is displayed.
The screen does not change if the
application has no setting items.
Recovery by Recovery by This setting gives priority to the recovery
Authentication Authentication time from energy saving modes when an
Priority Priority IC card authentication device is
connected.
When this setting is selected, the MFP
does not enter Engine OFF mode, and
always recovers from Silent mode.
Start Time (hh:mm) You can specify the start time of
Authentication priority mode.
Note: This can be changed only when
[Recovery by Authentication Priority] is
deselected.
Period (Hours) You can specify the period of validity of
Authentication priority mode.
Note: This can be changed only when
[Recovery by Authentication Priority] is
deselected.
Screen device This setting prevents the operation panel
always- from entering Sleep mode, so that
connection Bluetooth and other communication
Setting devices remain connected.
When this setting is selected, the
operation panel does not enter Sleep
mode. Only the LCD (display panel) turns
OFF.
Panel Self Check Starts self-diagnosis of the operation
panel.
(Panel Self Check)
*1 This can be pressed only when an SD card is inserted to the SD card slot of the operation panel.
672
Panel Self Check
The following are available as self-diagnostics functions of the control panel:

• LED Check
• Key Check
• LCD Check
• TouchPanel Calibration
• Bluetooth Check
• Speaker Check
• TouchPanel Check
• Wireless LAN Check
• MultiTouch Calibration
• eMMC Erasure Count
*The [microSD Erasure Count] menu can not be used with this machine.
• The [Self Check] menu is displayed in either English or Japanese. The language can be
changed using [Change Language] in the Home screen.
• If an unavailable language is selected, English will be displayed.
• With some diagnostic items, press [Back] [A] at the bottom of the screen to return to the top
menu of [Self Check].
LED Check
Select the [All Light On] check box, and make sure the following LEDs light:
• Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes)
• Fax indicator
• [Check Status] indicator (flashes in red and orange alternately)
673
• Operation call light (if attached) (lights in red/blue)
When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].
Key Check
Check if the Extended Feature keys on the left side of the control panel (EX1, EX2, EX3 from top to
bottom) are functioning normally. If they are functioning normally, the key will turn green when pressed.
[FOOT SW] is not used.
When the check is completed, press [End] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].
LCD Check
Visually inspect the color of the LCD. The displayed colors are white/black/red/green/blue. The LCD
changes to the next color when you press it.
674
The check is completed when all colors have been displayed. The screen returns to the top menu of
[Self Check].
TouchPanel Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel by touching the center of each of the five “+” signs.
The five “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left, bottom right, bottom left, center, and top right.
After you have touched the five “+” signs, the display switches to the [Retry/OK] screen.
• If you want to calibrate again, press [EX1].
• If you want to confirm that the calibration results are OK, press the [EX3] key to return to the top
675
Bluetooth Check
Check and configure the Bluetooth device connection.
• You cannot switch Bluetooth to [ON] or [OFF] from the [Self Check] menu. Before checking the
Bluetooth device connection, specify [ON] for [Bluetooth] in [Screen Features Settings] >
[WIRELESS & NETWORKS] > [Bluetooth].
676
Speaker Check
Tests the speaker by playing the reference sound.

1. Select the frequency (220Hz, 440Hz, 880Hz, 1760Hz, or 2000Hz).
2. Press [START/STOP] to play the sound.
3. Touch the volume bar, and play the sound at minimum and maximum volumes.
4. Press [START/STOP] to stop the sound.
TouchPanel Check
For each of the nine reference points on the screen, the distance between the detected pressed
position and the nearest reference point is displayed. The distance is displayed continually near each
reference point.
If all the distances between each detected pressed position and the nearest of the five reference points
on the screen (at the four corners and the center) are within ±12px, the [OK] button appears. (However,
even when the [OK] button is being displayed, if you press the screen again and the distance exceeds
±12px, the [OK] button disappears.)
677
If you press the [OK] button, the inspection implementation status switches to “Adjusted” and the screen
returns to the self-inspection menu.
If you press the [Back] key, the inspection implementation status does not switch and the screen returns
to the self-inspection menu.
Wireless LAN Check
Checks the condition of the wireless LAN connection.

When you select the connected access point, the signal strength, IP address and other information are
displayed.
678
MultiTouch Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel for multi-tap input methods such as pinch-in/pinch-out.
Touch the center of both “+” signs. The two “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left and bottom
right. Repeat the procedure. The touch panel will be calibrated.
• If you want to adjust it again, press the [EX1] key.
• If you want to confirm that the calibration results are OK, press the [EX3] key to return to the top
The “Back Key” in the message is actually the [EX1] key and the “Menu Key” in the message is actually
the [EX3] key.
• The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are for internal processing and do
not indicate the positions or distance of the points touched. There is no problem unless there
is a huge difference between the values of the first calibration and the second calibration.
eMMC Erasure Count
Displays the status of the the eMMC Erasure Count and the current number of times of rewriting.
679
Recovery Mode
The recovery mode menu is as follows. Ask your manager for details on how to enter Recovery mode.
Menu Description
reboot system Reboots the Android OS.
now
apply update from Updates the Cheetah System firmware by specifying the folder path.
sdcard
wipe data/factory Deletes all installed applications and all settings on the Cheetah.
reset
wipe cache Deletes all data that is stored on the cache partition. Currently, Cheetah does
partition not use the cache partition, so nothing happens when this menu item is
accessed.
wipe free area Deletes all data that is stored on the free partition. Cheetah stores the version
partition history on the free partition. When this menu item is selected, it will then
disappear.
wipe LegacyUI Deletes Legacy UI.
area
micon update Updates Keymicon by specifying the folder path.
from sdcard
view recovery Displays the recovery log.
logs
• If [System Settings] > [Administrator Tools] > [Extended Security] > [Update Firmware] is set to
[Prohibit], the control panel cannot enter the recovery mode.
• Ask your manager for information on how to enter the recovery Mode.
680
Special Key Combinations
Function Operation for Smart Operation Panel

Resetting Settings In the Settings screen, press a Settings category while holding down
the EX3 key.
Available for: System Settings, Copier/Document Server Settings,
and Scanner Settings.
System Reset Hold down the EX3 key and [#] simultaneously for 10 seconds.
Resets the controller software of the main machine.
Application Reset Hold down the EX3 key and [9] simultaneously for 10 seconds.
Resets a single application.
Resetting User Code Hold down [Reset] for 2 seconds.
Authentication Returns to the User Code entry screen.
Backup/Restore for Smart Operation Panel Application/Settings Function
Overview
Application settings and additional applications installed on the Smart Operation Panel can be backed
up automatically and can be restored, e.g. after Smart Operation Panel replacement.
In Cheetah SP mode, select [Screen Device Settings]> [Backup / Restore Settings].
Data that can be backed up and restored
• System application settings*1

• Standard application settings*1
• Pre-install application settings*1
• Add-on applications (including hybrids)*2
*1: The system application, standard installed application, and pre-installed application are installed in
MultiLink-Panel, so the application itself is not backed up or restored after replacement.
*2: Add-on applications settings are not backed up or restored.
Backup
• After replacing the smart operation panel, if the version of the cheetah system firmware is
older than a certain version, update it to a later version.
• Backup cannot be performed manually by the user or the technician.
• During the backup, the message being backed up is displayed and other operations cannot be
performed.
• A backup is performed 24 hours after the last backup. If the machine doesn’t have backup data, the
681
first backup is performed at 2:00AM.

• A backup cannot be performed under any of the conditions below. Backup will retry 1 hour later.
• During ARFU, firmware updating from download site, etc
• LCD on the operation panel: ON.
• If the backup data has not changed, no backup will be performed. (Maximum - 7 days)
• During the backup, the LCD is off.
• Backup data is stored on the micro SD card.
• The amount of time for the backup is as follows:
Example:
Data Backup time
Additional applications 106MB 1m 6s
Application settings 0.2MB 36s
Total 106.2MB 1m 42s
Disabling the Backup setting
The default setting is “Enabled”. To change it to “Disabled”, uncheck “Enabled”. Restarting the machine
is not necessary.
In Cheetah SP mode, select [Screen Device Settings] > [Backup/Restore Settings] In Cheetah SP
mode.
Restore
• After replacing the smart operation panel, if the version of the cheetah system firmware is
older than a certain version, update it to a later version.
• If the machine doesn’t have any backup data, the restore function cannot be used.
1. Execute [Cheetah SP mode] > [Screen Device Settings] > [Backup/Restore Settings] > [Start
Restore].
2. After a message indicating that restoration takes several minutes is displayed, touch "execute".
A message saying please wait for a while is displayed. Time is about 10 minutes.
3. After a message indicating that the next message is displayed, touch [Close].
A message that the restoration was successful is displayed.
4. Turn the main switch off/on.
Restore Error Codes
If restore fails, an error code appears on the operation panel.

Code Cause Solution
1 Failed to restore additionally installed application data Retry the Restore procedure.
3 Failed to restore application setting data Retry the Restore procedure.
682
Software Update
Updating the Smart Operation Panel
• In the case of models provided with package firmware only, updates for the Smart Operation
Panel and applications are also provided via package firmware. For details, see ”Firmware
Update (Removable Media)”.
There are three methods to update the Smart Operation Panel. The method is different depending on
what you want to update.
1. Installation/update from a media
2. Installation/update from the eDC Server
3. Installation/update from Application Site
Update method Features Control Applications
panel
firmware
Installation/update Installation or update is possible in the following Yes Yes
from a media two ways.
1. Applications
• Use the installation screen in the control
panel’s service mode to update
applications.
• You can install or update multiple
applications at once.
• You can also uninstall an application.
2. Package firmware (SD card or USB flash
drive)
Refer to ”Firmware Update (Removable
Media)”.
Installation/update Install or update applications directly from the eDC No Yes
from the eDC Server.
Server This method is mainly for paid applications. A
product key is required when an application is
installed for the first time.
*The update procedure is the same as when
updating the Smart Operation Panel application
already released.
Installation/update Installation and Updating of applications and Yes*1 Yes
from Application Site firmware update can be done from Application Site.
When administrator authentication is enabled, an
683
Update method Features Control Applications

panel
firmware
administrator privilege is required to start
Application Site. If you log in to the operation panel
service mode, however, you can use it with CE
privilege.
*1 Update can only be done by using a package file.
The following two methods can be used for updating the firmware.
• Update from a media
• Installation/update from Application Site
The following three methods can be used for updating an application.
• Installation/update from a media
• Installation/update from the eDC Server
• Installation/update from Application Site
Installation/Update from a Media
Installing/Updating an Application
Creating a media card for update
1. Download the update modules from the Firmware Download Center.

2. Unzip the downloaded file.
3. Create a folder named “romdata” in the root directory of the media.
4. Put the unzipped file in the “romdata” folder.
Update procedure
1. Log in to the control panel in service mode.

2. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the control panel.
3. Select [Apps] > [Install] > [Install from SD Card].
4. Select the application you want to install or update, and then press [Install]
5. The installation or update results are displayed.
6. Check that the application is correctly installed or updated, and then press [reboot operation panel].
Package Update
This method uses the package update function to update the control panel firmware and/or
applications. The package update function is provided by the controller.
Update is done in the following order:
1. Controller firmware
2. Applications
3. Control panel firmware
684
If the control panel firmware has to be updated, the control panel starts in the recovery mode and the
firmware is automatically updated.
The control panel restarts when updating is completed. The result notification is processed after the
control panel restarts.
Refer to ”Firmware Update (Removable Media)” for details.
When Installation/Update Is Prohibited
If [System Settings] > [Administrator Tools] > [Extended Security] > [Update Firmware] is set to
[Prohibit], the execution key is grayed out and installation/update cannot be executed.
When trying to update from a PC, updating fails and the result is recorded as “Failed”.
Installation/Update from the eDC Server
Downloads applications from the eDC Server, and installs or updates them.
• Installation/activation/update of applications from the server can only be done in the service
mode.
Check Server Connect
1. Log in to the control panel’s service mode.

2. Select [Apps] > [Install].
3. Press [Check Server Connect] and make sure that “Connect Server Succeeded!” is displayed.
• The server address is stored in the firmware of the Smart Operation Panel.
• To connect to the server, the network settings of the MFP must be configured correctly.
For the required configuration, see the Field Service Manual of the MFP.
• If server connection fails, see Troubleshooting for error codes.
Installation

685
3. Select [Install from Server].

4. Enter the product key and press [Execute].
5. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
• An application cannot be installed unless it is digitally signed by Ricoh.
Activation

3. Select [Activate Applications].
4. Select the application to be activated, and then enter the activation key and press [Execute].
• Only charged applications have to be activated.
Update

3. Select [Update Applications].
4. Select the application to be updated, and then press [Check Update Status].
686
Forced Uninstallation
If you try to uninstall an activated application without first deactivating it, the uninstallation will fail.
However, the application can be uninstalled without deactivation (forced uninstallation) in the following
circumstances:
• Uninstallation using the service login uninstallation menu
• Deactivation failure due to the license information stored in the control panel not matching the
license information published by the server
• Forced uninstallation cannot be performed if deactivation fails because of other factors (such
as failure to connect to the server because of temporary network disconnection or server
maintenance).
During forced uninstallation, the message indicating that deactivation failed appears.
If [OK] of the message is selected, uninstallation is executed forcibly without deactivation.
If [Cancel] of the message is selected, uninstallation is not executed.
• If executing forced uninstallation, forced deactivation must also be executed on the eDC
server. Accordingly, check whether the license has been published for the eDC server.
Application Site
"Application Site" has been added to Screen Service mode. Field engineers can start up Application
Site to install or update applications or firmware without needing user administrator credentials.
This menu item opens Application Site by using the Web Browser NX app.
687
Troubleshooting
Problems and Errors Related to Hardware
Symptom Solution
The touch panel is damaged (broken, • Connecting a commercially available USB mouse
dented, etc.) and cannot be operated. enables the same operation as the touch panel.
• Replace the LCD.
• Replace the operation panel unit (you need to
transfer user information, and reinstall the
applications, etc.). Refer to "Factory Reset and
Restoration".
The touch panel does not respond. • Connecting a commercially available USB mouse
enables the same operation as the touch panel.
• Execute the Panel Self Check.
• Check the operations other than that of the touch
panel.
• Replace the LCD.
Restoration".
The touch panel’s coordinates have • Connecting a commercially available USB mouse
shifted substantially, resulting in not enables the same operation as the touch panel. So
being able to execute its calibration. you can execute the calibration
• Execute the Panel Self Check, or the TouchPanel
Calibration
• Execute the MultiTouch Calibration.
• If the shift occurs even after turning the power and
then back on, check the battery voltage of the
operation panel’s main controller board.
• Replace the main controller board.
Restoration".
Cannot enter the SSP mode. If using the screen in a Classic Application, it does not
support multitouch, so you cannot enter the SSP mode by
the normal operation.
688
Symptom Solution
Instead, use the EX3 key. Press and hold the EX3 key,
and then press the "System/Copy" button in the SP mode
menu.
SC672-11 appears. Cause
Communication between the controller and the operation
panel was not established after a normal startup.
USB cable between the operation panel and the MFP is
disconnected, damaged or defective.
Solution
Reconnect or replace the USB cable. For details about
how to replace the USB cable, refer to the service manual
for the MFP.
Reference
For details about SC672, refer to SC6xx.
SC672-12 appears. Cause
Communication between the controller and the operation
panel was interrupted after a normal startup.
USB cable between the operation panel and the MFP is
disconnected, damaged or defective.
Solution
Reconnect or replace the USB cable. For details about
how to replace the USB cable, refer to the service manual
for the MFP.
Reference
For details about SC672, refer toSC6xx.
Errors Related to Applications
Pre-installed Applications
Applicable applications
Copy (Classic) / Scanner (Classic) / Printer (Classic) / Document Server / Quick Copy / Quick Fax /
Quick Scanner / Web Browser
/ Quick ID Card Authentication Config*
689
*Depends on the model whether it is a pre-installed application
If an error related to the application occurs, the operation panel’s operating system automatically
restarts the application (with a confirmation dialog box).
Third-Party Application
If using a third-party application, the error message, code and solution may vary depending on the
application. Follow the third-party vendor’s instructions.
Factory Reset and Restoration
This section explains the Factory Reset and subsequent procedure. Factory Reset may be executed
when an abnormal operation due to the system or an application occurs or when replacing the
operation panel (at the request of the customer to delete settings, etc.)
• When you execute the Factory Reset:

All data that created by users will be initialized.
All applications (including the applications from eDC server or Application Site) will be deleted.
Items Objective
Only delete Reset application Update system and reset
data configuration to factory application configuration to
settings. factory settings.
Exporting configuration - As required As required
file
Storing user information - As required As required
other than those exported
Factory reset Required Required Required
System update - - Required
Application installation - Required Required
Importing configuration - As required As required
file
Registering user - As required As required
information other than
those imported
Before executing Factory Reset, be sure to obtain the package firmware and copy it to the SD card.
Factory Reset
1. Enter the recovery mode.

690
2. Select and execute "wipe data/factory reset".

Press the EX1 and EX2 keys to move the cursor up and down.
Press the EX3 key to execute the selected function.
3. A reconfirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes].
The message “wiping data…” appears and the data and cache are cleared (within 1 minute).
On completion, the displayed screen returns to the recovery mode menu.
If you reboot the machine as is, the machine cannot display the messages in the local language
because of the absence of the LegacyUI data.
The pre-installed applications have also been deleted, so the alert appears.
For restoration, follow the installation procedure of package firmware, and update it.
Software Update Errors
Errors that occur during application update from an SD card
691
Error Messages
Error message Explanation Solution

Insert a correct SD card. - • Remove the SD card and insert it
again.
• Make sure that the directory of the
SD card is correct. You must
create the "app" folder in the root
directory of the SD card and put
the zip file in the "app" folder.
You are trying to install Displayed when you attempt Check the file, and select [OK] or
the same application with to update an application that [Cancel].
a different part number. Is is the same but has a different
it OK to continue? part number.
Some applications could Displayed in the following Restart the control panel and repeat
not be installed. cases. the update procedure.
• You attempted to update
a module (application) in
use.
• The application is
corrupted.
- - • Make sure that the directory of the
(The application you want SD card is correct. You must
to update is not displayed create the "app" folder in the root
in the list of applications.) directory of the SD card and put
the zip file in the "app" folder.
• Check the application file in the
SD card.
Error Codes
Error codes may appear along with the message reporting the installation failure.
Error Explanation
Code
215-01 Installation of an application that cannot be used according to the system configuration was
attempted.
(Example: This occurs when installing an application with the copier, scanner and fax
functions on a non-MFP printer. However, if any of these functions can be used, the
application with such multiple functions can be installed.)
215-02 This occurs if the hard disk cannot be used.
215-03 An application that does not match the type (LP/MFP) or model has been installed. *
692
Error Explanation
Code
215-04 Installation of an application that cannot be installed for Basic model was attempted.
221 The system cannot stop the application for the update or uninstallation.
222 The signature is not authentic.
235 The signature is not authentic.
* If the model information (type or model) does not match, even if SC215-03 does light up at the time of
installation, the error message may appear the next time the machine is started. The message shows
the model information of the correct firmware and installed firmware. This can be restored by updating
the firmware to the version with the correct model information.
Errors that occur during update from the eDC Server
Example of an error code display
XXX (3 digit error)

Error Explanation
code
101 Server connection error
102 Signature verification error
103 License error (for example, the product key was keyed in wrongly)
215 Dependency check error
Displayed when the control panel firmware version does not meet the installation
requirement of the application.
Example: The firmware version of the control panel is 1.02 and you attempted to install an
application that requires firmware version 1.03.
20X Other errors
• An additional 3-digit code may be displayed to indicate the details.

Example: 101-805
XXX -XXX (3 digit-3 digit error)
693
Error Explanation Solution

code
101- Connection Timeout Check the network settings of the
801 device.
• Network selection (MFP /
Operation Panel)
• IP address
• Default gateway
• Check DNS etc.
101- SSL communication failed Check the network settings of the
802 device.
101- Proxy authentication failed Check the proxy settings of the device.
803
101- Proxy Connection Timeout Check the proxy settings of the device.
804
101- The server is under maintenance. Resume the operation after completing
805 Connection timeout. the server maintenance.
(An incorrect network was selected on the Check the machine’s network settings.
operation panel.)
103- Executed activation for an already-activated Execute the update, not activation.
705 machine with a different product key.
201- Activation is being attempted from a device with Check the machine’s network settings.
700 an unauthorized serial number.
203- License update has been executed using a Execute activation, not license update.
706 deactivated product key.
=> User operation is required because the
settings remain even after deactivation.
Other Troubleshooting
Operation Panel Unit
HW: Hardware issue, SW: Software issue

No. Symptom Cause Solution
1 Both the Smart Operation HW The Smart Operation Panel 1. Reconnect the USB
Panel and the blue LED on the cannot be supplied with cable between the
operation panel do not turn on. electrical power. MPU and the Smart
Operation Panel.
2. Replace the USB
cable.
694
No. Symptom Cause Solution

3. Replace the MPU.
2 The Smart Operation Panel HW The Smart Operation Panel 1. Reconnect the LCD
does not turn on, but the blue can be supplied with I/F cable.
LED on the operation panel electrical power (blue LED 2. Replace the LCD.
turns on. lamp), but nothing can be 3. Replace the MPU.
displayed on the LCD. 4. Replace the LCD
I/F cable.
3 A splash (blue) screen SW The Smart Operation Panel 1. Update the Cheetah
or “Please wait” message HW and LCD can be supplied System firmware in
stays on the display. with electrical power, but recovery mode.
software issues occur 2. Do a factory reset.
during the boot-up 3. Replace the MPU.
sequence.
Firmware or eMMC data on
the Board is defective.
695
M 2700/M 2701/IM 2702
Machine Code: D0B2/D0B3/D0B4
Appendices
Ver 1.0
Latest Release: -
Initial Release: April, 2019
Copyright (c) 2019 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.
Table of Contents
1. Appendices: Preventive Maintenance Tables .................................................................................... 3
Preventive Maintenance ......................................................................................................................... 3
Preventive Maintenance Items ........................................................................................................... 3
2. Appendices:Specifications.................................................................................................................. 5
General Specifications............................................................................................................................ 5
Mainframe ........................................................................................................................................... 5
Printer Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 12
Scan Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 13
Supported Paper Sizes......................................................................................................................... 21
Original Size Detection (D0B2,D0B3) .............................................................................................. 21
Original Size Detection (D0B4)......................................................................................................... 24
Paper Feed ....................................................................................................................................... 26
Optional Equipment .............................................................................................................................. 28
Double Paper Feed Unit PB2040 ..................................................................................................... 28
Single Paper Feed Unit PB2030....................................................................................................... 28
Inner 1bin Tray BN2020 (D0B4) ....................................................................................................... 29
Controller Options (D0B4) ................................................................................................................ 29
3. SP Mode Tables (D0B2,D0B3)......................................................................................................... 30
Engine SP1-XXX (Paper handling) ...................................................................................................... 30
Engine SP2-XXX (Process) .................................................................................................................. 35
Engine SP4-XXX (Scan)....................................................................................................................... 39
Engine SP5-XXX (Mode) ...................................................................................................................... 40
Engine SP6-XXX (Option) .................................................................................................................... 42
Engine SP7-XXX (Data Log 1) ............................................................................................................. 43
Input and Output Check........................................................................................................................ 46
Input Check ....................................................................................................................................... 46
Output Check .................................................................................................................................... 47
4. SP Mode Tables (D0B4) ................................................................................................................... 49
Engine SP Tables ................................................................................................................................. 49
Engine SP1-XXX .............................................................................................................................. 49
Engine SP2-XXX .............................................................................................................................. 54
Engine SP4-XXX .............................................................................................................................. 58
Engine SP5-XXX .............................................................................................................................. 67
Engine SP6-XXX .............................................................................................................................. 68
Engine SP7-XXX .............................................................................................................................. 70
Input and Output Check .................................................................................................................... 75
Controller SP Tables ............................................................................................................................ 82
1
SP5-XXX ........................................................................................................................................... 82
SP7-XXX ......................................................................................................................................... 117
SP8-XXX ......................................................................................................................................... 131
5. Printer Service Mode (D0B4).......................................................................................................... 187
6. Scanner Service Mode (D0B4) ....................................................................................................... 194
7. Software Configuration (D0B4)....................................................................................................... 196
Printing Features ................................................................................................................................ 196
Auto PDL Detection Function ......................................................................................................... 196
Print Images Rotation ..................................................................................................................... 200
PJL USTATUS ................................................................................................................................ 201
Scanner Features ............................................................................................................................... 203
Display settings of recently used scan destination......................................................................... 203
The Qualification Switching of Scan to Folder ............................................................................... 203
Security Features ............................................................................................................................... 205
How to Restrict Access to the WIM Job Menu ............................................................................... 205
How to Restrict Web Image Monitor Access to the Document Server .......................................... 205
User Authentication for Specific MFP Applications ........................................................................ 206
2
1.Appendices: Preventive Maintenance Tables
1. Appendices: Preventive Maintenance

Tables
Preventive Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Items
• The amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.

Chart: A4/LT (LEF) / 5%
Mode: 2 copies / original (prints/job)
Ratio 20%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
Mainframe:
Item 60K 120K 180K 240K EM Note

Scanner
Platen cover C/I/L Replace the platen sheet if
(D0B2) necessary.
Dry cloth or alcohol
Exposure glass C/I/L Dry cloth or alcohol
Toner shield glass C Cleaning brush
PCDU
PCU C/I
OPC drum R
Charge roller R
Cleaning brush R
Drum cleaning blade R
Pick-off pawls R
Developer R
Mixing auger bushings R
Transfer
Transfer roller R
Discharge plate R
ID Sensor C/I Blower brush or dry cloth
Fusing
3
1.Appendices: Preventive Maintenance Tables
Item 60K 120K 180K 240K EM Note

Hot roller R
Pressure roller R
Thermistors R
Hot roller stripper pawls C/I R Wipe with a cloth dampened with
Fusing entrance guide C/I ethyl alcohol.
plate
Bearing R
Paper path
Paper feed roller C Damp cloth
Friction roller C Damp cloth
Pickup roller C Damp cloth
Paper end sensor C Damp cloth
Bypass pick-up roller C Damp cloth
Bypass paper feed roller C Damp cloth
Bypass friction pad C Damp cloth
Bypass paper end sensor C Damp cloth
Registration roller C Damp cloth
(drive/driven)
Registration sensor C Damp cloth
Relay roller (driven) C Damp cloth
Paper exit roller C Damp cloth
Paper exit sensor C Damp cloth
ADF (D0B3)
ADF separation pad C Replace parts every 30K (originals).

Damp cloth
ADF pickup roller C Replace parts every 45K (originals).
Damp cloth
ADF feed roller C Replace parts every 45K (originals).
Damp cloth
ADF feed clutch C Replace parts every 45K (originals).
Duplex
Duplex transfer rollers C Damp cloth
4
2.Appendices:Specifications
2. Appendices:Specifications
General Specifications
Mainframe
Item Spec.
Configuration Desktop
Color Supported Black and White
Scanning Element CIS
Printing process Laser beam scanning/marking & electro-photographic printing
Development Dry, dual component toner development
Fusing System Heat roll
Max. Imageable Area 297 x 432 mm (11" x 17")
297 x 600 mm from bypass tray (11" x 23" from bypass tray)
Target Monthly ACV Black :4K
First Copy Time (LT/A4 LEF, 1st 6.5 sec or less
tray)
Warm-up Time (23 °C, 71.6 °F) 19 sec or less
Power Source D0B2,D0B3
• EU/AP/CHN: 220-240V 50-60 Hz 8A
D0B4
• EU/AP/CHN: 220-240V 50/60Hz, 8A
• TWN: 110V, 60Hz
Max Power Consumption (Full 1,550 W or less
Configuration)
Dimensions (W x D x H) D0B2
Mainframe (without platen cover)
• 587 x 581 x 527 (23.1” x 22.9” x 20.1”)
Mainframe (with platen cover)
• 587 x 581 x 560 (23.1” x 22.9” x 22.1”)
D0B3
Mainframe (without ADF)
• 587 x 581 x 527 (23.1” x 22.9” x 20.1”)
Mainframe (with ADF)
• 587 x 581 x 639 (23.1” x 22.9” x 25.2”)
D0B4
Mainframe (without ADF)
5
Item Spec.
• 587 x 581 x 552 (23.1” x 22.9” x 21.7”)
Mainframe (with ADF)
• 587 x 581 x 677 (23.1” x 22.9” x 26.7”)
Weight D0B2
• Less than 34.0 kg (75.0 lbs)
D0B3
D0B4
CPU D0B2,D0B3
• 400 MHz
D0B4
• 800 MHz
RAM D0B2,D0B3
• 512 MB
D0B4
• 2GB
HDD No
Max Email Address in HDD -
Register Group Address in HDD -
Register client folder address in -
HDD
Recommended Standard A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 (JIS) SEF, B5 (JIS) SEF/LEF,A5
Paper Size Tray SEF/LEF, DLT SEF, Legal SEF, 8 1/2×13 2/5 SEF, LT
SEF/LEF, Government LG SEF, G LT SEF/LEF, F SEF,
Foolscap SEF, Folio SEF, Executive SEF/LEF, Eng Quatro
SEF/LEF, HLT SEF
8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 11×15 SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF,
10×14 SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
Width: 140 mm (5.51 inch) - 297mm (11.69 inch), Length: 148
mm (5.83 inch) - 432 mm (17.00 inch)
D0B2,D0B3
• Indefinite size constraints on trays 1, 2 and 3.
• Paper larger than 279 mm in width can not be used
with length exceeding 420 mm.
Recommended 2nd & 3rd A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 (JIS) SEF, B5 (JIS)SEF, A5 SEF,
6
Item Spec.
Paper Size Paper Tray DLT SEF, Legal SEF, 8 1/2×13 2/5 SEF, LT SEF/LEF,
(optional) Government LG SEF, G LT SEF/LEF, F SEF, Foolscap SEF,
Folio SEF, Executive SEF, Eng Quatro SEF/LEF, HLT SEF
10×14 SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
Width: 98 mm (3.86 inch) - 297 mm (11.69 inch), Length: 162
mm (6.38 inch) - 432 mm (17.00 inch)
D0B2,D0B3
• Indefinite size constraints on trays 1, 2 and 3.
• Paper larger than 279 mm in width can not be used
with length exceeding 420 mm.
Recommended Bypass A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 (JIS) SEF, B5 (JIS) SEF/LEF, A5
Paper Size SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B6 (JIS) SEF, DLT SEF, Legal SEF, 8
1/2×13 2/5 SEF, LT SEF/LEF, Government LG SEF, G LT
SEF/LEF, F SEF, Foolscap SEF, Folio SEF, Executive
SEF/LEF, Eng Quatro SEF/LEF, HLT SEF
Com10 SEF, Monarch SEF, Env.C5 SEF/LEF, Env.C6 SEF,
Env.DL SEF
10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
Width: 90 mm (3.55 inch) - 305 mm (12.00 inch), Length: 148
mm (5.83 inch) - 600 mm (23.62 inch)
Indefinite size constraints on trays 1, 2 and 3.

Paper larger than 279 mm in width can not be used with
length exceeding 420 mm.
*Paper Feeding Std 600 sheets (mainframe tray 500 sheets + by-pass tray 100
Capacity (LT/A4: sheets)
80gsm paper) Option 500sheet (500sheet x 1) or 1,000 sheets (500sheets x 2)
Max 1,600 sheets (mainframe tray 500 sheets + bypass tray 100
sheets + optional tray 500 sheets x 2)
Paper Output Std D0B2,D0B3,D0B4
Capacity (LT/A4: • 250 sheets (internal tray)
80gsm paper) Option D0B4
• 50 sheets
7
Item Spec.
Max D0B2,D0B3
• 250 sheets
D0B4
• 300 sheets
Paper Type Std Tray Thin Paper, Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Recycled Paper,
Capacity Color Paper, Special Paper, Middle Thick Paper, Prepunched
Paper, Letterhead, Bond Paper, Cardstock
Bypass Tray Thin Paper, Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Recycled Paper,
Color Paper, Special Paper, Middle Thick Paper, Prepunched
Paper, Letterhead, Bond Paper, Cardstock, Thick Paper 1,
Thick Paper 2,Label Paper, OHP, Envelope
Paper Feed Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Recycled Paper, Color Paper,
Unit Special Paper, Middle Thick Paper, Prepunched Paper,
Letterhead, Bond Paper, Cardstock
Paper Weight Std Tray 52 – 105 g/m2
Bypass 52 – 216 g/m2
Duplex Unit 64 – 105 g/m2
Paper Feed 60 – 105 g/m2
Unit
Reliability Max Monthly 10K
CV (5 years)
PM Cycle 60K
MCBC (Mean 65.6K
Copy
Between
Calls)
Life Approx. 600K or 5 years whichever comes first
ADF life D0B3
• Approx. 300K or 5 years whichever comes first
Copier Specifications
Item Spec.
CPM Black 27
CPM Color -
Copy Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Multiple Copying Up to 999 copies
Reproduction Ratio 400%, 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%,100%, 93%,
82%, 71%, 50%, 25%
8
Item Spec.
Zoom From 25% to 400% in 1% step
Number of Copy Reservations -
Maximum original Book D0B2,D0B3,D0B4
size • 297 x 432 mm
ADF D0B3
• 297 x 600 mm
D0B4
• Duplex: 297 x 432mm
• Simplex: 297 x 1260mm
Image Density Auto: No
Manual: 5 levels
Copy Mode D0B2,D0B3
• Default = Mixed
Mixed, Text, Photo, Diazo, Voucher
D0B4
• Default = Text
Text, Text&Photo (Printed/Glossy/Copied), Photo
(Printed/Glossy/Copied)
Paper Selection Default = Tray 1
Tray 1 (Default), Tray 2, Tray 3, Bypass Tray
Auto Tray Switch D0B2,D0B3
• Copy: Yes
• Printer: Yes
• By-pass is available
D0B4
• Yes
Duplex Yes
Book Booklet No
Magazine
Layout & Booklet
Series Book to simplex No
2 sided original to Yes
simplex
Combine (Layout) The following combinations are supported:
2 into 1 simplex,
4 into 1 simplex,
1 duplex into 1 simplex,
9
Item Spec.
2 duplex into 1 simplex,
2 into 1 duplex,
4 into 1 duplex,
8 into 1 duplex,
2 duplex into 1 duplex,
4 duplex into 1 duplex
Shift/Erase/ Centering No
Margin Adjustment Cornering No
Margin Adjustment D0B2,D0B3
• Duplex margine (Top / Left)
D0B4
• No
Scan Position No
Adjustment
Creep Adjustment No
Erase Center No
Erase Border No
Cover Sheet Front Cover No
Chapter Front and Back Cover
Slip Sheets Chapter
Slip Sheets
Image Rotation D0B2,D0B3
• No
D0B4
• Yes
Electronic Sort Without Shift Sort Yes
Rotate Sort Yes
Shift Sort No
Electronic Stack No
Stapling No
Image Creation Repeat No
Double Copy
Mirror
Positive/Negative
Erase Inside
Erase Outside
Stamp/Numbering Preset Stamp No
10
Item Spec.
User Stamp No
Date Stamp D0B2,D0B3
• No
D0B4
• Yes
Page Number D0B2,D0B3
• No
D0B4
• Yes
Bates Numbering D0B2,D0B3
• No
D0B4
• Yes
Printing copy prevention No
pattern
Sharp/Soft No
Contrast No
Background Density Adjustment No
Job Programs D0B2,D0B3
• No
D0B4
• Yes
User Code D0B2,D0B3
• No
D0B4
• Yes
Interrupt Copy No
Auto Start No
Job Preset No
Sample Copy No
ID Card copy D0B2,D0B3
• No
D0B4
• Yes
11
Printer Specifications
Item Spec.
Printer Language D0B2,D0B3
• Standard: GDI
• Option: -
D0B4
• Standard:PCL5e/6, PostScript3
• Option: -
Print Resolution D0B2,D0B3
• Max: 600 x 600 dpi
• PCL5c:No
• PCL6:No
• PS3:No
• XPS:No
• IPDS:No
D0B4
• Max:600 x 600 dpi (1bit)
• PCL5e:300 x 300 dpi (1bit),600 x 600 dpi (1bit) (Default)
• PCL6:600 x 600 dpi (1bit) (Default)
• PS3:300 x 300 dpi (1bit),600 x 600 dpi (1bit) (Default)
• XPS:No
• IPDS:No
Font D0B2,D0B3
• No
D0B4
• PCL5e/6
• PostScript3 : 80 Roman fonts + 13 international fonts
Host Interfaces D0B2,D0B3
Standard
• Ethernet (1000/100/10BASE), USB 2.0 TypeB x 1
Option
• IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac wireless LAN interface
D0B4
Standard
• 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T x1
• IEEE802.11a/b/g/n (5GHz/2.4GHz) x1
• USB2.0-Device (Type-B) x1
• USB2.0-Host x1
12
Item Spec.
Option
• FAX x1
Network Protocol TCP/IP
MIB Standard MIB: -
Private MIB: -
Network/Operating D0B2,D0B3
System • Windows Server2003/2008/2012/2016
• Windows7/8/8.1/10
D0B4
• Windows 7/8.1/10/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server
2012 R2/Server 2016/Server 2019
• Mac OS （X 10.11or later）
• SAP R/3, SAP S/4
• Unix: Sun Solaris, HP-UX, SCO OpenServer, Red Hat Linux, IBM AIX
Scan Specifications
Item Spec.
Color Scan Yes
Scanning Resolution D0B2,D0B3
• 100 × 100,150 × 150,200 × 200 (default),300 ×
300,600 × 600 dpi
D0B4
• 100 × 100,200 × 200 (default),300 × 300,400 ×
400,600 × 600 dpi
Auto Size Detection Exposure D0B2,D0B3
Glass • A3 SEF, B4 (JIS) SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 (JIS)
SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, Foolscap SEF, Folio SEF, F
SEF
• 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF
D0B4
• A3 SEF, B4 (JIS) SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 (JIS) LEF, A5
SEF/LEF, Foolscap SEF, Folio SEF, F SEF
ADF D0B2,D0B3
Simplex:
13
Item Spec.
• A3 SEF, B4 (JIS) SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 (JIS)
SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 (JIS) SEF, Foolscap SEF,
Folio SEF, F SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
• Vertical: 128 mm (5.1 inch) - 297 mm (11.7 inch)
• Horizontal: 148 mm (5.8 inch) - 600 mm (23.6 inch)
Image quality of custom paper is not guaranteed.

Duplex:
• A3 SEF, B4 (JIS) SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 (JIS)
SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, Foolscap SEF, Folio SEF, F
SEF
Image quality of custom paper is not guaranteed.

D0B4
• A3 SEF, B4 (JIS) SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 (JIS) LEF, A5
SEF/LEF, Foolscap SEF, Folio SEF, F SEF
Scan Area Exposure D0B2,D0B3,D0B4
Glass • 297 mm (11.7 inch) × 432 mm (17.00 inch)
ADF D0B3
• 297 mm (11.7 inch) × 600 mm (23.62 inch)
D0B4
• Duplex:297 mm (11.7 inch) × 600 mm (23.62 inch)
• Simplex:297 mm (11.7 inch) × 1260 mm (49.61 inch)
sRGB Supported No
Protocol D0B2,D0B3
• Network:TCP/IP
• Scan to E-mail: POP/POPS, SMTP/SMTPS
• Sacn to Folder: SMB
D0B4
• Network: TCP/IP
• Scan to E-mail: POP, SMTP
• Scan to Folder: SMB
Compression Method BW: MH, MR, MMR
Color: JPEG
14
Item Spec.
Scan Mode BW: BW, Grayscale
Color: True Color
Image Density Yes: Manual
Image Rotation No
SADF/Batch Mode No
Mixed Size Mode No
Reduce and Enlarge No
Split scan from Booklet type Original No
Scan to digitally signed PDF (Digital D0B2,D0B3
Signature for PDF) • No
D0B4
• Yes
Single Page TIFF On D0B2,D0B3
• Yes
D0B4
• No
Off NO
Multi-Page TIFF On D0B2,D0B3
• Yes
D0B4
• No
Off NO
Single Page JPEG On D0B2,D0B3
• Yes
D0B4
• No
Off NO
Single Page PDF On D0B2,D0B3
• Yes
D0B4
• No
Off NO
Multi PagePDF On D0B2,D0B3
• Yes
D0B4
• No
Off NO
15
Item Spec.
Single Page High On NO
Compression PDF Off NO
Multi-Page High On NO
Compression PDF Off NO
Single Page PDF-A On NO
Off NO
Multi-Page PDF-A On NO
Off NO
Scan to Email
Item Spec.
Requirement (Mail Protocol, Transmission Protocol, YES
Protocol)
Authorization Function SMTP authentication, POP3 before SMTP
Resolution D0B2,D0B3
• 100, 150, 200 (Default), 300, 600
D0B4
• 100, 200 (Default), 300, 600
Max Email Address in HDD -
Register Group Address in HDD -
Input of Destination E-mail Address via Soft Key No
Search methods of Email Address in HDD -
LDAP Search No
Max Address Numbers Per Send 1
Address Numbers Per Send From HDD: -
Direct Input: 1
Via LDAP: -
Simultaneous Transmission 1
Attention -
Email Size D0B2,D0B3
• With Restriction: 1MB - 5MB
(default=1MB)
• Without Restriction: Yes
D0B4
• With Restriction: 128KB-44300KB
• Without Restriction: Yes
Input Subject D0B2,D0B3
• Manual: Max. 64 Characters
16
Item Spec.
• User Pre-register: Max. 64 Characters
• Preset: Max. 64 Characters
D0B4
• Manual: No
• User Pre-register: No
• Preset: No
Input Main body text Manual: No
User Pre-register: No
Preset: No
Input File Name D0B2,D0B3
• Yes, 16 Characters
D0B4
• No
File Type True Color: JPEG/ PDF
Grayscale: JPEG/ PDF
Black and White: TIFF/ PDF
Program User Settings No
Divide and send Email (If the file size exceeds the No
max size.)
Resend No
Max Address Numbers Per Send D0B2,D0B3
(Combination with Folder) Input via Address Book: 1
Manual input: 1
D0B4
Input via Address Book
• From Address Book:100
• Address Book+Direct input: 100
• EMail destination+Folder destination:
132
Manual input: 1
• Direct input: 50
• Email destination+Folder Destination:
132
Scan to Folder
Item Spec.
Protocol Support Yes
17
Item Spec.
Security D0B2,D0B3
• LanMan1.0
• NTLMv1/v2
• GSS API
D0B4
• 2018/
Resolution D0B2,D0B3
• 100, 150, 200 (default), 300, 600 dpi
D0B4
• 100, 200 (default), 300, 400, 600 dpi
Register client folder address in HDD -
Maintain client folder address in HDD -
Direct addressing of destination client folder via D0B2,D0B3
soft key • No
D0B4
• Yes
SMB: Network path -> Client folder ->
Password
Search client folder By name and ID
Home folder over LDAP No
Max. client folder numbers per send D0B2,D0B3
• 1
D0B4
• 32
Simultaneous Transmission D0B2,D0B3
• No
D0B4
• Mail: 100
• Folder: 32
Group address D0B2,D0B3
• No
D0B4
• 20
Input File Name D0B2,D0B3
• Yes, 16 Characters
D0B4
• No
Input Subject D0B2,D0B3
18
Item Spec.
• Max. 64 Characters
D0B4
• No
Scan to File size Not defined
File Size when combined Scan to Folder & Scan to No
E-mail
File Type True Color: JPEG/ PDF
Grayscale: JPEG/ PDF
Black and White: TIFF/ PDF
Program User Settings No
Resend No
Max Address Numbers Per Send D0B2,D0B3
(Combination with E-mail) Input via Address Book: 1
Manual input: 1
D0B4
Input via Address Book
• From Address Book: 32
• EMail destination+Folder destination: 132
Manual input: 1
• Direct input: 32
• Email destination+Folder Destination: 132
Network TWAIN Driver
Item Spec.
OS D0B2,D0B3
• Windows server2003/2008/2012/2016
• Windows7/8/8.1/10
D0B4
• Windows server2003/2008/2012/2016/2019
• Windows7/8.1/10
Scanning BW 14 ipm (Simplex, 200dpi, A4LEF)
Speed Color 6 ipm (Simplex, 200dpi, A4LEF)
Resolution BW 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 600
Color 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 600
Scan Mode True Color, Grayscale, Black and White
Image Adjustment Gamma, Sharpness, Brightness Adjustment, Contrast, Saturation, Hue,
19
Item Spec.
Reduce moire
Endorser No
Stamp No
20
Supported Paper Sizes
Original Size Detection (D0B2,D0B3)
ADF (D0B3)
Size (W x L) [mm] Simplex Duplex NOTE

A3 SEF (297 x 420) C C
A4 SEF (210 x 297) D D
A4 LEF (297 x 210) C C
B4 SEF (257 x 364) C C
B5 SEF (182 x 257) D D
B5 LEF (257 x 182) C C
A5 SEF (148 x 210) Y Y
A5 LEF (210 x 148) D D
B6 SEF (128 x 182) Y -
B6 LEF (182 x 128) D -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A A Auto Size Detection is not possible.
LG SEF (81/2" x 14") B B
Oficio SEF (8 1/2"×13.4") F F
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") B B Auto Size Detection is not possible.
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A A Auto Size Detection is not possible.
F SEF (8" x 13") E E
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") B,D B,D
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") E E
Exective SEF (7 1/4" x 10 1/2") Y Y
1/ "
Exective LEF (10 2 x 7 1/4") A A
Eng quatro SEF (8" x 10") B B
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") Y Y
HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/ 2") B B
8K SEF (267 x 390) C C
16K SEF (195 x 267) D D
16K LEF (267 x 195) C C
11 x 15 SEF (11" x 15") A A Auto Size Detection is not possible.
10 x 14 SEF (10" x 14") A A
Remarks:
A Available
Size switching by document judgment according to SP6-016-001.
0:DLT SEF/LT LEF/11 x 15 SEF
21
1:10 x 14 SEF
2:Exective LEF
B Available
0：LG SEF/Foolscap SEF/LT SEF/HLT LEF
1：Eng quatro SEF
C Available
0:A3 SEF/B4 SEF/A4 LEF/B5 LEF
1:8K SEF/16K LEF
D Available
0:A4 SEF/B5 SEF/A5 LEF/B6 LEF
1:Foolscap SEF
2:16K SEF
E Available
Only valid when 1 is set for SP6-016-004.
0:Foolscap SEF
1:Folio SEF
2:F SEF
F Available
Only valid when 1 is set for SP6-016-002.
0:Foolscap SEF/LG SEF
1:oficio SEF
Y Available
- Not available
BOOK (D0B2,D0B3)
Size (W x L) [mm] Destination NOTE

EU,AP CHN
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A A
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A A
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A A
B5 SEF (182 x 257) - A
B5 LEF (257 x 182) A A
A5 SEF (148 x 210) B B
22
A5 LEF (210 x 148) B B

B6 SEF (128 x 182) - -
B6 LEF (182 x 128) - -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") - -
LG SEF (81/2" x 14") - -
Oficio SEF (8 1/2"×13.4") - -
1
LT SEF (8 /2" x 11") - -
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") - -
F SEF (8" x 13") C -
1
Foolscap SEF (8 /2" x 13") C -
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") C -
Exective SEF (7 1/4" x 10 1/2") - -
Exective LEF (10 1/2" x 7 1/4") - -
Eng quatro SEF (8" x 10") - -
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") - -
HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/2") - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) - A
16K SEF (195 x 267) - A
16K LEF (267 x 195) - A
11 x 15 SEF (11" x 15") - -
10 x 14 SEF (10" x 14") - -
Remarks:
A Available
0:Normal
1:8K/16K
B Available
0:Non
1:A5 SEF
2:A5 LEF
C Available
0: Foolscape SEF
1: Folio SEF
2: F SEF
- Not available
23
Original Size Detection (D0B4)
ADF

EU,AP,CHN,TWN
A3 SEF (297 x 420) Y
A4 SEF (210 x 297) Y
A4 LEF (297 x 210) Y
B4 SEF (257 x 364) Y
B5 SEF (182 x 257) Y
B5 LEF (257 x 182) Y
A5 SEF (148 x 210) Y
A5 LEF (210 x 148) Y
B6 SEF (128 x 182) Y
B6 LEF (182 x 128) Y
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A
LG SEF (81/2" x 14") -
Oficio SEF (8 1/2"×13.4") -
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") B
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") C
F SEF (8" x 13") D
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") D
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") D
Exective SEF (7 1/4" x 10 1/2") -
1/ "
Exective LEF (10 2 x 7 1/4") -
Eng quatro SEF (8" x 10") -
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") -
1 1
HLT LEF (8 /2" x 5 /2") -
8K SEF (267 x 390) A
16K SEF (195 x 267) B
16K LEF (267 x 195) C
11 x 15 SEF (11" x 15") -
10 x 14 SEF (10" x 14") -
Remarks:
A Available
“DLT SEF” is for default set sizes, and when setting “8K SEF” sizes for size detection from SP
mode, ““DLT SEF” sizes can no longer be detected.
B Available
24
“LT SEF” is for default set sizes, and when setting “16K SEF” sizes for size detection from SP
mode, “LT SEF” sizes can no longer be detected.
C Available
“LT LEF” is for default set sizes, and when setting “16K LEF” sizes for size detection from SP
mode, “LT LEF” sizes can no longer be detected.
D Available
F Sizes (8.5” x 13” SEF, 8.25” x 13” SEF, 8” x 13” SEF) will be available by SP mode settings.
Y Available
- Not available
BOOK

EU,AP,CHN,TWN
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A,D
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A,D
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A
B5 LEF (257 x 182) A
A5 SEF (148 x 210) A,B
A5 LEF (210 x 148) A
B6 SEF (128 x 182) -
B6 LEF (182 x 128) -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") -
LG SEF (81/2" x 14") -
Oficio SEF (8 1/2"×13.4") -
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") D
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") D
F SEF (8" x 13") C
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") C
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") C
Exective SEF (7 1/4" x 10 1/2") -
Exective LEF (10 1/2" x 7 1/4") -
Eng quatro SEF (8" x 10") -
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") -
HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/ 2") -
8K SEF (267 x 390) A
16K SEF (195 x 267) A
25
16K LEF (267 x 195) A

11 x 15 SEF (11" x 15") -
10 x 14 SEF (10" x 14") -
Remarks:
A Available
Size switching by document judgment according to SP mode.
• 8K SEF -> Switch between A3, B4 SEF
• 16K SEF -> Switch between A4, A5, B5 SEF
• 16K LEF -> Switch between A4, A5, B5 LEF
B Available
For detected originals smaller then A5 size, with SP mode either “detect as A5” or “Detect as
Unknown” can be selected. (Default is “Detect as unknown”)
C Available
F Sizes (8.5” x 13” SEF, 8.25” x 13” SEF, 8” x 13” SEF) will be available by SP mode settings.
D Available
Can be selected with switching A4/LT from SP mode.
• Standard detect (default)
• When placing A4/LT size LEF, detect as A4 LEF. When placing SEF, detect as LT SEF.
• When placing A4/LT size LEF, detect as LT LEF. When placing SEF, detect as A4 SEF.
- Not available
Paper Feed
Indefinite size constraints on trays 1, 2 and 3.

Paper larger than 279 mm in width can not be used with length exceeding 420 mm.
Remarks:
Y Yes; available
- Not available
Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2/3 (Option) By-pass Tray Duplex

A3 SEF (297 x 420) Y Y Y Y
A4 SEF (210 x 297) Y Y Y Y
A4 LEF (297 x 210) Y Y Y Y
B4 SEF (257 x 364) Y Y Y Y
B5 SEF (182 x 257) Y Y Y Y
B5 LEF (257 x 182) Y - Y -
A5 SEF (148 x 210) Y Y Y Y
A5 LEF (210 x 148) Y - Y -
26
Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2/3 (Option) By-pass Tray Duplex

A6 SEF (105 x 148) - - Y -
A6 LEF (148 x 105) - - - -
B6 SEF (128 x 182) - - Y -
B6 LEF (182 x 128) - - - -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") Y Y Y Y
1
LG SEF (8 /2" x 14") Y Y Y Y
Oficio / Folio SEF (8 1/2"×13.4") Y Y Y Y
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") Y Y Y Y
1
LT LEF (11" x 8 /2") Y Y Y Y
G-LGL SEF (8 1/4" x 14") Y Y Y Y
G-LT SEF (8" x 10 1/2") Y Y Y Y
G-LT LEF (10 1/2" x 8") Y Y Y Y
F SEF (8" x 13") Y Y Y Y
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") Y Y Y Y
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") Y Y Y Y
Exective SEF (7 1/4" x 10 1/2") Y Y Y Y
Exective LEF (10 1/ " x 7 1/4") Y - Y -
2
Eng quatro SEF (8" x 10") Y Y Y Y

Eng quatro LEF (10" x 8") Y Y Y Y
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") Y Y Y Y
HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/2") - - - -
Env.#10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3 mm) - - - -
Com10SEF (4.125" x 9.5") - - Y -
Env.Monarc SEF (98.4 x 190.5 mm) - - - -
Monarch SEF (3.875" x 7.5") - - Y -
Env.C5 SEF (162 x 229) - - Y -
Env.C5 LEF (229 x 162) - - Y -
Env.C6 SEF (114 x 162) - - Y -
Env.DL SEF (110 x 220) - - Y -
8K SEF (267 x 390) Y Y Y Y
16K SEF (195 x 267) Y Y Y Y
16K LEF (267 x 195) Y Y Y Y
12 x 18 SEF (12" x 18") - - Y -
11 x 15 SEF (11" x 15") Y Y Y Y
11 x 14 SEF (11" x 14") Y Y Y Y
10 x 15 SEF (10" x 15") Y Y Y Y
10 x 14 SEF (10" x 14") Y Y Y Y
27
Optional Equipment
Double Paper Feed Unit PB2040
Item Description
Number of Trays: 2
Paper Size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 (JIS) SEF, B5 (JIS)SEF, A5 SEF, DLT SEF, Legal
SEF, 8 1/2×13 2/5 SEF, LT SEF/LEF, Government LG SEF, G LT SEF/LEF, F
SEF, Foolscap SEF, Folio SEF, Executive SEF, Eng Quatro SEF/LEF, HLT
SEF
8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 11×15 SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF
<Custom Size Paper>

Width: 98 mm (3.86 inch) - 297 mm (11.69 inch), Length: 162 mm (6.38 inch)
- 432 mm (17.00 inch)
Paper Weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb.)
Paper Capacity (80 1000 sheets (500 sheets × 2tray) with 80g/m2 paper
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):
Power Consumption: Less than 36 W
Dimension (W x D x 587 × 711.4 × 340.6 mm (23.1 × 28.0 × 13.4 inches)
H):
Weight: Less than 30 kg (66.14 lb.)
Single Paper Feed Unit PB2030
Item Description
Number of Trays: 1
Paper Size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 (JIS) SEF, B5 (JIS)SEF, A5 SEF, DLT SEF, Legal
SEF, 8 1/2×13 2/5 SEF, LT SEF/LEF, Government LG SEF, G LT SEF/LEF, F
SEF, Foolscap SEF, Folio SEF, Executive SEF, Eng Quatro SEF/LEF, HLT
SEF
8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 11×15 SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF
<Custom Size Paper>

Width: 98 mm (3.86 inch) - 297 mm (11.69 inch), Length: 162 mm (6.38 inch)
- 432 mm (17.00 inch)
Paper Weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb.)
Paper Capacity (80 500 sheets with 80g/m2 paper
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):
Power Consumption: Less than 18 W
28
Item Description
Dimension (W x D x 587 × 556.2 × 140 mm (23.1 × 21.9 × 5.5 inches)
H):
Weight: Less than 12 kg (26.46 lb.)
Paper Size • A3 SEF - A6 SEF

• DLT SEF - HLT SEF
The spec may be different depending on the mainframe to be

attached.
Stacking supports up to 432mm.
Paper weight 60-105 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond- 28 lb. Bond)
The spec may be different depending on the mainframe to be

attached.
Paper Output Capacity (80 50 sheets
g/m2)
Power Consumption 9W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D x H) 416 x 425 x 85 mm (16.38 x 16.73 x 3.35 inches)
When the extension tray is withdrew：

447 x 425 x 85 mm (17.60 x 16.73 x 3.35 inches)
Weight 2kg or less (4.4lbs. or less)
Controller Options (D0B4)
• NFC Card Reader Type M38 (D0B4)
29
3.SP Mode Tables (D0B2,D0B3)
3. SP Mode Tables (D0B2,D0B3)
Engine SP1-XXX (Paper handling)

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or CTL [Min to Max/Init./Step]
1-001-002 Sub Registration Tray: Plain ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
1-001-003 Sub Registration Tray: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
1-001-004 Sub Registration Tray: Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
1-001-007 Sub Registration Bypass: Plain ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
1-001-008 Sub Registration Bypass: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
1-001-009 Sub Registration Bypass: Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
1-001-013 Sub Registration Duplex: Plain ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
1-001-014 Sub Registration Duplex: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
1-001-015 Sub Registration Duplex: Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
1-002-001 Main Registration By-pass ENG* [-4 to 4/0/0.1mm]
1-002-002 Main Registration Tray Main1 ENG* [-4 to 4/0/0.1mm]
1-002-004 Main Registration Tray Bank1 ENG* [-4 to 4/0/0.1mm]
1-002-005 Main Registration Tray Bank2 ENG* [-4 to 4/0/0.1mm]
1-002-006 Main Registration Duplex ENG* [-4 to 4/0/0.1mm]
1-003-002 Paper Buckle Tray1: Plain ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-003 Paper Buckle Tray1: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-004 Paper Buckle Tray1: Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-005 Paper Buckle Bank1:Plain ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-006 Paper Buckle Bank1:MiddleThick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-007 Paper Buckle Bank1:Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-008 Paper Buckle Bank2:Plain ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-009 Paper Buckle Bank2:MiddleThick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-010 Paper Buckle Bank2:Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-012 Paper Buckle Bypass: Plain ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-013 Paper Buckle Bypass: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-014 Paper Buckle Bypass: Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-018 Paper Buckle Duplex: Plain ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-019 Paper Buckle Duplex: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-003-020 Paper Buckle Duplex: Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
1-103-001 Reload Setting Fusing Idling ENG* [0 to 2/0/1]
0:OFF
1:ON
2:OFF+Temp
30

1-103-002 Reload Setting Reload Temp:CTR ENG* [100 to 200/145/1deg]
1-103-003 Reload Setting Reload Temp:End ENG* [100 to 200/145/1deg]
1-103-004 Reload Setting ReloadTemp:Cold:C ENG* [100 to 200/145/1deg]
1-103-005 Reload Setting ReloadTemp:Cold:E ENG* [100 to 200/145/1deg]
1-103-006 Reload Setting Forced ReloadTime ENG* [5 to 200/11/0.1sec]
1-104-001 Regist Waiting Regist Wait Time ENG* [0 to 120/120/1sec]
1-104-003 Regist Waiting Reg. Wait:Thin ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
1-104-004 Regist Waiting Reg. Wait:Plain1 ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
1-104-005 Regist Waiting Reg. Wait:Plain2 ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
1-104-006 Regist Waiting Reg. Wait:M-Thick ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
1-104-007 Regist Waiting Reg. Wait:Thick1 ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
1-104-008 Regist Waiting Reg. Wait:Thick2 ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
1-104-013 Regist Waiting Lower:Thin:center ENG* [0 to 60/30/1deg]
1-104-014 Regist Waiting Lower:Thin:end ENG* [0 to 60/30/1deg]
1-104-015 Regist Waiting Lower:Plain1:ctr ENG* [0 to 60/30/1deg]
1-104-016 Regist Waiting Lower:Plain1:end ENG* [0 to 60/30/1deg]
1-104-017 Regist Waiting Lower:Plain2:ctr ENG* [0 to 60/30/1deg]
1-104-018 Regist Waiting Lower:Plain2:end ENG* [0 to 60/30/1deg]
1-104-019 Regist Waiting Lower:M-Thick:ctr ENG* [0 to 60/5/1deg]
1-104-020 Regist Waiting Lower:M-Thick:end ENG* [0 to 60/5/1deg]
1-104-021 Regist Waiting Lower:Thick1:ctr ENG* [0 to 60/0/1deg]
1-104-022 Regist Waiting Lower:Thick1:end ENG* [0 to 60/0/1deg]
1-104-023 Regist Waiting Lower:Thick2:ctr ENG* [0 to 60/0/1deg]
1-104-024 Regist Waiting Lower:Thick2:end ENG* [0 to 60/0/1deg]
1-104-033 Regist Waiting Upper:Thin:center ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-034 Regist Waiting Upper:Thin:end ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-035 Regist Waiting Upper:Plain1:ctr ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-036 Regist Waiting Upper:Plain1:end ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-037 Regist Waiting Upper:Plain2:ctr ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-038 Regist Waiting Upper:Plain2:end ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-039 Regist Waiting Upper:M-Thick:ctr ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-040 Regist Waiting Upper:M-Thick:end ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-041 Regist Waiting Upper:Thick1:ctr ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-042 Regist Waiting Upper:Thick1:end ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-043 Regist Waiting Upper:Thick2:ctr ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-044 Regist Waiting Upper:Thick2:end ENG* [0 to 60/40/1deg]
1-104-050 Regist Waiting Low-V:Wait Time ENG* [0 to 300/60/1sec]
31

1-104-051 Regist Waiting Low-V:Wait:Center ENG* [0 to 100/10/1deg]
1-104-052 Regist Waiting Low-V:Wait:End ENG* [0 to 100/10/1deg]
1-105-003 Fusing Temp Adj Center:Thin ENG* [100 to 200/145/1deg]
1-105-004 Fusing Temp Adj End:Thin ENG* [100 to 200/145/1deg]
1-105-011 Fusing Temp Adj Center:Plain1 ENG* [100 to 200/165/1deg]
1-105-012 Fusing Temp Adj End:Plain1 ENG* [100 to 200/165/1deg]
1-105-013 Fusing Temp Adj Center:Plain2 ENG* [100 to 200/165/1deg]
1-105-014 Fusing Temp Adj End:Plain2 ENG* [100 to 200/165/1deg]
1-105-015 Fusing Temp Adj Center:M-Thick ENG* [100 to 200/175/1deg]
1-105-016 Fusing Temp Adj End:M-Thick ENG* [100 to 200/175/1deg]
1-105-021 Fusing Temp Adj Center:Thick1 ENG* [100 to 200/185/1deg]
1-105-022 Fusing Temp Adj End:Thick1 ENG* [100 to 200/180/1deg]
1-105-023 Fusing Temp Adj Center:Thick2 ENG* [100 to 200/195/1deg]
1-105-024 Fusing Temp Adj End:Thick2 ENG* [100 to 200/190/1deg]
1-106-001 Fusing Temp Disp Roller Center ENG [-20 to 250/0/1deg]
1-106-002 Fusing Temp Disp Roller End ENG [-20 to 250/0/1deg]
1-106-003 Fusing Temp Disp MachineTemp PowOn ENG [-20 to 250/0/1deg]
1-107-001 Wait Temp Adj Wait Temp:Center ENG* [0 to 200/155/1deg]
1-107-002 Wait Temp Adj Wait Temp:End ENG* [0 to 200/160/1deg]
1-107-003 Wait Temp Adj Print Ready:Ctr ENG* [120 to 180/160/1deg]
1-107-004 Wait Temp Adj Print Ready:End ENG* [120 to 180/165/1deg]
1-107-005 Wait Temp Adj Energy Saver ENG* [0 to 200/50/1deg]
1-107-006 Wait Temp Adj Duty Ctrl:Center ENG* [0 to 200/100/1deg]
1-107-007 Wait Temp Adj Duty Ctrl:End ENG* [0 to 200/100/1deg]
1-107-008 Wait Temp Adj Duty Ctrl 2:CTR ENG* [0 to 200/75/1deg]
1-107-009 Wait Temp Adj Duty Ctrl 2:End ENG* [0 to 200/75/1deg]
1-109-003 Fusing Rev. Adj Low-V PrePrt Time ENG* [0 to 120/0/1sec]
1-110-001 Env. Correction Thresh:S1 ENG* [0 to 50/16/1deg]
1-110-002 Env. Correction Thresh:delta t ENG* [0 to 50/0/1deg]
1-110-004 Env. Correction Low:Thin ENG* [0 to 30/5/1deg]
1-110-005 Env. Correction Low:Plain1 ENG* [0 to 30/10/1deg]
1-110-006 Env. Correction Low:Plain2 ENG* [0 to 30/10/1deg]
1-110-007 Env. Correction Low:M-Thick ENG* [0 to 30/10/1deg]
1-110-008 Env. Correction Low:Thick1 ENG* [0 to 30/10/1deg]
1-110-009 Env. Correction Low:Thick2 ENG* [0 to 30/10/1deg]
1-110-011 Env. Correction Thresh:S2 ENG* [0 to 50/38/1deg]
1-110-012 Env. Correction Thresh:delta t2 ENG* [0 to 50/0/1deg]
32

1-110-014 Env. Correction High:Thin ENG* [0 to 30/5/1deg]
1-110-015 Env. Correction High:Plain1 ENG* [0 to 30/5/1deg]
1-110-016 Env. Correction High:Plain2 ENG* [0 to 30/5/1deg]
1-110-017 Env. Correction High:M-Thick ENG* [0 to 30/5/1deg]
1-110-018 Env. Correction High:Thick1 ENG* [0 to 30/0/1deg]
1-110-019 Env. Correction High:Thick2 ENG* [0 to 30/0/1deg]
1-111-001 Energy Save Mode Print Temp:Center ENG* [100 to 200/155/1deg]
1-111-002 Energy Save Mode Print Temp:End ENG* [100 to 200/155/1deg]
1-112-001 Img Temp Correct Temp:Plain:Level1 ENG* [-25 to 10/0/1deg]
1-112-002 Img Temp Correct Temp:Plain:Level2 ENG* [-25 to 10/-5/1deg]
1-124-001 CPM Down Setting Low:Down Temp ENG* [-50 to 0/-13/1deg]
1-124-002 CPM Down Setting Low:Up Temp ENG* [-50 to 0/-5/1deg]
1-124-003 CPM Down Setting Low:1st CPM ENG* [10 to 100/75/5%]
1-124-004 CPM Down Setting Low:2nd CPM ENG* [10 to 100/65/5%]
1-124-005 CPM Down Setting Low:3rd CPM ENG* [10 to 100/40/5%]
1-124-006 CPM Down Setting High:1st CPM ENG* [10 to 100/80/5%]
1-124-007 CPM Down Setting High:2nd CPM ENG* [10 to 100/65/5%]
1-124-008 CPM Down Setting High:3rd CPM ENG* [10 to 100/50/5%]
1-124-009 CPM Down Setting H:CPM-D Temp1:A3 ENG* [100 to 250/215/1deg]
1-124-015 CPM Down Setting H:CPM-D Temp1:B5 ENG* [100 to 250/205/1deg]
1-124-024 CPM Down Setting Judging Interval ENG* [1 to 250/10/1sec]
1-124-025 CPM Down Setting Start Timing ENG* [1 to 999/10/1sec]
1-124-101 CPM Down Setting Low-V:1st CPM ENG* [10 to 100/30/5%]
1-124-102 CPM Down Setting Low-V:2nd CPM ENG* [10 to 100/20/5%]
33

1-124-103 CPM Down Setting Low-V:3rd CPM ENG* [10 to 100/10/5%]
1-124-104 CPM Down Setting Low-V:Stop Time ENG* [0 to 100/30/1sec]
1-152-001 Fusing Nip Check 0:OFF 1:ON ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
1-152-002 Fusing Nip Check Pre-idling Time ENG* [0 to 999/300/1sec]
1-152-003 Fusing Nip Check Stop Time ENG* [0 to 100/20/1sec]
1-152-004 Fusing Nip Check Roller Temp:CTR ENG* [100 to 200/160/1deg]
1-152-005 Fusing Nip Check Roller Temp:End ENG* [100 to 200/160/1deg]
1-159-001 Fusing Jam Detect SC Display ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
1-801-001 MotorSpeedAdjust mainmotor:122 ENG* [-2.5 to 2.5/-0.5/0.1%]
1-907-001 Paper Timing Adj. ExitCL Stop Pos. ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
1-907-002 Paper Timing Adj. ExitCL Start Pos. ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
1-907-003 Paper Timing Adj. D:ExCL Stop Pos. ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
1-907-004 Paper Timing Adj. D:ReCL Start Time ENG* [0 to 150/0/10msec]
1-907-005 Paper Timing Adj. Duplex Feed Pos. ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
1-907-006 Paper Timing Adj. Duplex Wait Pos. ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
1-907-007 Pap Fd Tim Adj. Paper Feed CL:OFF ENG* [0 to 30/0/1mm]
1-907-008 Pap Fd Tim Adj. Connecting CL:OFF ENG* [0 to 30/0/1mm]
1-907-009 Paper Timing Adj. Paper Start ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
1-907-010 Pap Fd Tim Adj. Connecting CL:ON ENG* [0 to 30/10/1mm]
1-907-011 Paper Timing Adj. Regist CL:OFF ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
1-907-013 Pap Fd Tim Adj. Bypass Fd CL:OFF ENG* [0 to 30/0/1mm]
1-907-014 Paper Timing Adj. Bypass Fd Space ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
1-909-001 FeedRetryCount Bypass Tray ENG* [0 to 2/1/1]
1-909-002 FeedRetryCount Tray1 ENG* [0 to 2/1/1]
1-910-001 FeedRetryCountLog Bypass Tray ENG* [0 to 65535/0/1]
1-910-002 FeedRetryCountLog Tray1 ENG* [0 to 65535/0/1]
1-911-001 Bypass Envelope Bypass Envelope ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
1-990-001 SC990 plt detail ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1]
1-996-001 Heater Forced Off After Print Time ENG* [0 to 120/7/1sec]
1-996-002 Heater Forced Off After Print Temp ENG* [0 to 200/100/1deg]
34
Engine SP2-XXX (Process)

2-001-001 Charge Roller Bia Printing ENG* [-2100 to -1400/-1470/10vol]
2-102-001 Main Scn Mag.Adj. ENG* [-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
2-103-001 Margin Adjustment Lead Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9/3/0.1mm]
2-103-002 Margin Adjustment Trail. Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9/5/0.1mm]
2-103-003 Margin Adjustment Left ENG* [0 to 9/2/0.1mm]
2-103-004 Margin Adjustment Right ENG* [0 to 9/2/0.1mm]
2-103-006 Margin Adjustment Duplex Trail. L ENG* [-4 to 4/1.2/0.1mm]
2-103-007 Margin Adjustment Duplex Trail. M ENG* [-4 to 4/0.8/0.1mm]
2-103-008 Margin Adjustment Duplex Trail. S ENG* [-4 to 4/0.6/0.1mm]
2-103-009 Margin Adjustment Duplex Left Edge ENG* [0 to 1.5/0.3/0.1mm]
2-103-010 Margin Adjustment Duplex Right Edge ENG* [0 to 1.5/0.3/0.1mm]
2-103-011 Margin Adjustment L Size:Thick ENG* [-4 to 4/1/0.1mm]
2-103-012 Margin Adjustment M Size:Thick ENG* [-4 to 4/0.6/0.1mm]
2-103-013 Margin Adjustment S Size:Thick ENG* [-4 to 4/0.4/0.1mm]
2-103-014 Margin Adjustment Duplex L:Thick ENG* [0 to 1.5/0.1/0.1mm]
2-103-015 Margin Adjustment Duplex R:Thick ENG* [0 to 1.5/0.1/0.1mm]
2-201-001 Deve Bias Adjust Printing ENG* [-1000 to 0/-520/10vol]
2-201-002 Deve Bias Adjust P Pattern Revisio ENG* [0 to 4/0/1]
0:N
1:H
2:L
3:HH
4:LL
2-220-001 Process Data Dila Vsp ENG* [0 to 9.99/0/0.01vol]
2-220-002 Process Data Dila Vsg ENG* [0 to 9.99/0/0.01vol]
2-220-003 Process Data Dila Vsdp ENG* [0 to 9.99/0/0.01vol]
2-220-004 Process Data Dila Vt ENG* [0 to 9.99/0/0.01vol]
2-220-005 Process Data Dila Vtref ENG* [0 to 9.99/2.5/0.01vol]
2-221-001 PsensorSC History Latest ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1]
2-221-002 PsensorSC History before 2 count ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1]
35

2-301-001 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Thin:Image ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-002 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Thin:Lead ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-003 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Thin:Trail ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-011 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Plai1:Image ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-012 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Plai1:Lead ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-013 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Plai1:Trail ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-031 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Mid:Image ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-032 Transfer Curr Adj 1sideMid:Lead ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-033 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Mid:Trail ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-041 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Thic1:Image ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-042 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Thic1:Lead ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-043 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Thic1:Trail ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-051 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Thic2:Image ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-052 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Thic2:Lead ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-053 Transfer Curr Adj 1side:Thic2:Trail ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-131 Transfer Curr Adj 2side:Mid:Image ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-132 Transfer Curr Adj 2sideMid:Lead ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-301-133 Transfer Curr Adj 2side:Mid:Trail ENG* [-8 to 8/0/1uA]
2-302-001 Transfer Curr Tim Lead Edge ENG* [0 to 50/5/1mm]
2-302-002 Transfer Curr Tim Trail Edge ENG* [0 to 50/3/1mm]
2-303-001 Transfer Clean Bi Positive ENG* [3 to 20/10/1uA]
2-303-002 Transfer Clean Bi Negative ENG* [0 to 20/4/1-uA]
2-304-001 Transfer Curr Dir Input:1side ENG [0 to 30/0/1uA]
2-304-002 Transfer Curr Dir Input:2side ENG [0 to 30/0/1uA]
2-305-001 Transfer Curr Set Non Image Area ENG* [0 to 30/10/1uA]
2-306-001 Transfer Curr Tem Temp Inside Machi ENG* [0 to 99/20/1deg]
36

2-307-001 TR Curr Tem Thres Division 1 ENG* [0 to 99/13/1deg]
2-307-005 TR Curr Tem Thres Division 5 ENG* [-99 to 99/-99/1deg]
2-309-001 TR Curr Mode Mode Select ENG* [0 to 6/0/1]
0:AutoControl
1:EnvironmentA
2:EnvironmentB
3:EnvironmentC
4:EnvironmentD
5:Special1
6:Special2
2-309-002 TR Curr Mode Curr Corr1 ENG* [-20 to 20/-3/1uA]
2-309-003 TR Curr Mode Curr Corr2 ENG* [-20 to 20/4/1uA]
2-700-001 NewUnit Detection ON/OFF Setting ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
2-801-001 Deve Initializati Init TD Sen Execu ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
2-802-001 Developer Mixing ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
2-803-001 Deve Initializati Vtref ENG* [0 to 9.99/2.5/0.01vol]
2-803-002 Deve Initializati ID Sensor PWM Val ENG* [0 to 1023/0/1]
2-903-001 AdjustTonerRemain Bottle Motor Time ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1msec]
2-903-002 AdjustTonerRemain Toner Level ENG* [0 to 100/100/1%]
2-903-003 AdjustTonerRemain Reset Motor Time ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
2-903-004 AdjustTonerRemain 0:OFF 1:ON ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
2-906-001 Tailing Control Shift Range ENG* [0 to 1/0/0.1mm]
2-906-002 Tailing Control Number of Sheets ENG* [0 to 10/0/1sheets]
2-908-001 Forced Toner Supp ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
2-915-001 PolygonRotateTime Idling Time ADJ ENG* [0 to 60/15/1sec]
2-915-002 PolygonRotateTime Post Idling ADJ ENG* [0 to 60/10/1sec]
2-928-001 Toner End Clear ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
2-934-001 ID.Sens PWM Set Dilay ENG* [0 to 1023/200/1]
2-935-001 ID.Sens Initializ ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
2-937-001 ID.Sens Coef :Set Vsp Coef ENG* [0.5 to 1.5/1/0.01]
2-937-002 ID.Sens Coef :Set Vsdp Coef ENG* [0.5 to 1.5/1/0.01]
2-937-003 ID.Sens Coef :Set Sens Chara Coef ENG* [0.1 to 1.5/1/0.01]
2-988-001 Out Temp: Disp Temp: Disp ENG [-5 to 70/0/0.1deg]
2-989-001 Print Temp: Disp Print Temp: Disp ENG [0 to 70/0/0.1deg]
37

2-990-004 Print Duty Ctrl Out Temp Setting ENG* [0 to 70/32/0.1deg]
38
Engine SP4-XXX (Scan)

4-008-001 Sub Scan Mag.Adj ENG* [-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
4-010-001 L-Edge Regist Adj ENG* [-2 to 2/0/0.1mm]
4-011-001 S-to-S Regist Adj ENG* [-2 to 2/0/0.1mm]
4-012-001 FB Erase ForSP Book: Lead Edge ENG* [0 to 3/3/0.1mm]
4-012-002 FB Erase ForSP Book: Trail Edge ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
4-012-003 FB Erase ForSP Book: Left ENG* [0 to 3/2/0.1mm]
4-012-004 FB Erase ForSP Book: Right ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
4-013-001 Scanner Free run Lamp OFF ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
4-013-002 Scanner Free run Lamp ON ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
4-301-001 Display-APS Data ENG [0 to 0xFFFF/0/1]
4-303-001 APS A5 Exchange 0:Non 1:A5T 2:A5Y ENG* [0 to 2/0/1]
4-305-001 APS Priority 0:Normal 1:8K/16K ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
4-307-001 APS LG Exchange 0:LG 1:Oficio ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
4-309-001 APS HLT Exchange 0:0 1:HLTT 2:HLTY ENG* [0 to 2/0/1]
4-311-001 F Size Exchange 0:Fols 1:Foli 2:F ENG* [0 to 2/0/1]
4-400-001 Erase Margin FB: Trail Edge L ENG* [0 to 3/1/0.1mm]
4-400-002 Erase Margin FB: Trail Edge R ENG* [0 to 3/1/0.1mm]
4-400-003 Erase Margin FB: Left ENG* [0 to 3/1/0.1mm]
4-400-004 Erase Margin FB: Right ENG* [0 to 3/1/0.1mm]
4-400-005 Erase Margin ADF:Trail Edge L ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
4-400-006 Erase Margin ADF:Trail Edge R ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
4-400-007 Erase Margin ADF:Left ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
4-400-008 Erase Margin ADF:Right ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
4-688-001 ADF Adj Density ENG* [50 to 150/100/1%]
4-803-001 Home Position Adj ENG* [-2 to 2/0/0.1mm]
39
Engine SP5-XXX (Mode)

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-104- A3/DLT Double Cnt ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
001 0:OFF
1:ON
5-126- Set F-size Doc ENG* [0 to 2/0/1]
001
5-131- Paper Size Type ENG* [1 to 2/*/1]
001 *NA:2, EU:1, Asia:1, CN:1, TW:1 ,
KR:1
5-135- LG_Oficio Change ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
001
5-140- DisableDupforTray Bypass ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
001
5-180- Tray Size Adjust 0:A4LEF ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
001 1:LTLEF 0:A4LEF
1:LTLEF
5-180- Tray Size Adjust 0:A3 1:DLT ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
002 0:A3
1:DLT
5-180- Tray Size Adjust 0:B4 1:LG ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
003 0:B4
1:LG
5-180- Tray Size Adjust 0:B5LEF ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
004 1:ExeLEF 0:B5LEF
1:ExeLEF
5-181- Clutch Adjust Bank1 ENG* [-10 to 10/0/1mm]
002
5-181- Clutch Adjust Bank2 ENG* [-10 to 10/0/1mm]
003
5-182- Next feed timing Bank1 ENG* [-10 to 10/0/1mm]
002
003
5-183- Re-feed timing Bank1 ENG* [-10 to 10/0/1mm]
002
40

CTL
003
5-305- AutoOff Limit Set ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
101
5-801- Memory Clear Engine ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
002
5-810- SC Reset Fusing SC Reset ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001
5-811- Serial No Setting Serial No. ENG* [0 to 0/0/0]
001
5-930- PCDU Cust 0:Ser 1:Customer ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
001 Change
5-940- Brand ID Setting Brand ID ENG* [0 to 7/1/1]
002
5-950- PnP ID Setting PnP ID ENG* [0 to 12/1/1]
001
5-995- Factory Mode ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
001
41
Engine SP6-XXX (Option)

6-006-001 ADF Adjustment Side Edge:Front ENG* [-3 to 3/0/0.1mm]
6-006-002 ADF Adjustment Side Edge:Rear ENG* [-3 to 3/0/0.1mm]
6-006-003 ADF Adjustment LeadingEdge:Front ENG* [-5 to 5/0/0.1mm]
6-006-004 ADF Adjustment Leading Edge:Rear ENG* [-5 to 5/0/0.1mm]
6-016-001 Size Detect Set NA-1 ENG* [0 to 2/0/1]
6-016-002 Size Detect Set NA-2 ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
6-016-003 Size Detect Set EU-1 ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
6-016-004 Size Detect Set EU-2 ENG* [0 to 2/0/1]
6-017-001 ADF Adjust Mag ENG* [-5 to 5/0/0.1%]
6-018-001 ADF Adjustment Scanner HP adj ENG* [-1 to 0/0/0.1mm]
6-020-001 ADF Job Counter ENG* [0 to 999999/0/1times]
6-030-001 ADF Job Cnt Clear ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
42
Engine SP7-XXX (Data Log 1)

7-001-001 Distance Counter ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-621-002 PM Count:Pages #PCU ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
7-621-021 PM Count:Pages OPC ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
7-621-024 PM Count:Pages Developer ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
7-621-028 PM Count:Pages Bearing:Dev Screw ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
7-621-108 PM Count:Pages Paper Trans Unit ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
7-621-115 PM Count:Pages Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
7-621-119 PM Count:Pages Fusing Roll Bear ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
7-622-002 PM Counter Reset #PCU ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
7-622-021 PM Counter Reset OPC ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
7-622-024 PM Counter Reset Developer ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
7-622-028 PM Counter Reset Bearing:Dev Screw ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
7-622-108 PM Counter Reset Paper Trans Unit ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
7-622-115 PM Counter Reset Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
7-622-119 PM Counter Reset Fusing Roll Bear ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
7-628-002 PM Counter Reset Reset-ALL ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
7-801-009 ROM Info. No.:Bank ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
7-801-019 ROM Info. No.:Bank2 ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
7-801-102 ROM Info. Version: Engine ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
7-801-109 ROM Info. Version:Bank ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
7-801-115 ROM Info. Version: Scanner ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
7-801-119 ROM Info. Version:Bank2 ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
7-942-002 PM Count:Dista(%) #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-942-021 PM Count:Dista(%) OPC ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-942-024 PM Count:Dista(%) Developer ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-942-028 PM Count:Dista(%) Bearing:Dev Screw ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-942-108 PM Count:Dista(%) Paper Trans Unit ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-942-115 PM Count:Dista(%) Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-942-119 PM Count:Dista(%) Fusing Roll Bear ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-944-002 PM Count:Distance #PCU ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-944-021 PM Count:Distance OPC ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-944-024 PM Count:Distance Developer ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-944-028 PM Count:Distance Bearing:Dev Screw ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-944-108 PM Count:Distance Paper Trans Unit ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-944-115 PM Count:Distance Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
43

7-944-119 PM Count:Distance Fusing Roll Bear ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-951-002 Remai D Cntr:Page #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-951-021 Remai D Cntr:Page OPC ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-951-024 Remai D Cntr:Page Developer ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-951-028 Remai D Cntr:Page Bearing:Dev Screw ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-951-108 Remai D Cntr:Page Paper Trans Unit ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-951-115 Remai D Cntr:Page Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-951-119 Remai D Cntr:Page Fusing Roll Bear ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-952-002 Remai D Cntr:Dist #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-952-021 Remai D Cntr:Dist OPC ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-952-024 Remai D Cntr:Dist Developer ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-952-028 Remai D Cntr:Dist Bearing:Dev Screw ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-952-108 Remai D Cntr:Dist Paper Trans Unit ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-952-115 Remai D Cntr:Dist Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-952-119 Remai D Cntr:Dist Fusing Roll Bear ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-954-002 PM Count:Pages(%) #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-954-021 PM Count:Pages(%) OPC ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-954-024 PM Count:Pages(%) Developer ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-954-028 PM Count:Pages(%) Bearing:Dev Screw ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-954-108 PM Count:Pages(%) Paper Trans Unit ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-954-115 PM Count:Pages(%) Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-954-119 PM Count:Pages(%) Fusing Roll Bear ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-955-002 Estimate Rem Page #PCU ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
7-955-021 Estimate Rem Page OPC ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
7-955-024 Estimate Rem Page Developer ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
7-955-028 Estimate Rem Page Bearing:Dev Screw ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
7-955-108 Estimate Rem Page Paper Trans Unit ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
7-955-115 Estimate Rem Page Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
7-955-119 Estimate Rem Page Fusing Roll Bear ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
7-956-002 Estimate Rem Days #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-956-021 Estimate Rem Days OPC ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-956-024 Estimate Rem Days Developer ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-956-028 Estimate Rem Days Bearing:Dev Screw ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-956-108 Estimate Rem Days Paper Trans Unit ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-956-115 Estimate Rem Days Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-956-119 Estimate Rem Days Fusing Roll Bear ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
7-960-002 Estimate Usa Rate #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
44

7-960-021 Estimate Usa Rate OPC ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-960-024 Estimate Usa Rate Developer ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-960-028 Estimate Usa Rate Bearing:Dev Screw ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-960-108 Estimate Usa Rate Paper Trans Unit ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-960-115 Estimate Usa Rate Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-960-119 Estimate Usa Rate Fusing Roll Bear ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-970-001 Ope Env Log PCU T<0 ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-970-002 Ope Env Log PCU 0<=T<10 ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-970-014 Ope Env Log PCU 60<=T ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-970-100 Ope Env Log PCU Log Clear ENG [0 to 1/0/11]
7-971-001 TSOpe Env Log PCU T<0 ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-971-002 TSOpe Env Log PCU 0<=T<10 ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-971-014 TSOpe Env Log PCU 60<=T ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
7-971-100 TSOpe Env Log PCU Log Clear ENG [0 to 1/0/11]
7-993-001 Total Counter main ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1]
45
Input and Output Check
Input Check

5-803-001 INPUT Check TrayPap Size Snr ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-002 INPUT Check Registration Snr ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-003 INPUT Check Paper Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-004 INPUT Check BypassPap Set Snr ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-005 INPUT Check PSU Low Voltage ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-006 INPUT Check PSU Rating Vol ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-007 INPUT Check Interlock Switch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-008 INPUT Check Right Cover Open ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-009 INPUT Check Fan Lock ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-010 INPUT Check Main Motor Lock ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-011 INPUT Check Polygon Motor Lok ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-012 INPUT Check HVP Transfer ENG [0 to 1/1/1]
5-803-013 INPUT Check HVP Dep ENG [0 to 1/1/1]
5-803-014 INPUT Check HVP Charge ENG [0 to 1/1/1]
5-803-015 INPUT Check Exhaust Fan Lock ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-016 INPUT Check U Sensor ENG [0 to 9999/0/1]
5-803-017 INPUT Check P Sensor ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
5-803-018 INPUT Check Fusing Thm:middle ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
5-803-019 INPUT Check Fusing Thm:end ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
5-803-020 INPUT Check Temperature Snr ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
5-803-021 INPUT Check Temperature Pdcu ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
5-803-022 INPUT Check BYPS Width ENG [0 to 15/0/1]
5-803-023 INPUT Check BYPS length ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-024 INPUT Check Pap Lift Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-025 INPUT Check Pap Size Sensor ENG [0 to 15/0/1]
5-803-200 INPUT Check Scanner HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-201 INPUT Check Platen Cover Snr ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-202 INPUT Check APS Sensor1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-211 INPUT Check FeedCoverOpen1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-212 INPUT Check FeedCoverOpen2 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-213 INPUT Check Size Sensor1 ENG [0 to 255/0/1]
46

5-803-214 INPUT Check Size Sensor2 ENG [0 to 255/0/1]
5-803-215 INPUT Check PaperEndSensor1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-216 INPUT Check PaperEndSensor2 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-217 INPUT Check FeedSensor1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-218 INPUT Check FeedSensor2 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-219 INPUT Check UpperLimitSensor1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-220 INPUT Check UpperLimitSensor2 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-221 INPUT Check TraySetSensor1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-803-222 INPUT Check TraySetSensor2 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
6-007-009 ADF INPUT Check Doc Detect Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]

6-007-013 ADF INPUT Check Regist Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
6-007-015 ADF INPUT Check Feed Cover Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
6-007-017 INPUT Check APS Timing Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
6-011-004 ADF INPUT Check DF_WSS_1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]

Output Check

5-804-001 OUTPUT Check Main Motor:CW ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-002 OUTPUT Check Main Motor:CCW ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-003 OUTPUT Check Toner Motor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-004 OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-005 OUTPUT Check Fan:High ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-006 OUTPUT Check Fan:Low ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-007 OUTPUT Check HVP:Charge ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-008 OUTPUT Check HVP:Development ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-009 OUTPUT Check HVP:Transfer + ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-010 OUTPUT Check HVP:Transfer - ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-011 OUTPUT Check P Sensor(PWM) ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-013 OUTPUT Check Registration CL ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-014 OUTPUT Check By-pass CL ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
47

5-804-015 OUTPUT Check Duplex CL ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-016 OUTPUT Check Pap Exit (CCW) CL ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-017 OUTPUT Check LD(Force) ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-020 OUTPUT Check Anti-static LED ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-021 OUTPUT Check FU_SOL ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-022 OUTPUT Check CL_RLY ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-023 OUTPUT Check Duplex CL_RDP2 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-024 OUTPUT Check Duplex CL_RDP1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-025 OUTPUT Check FN2_DRHigh ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-026 OUTPUT Check FN2_DRLOW ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-027 OUTPUT Check F1_UPMT_IN_A ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-028 OUTPUT Check F1_UPMT_IN_B ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-029 OUTPUT Check DHB_HURY ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-241 OUTPUT Check FeedMotor1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-242 OUTPUT Check FeedMotor2 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-243 OUTPUT Check PaperFeedClutch1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
5-804-244 OUTPUT Check PaperFeedClutch2 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
6-008-003 ADF OUTPUT Check FeedMotor Forward ENG [0 to 1/0/1]

6-008-004 ADF OUTPUT Check FeedMotor Reverse ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
6-008-009 ADF OUTPUT Check Feed Solenoid ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
6-008-011 ADF OUTPUT Check Inverter Solenoid ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
48
4.SP Mode Tables (D0B4)
4. SP Mode Tables (D0B4)
Engine SP Tables
Engine SP1-XXX
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-001- Leading Edge Tray: Plain ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
002 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
003 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray: Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
004 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Bypass: Plain ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
007 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Bypass: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
008 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Bypass: Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
009 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Plain ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
013 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
014 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick ENG* [-9 to 9/0/0.1mm]
015 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side Registration Bypass ENG* [-4 to 4/0/0.1mm]
001
1-002- Side-to-Side Registration Tray Main1 ENG* [-4 to 4/0/0.1mm]
002
1-002- Side-to-Side Registration Tray Bank1 ENG* [-4 to 4/0/0.1mm]
004
1-002- Side-to-Side Registration Tray Bank2 ENG* [-4 to 4/0/0.1mm]
005
1-002- Side-to-Side Registration Duplex ENG* [-4 to 4/0/0.1mm]
006
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray1: Plain ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
002
49

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray1: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
003
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray1: Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
004
1-003- Paper Buckle Bank1:Plain ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
005
1-003- Paper Buckle Bank1:Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
006
1-003- Paper Buckle Bank1:Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
007
1-003- Paper Buckle Bank2:Plain ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
008
1-003- Paper Buckle Bank2:Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
009
1-003- Paper Buckle Bank2:Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
010
1-003- Paper Buckle Bypass: Plain ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
012
1-003- Paper Buckle Bypass: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
013
1-003- Paper Buckle Bypass: Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
014
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex: Plain ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
018
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex: Mid Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
019
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex: Thick ENG* [-9 to 5/0/1mm]
020
1-007- ByPass Size Adj. 0:LTSEF 1:LG ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
001 0:LTSEF
1:LG
1-103- Reload Permit Setting Fusing Idling ENG* [0 to 2/0/1]
001 0:OFF
1:ON
2:OFF+Temp
1-103- Reload Permit Setting Reload Temp:Center ENG* [100 to
50

CTL Max/Init./Step]
002 200/145/1deg]
1-103- Reload Permit Setting Reload Temp:End ENG* [100 to
003 200/145/1deg]
1-103- Reload Permit Setting Reload Temp:Cold:Center ENG* [100 to
004 200/145/1deg]
1-103- Reload Permit Setting Reload Temp:Cold:End ENG* [100 to
005 200/145/1deg]
1-103- Reload Permit Setting Forced ReloadTime ENG* [5 to
006 200/110/0.1sec]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment Center:Thin ENG* [100 to
003 200/145/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment End:Thin ENG* [100 to
004 200/145/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment Center:Plain1 ENG* [100 to
011 200/165/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment End:Plain1 ENG* [100 to
012 200/165/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment Center:Plain2 ENG* [100 to
013 200/165/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment End:Plain2 ENG* [100 to
014 200/165/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment Center:Mid Thick ENG* [100 to
015 200/175/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment End:Mid Thick ENG* [100 to
016 200/175/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment Center:Thick1 ENG* [100 to
021 200/185/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment End:Thick1 ENG* [100 to
022 200/180/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment Center:Thick2 ENG* [100 to
023 200/195/1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temp Adjustment End:Thick2 ENG* [100 to
024 200/190/1deg]
1-106- Fusing Temp Display Roller Center ENG [-20 to 250/0/1deg]
001
1-106- Fusing Temp Display Roller End ENG [-20 to 250/0/1deg]
51

CTL Max/Init./Step]
002
1-106- Fusing Temp Display MachineTemp PowOn ENG [-20 to 250/0/1deg]
003
1-110- Environment Temp Thresh:S1 ENG* [0 to 50/16/1deg]
001 Adjustment
1-110- Environment Temp Thresh:delta t1 ENG* [0 to 50/0/1deg]
002 Adjustment
1-110- Environment Temp Low:Thin ENG* [0 to 30/5/1deg]
004 Adjustment
1-110- Environment Temp Low:Plain1 ENG* [0 to 30/10/1deg]
005 Adjustment
1-110- Environment Temp Low:Plain2 ENG* [0 to 30/10/1deg]
006 Adjustment
1-110- Environment Temp Low:M-Thick ENG* [0 to 30/10/1deg]
007 Adjustment
1-110- Environment Temp Low:Thick1 ENG* [0 to 30/10/1deg]
008 Adjustment
1-110- Environment Temp Low:Thick2 ENG* [0 to 30/10/1deg]
009 Adjustment
1-110- Environment Temp Thresh:S2 ENG* [0 to 50/38/1deg]
011 Adjustment
1-110- Environment Temp Thresh:delta t2 ENG* [0 to 50/0/1deg]
012 Adjustment
1-110- Environment Temp High Temp Corr Coef ENG* [0 to 30/5/1deg]
014 Adjustment K2:Thin
015 Adjustment K2:Plain1
016 Adjustment K2:Plain2
017 Adjustment K2:Mid Thick
018 Adjustment K2:Thick1
019 Adjustment K2:Thick2
1-159- Fusing Jam Detection SC Display ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
52

CTL Max/Init./Step]
001
1-801- MotorSpeedAdjust mainmotor:122 ENG* [-2.5 to 2.5/-5/0.1%]
001
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. PaperExitCL Stop Pos. ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
001
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. PaperExitCL Start Pos. ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
002
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Dup:PaperExitCL Stop Pos. ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
003
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Dup:ReverseCL Start Time ENG* [0 to 150/0/10msec]
004
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Duplex Feed Pos. ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
005
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Duplex Wait Pos. ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
006
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Paper Feed CL:OFF ENG* [0 to 30/0/1mm]
007
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Relay CL:OFF ENG* [0 to 30/0/1mm]
008
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Paper Feed Start ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
009
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Relay CL:ON ENG* [0 to 30/10/1mm]
010
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Registration CL:OFF ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
011
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Bypass Paper Feed ENG* [0 to 30/0/1mm]
013 CL:OFF
1-907- Pap Fd Tim Adj. Bypass FD Space ENG* [-30 to 30/0/1mm]
014
1-909- FeedRetryCount Bypass Tray ENG* [0 to 2/1/1]
001
1-909- FeedRetryCount Tray1 ENG* [0 to 2/1/1]
002
1-910- FeedRetryCountLog Bypass Tray ENG* [0 to 65535/0/1]
001
1-910- FeedRetryCountLog Tray1 ENG* [0 to 65535/0/1]
53

CTL Max/Init./Step]
002
1-911- Bypass Envelope Bypass Envelope ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
001
1-990- SC990 plt detail ENG* [0 to
001 4294967295/0/1]
Engine SP2-XXX

CTL
2-001- Charge Bias Voltage Printing Development ENG* [-2100 to 0/-
005 Corr 1470/10vol]
2-102- Main Scan Mag. ENG* [-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
001 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Lead Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9/30/0.1mm]
001
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Trail. Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9/50/0.1mm]
002
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Left ENG* [0 to 9/20/0.1mm]
003
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Right ENG* [0 to 9/20/0.1mm]
004
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex Trail. L Size ENG* [-4 to 4/12/0.1mm]
006
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex Trail. M Size ENG* [-4 to 4/8/0.1mm]
007
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex Trail. S Size ENG* [-4 to 4/6/0.1mm]
008
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex Left Edge ENG* [0 to 1.5/3/0.1mm]
009
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex Right Edge ENG* [0 to 1.5/3/0.1mm]
010
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex Trail. L ENG* [0 to 4/10/0.1mm]
011 Size:Thick
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex Trail. M ENG* [0 to 4/6/0.1mm]
012 Size:Thick
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex Trail. S ENG* [0 to 4/4/0.1mm]
54

CTL
013 Size:Thick
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex Left Edge:Thick ENG* [0 to 1.5/1/0.1mm]
014
2-103- Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex Right ENG* [0 to 1.5/1/0.1mm]
015 Edge:Thick
2-105- LD Power Adjustment Unit ENG* [-50 to 50/0/1%]
001
2-107- Image Parameter Image Gamma Flag ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
001 0:OFF
1:ON
2-109- Test Pattern Pattern Selection ENG [0 to 21/0/1]
001 0:None
1:1dot Vertical
2:2dot Vertical
3:1dot Horizontal Line
4:2dot Horizontal Line
5:Grid Vert
6:Grid Horizontal
7:Grid Pattern Small
8:Grid Pattern Large
9:Argyle Pattern Small
10:Argyle P:L
11:1dot Ind. Pttrn
12:2dot Ind. Pttrn
13:4dot Ind. Pttrn
14:Trimming Area
15:Black Band H
16:Black Band V
17:Checker Flag
Pattern
18:Grayscale V
19:Grayscale H
20:Full Dot Pattern
21:All White Pattern
2-109- Test Pattern Density ENG [0 to 15/15/1]
002
2-160- Vertical Line Width 1dot Line ENG* [0 to 31/31/1]
55

CTL
001
2-201- Deve Bias Adjust P Pattern Revisio ENG* [0 to 4/0/1]
002 0:N
1:H
2:L
3:HH
4:LL
2-201- Deve Bias Adjust Printing Devlopment ENG* [-1000 to 0/-520/10vol]
004 Corr
2-220- Process Data Dila Vsp ENG* [0 to 9.99/0/0.01vol]
001
2-220- Process Data Dila Vsg ENG* [0 to 9.99/0/0.01vol]
002
2-220- Process Data Dila Vsdp ENG* [0 to 9.99/0/0.01vol]
003
2-220- Process Data Dila Vt ENG* [0 to 9.99/0/0.01vol]
004
2-220- Process Data Dila Vtref ENG* [0 to 9.99/250/0.01vol]
005
2-221- ID sens:Log SCHistory Latest ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1]
001
2-221- ID sens:Log SCHistory Last 2 ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1]
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
56

CTL
009
010
2-304- Transfer Curr Dir Input:1side ENG [0 to 30/0/1uA]
001
2-304- Transfer Curr Dir Input:2side ENG [0 to 30/0/1uA]
002
2-306- Transfer Curr Tem Temp Inside Machi ENG* [0 to 99/20/1deg]
001
2-309- TR Curr Mode Curr Corr1 ENG* [-20 to 20/-3/1uA]
002
2-309- TR Curr Mode Curr Corr2 ENG* [-20 to 20/4/1uA]
003
2-700- NewUnit Detection ON/OFF Setting ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
001
2-701- Manual New Unit Set #Paper Trans/#Fusing ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
108 Unit
2-801- Deve Initializati Init TD Sen Execu ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
001
2-802- Developer Mixing ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
001
2-803- Deve Initializati ID Sensor PWM Val ENG* [0 to 1023/0/1]
002
2-903- TonerRemainDetection Toner Bottle Motor ON: ENG* [0 to
001 Time 99999999/0/1msec]
2-903- TonerRemainDetection Toner Remaining ENG* [0 to 100/100/1%]
002 Amount
2-903- TonerRemainDetection Reset Motor ON Time ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
003
2-903- TonerRemainDetection 0:OFF 1:ON ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
004
2-903- TonerRemainDetection Mode Select ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
005 0:4Kbottle
1:12Kbottle
2-906- Tailing Control Shift Range ENG* [0 to 1/0/0.1mm]
001
57

CTL
2-906- Tailing Control Number of Sheets ENG* [0 to 10/0/1sheet]
002
2-908- Forced Toner Supp ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
001
2-921- Toner Supply Mode Mode Select ENG* [0 to 4/0/1]
001 0:Normal1
1:Normal2
2:Fixed1
3:Fixed2
2-928- Toner End Clear ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
001
2-935- ID.Sens Initializ ENG [0 to 1/0/0]
001
2-937- ID.Sens Coef :Set Vsp Coef ENG* [5 to 1.5/100/0.01]
001
2-937- ID.Sens Coef :Set Vsdp Coef ENG* [5 to 1.5/100/0.01]
002
2-988- AM Temp: Disp Temp: Disp ENG [-5 to 70/0/0.1deg]
001
2-989- Print Temp: Disp Print Temp: Disp ENG [0 to 70/0/0.1deg]
001
Engine SP4-XXX

CTL
4-008- Sub Scan ENG* [-1 to 1/0/0.1%]
001 Magnification Adj
4-010- Sub Scan ENG* [-2 to 2/0/0.1mm]
001 Registration Adj
4-011- Main Scan Reg ENG* [-2.5 to 2.5/0/0.1mm]
001
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Sub LEdge ENG [0 to 3/10/0.1mm]
001
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Sub TEdge ENG [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
002
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Main:LEdge ENG [0 to 3/10/0.1mm]
58

CTL
003
4-012- Set Scale Mask Book:Main:TEdge ENG [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
004
4-012- Set Scale Mask ADF: Leading Edge ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
005
4-012- Set Scale Mask ADF: Right ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
007
4-012- Set Scale Mask ADF: left ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
008
4-013- Scanner Free run Book mode :Lamp Off ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001
4-013- Scanner Free run Book mode :Lamp On ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
002
4-020- Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001
4-020- Dust Check Dust Detect:Lvl ENG [0 to 8/4/1]
002
4-020- Dust Check Dust Reject:Lvl ENG [0 to 4/0/1]
003
4-301- Operation Check ENG [0 to 255/0/1]
001 APS Sensor
4-303- Min Size for APS ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
001 0:No Original
1:A5-Lengthwise
4-305- 8K/16K Detection ENG* [0 to 3/0/1]
001 0:Normal Detection
1:A4-Sideways LT-
Lengthwise
2:LT-Sideways A4-
Lengthwise
3:8K 16K
4-308- Scan Size Detection Detection ON/OFF ENG* [0 to 2/1/1]
001 0:OFF
1:ON
2:APS
4-311- Detection:Start Detection:Start Position ENG* [0 to 2/0/1]
59

CTL
001 Position 0:20mm
1:30mm
2:130mm
4-312- Scan Size Original Density Thresh:S1 ENG* [0 to 255/7/1digit]
001 Detect:Setting
002 Detect:Setting
003 Detect:Setting
4-312- Scan Size Detection Time ENG* [10 to 20/10/10msec]
004 Detect:Setting
4-312- Scan Size Detection:Delay Time ENG* [0 to 200/0/10msec]
005 Detect:Setting
4-312- Scan Size LED PWM Duty ENG* [0 to 100/22/1]
006 Detect:Setting
4-313- Scan Size Detect S1:R:LEDOFF ENG [0 to 255/0/1digit]
001 Value
4-313- Scan Size Detect S1:G:LEDOFF ENG [0 to 255/0/1digit]
002 Value
4-313- Scan Size Detect S1:B:LEDOFF ENG [0 to 255/0/1digit]
003 Value
004 Value
005 Value
006 Value
007 Value
008 Value
009 Value
4-313- Scan Size Detect S1:R:LEDON:AREA1 ENG [0 to 255/0/1digit]
010 Value
4-313- Scan Size Detect S1:G:LEDON:AREA1 ENG [0 to 255/0/1digit]
60

CTL
011 Value
4-313- Scan Size Detect S1:B:LEDON:AREA1 ENG [0 to 255/0/1digit]
012 Value
013 Value
014 Value
015 Value
016 Value
017 Value
018 Value
019 Value
020 Value
021 Value
022 Value
023 Value
024 Value
025 Value
026 Value
027 Value
028 Value
61

CTL
029 Value
030 Value
031 Value
032 Value
033 Value
034 Value
035 Value
036 Value
4-400- Org Edge Mask Book:Sub:LEdge(Left) ENG [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
001
4-400- Org Edge Mask Book:Sub:TEdge(Right) ENG [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
002
4-400- Org Edge Mask Book:Main:LEdge(Rear) ENG [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
003
4-400- Org Edge Mask Book:Main:Tedge(Front) ENG [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
004
4-400- Org Edge Mask ADF: Leading Edge ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
005
4-400- Org Edge Mask ADF: Right ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
007
4-400- Org Edge Mask ADF: left ENG* [0 to 3/0/0.1mm]
008
4-417- IPU Test Pattern Test Pattern ENG [0 to 9/0/1]
001 0:Scanned image
1:Gradation main scan
A
2:Patch 16C
3:Grid pattern A
4:Slant grid pattern B
62

CTL
5:Slant grid pattern C
6:Slant grid pattern D
7:Scanned+Slant Grid
C
D
B
4-460- Digital AE Low Limit Value ENG [0 to 1023/364/1]
001
4-460- Digital AE Background level ENG [512 to 1535/932/1]
002
4-551- Scan Apli:Txt MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- ENG [0 to 15/8/1]
005 Strong)
4-551- Scan Apli:Txt Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- ENG [0 to 7/4/1]
006 Strong)
4-551- Scan Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
007
4-551- Scan Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
008
4-551- Scan Apli:Txt Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
009 (Weak-Strong)
4-553- Scan Apli:Txt/Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- ENG [0 to 15/8/1]
005 Strong)
4-553- Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- ENG [0 to 7/4/1]
006 Strong)
4-553- Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
007
4-553- Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
008
4-553- Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
009 (Weak-Strong)
4-554- Scan Apli:Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- ENG [0 to 15/8/1]
005 Strong)
4-554- Scan Apli:Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- ENG [0 to 7/4/1]
006 Strong)
63

CTL
4-554- Scan Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
007
4-554- Scan Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
008
4-554- Scan Apli:Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
009 (Weak-Strong)
4-565- Scan Apli:GrayScale MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- ENG [0 to 15/8/1]
005 Strong)
4-565- Scan Apli:GrayScale Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- ENG [0 to 7/4/1]
006 Strong)
4-565- Scan Apli:GrayScale Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
007
4-565- Scan Apli:GrayScale Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
008
4-565- Scan Apli:GrayScale Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
009 (Weak-Strong)
4-570- Scan Apli:Col MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- ENG [0 to 15/8/1]
005 Txt/Photo Strong)
4-570- Scan Apli:Col Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- ENG [0 to 7/4/1]
006 Txt/Photo Strong)
4-570- Scan Apli:Col Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
007 Txt/Photo
4-570- Scan Apli:Col Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
008 Txt/Photo
4-570- Scan Apli:Col Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
009 Txt/Photo (Weak-Strong)
4-571- Scan Apli:Col Gloss MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- ENG [0 to 15/8/1]
005 Photo Strong)
4-571- Scan Apli:Col Gloss Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- ENG [0 to 7/4/1]
006 Photo Strong)
4-571- Scan Apli:Col Gloss Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
007 Photo
4-571- Scan Apli:Col Gloss Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
008 Photo
4-571- Scan Apli:Col Gloss Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
009 Photo (Weak-Strong)
64

CTL
4-581- Fax Apli:Txt MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- ENG [0 to 15/8/1]
005 Strong)
4-581- Fax Apli:Txt Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- ENG [0 to 7/4/1]
006 Strong)
4-581- Fax Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
007
4-581- Fax Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
008
4-581- Fax Apli:Txt Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
009 (Weak-Strong)
4-582- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- ENG [0 to 15/8/1]
005 Strong)
4-582- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- ENG [0 to 7/4/1]
006 Strong)
4-582- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
007
4-582- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
008
4-582- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
009 (Weak-Strong)
4-582- Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Texture Erase: 0 ENG [0 to 2/0/1]
010
4-583- Fax Apli:Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 (Weak- ENG [0 to 15/8/1]
005 Strong)
4-583- Fax Apli:Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 (Weak- ENG [0 to 7/4/1]
006 Strong)
4-583- Fax Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
007
4-583- Fax Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255/128/1]
008
4-583- Fax Apli:Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
009 (Weak-Strong)
4-583- Fax Apli:Photo Texture Erase: 0 ENG [0 to 2/0/1]
010
4-600- SBU Version Display SBU ID ENG [0x0000 to
001 0xFFFF/0/1]
65

CTL
4-609- Gray Balance Set: R Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255/-
001 100/1digit]
4-609- Gray Balance Set: R DF Scan ENG* [-384 to 255/-
002 100/1digit]
4-610- Gray Balance Set: G Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255/-
001 100/1digit]
4-610- Gray Balance Set: G DF Scan ENG* [-384 to 255/-
002 100/1digit]
4-611- Gray Balance Set: B Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255/-
001 100/1digit]
4-611- Gray Balance Set: B DF Scan ENG* [-384 to 255/-
002 100/1digit]
4-646- Scan Adjust Error White level ENG* [0 to 65535/0/1]
001
4-646- Scan Adjust Error Black level ENG* [0 to 65535/0/1]
002
4-647- Scanner Hard Error Power-ON ENG [0 to 65535/0/1]
001
4-688- DF Density ENG* [80 to 120/106/1%]
001 Adjustment
4-699- SBU Test Pattern ENG [0 to 255/0/1]
001 Change
4-803- Home Position Adj ENG* [-2 to 2/0/0.1mm]
001 Value
4-853- Partial LED ON ON/OFF(Scan) ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
001
4-853- Partial LED ON ON/OFF(Size Detection) ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
002
4-871- Distortion Correction Distortion Correction ON/OFF ENG [0 to 1/1/1]
001
4-871- Distortion Correction Distortion Initialization ENG [0 to 21/0/1]
002
4-871- Distortion Correction Magnification Adjust(DF) ENG* [-3.5 to 0.35/11/0.01%]
003
4-871- Distortion Correction Magnification Adjust(FB) ENG* [-3.5 to 0.35/0/0.01%]
004
66

CTL
4-903- Filter Setting Ind Dot Erase: Text ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
001
4-903- Filter Setting Ind Dot Erase: Generation ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
002 Copy
4-905- Select Gradation ENG [0 to 255/0/1]
001 Level
4-918- Man Gamma Adj ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
009
4-993- High Light Correction Sensitivity Selection ENG [0 to 9/4/1]
001
4-993- High Light Correction Range Selection ENG [0 to 9/4/1]
002
4-996- White Paper ENG [0 to 6/3/1]
001 Detection Level
Engine SP5-XXX

CTL Max/Init./Step]
5-126- Set F-size Document ENG [0 to 2/0/1]
001 0:8 1/2 x13
1:8 1/4 x13
2:8 x13
5-131- Paper Size Type ENG* [1 to 2/2/1]
001 Selection 1:NA
2:EU/AP
5-135- LG_Oficio Change ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001
5-180- Tray Size Adjust Tray1:1 ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
001 0:A4LEF
1:LTLEF
002 0:A3
1:DLT
003 0:B4
1:LG
67

CTL Max/Init./Step]
004 0:B5LEF
1:ExeLEF
5-181- PaperFD Clutch Adjust Bank1 ENG* [-10 to 10/0/1mm]
002
5-181- PaperFD Clutch Adjust Bank2 ENG* [-10 to 10/0/1mm]
003
002
003
002
003
5-801- Memory Clear Engine ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
002
5-810- SC Reset Fusing SC Reset ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001
5-811- BICU MachineSerial ENG* [0 to 255/0/1]
002 Display
5-900- UploadPattern ENG* [0 to 255/0/1]
001
5-930- PCDU Replacement by 0:Customer 1:CE ENG* [0 to 1/1/1]
001
5-995- Factory Mode ENG* [0 to 1/0/1]
001
Engine SP6-XXX

CTL Max/Init./Step]
6-006- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front ENG* [-3 to 3/0/0.1mm]
001
6-006- ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear ENG* [-3 to 3/0/0.1mm]
002
6-006- ADF Adjustment Leading Edge Registration: ENG* [-5 to 5/0/0.1mm]
68

CTL Max/Init./Step]
003 Front
6-006- ADF Adjustment Leading Edge Registration: ENG* [-5 to 5/0/0.1mm]
004 Rear
6-006- ADF Adjustment Buckle: Duplex Front ENG* [-5 to 5/0/0.1mm]
005
6-006- ADF Adjustment Buckle: Duplex Rear ENG* [-5 to 5/0/0.1mm]
006
6-006- ADF Adjustment Rear Edge Erase Front ENG* [-10 to 10/-
007 23/0.1mm]
6-006- ADF Adjustment Rear Edge Erase Rear ENG* [-10 to 10/-
008 23/0.1mm]
6-009- ADF FreeRun Free Run Simplex Motion ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001
6-009- ADF FreeRun Free Run Duplex Motion ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
002
6-009- ADF FreeRun Free Run Stamp Motion ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
003
6-009- ADF FreeRun Free Run Simplex Motion(low ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
004 speed)
6-009- ADF FreeRun Free Run Simplex ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
005 Motion(high speed)
6-009- ADF FreeRun Free Run Duplex Motion(low ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
006 speed)
6-009- ADF FreeRun Free Run Duplex Motion(high ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
007 speed)
6-010- Stamp Position Adj. ENG* [-5 to 5/0/0.1mm]
001
6-016- Original Size Detect ENG* [0 to 255/0/1]
001 Setting
6-017- DF Magnification Adj. ENG* [-5 to 5/0/0.1%]
001
6-901- ADF Operation Setting ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001
6-901- ADF Operation Setting Stack Mode ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
002
69
Engine SP7-XXX

CTL
7-001- Distance Counter ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
001
7-621- PM Counter Display: Pages #PCU ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
002
7-621- PM Counter Display: Pages Drum ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
021
7-621- PM Counter Display: Pages Developer ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
024
7-621- PM Counter Display: Pages Mixing Auger ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
028 Bushing
7-621- PM Counter Display: Pages #Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
108 Unit
7-621- PM Counter Display: Pages #Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
115
7-621- PM Counter Display: Pages Hot Roller Bearing ENG* [0 to 99999999/0/1page]
119
7-622- PM Counter Reset #PCU ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
002
7-622- PM Counter Reset Drum ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
021
7-622- PM Counter Reset Developer ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
024
7-622- PM Counter Reset Mixing Auger ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
028 Bushing
7-622- PM Counter Reset #Paper Transfer ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
108 Unit
7-622- PM Counter Reset #Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
115
7-622- PM Counter Reset Hot Roller Bearing ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
119
7-801- ROM Info Display No.: Engine ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
002
7-801- ROM Info. No.:ADF ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
005
7-801- ROM Info. No.:Bank ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
70

CTL
009
7-801- ROM Info. No.:Bank2 ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
019
7-801- ROM Info Display Version: Engine ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
102
7-801- ROM Info. Version:ADF ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
105
7-801- ROM Info. Version:Bank ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
109
7-801- ROM Info. Version:Bank2 ENG [0 to 0/0/0]
119
7-942- PM Counter #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
002 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Drum ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-942- PM Counter Developer ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-942- PM Counter Mixing Auger ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
028 Display:Distance(%) Bushing
7-942- PM Counter #Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
108 Display:Distance(%) Unit
7-942- PM Counter #Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-942- PM Counter Hot Roller Bearing ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
7-944- PM Counter Display: #PCU ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
002 Distance
7-944- PM Counter Display: Drum ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
021 Distance
7-944- PM Counter Display: Developer ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
024 Distance
7-944- PM Counter Display: Mixing Auger ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
028 Distance Bushing
7-944- PM Counter Display: #Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
108 Distance Unit
7-944- PM Counter Display: #Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
71

CTL
115 Distance
7-944- PM Counter Display: Hot Roller Bearing ENG* [0 to 4294967295/0/1mm]
119 Distance
7-951- Remain Day Counter: #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
002 Pages
7-951- Remain Day Counter: Drum ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
021 Pages
7-951- Remain Day Counter: Developer ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
024 Pages
7-951- Remain Day Counter: Mixing Auger ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
028 Pages Bushing
7-951- Remain Day Counter: #Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
108 Pages Unit
7-951- Remain Day Counter: #Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
115 Pages
7-951- Remain Day Counter: Hot Roller Bearing ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
119 Pages
7-952- Remain Day Counter: #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
002 Distance
7-952- Remain Day Counter: Drum ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
021 Distance
7-952- Remain Day Counter: Developer ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
024 Distance
7-952- Remain Day Counter: Mixing Auger ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
028 Distance Bushing
7-952- Remain Day Counter: #Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
108 Distance Unit
7-952- Remain Day Counter: #Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
115 Distance
7-952- Remain Day Counter: Hot Roller Bearing ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
119 Distance
7-954- PM Counter Display: #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
002 Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Display: Drum ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
021 Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Display: Developer ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
72

CTL
024 Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Display: Mixing Auger ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
028 Pages(%) Bushing
7-954- PM Counter Display: #Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
108 Pages(%) Unit
7-954- PM Counter Display: #Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
115 Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Display: Hot Roller Bearing ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
119 Pages(%)
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages #PCU ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
002
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Drum ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
021
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Developer ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
024
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Mixing Auger ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
028 Bushing
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages #Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
108 Unit
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages #Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
115
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Hot Roller Bearing ENG* [0 to 9999999/0/1page]
119
7-956- Estimated Remain Days #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
002
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Drum ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
021
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Developer ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
024
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Mixing Auger ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
028 Bushing
7-956- Estimated Remain Days #Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
108 Unit
7-956- Estimated Remain Days #Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
115
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Hot Roller Bearing ENG* [0 to 255/255/1days]
73

CTL
119
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate #PCU ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
002
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Drum ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
021
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Developer ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
024
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Mixing Auger ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
028 Bushing
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate #Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
108 Unit
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate #Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
115
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Hot Roller Bearing ENG* [0 to 255/0/1%]
119
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data1 ENG* [0x00 to 0xFF/0x00/1]
001
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data2 ENG* [0x0000 to
002 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
003 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
004 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
005 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
006 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
007 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
008 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
009 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
010 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
74

CTL
011 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
012 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
013 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
014 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
015 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
016 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
017 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
018 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
019 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
020 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
021 0xFFFF/0x0000/1]
Input and Output Check
Input Check

CTL Max/Init./Step]
5-803- INPUT Check Paper End Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001
5-803- INPUT Check Registration Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
002
5-803- INPUT Check Peper Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
003
5-803- INPUT Check Bypass Paper End Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
004
5-803- INPUT Check LOW VOLTAGE ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
005
75

CTL Max/Init./Step]
5-803- INPUT Check RAITING VOLTAGE ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
006
5-803- INPUT Check Interlock Switch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
007
5-803- INPUT Check Vertical Transport Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
008
5-803- INPUT Check Main Fan: LOCK ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
009
5-803- INPUT Check Main Motor: LOCK ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
010
5-803- INPUT Check Tray Lift Motor: LOCK ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
011
5-803- INPUT Check SC: Transfer ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
012
5-803- INPUT Check SC: Charge ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
013
5-803- INPUT Check SC: Development ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
014
5-803- INPUT Check Exhaust Fan: LOCK ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
015
5-803- INPUT Check TD Sensor ENG [0 to 9999/0/1]
016
5-803- INPUT Check ID Sensor ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
017
5-803- INPUT Check Thermistor: Center ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
018
5-803- INPUT Check Thermistor: End ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
019
5-803- INPUT Check Temperature Sensor ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
020
5-803- INPUT Check Imaging Temperature Sensor ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
021
5-803- INPUT Check By-pass Width Sensor ENG [0 to 15/0/1]
022
5-803- INPUT Check By-pass Length Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
023
76

CTL Max/Init./Step]
5-803- INPUT Check Upper Limit Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
024
5-803- INPUT Check Paper Size Switch ENG [0 to 15/0/1]
025
5-803- INPUT Check Door Switch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
026
5-803- INPUT Check CTL Cooling Fan: LOCK ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
027
5-803- INPUT Check PCB VERSION ENG [0 to 7/0/1]
028
5-803- INPUT Check SDCU SET ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
029
5-803- INPUT Check FB VTP ENG [0 to 1023/0/1]
030
5-803- INPUT Check HP Senser ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
200
5-803- INPUT Check Platen Cover Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
201
5-803- INPUT Check Bank1:Feed Cover Open ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
211
5-803- INPUT Check Bank2:Feed Cover Open ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
212
5-803- INPUT Check Bank1:Paper Size Switch ENG [0 to 255/0/1]
213
5-803- INPUT Check Bank2:Paper Size Switch ENG [0 to 255/0/1]
214
5-803- INPUT Check Bank1:Paper End Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
215
5-803- INPUT Check Bank2:Paper End Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
216
5-803- INPUT Check Bank1:Paper Feed Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
217
5-803- INPUT Check Bank2:Paper Feed Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
218
5-803- INPUT Check Bank1:Tray Lift Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
219
77

CTL Max/Init./Step]
5-803- INPUT Check Bank2:Tray Lift Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
220
5-803- INPUT Check Bank1:Tray Set Switch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
221
5-803- INPUT Check Bank2:Tray Set Switch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
222
6-007- ADF INPUT Original Length 1 (B5 Detection ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001 Check Sensor)
6-007- ADF INPUT Original Length 2 (A4 Detection ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
002 Check Sensor)
6-007- ADF INPUT Original Length 3 (LG Detection ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
003 Check Sensor)
6-007- ADF INPUT Original Width 1 ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
004 Check
005 Check
006 Check
007 Check
008 Check
6-007- ADF INPUT Original Detection ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
009 Check
6-007- ADF INPUT Skew Correction ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
011 Check
6-007- ADF INPUT Registration Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
013 Check
6-007- ADF INPUT Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
014 Check
6-007- ADF INPUT Feed Cover Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
015 Check
6-007- ADF INPUT Lift Up Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
016 Check
6-007- ADF INPUT Rear Edge Detection ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
023 Check
78

CTL Max/Init./Step]
6-154- INPUT Check 1BIN: SetDetection ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001
6-154- INPUT Check 1BIN: PaperRemain ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
003
6-154- INPUT Check 1BIN: CoverOpen ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
004
Output Check

CTL Max/Init./Step]
5-804- OUTPUT Check Main Motor: CW ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
001
5-804- OUTPUT Check Main Motor: CCW ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
002
5-804- OUTPUT Check Toner Supply Motor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
003
5-804- OUTPUT Check CTL Cooling Fan: Full ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
004
5-804- OUTPUT Check Main Fan: Full ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
005
5-804- OUTPUT Check Main Fan: Half ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
006
5-804- OUTPUT Check HVP CHARGING PWM ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
007
5-804- OUTPUT Check HVP DEVELOPING PWM ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
008
5-804- OUTPUT Check HVP TRANSFER+ PWM ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
009
5-804- OUTPUT Check HVP TRANSFER- PWM ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
010
5-804- OUTPUT Check ID Sensor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
011
5-804- OUTPUT Check Registration Clutch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
013
5-804- OUTPUT Check Bypass Paper Feed Clutch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
014
5-804- OUTPUT Check Duplex Clutch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
79

CTL Max/Init./Step]
015
5-804- OUTPUT Check Paper Feed Clutch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
016
5-804- OUTPUT Check CTL Cooling Fan: Half ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
017
5-804- OUTPUT Check Quenching Lamp ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
020
5-804- OUTPUT Check Fusing Contact Release ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
021 Solenoid
5-804- OUTPUT Check Relay Clutch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
022
5-804- OUTPUT Check Reverse Clutch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
023
5-804- OUTPUT Check Paper Exit Clutch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
024
5-804- OUTPUT Check Fusing Fan Full ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
025
5-804- OUTPUT Check Fusing Fan Half ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
026
5-804- OUTPUT Check Tray Lift Motor: CW ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
027
5-804- OUTPUT Check Tray Lift Motor: CCW ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
028
5-804- OUTPUT Check DHB CONTROL ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
029
5-804- OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
050
5-804- OUTPUT Check LD Forced On ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
051
5-804- OUTPUT Check Scanner Lamp ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
202
5-804- OUTPUT Check Bank1:Paper Feed Motor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
241
5-804- OUTPUT Check Bank2:Paper Feed Motor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
242
5-804- OUTPUT Check Bank1:Paper Feed Clutch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
80

CTL Max/Init./Step]
243
5-804- OUTPUT Check Bank2:Paper Feed Clutch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
244
6-008- ADF OUTPUT Feed Motor Forward ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
003 Check
6-008- ADF OUTPUT Feed Motor Reverse ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
004 Check
6-008- ADF OUTPUT Relay Motor Forward ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
005 Check
6-008- ADF OUTPUT Relay Motor Reverse ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
006 Check
6-008- ADF OUTPUT Inverter Solenoid ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
011 Check
6-008- ADF OUTPUT Stamp ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
012 Check
6-008- ADF OUTPUT Fan Motor ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
013 Check
6-008- ADF OUTPUT Feed Clutch ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
014 Check
6-008- ADF OUTPUT Feed Solenoid ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
015 Check
6-155- OUTPUT Check 1BIN SOL ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
002
6-155- OUTPUT Check 1BINMotor:HOLD ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
003
6-155- OUTPUT Check 1BINMotor: CCW: H ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
004
6-155- OUTPUT Check 1BINMotor: CCW: L ENG [0 to 1/0/1]
005
81
Controller SP Tables
SP5-XXX
SP Large Category Small Category ENG/CTL [Min to Max/Init./Step]

No.
5- Add display language 1-8 CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
009-
201
009-
202
009-
203
009-
204
009-
205
009-
206
009-
207
5- mm/inch Display 0:mm 1:inch CTL [0 to 1 / * / 1 ]
024- Selection *NA=1, Other=0
001
5- Accounting counter Counter Method CTL [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ]
045-
001
5- Display IP address CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
055-
001
5- Part Replacement Alert #PCU CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
062- Display
002
82
5- Part Replacement Alert OPC CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

062- Display
021
5- Part Replacement Alert Developer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
062- Display
024
5- Part Replacement Alert Bearing:Development Screw CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
062- Display
028
5- Part Replacement Alert #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
062- Display
108
5- Part Replacement Alert #Fusing Unit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
062- Display
115
5- Part Replacement Alert Bearing:Pressure Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
062- Display
119
5- PM Parts Display CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
066-
001
5- Part Replacement #PCU CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
067- Operation Type
002
5- Part Replacement OPC CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
067- Operation Type
021
5- Part Replacement Developer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
067- Operation Type
024
5- Part Replacement Bearing:Development Screw CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
067- Operation Type
028
5- Part Replacement #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
067- Operation Type
108
5- Part Replacement #Fusing Unit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
067- Operation Type
115
83
5- Part Replacement Bearing:Pressure Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

067- Operation Type
119
5- Set Bypass Paper Size CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
071- Display
001
5- Supply Part Drum Unit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
073- Replacement
005 Operation Type
5- Home Key Login Setting CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
074- Customization
002
5- Home Key Show Home Edit Menu CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
074- Customization
050
5- Home Key Function Setting CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
074- Customization
091
5- Home Key Product ID CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ]
074- Customization
092
5- Home Key Application Screen ID CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
074- Customization
093
5- ServiceSP Entry Code CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
081- Setting
001
5- LED Light Switch Toner Near End CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
083- Setting
001
5- LED Light Switch Waste Toner Near End CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
083- Setting
002
5- Copy Auto Clear Auto Clear Timer Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
101- Setting (0:ON 1:OFF)
202
5- Disable Copying CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
118-
001
84
5- Copy mode setting DocumentServer:Printed File CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

118- Auto Delete
003
5- Copy mode setting Print Limit Warning Display CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
118- Setting
004
5- Counter Up Timing 0:Feed 1:Exit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
121-
001
5- APS Mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
127-
001
5- Disable Duplex for Tray Bypass CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
140-
001
5- Length Setting Bypass(0:OFF 1:Long) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
150-
001
5- CE Login CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
169-
001
5- Copy Nv Version CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
188-
001
5- Mode Set Power Low Clock Mode CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
191-
002
5- Page Numbering Duplex Printout Left/Right CTL [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01mm]
212- Position of Left/Right Facing
003
5- Page Numbering Duplex Printout Top/Bottom CTL [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01mm]
212- Position of Left/Right Facing
004
5- Page Numbering Duplex Printout Left/Right CTL [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01mm]
212- Position of Top/Bottom
018 Facing
5- Page Numbering Duplex Printout Top/Bottom CTL [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01mm]
212- Position of Top/Bottom
019 Facing
85
5- Page Numbering Allow Page No. Entry CTL [2 to 9 / 9 / 1]

227-
201
5- Page Numbering Zero Surplus Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
227-
202
5- Set Time Time Difference CTL [-1440 to 1440 / * / 1 ]
302- *NA=-300, EU/AP=60,
002 China/Taiwan=480,
Korea=540
5- Auto Off Set Auto Off Limit Set CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
305-
101
5- Daylight Saving Time Setting CTL [0 to 1 / * / 1 ]
307- *NA/EU=1, Other=0
001
5- Daylight Saving Time Rule Set(Start) CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / * / 1 ]
307- *NA=0x03200210,
003 EU=0x03500010,
AP=0x10500010,
Other=0
5- Daylight Saving Time Rule Set(End) CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / * / 1 ]
307- *NA=0x11100200,
004 EU=0x10500100,
AP=0x03100000,
Other=0
5- Access Control Default Document ACL CTL [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 ]
401-
103
5- Access Control Authentication Time CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec ]
401-
104
5- Access Control Extend Certification Detail CTL [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 ]
401-
162
5- Access Control SDK1 UniqueID CTL [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 /
401- 1]
200
5- Access Control SDK1 Certification Method CTL [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ]
86
401-
201
401- 1]
210
401-
211
401- 1]
220
401-
221
5- Access Control SDK Certification Device CTL [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 ]
401-
230
5- Access Control Detail Option CTL [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 ]
401-
240
5- User Code Count Clear User Code Count Clear CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
404-
001
5- LDAP-Certification Simplified Authentication CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
411-
004
5- LDAP-Certification Password Null Not Permit CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
411-
005
5- LDAP-Certification Detail Option CTL [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 ]
411-
006
5- Krb-Certification Encrypt Mode CTL [0 to 0xFF / 0x1F / 1 ]
412-
100
5- Lockout Setting Lockout On/Off CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
413-
001
87
5- Lockout Setting Lockout Threshold CTL [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 ]

413-
002
5- Lockout Setting Cancelation On/Off CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
413-
003
5- Lockout Setting Cancelation Time CTL [1 to 9999 / 60 / 1min ]
413-
004
5- Access Mitigation Mitigation On/Off CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
414-
001
5- Access Mitigation Mitigation Time CTL [0 to 60 / 15 / 1min ]
414-
002
5- Password Attack Permissible Number CTL [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 ]
415-
001
5- Password Attack Detect Time CTL [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 ]
415-
002
5- Access Information Access User Max Num CTL [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]
416-
001
5- Access Information Access Password Max Num CTL [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]
416-
002
5- Access Information Monitor Interval CTL [1 to 10 / 3 / 1 ]
416-
003
5- Access Attack Access Permissible Number CTL [0 to 500 / 100 / 1 ]
417-
001
5- Access Attack Attack Detect Time CTL [10 to 30 / 10 / 1sec ]
417-
002
5- Access Attack Productivity Fall Waite CTL [0 to 9 / 3 / 1sec ]
417-
003
88
5- Access Attack Attack Max Num CTL [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]

417-
004
5- User Authentication Copy CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
420-
001
5- User Authentication DocumentServer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
420-
011
5- User Authentication Fax CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
420-
021
5- User Authentication Scanner CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
420-
031
5- User Authentication Printer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
420-
041
5- User Authentication SDK1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
420-
051
420-
061
420-
071
5- User Authentication Browser CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
420-
081
5- Auth Dialog Message Message Change On/Off CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
430- Change
001
5- Auth Dialog Message Message Text Download CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
430- Change
002
5- Auth Dialog Message Message Text ID CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
430- Change
003
89
5- External Auth User Tag CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]

431- Preset
010
5- External Auth User Entry CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
011
5- External Auth User Group CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
012
5- External Auth User Mail CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
020
5- External Auth User Fax CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
030
5- External Auth User FaxSub CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
031
5- External Auth User Folder CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
032
5- External Auth User ProtectCode CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
033
5- External Auth User SmtpAuth CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
034
5- External Auth User LdapAuth CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
035
5- External Auth User Smb Ftp Fldr Auth CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
036
5- External Auth User AcntAcl CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
037
5- External Auth User DocumentAcl CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
038
90
5- External Auth User CertCrypt CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

431- Preset
040
5- External Auth User UserLimitCount CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
431- Preset
050
5- Authentication Error System Log Disp CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
481- Code
001
5- Authentication Error Panel Disp CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
481- Code
002
5- MF KeyCard Job Permit Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
490-
001
5- PM Alarm PM Alarm Level CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 ]
501-
001
5- PM Alarm Original Count Alarm CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
501-
002
5- Jam Alarm CTL [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 ]
504-
001
5- Jam Alarm Threshold CTL [1 to 99 / 10 / 1 ]
504-
002
5- Error Alarm CTL [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 ]
505-
001
5- Error Alarm Threshold CTL [1 to 99 / 5 / 1 ]
505-
002
5- Supply/CC Alarm Paper Supply Alarm CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
507-
001
5- Supply/CC Alarm Toner Supply Alarm CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
507-
003
91
5- Supply/CC Alarm Toner Call Timing CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

507-
080
5- Supply/CC Alarm Toner Call Threshold CTL [10 to 90 / 10 / 10% ]
507-
081
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: Others CTL [250 to 10000 / 1000 /
507- 1]
128
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: A3 CTL [250 to 10000 / 1000 /
507- 1]
132
507- 1]
133
507- 1]
134
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: B4 CTL [250 to 10000 / 1000 /
507- 1]
141
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: B5 CTL [250 to 10000 / 1000 /
507- 1]
142
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: DLT CTL [250 to 10000 / 1000 /
507- 1]
160
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: LG CTL [250 to 10000 / 1000 /
507- 1]
164
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: LT CTL [250 to 10000 / 1000 /
507- 1]
166
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: HLT CTL [250 to 10000 / 1000 /
507- 1]
172
5- CC Call Jam Remains CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
508-
001
92
5- CC Call Continuous Jams CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]

508-
002
5- CC Call Continuous Door Open CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
508-
003
5- CC Call Jam Detection: Time Length CTL [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 ]
508-
011
5- CC Call Jam Detection: Continuous CTL [2 to 10 / 5 / 1 ]
508- Count
012
5- CC Call Door Open: Time Length CTL [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 ]
508-
013
5- SC/Alarm Setting SC Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
515-
001
5- SC/Alarm Setting Service Parts Near End Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
515-
002
5- SC/Alarm Setting Service Parts End Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
515-
003
5- SC/Alarm Setting User Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
515-
004
5- SC/Alarm Setting Communication Test Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
515-
006
5- SC/Alarm Setting Machine Information Notice CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
515-
007
5- SC/Alarm Setting Alarm Notice CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
515-
008
5- SC/Alarm Setting Supply Automatic Ordering CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
515- Call
010
93
5- SC/Alarm Setting Supply Management Report CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]

515- Call
011
5- SC/Alarm Setting Jam/Door Open Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
515-
012
5- SC/Alarm Setting Timeout:Manual Call CTL [1 to 255 / 5 / 1min ]
515-
050
5- SC/Alarm Setting Timeout:Other Call CTL [1 to 255 / 10 / 1min ]
515-
051
5- Get Machine AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
517- Information Setting
061
517- Information Interval
062
517- Information Weekday
063
517- Information Hour
064
517- Information Minute
065
5- Get Machine AutoDiscovery SNMP CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
517- Information Community Name
066
5- Get Machine GetLog:NotificationSetting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
517- Information
100
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port1 CTL [1 to 65535 / 49101 /
728- 1]
001
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port1 CTL [1 to 65535 / 55101 /
728- 1]
002
94

728- 1]
003
728- 1]
004
728- 1]
005
728- 1]
006
728- 1]
007
728- 1]
008
728- 1]
009
728- 1]
010
728- 1]
011
728- 1]
012
728- 1]
013
728- 1]
014
728- 1]
015
95

728- 1]
016
728- 1]
017
728- 1]
018
728- 1]
019
728- 1]
020
5- Counter Effect Change Mk1 Cnt(Paper- CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
731- >Combine)
001
5- PDF Setting PDF/A Fixed CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
734-
001
5- OpePanel Setting Op Type Action Setting CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
748-
101
5- Import/Export Export CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
749-
001
5- Import/Export Import CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
749-
101
5- Copy:WebAPI Setting Copy:FlairAPI Setting CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
752-
001
5- Display Setting Disp Administrator Password CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
755- Change Scrn
001
5- RemoteUI Setting Authentication CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
758-
001
96
5- Machine Limit Count Machine Limit Count Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

759-
001
5- Machine Limit Count Limit Count CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
759-
051
5- PaaS Status CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
001
5- PaaS Enter PaaS Mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
002
5- PaaS Contract ID CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
760-
003
5- PaaS Authentication Key CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
760-
004
5- PaaS Server Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
760-
005
5- PaaS Server URL Path CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
760-
006
5- PaaS Server Port Number CTL [1 to 65535 / 443 / 1 ]
760-
007
5- PaaS Contract Status CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
008
5- PaaS Registration CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
009
5- PaaS Unregistration CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
010
5- PaaS Overwrite Registration on CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
760- Server
011
97
5- PaaS Execution Return Code CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]

760-
012
5- PaaS Error Code CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ]
760-
013
5- PaaS 3G Signal Error CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
760-
014
5- PaaS Use Proxy CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
015
5- PaaS Proxy Server CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
760-
016
5- PaaS Proxy Port Number CTL [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
017
5- PaaS Proxy User Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
760-
018
5- PaaS Proxy User Password CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
760-
019
5- PaaS Retry Interval CTL [0 to 65535 / 5 / 1sec ]
760-
020
5- PaaS Retry Count CTL [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 ]
760-
021
5- PaaS Device Information Call CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
022
5- PaaS Next Update Time CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
023
5- PaaS Enter Normal Mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
024
98
5- PaaS Prescribed Print Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]

760- No/Page
025
5- PaaS Permit Setting CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
027
5- PaaS Selection Country CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
760-
028
5- SmartOperationPanel Restore the default Home CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
761- Setting screen
001
5- SmartOperationPanel Introduction Setting Boot CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
761- Setting Mode
007
5- SmartOperationPanel SmartOperationPanel Font CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
761- Setting Setting
009
5- NFC Setting GuestNetwork CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
764-
001
5- NFC Setting Encrypted Communication CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
764- Permission
002
5- NFC Setting Access Port1 CTL [0 to 65535 / 8081 / 1 ]
764-
003
764-
004
764-
005
5- Memory Clear All Clear CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
001
5- Memory Clear SCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
003
99
5- Memory Clear IMH Memory Clr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]

801-
004
5- Memory Clear MCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
005
5- Memory Clear Copier application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
006
5- Memory Clear Fax Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
007
5- Memory Clear Printer Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
008
5- Memory Clear Scanner Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
009
5- Memory Clear Web Service CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
010
5- Memory Clear NCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
011
5- Memory Clear R-FAX CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
012
5- Memory Clear Clear DCS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
014
5- Memory Clear Clear UCS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
015
5- Memory Clear MIRS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
016
5- Memory Clear CCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
017
100
5- Memory Clear SRM Memory Clr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]

801-
018
5- Memory Clear LCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
019
5- Memory Clear ECS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
021
5- Cleae Memory websys CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
025
5- Memory Clear SAS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
027
5- Memory Clear Rest WebService CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
801-
028
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Service CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
812-
001
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Facsimile CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
812-
002
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Supply CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
812-
003
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Operation CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
812-
004
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Disp Inquiry CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
812-
101
5- Remote Service I/F Setting CTL [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 ]
816-
001
5- Remote Service CE Call CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
816-
002
101
5- Remote Service Function Flag CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

816-
003
5- Remote Service SSL Disable CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
816-
007
5- Remote Service RCG Connect Timeout CTL [1 to 90 / 30 / 1sec ]
816-
008
5- Remote Service RCG Write Timeout CTL [0 to 100 / 60 / 1sec ]
816-
009
5- Remote Service RCG Read Timeout CTL [0 to 100 / 60 / 1sec ]
816-
010
5- Remote Service Port 80 Enable CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
816-
011
5- Remote Service RFU Timing CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
816-
013
5- Remote Service RCG Error Cause CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
816-
014
5- Remote Service CERT:Encrypt Level CTL [1 to 2 / 1 / 1 ]
816-
102
5- Remote Service Client Communication CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 ]
816- Method
103
5- Remote Service Client Communication Limit CTL [1 to 7 / 7 / 1 ]
816-
104
5- Remote Service Network Information Waiting CTL [5 to 255 / 5 / 1sec ]
816- timer
115
5- Remote Service 3G DongleID CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
816-
190
102
5- Remote Service Instl Clear CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

816-
209
5- Remote Service RCG RCG IPv4 Address CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 ]
821- Setting
002
5- Remote Service RCG RCG Port CTL [0 to 65535 / 443 / 1 ]
821- Setting
003
5- Remote Service RCG RCG IPv4 URL Path CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
821- Setting
004
5- Remote Service RCG RCG IPv6 Address CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
821- Setting
005
5- Remote Service RCG RCG IPv6 URL Path CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
821- Setting
006
5- Remote Service RCG RCG Host Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
821- Setting
007
5- Remote Service RCG RCG Host URL Path CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
821- Setting
008
5- NV-RAM Data Upload CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
824-
001
5- NV-RAM Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
825- Download
001
5- Network Setting User Class CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828-
039
5- Network Setting Class Id CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828-
040
5- Network Setting Job Spooling CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
828-
065
103
5- Network Setting Job Spooling Clear: Start CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]

828- Time
066
5- Network Setting Job Spooling (Protocol) CTL [0x00 to 0xff / 0x7f / 0 ]
828-
069
5- Network Setting Protocol usage CTL [0x00000000 to 0xffffffff
828- / 0x00000000 / 1 ]
087
5- Network Setting TELNET(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
828-
090
5- Network Setting Web(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
828-
091
5- Network Setting Active IPv6 Link Local CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828- Address
145
5- Network Setting Active IPv6 Stateless Address CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828- 1
147
828- 2
149
828- 3
151
828- 4
153
828- 5
155
5- Network Setting IPv6 Manual Address CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828-
156
5- Network Setting IPv6 Gateway Address CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828-
158
104
5- Network Setting IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]

828-
161
5- Network Setting Web Item visible CTL [0x0000 to 0xffff / 0xffff
828- /1]
236
5- Network Setting Web shopping link visible CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
828-
237
5- Network Setting Web Supplies Link visible CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
828-
238
5- Network Setting Web Link1 Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828-
239
5- Network Setting Web Link1 URL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828-
240
5- Network Setting Web Link1 visible CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
828-
241
5- Network Setting Web Link2 Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828-
242
5- Network Setting Web Link2 URL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828-
243
5- Network Setting Web Link2 visible CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
828-
244
5- Network Setting DHCPv6 DUID CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
828-
249
5- IEEE 802.11 Channel MAX CTL [1 to 14 / 14 / 1 ]
840-
006
5- IEEE 802.11 Channel MIN CTL [1 to 14 / 1 / 1 ]
840-
007
105
5- IEEE 802.11 WEP Key Select CTL [0x00 to 0x11 / 0x00 /

840- 0]
011
5- IEEE 802.11 WPA Debug Lvl CTL [1 to 3 / 3 / 1 ]
840-
045
5- IEEE 802.11 11w CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
840-
046
5- IEEE 802.11 PSK Set Type CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
840-
047
5- Supply Name Setting Toner Name Setting: Black CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
841-
001
5- Supply Name Setting OrgStamp CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
841-
007
5- Supply Name Setting DrumUnit: Black CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
841-
101
5- GWWS Analysis Setting 1 CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ]
842-
001
5- GWWS Analysis Setting 2 CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ]
842-
002
5- USB Transfer Rate CTL [1 to 4 / 4 / 0 ]
844-
001
5- USB Vendor ID CTL [0x0000 to 0xffff /
844- 0x05ca / 0 ]
002
5- USB Product ID CTL [0x0000 to 0xffff /
844- 0x0403 / 0 ]
003
5- USB Device Release Number CTL [0 to 9999 / 100 / 1 ]
844-
004
106
5- USB Fixed USB Port CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]

844-
005
5- USB PnP Model Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
844-
006
5- USB PnP Serial Number CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
844-
007
5- USB Mac Supply Level CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
844-
008
5- USB USB Toggle Clear Mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
844-
009
5- USB Notify Unsupport CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
844-
100
5- Delivery Server Setting FTP Port No. CTL [1 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 ]
845-
001
5- Delivery Server Setting Retry Interval CTL [60 to 900 / 300 /
845- 1sec ]
003
5- Delivery Server Setting Number of Retries CTL [0 to 99 / 3 / 1 ]
845-
004
5- Delivery Server Setting Delivery Error Display Time CTL [0 to 999 / 300 / 1sec ]
845-
006
5- Delivery Server Setting Rapid Sending Control CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
845-
022
5- UCS Setting LDAP Search Timeout CTL [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 ]
846-
010
5- UCS Setting Folder Auth Change CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
846-
021
107
5- UCS Setting Addr Book Media CTL* [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 ]

846-
043
5- UCS Setting Initialize Local Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
846-
047
5- UCS Setting Initialize LDAP Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
846-
049
5- UCS Setting Initialize All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
846-
050
5- UCS Setting Backup All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
846-
051
5- UCS Setting Restore All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
846-
052
5- UCS Setting Clear Backup Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
846-
053
5- UCS Setting Search option CTL [0x00 to 0xff / 0x0f / 1 ]
846-
060
5- UCS Setting Complexity option 1 CTL [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 ]
846-
062
846-
063
846-
064
846-
065
5- UCS Setting Encryption Stat CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
846-
094
108
5- UCS Setting Initialize Suprvisor CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]

846-
100
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: udirectory CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 /
848- (Lower 4bits) 0]
004
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Comm. Log CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 /
848- Fax(Lower 4bits) 0]
007
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 /
848- 4bits) 0]
009
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 /
848- Devicemanagement(Lower 0]
011 4bits)
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: uadministration CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 /
022
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Log Service CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 /
024
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Rest CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 /
848- WebService (Lower 4bits) 0]
025
5- Web Service Reverse Proxy Server CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 ]
848- Setting(ESA Port)
045
5- Web Service 8080/51443 Port Open Time CTL [0 to 300 / 60 / 1 ]
848-
046
5- Web Service Log Operation Mode CTL [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 ]
848-
150
5- LogTrans Setting: Timing CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
848-
217
5- Installation Date Display CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
849-
001
109
5- Installation Date Switch to Print CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]

849-
002
5- Installation Date Total Counter CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
849-
003
5- Address Book Function Replacement of Circuit CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
850- Classifications
003
5- Remote ROM Update Local Port CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
856-
002
5- Collect Machine Info 0:OFF 1:ON CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
858-
001
5- Collect Machine Info Save To (0:HDD 1:SD) CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
858-
002
5- Collect Machine Info Make Log Trace Dir CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858-
003
5- Collect Machine Info Failure Occuring Date CTL [0 to 20371212 / 0 / 1 ]
858-
101
5- Collect Machine Info Tracing Days CTL [1 to 180 / 2 / 1day ]
858-
102
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax Address(0:OFF CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
858- 1:ON)
103
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire All Info & Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858-
111
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Configuration Page CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858-
121
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Font Page CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858-
122
110
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Print Setting List CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]

858-
123
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Error Log CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858-
124
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax Info CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858-
131
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire All Debug Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858-
141
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Controller Debug CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858- Logs Only
142
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Engine Debug Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858- Only
143
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Opepanel Debug CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858- Logs Only
144
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire FCU Debug Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0 ]
858- Only
145
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Server Port Number CTL [1 to 65535 / 25 / 1 ]
860-
002
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Authentication CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
860-
003
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. Encryption CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
860-
006
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP before SMTP CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
860-
007
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP to SMTP Waiting Time CTL [0 to 10000 / 300 /
860- 1ms ]
008
111
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Mail Receive Protocol CTL [1 to 3 / 1 / 1 ]

860-
009
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP3/IMAP4 Auth. CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
860- Encryption
013
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP3 Server Port Number CTL [1 to 65535 / 110 / 1 ]
860-
014
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 IMAP4 Server Port Number CTL [1 to 65535 / 143 / 1 ]
860-
015
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Receive Port Number CTL [1 to 65535 / 25 / 1 ]
860-
016
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Mail Receive Interval CTL [2 to 1440 / 3 / 1min ]
860-
017
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Mail Keep Setting CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
860-
019
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 MDN Response RFC2298 CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
860- Compliance
021
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. From Field CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
860- Replacement
022
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting CTL [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 ]
860-
025
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 S/MIME:MIME Header CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
860- Setting
026
5- E-Mail Report Report Validity CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
866-
001
5- E-Mail Report Add Date Field CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
866-
005
112
5- RAM Disk Setting Mail Function CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

869-
001
5- Common KeyInfo Writing CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
870- Writing
001
5- Common KeyInfo Initialize CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
870- Writing
003
5- Common Key Info Writing: 2048bit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
870- Writing
004
5- SC Auto Reboot Reboot Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
875-
001
5- SC Auto Reboot Reboot Type CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
875-
002
5- Set WIM Function MonitorDisable CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
885-
205
5- Farm Update Setting Skip Version Check CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
886-
100
5- Farm Update Setting Skip LR Check CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
886-
101
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
886-
111
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Term CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
886- Setting
112
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Start CTL [0 to 23 / 9 / 1hour ]
886- hour
113
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit End CTL [0 to 23 / 17 / 1hour ]
886- hour
114
113
5- Farm Update Setting SFU Auto Download Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

886-
115
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Next Date CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
886-
116
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Retry Interval CTL [1 to 24 / 1 / 1hour ]
886- Hour
117
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Day of CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
886- Week Setting
120
5- Farm Update Setting Restore Date CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
886-
201
5- Farm Update Setting Save Old Version List CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
886-
202
5- SD GetCounter CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
887-
001
5- Personal Information CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
888- Protect
001
5- Plug & CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
907- Play Maker/Model
001 Name
5- Switchover Permission Print Application Timer CTL [0 to 30 / 3 / 1 ]
913- Time
002
5- SP Print Mode All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
001
5- SP Print Mode SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
002
5- SP Print Mode User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
003
114
5- SP Print Mode Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]

990-
004
5- SP Print Mode Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
005
5- SP Print Mode Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
006
5- SP Print Mode NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
007
5- SMC Print Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
990-
021
5- SP Print Mode Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
022
5- SP Print Mode Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
023
5- SP Print Mode Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
026
5- SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
027
5- SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
990-
028
5- SP Text Mode All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
001
5- SP Text Mode SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
002
5- SP Text Mode User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
003
115
5- SP Text Mode Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]

992-
004
5- SP Text Mode Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
005
5- SP Text Mode Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
006
5- SP Text Mode NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
007
5- SP Text Mode Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
992-
021
5- SP Text Mode Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
022
5- SP Text Mode Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
023
5- SP Text Mode Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
026
5- SP Text Mode SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
027
5- SP Text Mode SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
992-
028
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
001
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
002
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
003
116
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]

993-
004
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
005
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
006
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
007
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
993-
021
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
022
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
023
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
026
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
027
5- SP Text Mode(Privacy) SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 ]
993-
028
SP7-XXX
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG/CTL [Min to

Max/Init./Step]
7-334- Function Use Count Original Orientation CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
001
117
7-334- Function Use Count All Job Stop CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]

003
7-334- Function Use Count Copy Quality CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
004
7-334- Function Use Count Mag. FixRatio CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
7-334- Function Use Count Mag. Ratio CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
006
7-334- Function Use Count Size Mag. CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
007
7-334- Function Use Count Auto Reduce/Enlarge CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
010
7-334- Function Use Count OneSideDpx CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
012
7-334- Function Use Count DateStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
027
7-334- Function Use Count PageStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
028
7-334- Function Use Count CharStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
029
7-334- Function Use Count CharNumStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
030
7-334- Function Use Count BackNum CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
036
7-335- Total Job Count SmartCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
002
7-335- Total Job Count SmartCopy FullHouse CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
003
7-335- Total Job Count SimpleCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
004
7-335- Total Job Count OtherCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
7-401- Total SC SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
001
7-401- Total SC Total SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
002
7-403- SC History Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001
118
7-403- SC History Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]

002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
7-404- Software Error History Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001
7-404- Software Error History Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
119
7-502- Total Paper Jam Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]

001
7-502- Total Paper Jam Total Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
002
7-503- Total Original Jam Original Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
001
7-503- Total Original Jam Total Original Jam CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
002 Counter
7-504- Paper Jam Location At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
001
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray1: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
003
005
006
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bypass: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
008
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
009
7-504- Paper Jam Location Vertical Trans. Sn2: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
013
7-504- Paper Jam Location Registration Sn: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
017
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Ext Sn: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
020
7-504- Paper Jam Location Vertical Trans. Sn2: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
053
7-504- Paper Jam Location Vertical Trans. Sn3: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
054
7-504- Paper Jam Location Registratin Sn: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
057
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Ext Sn: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
060
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Ent Sn: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
067
7-505- Original Jam Detection At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
001
120
7-505- Original Jam Detection Skew Correction Sn: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]

014
7-505- Original Jam Detection Registration Sensor: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
016
7-505- Original Jam Detection Original Exit Sensor: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
017
7-505- Original Jam Detection Skew Correction Sn: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
064
7-505- Original Jam Detection Registration Sensor: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
066
7-505- Original Jam Detection Original Exit Sensor: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
067
7-505- Original Jam Detection Original Pull CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
239
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A4 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
005
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
006
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size B5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
014
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size LT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
038
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size HLT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
044
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A3 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
132
133
134
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size B4 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
141
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
142
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size DLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
160
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size LG SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
164
121
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size LT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]

166
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size HLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
172
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size Others CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
255
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
7-508- Original Jam History Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001
7-508- Original Jam History Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
002
003
004
005
006
122

007
008
009
010
7-514- Paper Jam Count by At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
001 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray1: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
003 Location
005 Location
006 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bypass: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
008 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
009 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Vertical Trans. Sn2: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
013 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Registration Sn: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
017 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Ext Sn: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
020 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Vertical Trans. Sn2: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
053 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Vertical Trans. Sn3: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
054 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Registratin Sn: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
057 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Ext Sn: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
060 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex Ent Sn: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
067 Location
7-515- Original Jam Count by At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
001 Detection
123
7-515- Original Jam Count by Skew Correction Sn: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]

014 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Registration Sensor: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
016 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Original Exit Sensor: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
017 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Skew Correction Sn: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
064 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Registration Sensor: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
066 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Original Exit Sensor: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
067 Detection
7-515- Original Jam Count by Original Pull CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
239 Detection
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A4 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
005
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
006
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count B5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
014
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
038
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count HLT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
044
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A3 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
132
133
134
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count B4 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
141
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
142
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count DLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
160
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LG SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
164
124
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]

166
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count HLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
172
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count Others CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 ]
255
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord1 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
7-520- Update Log Auto:StartDate1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
011
012
013
014
015
7-520- Update Log Auto:EndDate1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
021
125

022
023
024
025
7-520- Update Log Auto:Piecemark1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
031
032
033
034
035
7-520- Update Log Auto:Version1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
041
042
043
044
045
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result1 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
051
052
053
054
055
126

056
057
058
059
060
7-617- PM Parts Counter Display Normal CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 /
001 0]
7-617- PM Parts Counter Display Df CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 /
002 0]
7-618- PM Parts Counter Reset Normal CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001
7-618- PM Parts Counter Reset Df CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
002
7-624- Part Replacement #PCU CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
002 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement OPC CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
7-624- Part Replacement Developer CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
7-624- Part Replacement Bearing:Development CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
028 Operation ON/OFF Screw
7-624- Part Replacement #Paper Transfer Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
108 Operation ON/OFF Unit
7-624- Part Replacement #Fusing Unit CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
7-624- Part Replacement Bearing:Pressure Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
7-801- ROM No./ Firmware Version CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
255
7-803- PM Counter Display Paper CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 /
001 0]
7-804- PM Counter Reset Paper CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001
127
7-807- SC/Jam Counter Reset CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]

001
7-832- Self-Diagnose Result CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001 Display
7-836- Total Memory Size CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
001 0MB ]
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Chg Change Time :Latest CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001 Hist
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Chg Change Time :Last1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
002 Hist
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Chg Initialize Time :Latest CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
101 Hist
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Chg Initialize Time :Last1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
102 Hist
7-901- Assert Info. File Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001
7-901- Assert Info. Number of Lines CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
002
7-901- Assert Info. Location CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
003
7-910- ROM No System/Copy CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001
7-910- ROM No Engine CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
002
7-910- ROM No Lcdc CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
003
7-910- ROM No ADF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
005
7-910- ROM No Bank CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
009
7-910- ROM No FCU CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
012
7-910- ROM No Bank2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
019
7-910- ROM No PS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
151
7-910- ROM No PCL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
158
128
7-910- ROM No PCLXL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]

159
7-910- ROM No PDF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
162
7-910- ROM No PJL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
165
7-910- ROM No MediaPrint:TIFF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
168
7-910- ROM No FONT CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
180
7-910- ROM No FONT1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
181
7-910- ROM No FONT2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
182
7-910- ROM No FONT3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
183
7-910- ROM No FONT4 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
184
7-910- ROM No FONT5 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
185
7-910- ROM No FONT6 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
186
7-910- ROM No FONT7 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
187
7-910- ROM No Factory CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
200
7-910- ROM No Copy CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
201
7-910- ROM No NetworkDocBox CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
202
7-910- ROM No Fax CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
203
7-910- ROM No Printer CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
204
7-910- ROM No Scanner CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
205
7-910- ROM No RFax CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
206
129
7-910- ROM No MIB CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]

210
7-910- ROM No Websupport CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
211
7-910- ROM No Package CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
250
7-911- Firmware Version System/Copy CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
001
7-911- Firmware Version Engine CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
002
7-911- Firmware Version Lcdc CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
003
7-911- Firmware Version ADF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
005
7-911- Firmware Version Bank CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
009
7-911- Firmware Version FCU CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
012
7-911- Firmware Version Bank2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
019
7-911- Firmware Version PS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
151
7-911- Firmware Version PCL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
158
7-911- Firmware Version PCLXL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
159
7-911- Firmware Version PDF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
162
7-911- Firmware Version PJL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
165
7-911- Firmware Version MediaPrint:TIFF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
168
7-911- Firmware Version FONT CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
180
7-911- Firmware Version FONT1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
181
182
130

183
184
185
186
187
7-911- Firmware Version Factory CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
200
7-911- Firmware Version Copy CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
201
7-911- Firmware Version NetworkDocBox CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
202
7-911- Firmware Version Fax CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
203
7-911- Firmware Version Printer CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
204
7-911- Firmware Version Scanner CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
205
7-911- Firmware Version RFax CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
206
7-911- Firmware Version MIB CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
210
7-911- Firmware Version Websupport CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
211
7-911- Firmware Version Package CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 ]
250
SP8-XXX
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG/CTL [Min to Max/Init./Step]

8-001- T:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-002- C:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
131
001
8-003- F:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-004- P:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-005- S:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-011- T:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-012- C:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-013- F:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-014- P:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-015- S:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-017- O:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-021- T:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-022- C:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-023- F:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-024- P:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-025- S:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-027- O:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-031- T:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-032- C:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-033- F:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-034- P:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
132
001
8-035- S:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-037- O:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-041- T:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-042- C:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-043- F:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-044- P:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-045- S:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-047- O:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-051- T:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-052- C:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-053- F:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-054- P:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-055- S:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-057- O:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
133
005
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-061- T:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-061- T:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-061- T:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
134
008
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-062- C:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-062- C:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-062- C:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-062- C:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
135
011
8-063- F:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-063- F:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-063- F:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-063- F:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-064- P:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
136
014
8-064- P:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-064- P:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-065- S:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-065- S:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-065- S:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-065- S:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
137
001
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-067- O:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-067- O:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-067- O:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
003
138
004
005
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
003
004
005
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
008
139
009
010
011
012
013
8-072- C:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
003
004
005
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
8-073- F:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
140
014
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
003
004
005
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
003
004
141
005
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
8-075- S:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
003
004
005
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
008
009
142
010
011
012
013
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-081- T:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-082- C:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-083- F:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-084- P:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-085- S:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-111- T:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-111- T:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
101
8-113- F:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-113- F:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
101
8-121- T:IFAX TX Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-123- F:IFAX TX Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-131- T:S-to-Email Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-131- T:S-to-Email Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-131- T:S-to-Email Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-135- S:S-to-Email Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
143
001
8-135- S:S-to-Email Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-135- S:S-to-Email Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-141- T:Deliv Jobs/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-141- T:Deliv Jobs/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-141- T:Deliv Jobs/Svr ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-145- S:Deliv Jobs/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-145- S:Deliv Jobs/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-145- S:Deliv Jobs/Svr ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-151- T:Deliv Jobs/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-151- T:Deliv Jobs/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-151- T:Deliv Jobs/PC ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-155- S:Deliv Jobs/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-155- S:Deliv Jobs/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-155- S:Deliv Jobs/PC ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-161- T:PCFAX TX Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-163- F:PCFAX TX Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-171- T:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-171- T:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-171- T:Deliv ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
144
003 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-175- S:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-175- S:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-175- S:Deliv ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003 Jobs/WSD/DSM
8-181- T:Scan to Media Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-181- T:Scan to Media Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-181- T:Scan to Media Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-185- S:Scan to Media Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-185- S:Scan to Media Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-185- S:Scan to Media Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-191- T:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-192- C:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-193- F:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-195- S:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-201- T:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-203- F:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-205- S:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-211- T:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-212- C:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-213- F:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
145
001
8-215- S:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-221- ADF Org Feeds Front CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-221- ADF Org Feeds Back CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode Large Volume CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode SADF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode Mixed Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode Custom Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode Platen CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode Mixed 1side/2side CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-231- Scan PGS/Mode ID card Feeder CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Normal/Detail CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Fine/Super Fine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Binary CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Grayscale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
146
009
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-241- T:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-242- C:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Normal/Detail CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Fine/Super Fine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-243- F:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Binary CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
147
008
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Grayscale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-245- S:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-251- T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-252- C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-255- S:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-257- O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-281- T:Scan PGS/TWAIN CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-285- S:Scan PGS/TWAIN CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-291- T:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-293- F:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-295- S:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
148
007
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
254
8-301- T:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
255
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
254
8-302- C:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
255
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
149
002
003
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
254
8-303- F:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
255
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
150
009
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
254
8-305- S:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
255
8-311- T:Scan PGS/Rez 1200dpi ~ CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-311- T:Scan PGS/Rez 600dpi~1199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
003
004
8-311- T:Scan PGS/Rez ~199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-315- S:Scan PGS/Rez 1200dpi ~ CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-315- S:Scan PGS/Rez 600dpi~1199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
003
004
8-315- S:Scan PGS/Rez ~199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-321- T:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
8-322- C:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
151
003
8-381- T:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-382- C:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-383- F:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-384- P:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-385- S:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-387- O:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-391- LSize PrtPGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-401- T:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-402- C:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-403- F:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-404- P:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-405- S:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-411- Prints/Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
152
006
007
008
009
010
011
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
015
016
017
018
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
019
020
021
022
023
024
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
153
001
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
009
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
015
017
8-422- C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
019
020
022
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
154
006
007
009
011
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
015
017
8-423- F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
019
020
022
024
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
008
155
009
010
011
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
015
016
017
018
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
019
020
021
022
023
024
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
156
006
007
009
010
011
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
015
017
018
8-425- S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
019
020
022
023
024
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
157
004
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
008
009
010
011
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
015
016
017
018
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
019
020
021
022
158
023
024
8-431- T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-431- T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-431- T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-432- C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-432- C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-432- C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-434- P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-434- P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-434- P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-437- O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-437- O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-437- O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
159
006
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
254
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
255
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
254
8-442- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
255
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
160
001
002
003
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
254
8-443- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
255
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
161
008
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
254
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
255
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
254
8-445- S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
255
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
162
003
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
254
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
255
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Bypass Tray CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
163
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray LC Inserter CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
101
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
102
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
164
003
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-462- C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-463- F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
165
006
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag ~49% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 50%~99% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 100% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 101%~200% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 201% ~ CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-481- T:PrtPGS/TonSave CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-484- P:PrtPGS/TonSave CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul RPDL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PS3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul R98 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
005
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul RTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PCL5e/5c CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
166
010
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PCL XL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul IPDL-C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul BM-Links CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul IPDS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul XPS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
017
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
018
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PictBridge CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
019
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
020
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintJPEG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
021
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul RPDL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PS3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul R98 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
005
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
007
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul RTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
167
008
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PCL5e/5c CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PCL XL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul IPDL-C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul BM-Links CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul IPDS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul XPS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
017
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
018
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PictBridge CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
019
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
020
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintJPEG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
021
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
168
006
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
169
009
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-522- C:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
170
012
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-523- F:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
171
015
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
014
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
015
8-525- S:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
016
8-531- Staple Staples CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-531- Staple Stapless CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
172
002
8-551- T:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-551- T:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-551- T:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-552- C:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-552- C:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-552- C:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-554- P:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-554- P:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-554- P:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-562- C:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-562- C:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-562- C:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-562- C:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-563- F:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-563- F:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
173
002
8-563- F:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-563- F:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-581- T:Counter Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-581- T:Counter Total(A3) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
032
8-591- O:Counter A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-591- O:Counter Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-601- T:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1% ]
8-601- T:Coverage Counter B/W Printing Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-602- C:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1% ]
8-603- F:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1% ]
8-604- P:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
174
001 1% ]
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-001 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
004
005
006
175
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
176
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
177
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
178
064
8-631- T:FAX TX PGS B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-631- T:FAX TX PGS B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
101
8-633- F:FAX TX PGS B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-633- F:FAX TX PGS B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
101
8-641- T:IFAX TX PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-643- F:IFAX TX PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-651- T:S-to-Email PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-651- T:S-to-Email PGS Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-655- S:S-to-Email PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-655- S:S-to-Email PGS Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-661- T:Deliv PGS/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-661- T:Deliv PGS/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-665- S:Deliv PGS/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-665- S:Deliv PGS/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-671- T:Deliv PGS/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-671- T:Deliv PGS/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-675- S:Deliv PGS/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-675- S:Deliv PGS/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-681- T:PCFAX TXPGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
179
001
8-683- F:PCFAX TXPGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-691- T:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-692- C:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-693- F:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-694- P:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-695- S:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-701- TX PGS/Port PSTN-1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
002
003
8-701- TX PGS/Port ISDN(G3,G4) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-701- TX PGS/Port Network CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp JPEG/JPEG2000 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp TIFF(Multi/Single) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
180
008
8-711- T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp JPEG/JPEG2000 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp TIFF(Multi/Single) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-715- S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-721- T:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001 PGS/WSD/DSM
8-721- T:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002 PGS/WSD/DSM
8-725- S:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001 PGS/WSD/DSM
8-725- S:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002 PGS/WSD/DSM
8-731- T:Scan PGS/Media B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-731- T:Scan PGS/Media Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-735- S:Scan PGS/Media B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-735- S:Scan PGS/Media Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-741- RX PGS/Port PSTN-1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
181
001
002
003
8-741- RX PGS/Port ISDN(G3,G4) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-741- RX PGS/Port Network CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-771- Dev Counter Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-781- Toner_Botol_Info. BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-791- LS Memory Remain CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
001
8-801- Toner Remain K CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
001
8-811- Eco Counter Eco Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-811- Eco Counter Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
008
8-811- Eco Counter Combine(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
009
8-811- Eco Counter Paper Cut(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
010
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Eco Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
051
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
054
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
055
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
058
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
182
059
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Paper Cut(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
060
8-811- Eco Counter Eco Totalr:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
101
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
104
8-811- Eco Counter Combine:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
105
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
108
8-811- Eco Counter Combine(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
109
8-811- Eco Counter Paper Cut(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
110
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Eco Totalr:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
151
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
154
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
155
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
158
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
159
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Paper Cut(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% ]
160
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 0~2%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 3~4%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
021
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 5~7%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
031
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
041
8-861- Cvr Cnt:11-20% BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-871- Cvr Cnt:21-30% BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
183
001
8-881- Cvr Cnt:31%- BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-891- Page/Toner Bottle BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-901- Page/Toner_Prev1 BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-911- Page/Toner_Prev2 BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-921- Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage(%):BK CTL* [0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1% ]
8-921- Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage/P:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-941- Machine Status Operation Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-941- Machine Status Standby Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-941- Machine Status Energy Save Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-941- Machine Status Low Power Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004
8-941- Machine Status Off Mode Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-941- Machine Status SC CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-941- Machine Status PrtJam CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-941- Machine Status OrgJam CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-941- Machine Status Supply PM Unit End CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-951- AddBook Register User Code /User ID CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-951- AddBook Register Mail Address CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-951- AddBook Register Fax Destination CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-951- AddBook Register Group CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1 ]
184
004
8-951- AddBook Register Transfer Request CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-951- AddBook Register F-Code CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-951- AddBook Register Copy Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-951- AddBook Register Fax Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-951- AddBook Register Printer Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-951- AddBook Register Scanner Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-961- Electricity Status Ctrl Standby Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-961- Electricity Status STR Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-961- Electricity Status Main Power Off Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-961- Electricity Status Reading and Printing CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
004 Time
8-961- Electricity Status Printing Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
005
8-961- Electricity Status Reading Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
006
8-961- Electricity Status Eng Waiting Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-961- Electricity Status Low Pawer State Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
008
8-961- Electricity Status Silent State Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
009
8-961- Electricity Status Heater Off State Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-961- Electricity Status LCD on Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
011
8-961- Electricity Status Silent Print CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
101
8-971- Unit Control Engine Off Recovery CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
185
001 Count
8-971- Unit Control Power Off Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
002
8-971- Unit Control Force Power Off Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-999- Admin. Counter List Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
001
8-999- Admin. Counter List Copy: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
003
8-999- Admin. Counter List Printer: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
007
8-999- Admin. Counter List Fax Print: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
010
8-999- Admin. Counter List A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
012
8-999- Admin. Counter List Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
013
8-999- Admin. Counter List Copy: BW(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
023 1]
8-999- Admin. Counter List Printer: BW(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
027 1]
8-999- Admin. Counter List Fax Print: BW(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
030 1]
8-999- Admin. Counter List Transmission Total: Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
101
8-999- Admin. Counter List Transmission Total: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
102
8-999- Admin. Counter List FAX Transmission CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
103
8-999- Admin. Counter List Scanner Transmission: CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
104 Color
8-999- Admin. Counter List Scanner Transmission: CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 ]
105 BW
186
5.Printer Service Mode (D0B4)
5. Printer Service Mode (D0B4)

1001 Bit Switch
1-001- Bit Switch 1 0 1
001 bit DFU - -
0
bit Responding with the hostname as the Model name (PnP Hostname
1 sysName name)
This BitSwitch can change the value of the sysName.
0 (default): Model name (PnP name) such as "MP C401SP"
1: Host name
bit DFU - -
2
bit I/O Timeout Enabled Disabled
3 Enables/Disables MFP I/O Timeouts. If disabled, the MFP I/O Timeout setting will not
be in effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit SD Card Save Mode Enabled Disabled
4 This BitSw enables the SD card save mode setting menu to be displayed. After
enabling this BitSw, the Card Save settings will appear under: "User Tools > Machine
Features >Printer Features > List/Test print"
bit Paper size error margin ±5pt ±10pt
5 When a PS job is printed on a custom paper size, the job might not print because of a
paper size mismatch caused by a calculation error. This BitSw can set the allowable
margin of error value.
Note:This is available for PS, PDF only.
bit DFU
6
bit DFU
7
1001 Bit Switch

1-001- Bit Switch 2 0 1
002 bit DFU
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
187
1001 Bit Switch

bit [PCL5e/c.PS]: PDL Auto Switching Enable Disable
3 Enables/disable the MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.
Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL
switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit DFU
4
bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7
1001 Bit Switch

1-001- Bit Switch 3 0 1
003 bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility Disabled Enabled
Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be
changed to "<ESC>*r1A".
bit 3 DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch

1-001-004 Bit Switch 4 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

1- Bit Switch 5 0 1
001- bit Display Finishing Settings Hide settings Display settings
005 0 If enabled, users will be able to configure the Collate Settings, Staple Settings, and
Punch Settings from the operation panel. The available Settings will depend on the
device and configured options.
After enabling this BitSw, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Machine Features >Printer Features > System"
bit Number of Copies with Paper Print Single Copy Print All Copies
188
1001 Bit Switch

1 Mismatch
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this bit switch, the device can be configured to
print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit DFU - -
2
bit PS Trigger for PDL Switching Standard pattern Pattern1
3 Specifying the auto detection algorithm for PS while switching the print language. If the
Pattern1 is selected, "%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger.
bit DFU - -
4
bit DFU - -
5
bit Change Imposition Specification Standard specification Old model
6 specification
This setting enables the specification for imposition such as page alignment and image
rotation to be changed to the specification of old models when job orientation and
paper size are mixed.
The old models are below:
- PCL: 04A and earlier models
- PS/PDF/RPCS: 05S and earlier models
- BMLinkS: 05A and earlier models
IRIPS PS/PDF：
- 09A and earlier models: Operation under current model specification is not supported
(Operation with older specification is recommended)
- 15S and later models: Operation under current model specification is supported.
bit Paper Path for Letterhead Simplex paper path Duplex paper path
7 Simplex Job
This setting enables the simplex job to be routed through the duplex unit. Only affects
jobs specified as letterhead.
1001 Bit Switch

1-001-006 Bit Switch 6 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
189
1001 Bit Switch

1-001-007 Bit Switch 7 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

1-001-008 Bit Switch 8 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

1- Bit Switch 9 0 1
001- bit PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted Disabled Enabled
009 0 via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (Immediately) (10 seconds)
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection does not
necessarily mean that the job can not be printed. This bit switch tells the device
whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit DFU - -
1
bit Job Cancel after Jam Not cancelled Cancelled
2
Enable: All jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bit switch is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in
problems:
- Job submission via USB or parallel port
- Spool printing (WIM > Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit Bypass Tray Paper Rotation (SEF/LEF) Disabled Enanbled
3 This BitSw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous generations. It only
takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" = "Driver/Command".
Previous spec (BitSw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the bypass
tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this BitSw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch, the MFP
will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by the MFP bypass
tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
Note:This is available for PCL,PS only.
bit Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack (JOB END) Mode 0 Mode 1
4 when printing multiple collated copies.
This bit switch determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent when
multiple collated copies are being printed.
Disable (=0 (default)):
190
1001 Bit Switch

JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy has completed printing.
This causes the page counter to be incremented after the first copy and then again at
the end of the job.
Enable (=1):
JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has finished printing.
This causes the page counter to be incremented at the end of each job.
bit UTF-8 Mode Enabled Disabled
5 Enabled (=0):
Text composed of UTF-8 characters can be displayed in the operation panel.
Disabled (=1):
UTF-8 characters cannot be displayed in the operation panel
For example, job names are sometimes stored in the MIB using UTF-8 encoded
characters. When these are displayed on the operation panel, they will be garbled
unless this BitSw is enabled (=0).
bit Print Option Configuration (rsh, rcp, ftp) Enabled Disabled
6 This BitSw enables the specification of the configuration of the print option using
rcp/rsh/ftp.
bit DFU - -
7
1001 Bit Switch

1-001-010 Bit Switch A 0 1
bit 0 to 3 DFU - -
bit 4 to 7 Not Used - -
1001 Bit Switch

1- Bit Switch B 0 1
001- bit DFU - -
011 0
to
3
bit "Apply Auto Paper Select" to Override Paper Size or Disabled Enabled
4 Paper Type of the Device
If this BitSw is enabled, the "Apply Auto Paper Select" setting will decide if the paper
size or paper type that is specified in the device settings should be overridden by the
job's commands when "Tray Setting Priority" is set to "Driver/Command" or "Machine
Setting(s): Any Type".
191
1001 Bit Switch

- Apply Auto Paper Select = OFF: Overridden (priority is given to the job’s commands)
- Apply Auto Paper Select = ON: NOT overridden (priority is given to the device
settings)
bit Not Used - -
5
bit Tray Selection when a Paper Mismatch Occurs. Disabled Enabled
6 This BitSw enables the inactive auto paper select tray to be unselectable when a
paper size/type mismatch occurs.
bit DFU
7
1001 Bit Switch

1-001- Bit Switch C 0 1
012 bit 0 DFU - -
to 4
bit 5 Change the user ID type displayed on the Disabled Enabled
operation panel
As of 15S models, the Login User Name can be displayed on the operation panel.
The user ID type displayed on the operation panel can be changed by configuring
BitSwitch #12-5 as follows:
- 0 (Default): Login User Name
- 1: User ID. If this is enabled, User ID will be displayed, which is equivalent to the
behavior exhibited in 14A and earlier models.
bit 6 AirPrint Enabled Disabled
For 15S and later models that support AirPrint, AirPrint can be disabled by changing
this Bit Switch from 0 (default) to 1.
bit 7 Not Used
1002 [Bit Switch2]

1-002-001 Bit Switch (2) 1 Settings 0 1
bit 0 Paper size mismatch display Enabled Disabled
Display warning screen (40909) of paper size mismatch.
bit 1 to 7 Not used
1003 [Clear Setting]

1-003-001 Initialize System Initializes settings in the System menu of the user mode.
1-003-003 Delete Program DFU
192
1004 [Print Summary]

1-004- Service Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller
001 Summary1 settings).
1-004- Service
002 Summary2
1110 [Media Print Device Setting]

Enable or disable the media print support function.
0: Disable, 1:Enable
1110-002 0: Disable 1:Enable [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1111 [All Job Delete Mode]

-
0: Exclusive New Job, 1:Including New Job
1110-001 0: Exclusive New Job 1: Including New Job [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
193
6.Scanner Service Mode (D0B4)
6. Scanner Service Mode (D0B4)

SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to
Max/Init./Step]
1-014- Scan to Folder Pass Input 0:OFF 1:ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 Set
1-016- Scan To Email Sender 0:Login User Address 1:POP before [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 Address SMTP Address
1-041- Scan:FlairAPI Setting 0x00 - 0xff [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005
2-021- Compression Comp1:5-95 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1]
005 Level(Grayscale)
3-071- Function Use Count WSD [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
3-071- Function Use Count DSM [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
3-071- Function Use Count SmallSizeTray [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
3-071- Function Use Count BlankDetect Ocr [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
3-071- Function Use Count BlankDetect [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
3-071- Function Use Count AirPrint/Mopria [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
3-071- Function Use Count ScanToURL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
3-072- Total Job Count LegacyScnan [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
3-072- Total Job Count SmartScan [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
194
6.Scanner Service Mode (D0B4)
3-072- Total Job Count SimpleScan [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]

005
3-072- Total Job Count MediaScan [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
3-072- Total Job Count OtherScan [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 0]
005
195
7.Software Configuration (D0B4)
7. Software Configuration (D0B4)
Printing Features
Auto PDL Detection Function
Overview
The Auto PDL Detection function gives the MFP the ability to determine the PDL of a job or of specific
parts of a job. This can be especially useful in cases where the PDL is not specified or if the job
contains multiple PDLs.
Conditions for detection of the PDL
The MFP will only attempt to detect a job's PDL if all of the following conditions are met.
• No @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command is contained in the job
• No submission protocol options (lpr, ftp, rcp, or rsh options) have been used to specify the PDL
• User Tools > Printer > System > Printer Language = Auto
PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter
There are 3 components in the printer which can perform Auto PDL Detection:
1. Printer system:
Uses a set of triggers unique to PCL5, PS or PDF. Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be
searched for triggers.
2. PCL interpreter:
It can detect PS triggers in PCL data. If a PS trigger is detected, the PCL interpreter will abort
processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. Up to 256 bytes
from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
3. PS interpreter:
It can detect PCL5 triggers in PS data. If a PCL trigger is detected, the PS interpreter will abort
processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. The entire page
(regardless of the number of bytes) is searched for triggers.
• 2. and 3. can be disabled using Printer Bit Switch 2-3=1.

• If the "Printer Language" is configured to anything other than Auto, all detection will be
disabled.
• An interpreter submits a job page by page to the rasterizer. Therefore, when an interpreter
detects a trigger mid-job, the previous pages will have already been submitted and will be
output using the previously detected PDL.
• If the PDL cannot be detected by the printer system, then the PDL defaults to the one
196
configured in "Configuration > Printer Basic Settings > Default Printer Language".
The Printer Language setting and Default Printer Language setting in WIM:
PDL selection and switching
3 types of PDL selection/switching are performed:

1. PDL selection (PCL5 or PS (including PDF)) at the beginning of the job: performed by the printer
system
2. PDL switching from PCL5 to PS: performed by the PCL interpreter and the printer system
197
3. PDL switching from PS to PCL5: performed by the PS interpreter and the printer system
Triggers
Printer system
PCL5 [ESC]E
triggers [FF]
PS triggers %!PS-Adobe-3.1 %! dict begin bind def findfont showpage /statusdict 0 startjob [EOT]
0x04 "}" + space caracter + "def" userdict 0x14
PDF %PDF-
triggers %!PS-Adobe-M.nPDF- (*M, n=numeric)
* "userdict" is excluded by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1.
• Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be searched for triggers.
• By configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1:
• "%%" can be added to the PS triggers
• "userdict" is excluded
• If a job is identified as PDF, it will be sent to the PS interpreter to be processed as a regular PS
job.
PS interpreter
PCL5 trigger [ESC]E and 2 or more continuous PCL commands
• Up to 256 bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
Some possible problems
Garbled output:
If a string of characters (or binary data) is mistaken as a trigger and an incorrect PDL is applied, the
output will be garbled.
198
Incorrect printer settings:
Printer settings, for example the paper size, is incorrectly applied. This can happen when the printer
settings at the beginning of the job are initialized before a PDL switch occurred and no settings were
configured for the rest of the job.
Printer Bit Switch description
Bit Switch 2-3

This controls Auto PDL Detection by the PCL interpreter and PS interpreter.
BitSW 2-3=0 (default):
If PDL switching is applied to the job, all of the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter will
search for switching criteria (triggers).
BitSW 2-3=1:
Only the printer system will search for switching criteria (triggers). PCL/PS interpreters will not.
Bit Switch 5-3
This affects the PDL switching criteria (triggers) used by the printer system.
"%%" is not used as a printer system PS trigger. "%%" will not call the PS interpreter.
BitSW 5-3=1:
"%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger.
The reason that "%%" is not included as a trigger by default, is that a string of text in the body of the job
such as the below, could result in a false positive. This would trigger a switch and result garbled output.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
However some customers prefer that "%%" be included as a switching criteria. BitSW5-3=1 should be
used in such a case.
• A side effect of BitSW5-3=1 is that "userdict" will no longer be used as a PS trigger.

Bit Switch 9-0
These determine whether Auto PDL Detection for print jobs transmitted via USB/parallel will wait 10
seconds to make sure the first 2KB of the job has been sent.
The Printer system portion of the Auto PDL Detection function is only performed on the first 2KB of a job
and can wait up to 10 seconds for that first 2KB to arrive. As the printer is unable to detect the end of
jobs submitted over a USB/Parallel connection, it might be preferable to not wait 10 seconds if jobs of
less than 2KB are going to be printed. Enabling/disabling this waiting time is the purpose of BitSw 9-0.
BitSw 9-0=0 (default):
The printer system will not wait 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
BitSw 9-0=1:
The printer system will wait up to 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
199
Print Images Rotation
Bit Switch 5-6

This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will be applied to every page of every job. Pages will
always be rotated as if they were to be bound on that edge.
BitSW 5-6=1:
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will only be applied if the job is stapled, punched, or Z-
folded. Otherwise, the bound edge might differ from page to page.
Example:
A 3-page job. Page 1 has the PCL simplex command. Page 2 and 3 have the PCL duplex long-edge
bind commands.
No finishing options (staple, punch, z-fold) are used.
Bit Switch #5-6=0:
Bit Switch #5-6=1:
• Used in conjunction with Bit Switch #5-6, Orientation Auto Detect for PS/PDF jobs might cause
unexpected results.
200
PJL USTATUS
Bit Switch 9-4

These control the way PJL USTATUS returns page count totals in cases where multiple copies of a job
are being printed.
BitSw 9-4=0 (default):
This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
1. The page count for a single copy is returned after the first copy is printed.
2. The page count for the rest of the copies, excluding the first copy, is returned after all copies have
been printed.
3. This emulates an older HP PCL firmware spec. It is only needed for compatibility with legacy
software.
BitSw 9-4=1:
The page count for all copies is output after all copies have been printed.
This emulates more recent HP PCL firmware specs.
For example, consider 3 copies of a 3 page job:
9-4 = 0
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=3
<comment> The page count of the first copy is returned.</comment>
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
201
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6
<comment> The page count of the remaining two copies is returned.</comment>
9-4 = 1
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6@PJL USTATUS PAGE
7
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
8
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
9
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=9
<comment> The page count of all three copies is returned.</comment>
202
Scanner Features
Display settings of recently used scan destination
Configuring the scanner interface so that the most recently used scan destination is cleared.
Whether the MFP clears the most recently used scan destination, can be configured using Scanner SP
1-012-001.
By default, this is cleared to avoid subsequent users scanning to it by mistake.
Scanner SP 1-012-001
1 (default): Clear
0: Do not clear
This will cause all of the following to be cleared after the scanning is complete:
• Destination
• Sender
• Email subject
• Email message
• File name
The information in the list above will be cleared after scanning is finished.
Exceptions:
• User Auth.:
If SP 1-012-001 = 0 and if User Auth. (excluding User Code authentication) is enabled, the most
recently used scan destination will only be retained until the user logs out.
• Scanner Auto Reset timer:
Even if SP 1-012-001 = 0 the most recently used scan destination can still be cleared by the
Scanner Auto Reset timer. If the Scanner Auto Reset timer is shorter than the System Auto Reset
timer, then the most recently used scan destination will be cleared when the Scanner Auto Reset
timer elapses.
The Qualification Switching of Scan to Folder
Determining which account Scan to Folder uses to access a scan destination and the effects of System
SP 5-846-021.
This method depends on how the destination is accessed, whether authentication is being used, and
SP 5-846-021.
Cases:
Case Destination User auth. Account used to access the folder
selection
A Manual entry Either enabled or The user's account *
disabled
B Destination list disabled The recipient's account
203
Case Destination User auth. Account used to access the folder

selection
(as configured in the Address Book's Folder
Authentication setting)
C enabled If SP 5-846-021 =
0 (default): The authenticated user's account
1: The recipient's account
(as configured in the Address Book's Folder
Authentication setting)
* The "user's account" will be either the one entered during scanning (see the Manual Entry screen
capture) or if User Auth. is enabled, the account configured in the user's Folder Authentication setting
will be used.
The destination's access logs:
Case A or Case C with SP=0: The access logs can be used to determine which user sent the scan.
Case B or Case C with SP=1: All access will be logged as the same user.
204
Security Features
How to Restrict Access to the WIM Job Menu
1. Enter 'Printer' SP mode.

2. Set SP5-888-001
0: (default): "Job" menu is enabled.
1: "Job" menu is disabled.
• This setting takes effect only if user authentication (other than User Code auth.) is
disabled.
How to Restrict Web Image Monitor Access to the Document Server
System (Copier) SP 5-885-020 bit 0, 1 and 7 restrict Web Image Monitor access to the DS. It disables
the following WIM settings:
• The entire Document Server menu (shown in blue in fig1)
• Job > Document Server (shown in red in fig1)
See the following for details:
Bit 0:
Bit 0 = 0 (default): Allows anyone (guests, users, admins) access to the DS via WIM.
Bit 0 = 1: Prevents everyone from accessing the DS via WIM.
Bit 1:
Bit 1 = 1: Only administrators can access the DS via WIM.
• Without admin privileges, even authenticated users will be unable to access the DS via WIM.
Bit 7:
Bit 7 = 1: Only administrators and authenticated users can access the DS via WIM.
The most restrictive result of combining these three configurations will take priority. So for example:
Bit 0 = 0
205
Bit 1 = 1
Bit 7 = 1
As Bit 1 = 1 is the most restrictive of the three, it will take presedence over the other two and only
administrators will be able to access the DS via WIM.
• In order for SP5-885-020 to have any effect, the Document Server must be enabled (SP5-967-
001=0). For information about SP5-967-001, refer to Disabling the Document Server using
System SP5-967-001 and Printer SP1-006-001.
• Access to the entire "Job" menu can be restricted using SP 5-888-001. For details, refer to
Use of SP 5-888-001 to restrict access to the "Job" menu on WIM.
User Authentication for Specific MFP Applications
The SP5-420 settings enable/disable User Authentication for specific MFP applications.
SP 5-420 User Authentication Value (Default: 0)
SP 5-420 User Authentication Value (Default: 0)
SP5-420-001 Copy 0 (ON) 1 (OFF)
SP5-420-011 Document Server
SP5-420-021 Fax
SP5-420-031 Scanner
SP5-420-041 Printer
1. Enable User Authentication for the device as a whole:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > User Authentication Management
2. Use the SP5-420 settings to specify the applications to which User authentication is to apply.
206

M 2700, M 2701, IM 2702 Machine Code: D0B2/D0B3/D0B4 Field Service Manual Ver 1.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M 2700, M 2701, IM 2702 Machine Code: D0B2/D0B3/D0B4 Field Service Manual Ver 1.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M 2700, M 2701, IM 2702

Machine Code: D0B2/D0B3/D0B4

Warnings, Cautions, Notes

General Safety Instructions

Switches and Symbols

Prevention of Physical Injury

Safety Instructions for the Color Controller

Location of a connector(s), clamp(s) or spring(s) to be removed

[A] Short edge feed (SEF)

Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

System Configuration and Options

Model Name Product Name Machine Code

No. Item Machine Code Remarks

No. Item Machine Code Remarks

No. Item Machine Code Remarks

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with The Predecessor

Comparison with Previous Models

Component Changed Item RICOH MP 2014 / RICOH M 2700 / M RICOH IM

bearing to prevent 2700 / M

option standard feature RICOH M

–Temperature and Humidity Chart–

• Standard temperature range: 10 - 32°C (50 - 89.6°F)

• Do not place the machine where it is subjected to strong vibrations.

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Minimum Space Requirements

Place the machine near a power source, providing clearance as shown:

• Platen Model (D0B2)

EU, AP, CHN 220V - 240V, 50/60Hz, 8A

EU, AP, CHN 220V - 240V, 50/60Hz, 8A

Copier Installation (D0B2,D0B3)

Check that the accessories in this list are included.

• Two persons are required to lift the machine.

Platen Model (D0B2)

4. Place the machine on a table or optional paper feed unit.

6. Remove the heat seal [A], and the mylar [B].

7. Pull the toner bottle holder lever [A] upward.

11. Close the front door.

Setting for the language displayed on the display

1. Press the User Tools button.

2. Select "Admin. Tools" and press "OK".

3. Select "Language" and press "OK".

4. Select a language and press "OK".

The selected language is used for the operation panel.

Checking the copy image with the test chart

Check the copy image with the test chart.

Moving the Machine

Transporting the Machine

Copier Installation (D0B4)

Check that the accessories in this list are included.

• Two persons are required to lift the machine.

6. Place the machine on a table or optional paper feed unit.

8. Remove the heat seal [A], and the mylar [B].

9. Pull the toner bottle holder lever [A] upward.

13. Close the front door.

Checking the copy image with the test chart

Check the copy image with the test chart.

Moving the Machine

Transporting the Machine

Paper Feed Unit PB2030/2040

Installing the Single Paper Feed Unit

1. Remove all tapes and accessories on the paper feed unit.

5. Remove the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit.

6. Remove the brackets [A] on the bottom of the main machine.